Ethics at the Heart of Global Climate Action

  • 07 Oct 2025

In News:

As the world approaches COP30 in Brazil (2025), the role of ethics in climate governance has been revived through the launch of the Global Ethical Stocktake. This initiative aims to place justice, equity, responsibility, and intergenerational fairness at the core of global climate action, complementing the scientific urgency highlighted by rising emissions and warming temperatures.

Ethical Dimensions of Climate Action:

  • Justice and Equity:
    • The principle of common but differentiated responsibilities under the UNFCCC reflects fairness—developed nations bear historical responsibility, while developing nations require space for sustainable growth.
    • The Paris Agreement’s “leave no one behind” principle embodies distributive justice.
  • Intergenerational Responsibility:
    • Present decisions affect the survival prospects of future generations. Ethical stewardship, not exploitation, is essential.
    • In 2025, the International Court of Justice reaffirmed intergenerational equity as central to climate treaties.
  • Human Rights Linkage:
    • Access to food, water, housing, and a healthy environment is inseparable from the right to life (Article 21, Indian Constitution).
    • The Inter-American Court (2024) declared the right to a safe climate a fundamental human right.
  • Integrity and Credibility:
    • The gap between climate promises and delivery undermines trust. Ethical governance requires accountability, transparency, and scientific rigor in Nationally Determined Contributions (NDCs).
    • Corporate greenwashing erodes credibility, emphasizing the need for ethical corporate responsibility.
  • Solidarity with the Vulnerable:
    • Marginalized groups, Indigenous peoples, and communities in the Global South face disproportionate risks. Ethical climate action ensures inclusion and empathy in adaptation strategies.
    • Community-based initiatives, such as the Himachal Pradesh snow leopard survey, illustrate ethics of inclusion in environmental stewardship.

Role of Ethics in Governance:

  • Guiding Negotiators: Ethics reminds negotiators of moral responsibility, where delays equate to human suffering and ecosystem loss.
  • Embedding Frameworks: Initiatives like the Global Ethical Stocktake institutionalize ethics alongside scientific assessments.
  • Judicial Oversight: Courts link morality with law, compelling states to respect climate and human rights obligations.
  • Corporate Responsibility: Businesses must adopt ethical approaches to avoid tokenistic climate pledges.

Ethics in the Indian Context:

  • Constitutional Mandates:
    • Article 48A – Duty of the State to protect the environment.
    • Article 51A(g) – Duty of citizens to protect natural resources.
  • Judicial Precedents: Vellore Citizens’ Forum vs Union of India (1996) upheld the precautionary principle and polluter pays principle.
  • Gandhian Philosophy: Trusteeship aligns with sustainable consumption and responsibility toward nature.

Challenges:

  • National interest vs. global good delays climate finance and technology transfer.
  • Political polarization and denialism hinder consensus despite rising urgency.
  • Greenwashing and weak enforcement erode accountability.
  • Adaptation finance remains underfunded, leaving vulnerable populations exposed.

Way Forward:

  • Institutionalize the Global Ethical Stocktake to align climate action with justice and equity.
  • Implement just transition policies protecting livelihoods while shifting from fossil fuels.
  • Strengthen ethical climate jurisprudence to ensure rights-based accountability.
  • Promote ethical leadership and integrate climate ethics into education and policymaking.

Conclusion:
Climate change is as much a moral challenge as a scientific one. Ethics—anchored in justice, responsibility, solidarity, and intergenerational equity—must guide global action. Embedding ethics into negotiations, law, community initiatives, and corporate practices is essential to restore credibility, build trust, and ensure a liveable planet for present and future generations.

Heritage Management and Conservation in India

  • 06 Oct 2025

In News:

  • India’s rich cultural and architectural legacy, reflected in thousands of ancient monuments and archaeological sites, has long been under the stewardship of the Archaeological Survey of India (ASI).
  • Established in 1861, the ASI functions under the Ministry of Culture and enforces the Ancient Monuments and Archaeological Sites and Remains Act, 1958, and the Antiquities and Art Treasures Act, 1972.
  • However, with over 3,700 protected monuments under its care, the ASI’s capacity constraints have often resulted in delays and maintenance backlogs.
  • Recognizing this challenge, the government has initiated a landmark policy shift to introduce public-private partnerships (PPP) in heritage conservation — marking a major reform in India’s cultural governance.

The Policy Shift

  • For the first time, the core conservation of protected monuments will no longer be ASI’s exclusive domain. Under the new model, private players, corporates, and public sector undertakings can directly fund and implement conservation projects under ASI’s supervision. This move seeks to expand capacity, accelerate timelines, and leverage private expertise, while retaining strict professional and regulatory oversight.
  • All projects will be monitored by the ASI and must comply with the National Policy for Conservation of Ancient Monuments, Archaeological Sites and Remains (2014). The initiative aims to balance modernization and preservation by fostering collaboration between government, industry, and civil society.

Institutional Framework and Implementation

  • The reforms will operate through the National Culture Fund (NCF), established in 1996 with an initial government corpus of ?20 crore.
      • The NCF enables donors to contribute directly to heritage projects and offers 100% CSR tax exemptions, incentivizing private participation.
  • To ensure professional standards, the Ministry of Culture will empanel conservation architects of national repute, who will guide donors in planning and executing projects. The Detailed Project Reports (DPRs) will require ASI approval before implementation.
  • Private donors, guided by these architects, can hire external implementing agencies experienced in restoring structures over 100 years old. Initially, a list of 250 monuments requiring urgent conservation will be released for donor selection.

Track Record of the National Culture Fund

Since its inception, the NCF has mobilized around ?140 crore in corporate and public donations, supporting over 100 conservation projects. Notable examples include:

  • Bhuleshwar Temple (Pune),
  • British Residency (Hyderabad),
  • Group of Monuments at Mandu,
  • Purana Qila and Red Fort site museums (New Delhi),
  • Ongoing work at Vikramshila (Bihar), Deobaloda (Chhattisgarh), and Singorgarh Fort (Madhya Pradesh).

Significance and Safeguards

  • The PPP model represents a shift from state monopoly to collaborative stewardship, ensuring accountability, transparency, and efficiency.
  • The ASI retains its supervisory authority, maintaining consistency with India’s constitutional framework, where heritage conservation falls under both Union and State jurisdictions, as outlined in the Seventh Schedule and Article 253.
  • Qualified conservation architects, empanelled through due diligence, will ensure technical integrity, while all financial contributions must pass through the NCF to prevent misuse. The government views this as a cautious, phased reform, initially assigning private players a supplementary role to test the model’s viability.

Comparison with Past Initiatives

Unlike the earlier ‘Adopt a Heritage’ scheme, which allowed corporates to develop tourist amenities such as cafes and restrooms as “monument mitras,” the current initiative extends to core conservation work. This marks a decisive evolution from heritage promotion to heritage preservation.

Conclusion

India’s new heritage management framework reflects a pragmatic blend of Aatmanirbhar Bharat, cultural preservation, and corporate participation. By integrating private sector efficiency with ASI’s institutional expertise, the model promises to make heritage conservation financially sustainable, technologically advanced, and socially participatory — ensuring that India’s timeless legacy endures through collective stewardship.

India’s Deep-Sea Mineral Exploration in the Indian Ocean

  • 05 Oct 2025

In News:

India has achieved a major milestone in deep-sea exploration by signing a new 15-year contract with the International Seabed Authority (ISA) for the exclusive exploration of Polymetallic Sulphides (PMS) in a 10,000 sq km area of the Carlsberg Ridge in the Indian Ocean.

With this agreement, India has become the first country in the world to hold two PMS exploration contracts, commanding the largest area allocated globally for such exploration. This advancement marks a blend of scientific progress, strategic foresight, and economic opportunity within India’s broader Blue Economy vision.

Polymetallic Sulphides and Their Significance

Polymetallic Sulphides are mineral-rich deposits found on the ocean floor, primarily near hydrothermal vents along mid-ocean ridges. Formed through interactions between seawater and magma beneath the Earth’s crust, they contain valuable metals such as copper, zinc, lead, gold, silver, and trace rare elements.

For India, these minerals are crucial for high-technology industries, renewable energy systems, and green technologies. Given the country’s limited terrestrial reserves, deep-sea exploration ensures resource security, supports the energy transition, and reduces import dependence on critical minerals.

India’s Deep Ocean Initiatives

India’s engagement with the ISA dates back over three decades. It was among the earliest countries to receive an area for polymetallic nodule exploration, earning the status of a “Pioneer Investor.” The first PMS exploration contract was signed in 2016 for the Central and Southwest Indian Ridges, and the latest agreement in 2025 extends exploration to the Carlsberg Ridge, located near 2°N latitude — significantly closer to India than the earlier sites.

The National Centre for Polar and Ocean Research (NCPOR) in Goa, under the Ministry of Earth Sciences (MoES), will begin exploration operations in 2026, employing geophysical, hydrographic, and near-seabed surveys.

These efforts are supported by the Deep Ocean Mission, launched by the Government of India to develop seabed mining technology, autonomous underwater vehicles (AUVs), and the Matsya submersible under the Samudrayaan Mission. This ecosystem strengthens India’s capacity for scientific research, environmental assessment, and mineral resource utilisation.

The Carlsberg Ridge: A Strategic and Scientific Hub

The Carlsberg Ridge is a part of the mid-ocean ridge system formed by the divergence of the Indian and Somali plates about 40 million years ago. With a spreading rate of 2.4–3.3 cm per year, it features hydrothermal vent systems ideal for PMS deposits. Its proximity to India enhances logistical feasibility and strategic relevance. The region’s exploration will expand understanding of deep-sea geology, marine ecosystems, and plate tectonics, while supporting India’s long-term maritime interests.

Exploration Challenges and Governance

PMS exploration is among the most technically demanding deep-sea missions, occurring at depths of 2,000–5,000 metres in rugged, volcanic terrains. It demands multidisciplinary collaboration across marine geology, geophysics, biology, and ocean engineering, supported by dynamic-positioning vessels, AUVs, and ROVs.

The ISA, functioning under the United Nations Convention on the Law of the Sea (UNCLOS), regulates seabed exploration beyond national jurisdictions. Applications must meet rigorous standards of environmental protection, financial capability, and scientific planning before approval.

Future Prospects

Beyond PMS, India has applied for exploration rights over cobalt-rich ferromanganese crusts on the Afanasy-Nikitin Seamount in the Central Indian Ocean, aligning with its Blue Economy and resource security goals. Hosting the 8th ISA Annual Contractors’ Meeting in Goa underscores India’s growing leadership in global seabed research governance.

Conclusion

India’s twin PMS contracts with the ISA mark a historic milestone in ocean science, resource diplomacy, and sustainable technology development. By combining strategic exploration, indigenous innovation, and environmental stewardship, India is positioning itself at the forefront of responsible deep-sea resource management — a critical pillar of its vision for a self-reliant and resilient Blue Economy.

India’s E-Waste Recycling Challenges and Opportunities

  • 04 Oct 2025

In News:

Electronic waste, or e-waste, has emerged as one of the fastest-growing waste streams globally, driven by rapid technological obsolescence, consumerism, and the digital transformation of economies. E-waste refers to discarded electronic devices—such as mobile phones, laptops, televisions, and refrigerators—that contain both valuable materials like gold, copper, and lithium, and hazardous substances like lead, mercury, and cadmium. The dual nature of e-waste—an economic resource and an environmental hazard—makes its management a critical policy challenge for India.

The Scale of the Problem

According to the Global E-Waste Monitor 2020, India is the world’s third-largest generator of e-waste after China and the USA. The country produced around 4.17 million metric tonnes of e-waste in 2022, yet only one-third was processed through authorized recyclers. With India’s electronics industry projected to grow at a CAGR of 16.6%—from USD 215 billion in FY19 to USD 540 billion by FY25—the volume of e-waste is expected to surge further. This growth is compounded by the increasing number of broadband and smartphone users, currently exceeding 93.9 crore, reflecting expanding consumption and shorter product lifecycles.

Environmental and Health Implications

Improper e-waste disposal leads to severe ecological and health impacts. Open burning and acid leaching—common in informal recycling—release toxic fumes and contaminate soil and groundwater. Heavy metals such as lead and cadmium cause neurological and renal damage, while persistent organic pollutants affect ecosystems and biodiversity. The World Health Organization has warned that children and informal workers face disproportionate exposure risks, underscoring the urgent need for safe handling and regulation.

Policy and Institutional Framework

India’s e-waste management is governed by the E-Waste (Management) Rules, 2022, notified by the Ministry of Environment, Forest and Climate Change (MoEFCC), and effective from April 2023. These rules emphasize Extended Producer Responsibility (EPR), mandating manufacturers and importers to collect and recycle end-of-life products. The Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB) has initiated audits of recyclers to curb “paper trading” and ensure genuine recycling practices. Moreover, a ?1,500 crore Mineral Recycling Scheme was launched in 2023 to recover critical metals like copper, aluminium, cobalt, and lithium, reducing import dependence amid geopolitical supply risks.

Gaps and Challenges

Despite robust policy intent, significant implementation challenges persist. A 2023 Indian Cellular and Electronics Association report highlighted the dominance of the informal sector, which manages nearly 90% of India’s e-waste through unsafe methods. Lack of material traceability, inadequate inventorying by State Pollution Control Boards, and weak enforcement mechanisms further hamper progress. Experts also note the absence of uniform data and poor public awareness about responsible disposal.

Recent Initiatives and Future Potential

Government efforts, such as the Prime Minister’s Science, Technology, and Innovation Advisory Council (PM-STIAC) initiatives, promote indigenous R&D, technology transfer, and a national e-waste catalog through the I-STEM portal. Institutions like CMET, BARC, and NML are collaborating with industries to deploy eco-friendly recycling technologies. Private players such as Attero have begun aggregating informal setups into formal “mandi-style” recycling networks, aiming to recover metals sustainably. With appropriate regulatory and market support, India could meet up to 70% of its rare earth metal needs domestically within 18 months.

Conclusion

E-waste management lies at the intersection of environmental protection, resource efficiency, and industrial policy. Strengthening the EPR mechanism, integrating informal recyclers, improving traceability, and incentivizing circular design are essential for sustainable growth. Effective e-waste management supports India’s commitments under SDG 12 (Responsible Consumption and Production) and SDG 13 (Climate Action), and can transform waste into a strategic resource, reinforcing India’s journey toward a green and self-reliant economy.

Corporate Average Fuel Efficiency (CAFE) 3 Norms

  • 03 Oct 2025

In News:

  • India has proposed the Corporate Average Fuel Efficiency (CAFE) 3 norms, drafted by the Bureau of Energy Efficiency (BEE), aiming to tighten fuel efficiency standards, reduce vehicular emissions, and promote electric and alternative fuel vehicles.
  • First introduced in 2017, CAFE norms regulate fuel consumption and CO? emissions for passenger vehicles weighing up to 3,500 kg, including petrol, diesel, CNG, LPG, hybrid, and electric vehicles.
  • The earlier iteration, CAFE 2 (2022-23), capped fuel consumption at 4.78 litres/100 km and CO? emissions at 113 g/km, with penalties for non-compliance.

Need for CAFE 3

Current Indian norms inadvertently favourheavier vehicles like SUVs while imposing stringent targets on smaller cars, unlike international practices in the USA, EU, China, and Japan, where light vehicles enjoy relaxed emission standards. CAFE 3 seeks to align India with global best practices, revive the small car segment, and incentivisegreen mobility, particularly electric vehicles (EVs) and hybrids.

Key Features of CAFE 3 Norms

1. Applicability

  • Targets M1 category passenger vehicles (seating up to nine people, maximum weight 3,500 kg).
  • Non-compliance will attract penalties under the Energy Conservation Act, 2001.

2. Efficiency Targets

  • Efficiency formula: [0.002 × (W – 1170) + c], measured in petrol-equivalent litres/100 km, where W is fleet weight, 1,170 kg is a fixed constant, 0.002 is a multiplier, and ‘c’ decreases yearly from 3.7264 (FY28) to 3.0139 (FY32).
  • Lighter vehicles benefit from easier compliance, motivating manufacturers to focus on small cars.
  • Additional relaxation: 3.0 g CO?/km (capped at 9 g/km) for compact cars (<909 kg, ≤1200 cc engine, ≤4,000 mm length).

3. Incentives for EVs and Alternative Fuels

  • Super credits: Each EV sold counts three times toward fleet compliance; plug-in hybrids 2.5×, strong hybrids 2×, flex-fuel ethanol vehicles 1.5×.
  • Carbon Neutrality Factor (CNF): Offers relaxation based on fuel type (e.g., E20–E30 petrol vehicles 8% CNF; strong hybrids 22.3%).

4. Emissions Pooling

  • Up to three manufacturers can form a pool, treated as a single entity for compliance.
  • Pool managers are legally responsible for penalties, allowing strategic partnerships, cost-sharing, and smoother adherence to targets.

Policy Complementarities

  • GST reforms (GST 2.0) reduced taxes on small cars from 28% to 18%, complementing the relaxation measures under CAFE 3.
  • By incentivisingEVs, hybrids, and small vehicles, the norms aim to reduce oil import dependency and advance India’s climate commitments under the Paris Agreement.

Challenges

  • Industry adaptation: Transitioning fleets to comply with stricter norms while managing costs.
  • Consumer acceptance: Affordability and infrastructure readiness for EVs and hybrids.
  • Infrastructure readiness: Charging and fuel infrastructure for alternative vehicles needs significant expansion.

Conclusion

CAFE 3 represents a transformative step in India’s vehicular emission regulation, combining fuel efficiency improvements, emission reductions, and green mobility incentives. By aligning with global practices, reviving the small car segment, and encouraging electric and hybrid vehicles, the norms have the potential to accelerate sustainable transportation while addressing environmental and energy security goals. Successful implementation will require coordinated action between manufacturers, policymakers, and consumers to build a cleaner, efficient, and resilient automotive sector in India.

Reimagining Green Economy through Landscapes

  • 02 Oct 2025

In News:

India stands at a critical juncture where the pursuit of economic growth must align with environmental sustainability. The transition to a green economy offers an opportunity to reshape the country’s development paradigm—one that integrates ecological balance, inclusive livelihoods, and technological innovation within a landscape-driven framework.

India’s Green Economy: Growth and Scope

India’s bioeconomy has expanded remarkably from $10 billion in 2014 to $165.7 billion in 2024, growing sixteenfold and accounting for 4.25% of the national GDP. This growth, driven by over 10,000 bio-based start-ups, spans biofuels, bioplastics, pharmaceuticals, and bioinformatics. The industrial bioeconomy contributes nearly half the sectoral share, while India’s achievements—such as 20% ethanol blending in petrol and becoming the third-largest pharmaceutical producer by volume—reflect the scale of progress.

A green economy, however, extends beyond bio-based industries. It encompasses low-carbon growth, circular resource use, ecosystem restoration, and inclusive employment. By 2030, it is estimated to create 35 million green jobs, strengthening India’s resilience against climate shocks and enhancing energy security under Aatmanirbhar Bharat.

Challenges in the Green Transition

Despite this momentum, India’s green growth exhibits deep regional and socio-economic disparities. Urban centers like Maharashtra, Karnataka, and Gujarat dominate green investments, while the North-Eastern and tribal states contribute less than 6% despite abundant natural resources. This spatial imbalance mirrors unequal access to clean energy, irrigation, and digital infrastructure.

Simultaneously, energy transition dilemmas persist. While renewables are expanding, fossil fuel subsidies—still around 40%—undermine emission reduction efforts. In agriculture, solar pump deployment risks groundwater depletion, highlighting the complexity of balancing environmental and livelihood goals. Hard-to-abate sectors such as steel, cement, and power, which contribute nearly 23% of GHG emissions, face prohibitive costs for green technologies—often four times higher than conventional alternatives.

Social inclusion remains another challenge. Women hold only 11% of rooftop solar jobs, and their share in technical green roles is as low as 1–3%. Similarly, tribal and marginalised communities remain passive beneficiaries rather than active stakeholders in climate action.

Reimagining the Green Economy through Landscapes

A landscape-based approach can make India’s green transition more inclusive and ecologically coherent. Landscapes represent interconnected systems of land, water, biodiversity, and human activity. Integrating these systems through participatory planning—from village to national level—can enhance ecosystem services such as air and water regulation, soil fertility, and climate moderation.

Institutionally, leveraging 2.5 lakh Panchayati Raj Institutions (PRIs) and 12 million women-led Self-Help Groups (SHGs) can embed community ownership into green initiatives. Promoting tribal-led bioeconomy models based on non-timber forest produce, agro-waste reuse, and medicinal flora can align conservation with livelihoods.

Technology and fiscal innovation must complement this vision—through green budgeting, public procurement of sustainable products, and expansion of 5G/6G labs for greening digital infrastructure. Decentralised waste management and circular economy practices are vital, especially as urban areas generate 75% of India’s solid waste.

Conclusion

India’s green transformation must evolve from a sectoral to a landscape-driven, community-based model that harmonises economic growth with ecological integrity. Empowering local institutions, mainstreaming gender, and integrating traditional knowledge with modern innovation will be crucial to achieving a just and resilient green future. By 2047, the goal should not merely be higher GDP, but ecological regeneration, social equity, and global climate leadership.

National Security Act (NSA)

  • 01 Oct 2025

Context:
The detention of climate activist Sonam Wangchuk under the National Security Act (NSA), 1980, has reignited a long-standing debate on the balance between national security and civil liberties in India. Wangchuk, who has been leading the movement for Ladakh’s statehood and Sixth Schedule protections, was detained following alleged provocative speeches that, according to the administration, triggered violent protests in Leh leading to four deaths and several injuries. His case illustrates the continuing tension between state power and individual freedoms under India’s preventive detention framework.

Understanding Preventive Detention in India

Preventive detention refers to the practice of detaining an individual not for a crime already committed, but to prevent them from acting in a manner considered prejudicial to public order, security, or essential supplies. Unlike punitive detention, which follows conviction through due process, preventive detention is anticipatory in nature—aimed at averting potential threats before they materialise.

The Constitutional sanction for preventive detention is provided under Article 22 (Clauses 3–7), which permits Parliament and State legislatures to enact laws allowing such detention. A person can be held for up to three months without approval from an Advisory Board of judges, and longer if such approval is obtained. However, detainees are denied the right to legal counsel before the Advisory Board, and authorities may withhold information on grounds of public interest—limiting transparency and accountability.

Evolution of Preventive Detention Laws

Preventive detention has deep colonial roots, beginning with wartime laws such as the Defence of India Acts and the Rowlatt Act (1919). Post-Independence, the Preventive Detention Act, 1950, institutionalised this power, followed by the Maintenance of Internal Security Act (MISA), 1971, which gained notoriety during the Emergency (1975–77). Although MISA was repealed in 1978, preventive detention returned with the National Security Act (NSA), 1980, reflecting the persistence of this legal mechanism in India’s security architecture.

Provisions and Safeguards under the NSA

The NSA empowers the Central and State governments, as well as authorisedDistrict Magistrates and Police Commissioners, to detain individuals to prevent actions “prejudicial to India’s defence, foreign relations, national security, public order, or essential supplies.”

  • Detention orders operate like arrest warrants, allowing transfer across states and detention up to 12 months.
  • Grounds for detention must be communicated within 5 to 15 days, and the detainee can submit a representation to the government.
  • An Advisory Board of High Court judges must review the case within three weeks and order release if “no sufficient cause” exists.

However, no legal representation is allowed before the Board, and the government may withhold crucial information—leaving wide discretion in official hands.

Use and Misuse: Judicial and Public Concerns

Over the decades, NSA has been used in cases involving separatists, radical preachers, gangsters, and protesters. Notable instances include the detention of Amritpal Singh (2023), Bhim Army chief Chandrashekhar Azad (2017), and Dr. Kafeel Khan (2020). Courts have repeatedly intervened in cases of misuse, emphasising that the Act cannot be a substitute for ordinary criminal law. The Supreme Court’s 2012 ruling striking down detention for kerosene black-marketing underscored this misuse.

Critics argue that preventive detention contradicts the spirit of fundamental rights under Articles 19, 21, and 22, allowing incarceration without trial and enabling governments to suppress dissent under the guise of maintaining order. Scholars contend that Article 22 itself legitimises preventive detention, reflecting what Erich Fromm described as a “fear of freedom”—a societal tendency to trade liberty for perceived security.

Conclusion

The National Security Act remains one of India’s most powerful yet controversial laws. While it provides governments with a vital tool to prevent threats to national security and public order, its frequent and often arbitrary invocation erodes constitutional guarantees of liberty and due process.
The detention of Sonam Wangchuk serves as a stark reminder that preventive detention laws, though constitutionally sanctioned, sit uneasily within a democratic framework. India’s challenge lies in ensuring that security imperatives do not eclipse fundamental freedoms, reaffirming the Constitution’s promise of liberty, justice, and accountability.

Inflation: A Double-Edged Sword for Economic Growth and Fiscal Stability

  • 30 Sep 2025

In News:

Inflation, the sustained rise in general price levels, remains one of the most debated macroeconomic phenomena. While high inflation erodes purchasing power and destabilizes economies, moderate and predictable inflation is often considered essential for sustained growth and fiscal stability. Its impact, however, varies depending on the broader economic context and the balance between price stability and growth objectives.

Understanding Inflation and Its Role

Economists typically define inflation as a result of “too much money chasing too few goods.” Moderate inflation signals expanding demand and healthy economic activity, while very high or negative inflation (deflation) indicates structural imbalances. Central banks, such as the U.S. Federal Reserve and the Reserve Bank of India (RBI), usually target a low but positive inflation rate — around 2% — to maintain price stability and incentivize investment.

Mild inflation helps prevent deflation, which discourages spending and investment as consumers postpone purchases in anticipation of falling prices. The British economist John Maynard Keynes argued that a small amount of inflation encourages consumption, supports employment, and sustains aggregate demand. This aligns with the concept of the Phillips Curve, which once suggested a trade-off between inflation and unemployment, though the relationship has weakened in recent decades.

Economic Benefits of Moderate Inflation

A modest level of inflation can stimulate economic activity when idle capacity and underutilized labor exist. Rising prices encourage producers to expand output, generating more employment and income. Borrowers, including businesses and households, also benefit since debts can be repaid with “cheaper” money, thus encouraging borrowing and spending. Fixed-rate homeowners and long-term debtors gain, as the real value of their obligations declines over time.

For governments, inflation contributes positively to nominal GDP growth, the key denominator in fiscal ratios such as the debt-to-GDP ratio and fiscal deficit. Higher nominal GDP, driven partly by price growth, increases tax collections and helps meet revenue and deficit targets. Hence, inflation, within manageable limits, supports both macroeconomic stability and fiscal sustainability.

Challenges of High or Low Inflation

Excessive inflation, however, leads to declining real incomes, uncertainty, and reduced investment. Rising input and borrowing costs can trigger stagflation — a combination of stagnant growth and high inflation. On the other hand, very low inflation, as seen in India recently with CPI inflation at 2.07% (August 2025) and WPI at 0.52%, presents a different set of challenges.

While subdued prices benefit consumers, they constrain the government’s fiscal arithmetic. Lower inflation suppresses nominal GDP growth — the sum of real growth and inflation — reducing tax revenue growth and widening fiscal gaps. The Union Budget 2025–26 projected nominal GDP growth at 10.1%, but with low price levels, actual growth has trailed this target, weakening revenue collection and straining fiscal balances.

Moreover, persistently low inflation can reflect weak demand and investment sentiment. Although corporate profits have risen due to falling input costs, private capital expenditure remains sluggish, suggesting that firms are not reinvesting profits into productive capacity — a sign of demand-side weakness rather than efficiency gains.

Conclusion

Inflation’s impact on an economy depends on its source, magnitude, and persistence. Moderate inflation supports economic dynamism, government finances, and debt sustainability. However, extremes on either side — hyperinflation or deflation — can destabilize the macroeconomic framework. For India, the policy challenge lies in maintaining a delicate balance: ensuring that inflation stays within the target range to protect consumers while sustaining enough price growth to support investment, job creation, and fiscal health.

Fixing Timelines for Governors

  • 29 Sep 2025

In News:

The Supreme Court of India is currently examining a Presidential reference on whether fixed timelines can be prescribed for Governors and the President in giving assent to Bills passed by State legislatures. The reference arises from growing concerns over delays in assent, which have triggered debates about the balance of power, federalism, and accountability within India’s constitutional framework.

Constitutional Provisions

Under Article 200 of the Constitution, when a Bill is passed by a State legislature, it is presented to the Governor for assent. The Governor may:

  1. Grant assent.
  2. Withhold assent.
  3. Reserve the Bill for the President’s consideration.
  4. Return the Bill (if not a Money Bill) with a message for reconsideration.

If the legislature passes the Bill again, the Governor is constitutionally obliged to grant assent. Article 201 governs the President’s assent to Bills reserved by Governors. Notably, neither Article prescribes a timeframe for decision-making, allowing for indefinite delays, which some States view as a de facto pocket veto.

The Current Debate

States such as Tamil Nadu, Kerala, Punjab, and Telangana have raised complaints about Governors withholding or delaying assent, often stalling critical legislative reforms. The Supreme Court is tasked with determining whether judicially enforceable timelines can be set to prevent such inaction, while ensuring the Governor’s discretion is respected.

Proponents argue that indefinite delays undermine parliamentary democracy and the functioning of elected governments. Critics caution that imposing strict timelines could limit constitutional discretion and upset the delicate Centre-State balance. The Union government has maintained that Governors operate within their constitutional mandate and that delays may result from the need for scrutiny or consultation with the Centre.

Judicial Precedents

Earlier rulings, including Shamsher Singh v. State of Punjab (1974) and NabamRebia v. Deputy Speaker (2016), emphasized that Governors are generally bound by the aid and advice of the Council of Ministers, except in exceptional circumstances. The current reference under Article 143 seeks to clarify whether inaction can be constitutionally limited through prescribed timelines, ensuring accountability without undermining constitutional checks.

Implications for Federalism

  1. Strengthening Legislative Authority: Time-bound assent would reinforce the role of elected State legislatures, reducing the scope for executive interference.
  2. Preventing Political Deadlocks: Clear timelines could mitigate friction between Governors and State governments, facilitating smoother legislative functioning.
  3. Judicial Oversight: The Supreme Court’s intervention could clarify constitutional ambiguities affecting Centre-State relations, setting a precedent for other offices where delays impact governance.
  4. Balancing Discretion and Accountability: A measured approach could preserve the Governor’s discretionary powers while ensuring responsiveness to elected governments.

Conclusion

The question of whether timelines can be fixed for Governors and the President is more than a procedural issue—it reflects the tensions inherent in India’s federal design. Governors are intended as neutral constitutional authorities, yet their actions are often perceived through the prism of partisan politics. By addressing this grey area, the Supreme Court has an opportunity to redefine Centre-State dynamics, strengthen legislative authority, and enhance accountability within India’s parliamentary democracy. The ruling will have far-reaching implications for federal governance, political neutrality, and the balance of power in the legislative process.

Artificial Intelligence and India’s Global Race

  • 28 Sep 2025

In News:

Artificial Intelligence (AI) is reshaping the global technological and economic order, influencing sectors from healthcare to defence. For India, AI represents both a transformative development tool and a strategic domain crucial for economic competitiveness and national security.

India’s Position in the Global AI Landscape

India has entered the AI race with significant momentum, backed by a vast digital ecosystem and growing policy support. The government’s India AI Mission, with an outlay of ?10,372 crore, seeks to enhance AI infrastructure, computing power, and research capacity. With over one billion smartphone users and 20 billion monthly UPI transactions, India offers a data-rich environment that can power AI development at scale.

However, compared to the United States ($20 billion) and China ($30 billion) in AI investments during 2024, India’s funding remains modest. While India boasts a talent base of over 18 million software professionals and has integrated AI into school curricula, it still lags in advanced research output and patent generation.

Opportunities for India’s Development

AI holds immense potential to drive India’s socio-economic transformation:

  • Healthcare: AI-assisted diagnostics and predictive models can enhance early disease detection, telemedicine outreach, and epidemic forecasting.
  • Education: Initiatives like the Bhashini Project enable real-time language translation, improving accessibility and inclusivity in classrooms and governance.
  • Agriculture: AI-driven precision farming and weather-based advisories can help small farmers optimise productivity and manage climate risks.
  • Finance: Tools such as “Hello UPI” and AI-based fraud detection can deepen rural financial inclusion and strengthen digital security.
  • Disaster Management: States like Odisha employ AI in cyclone prediction and geospatial mapping, showcasing AI’s role in saving lives and resources.

Together, these applications align with India’s broader developmental goals of inclusion, sustainability, and resilience.

Challenges in India’s AI Ecosystem

Despite its promise, India faces structural and institutional constraints:

  • Infrastructure Deficit: Limited access to high-end GPUs and slow expansion of data centres constrain computational capacity.
  • R&D Weakness: India contributes barely 1.4% of global AI research papers and produces less than 2% of global AI PhDs, reflecting a shallow innovation base.
  • Regulatory Lag: The outdated IT Act (2000) continues to govern digital activities, lacking provisions for algorithmic transparency, accountability, and data ethics.
  • Talent Gap: The focus on short-term certification courses produces surface-level skills rather than deep AI expertise.
  • Geopolitical Pressure: The US, EU, and China lead in developing Large Language Models (LLMs), while India risks remaining a consumer market rather than a producer of foundational AI technologies.

Way Forward

A robust AI ecosystem requires a multi-dimensional approach:

  • Strengthen Research and Innovation: Enhance public funding for fundamental AI research and incentivise private R&D.
  • Human Capital Development: Expand AI training beyond elite institutions and develop teacher capacity for advanced AI pedagogy.
  • Regulatory Reforms: Enact a Digital India Act and an AI-specific ethical charter inspired by the EU AI Act, ensuring safety without stifling innovation.
  • Public–Private Collaboration: Establish AI innovation hubs focused on healthcare, agriculture, and sustainability.
  • Global Partnerships: Engage with international initiatives and leverage India’s leadership in G20 and BRICS to promote responsible AI governance.

Conclusion

India’s AI trajectory stands at a decisive juncture. With its digital depth, demographic advantage, and policy intent, the country can harness AI to drive inclusive growth and global leadership. Yet, without addressing gaps in research, regulation, and ethics, India risks being a user rather than a creator in the AI revolution. Balancing innovation with responsibility will determine whether India can truly emerge as a leading power in the AI-driven century.

River Pollution in India

  • 27 Sep 2025

In News:

Rivers are the lifelines of India, sustaining agriculture, industry, and millions of livelihoods. Yet, rapid urbanisation, untreated sewage, industrial effluents, and agricultural runoff have severely degraded many river ecosystems. According to the Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB), river pollution remains a critical environmental and public health challenge.

Status of River Pollution

The CPCB’s 2023 assessment indicates a marginal reduction in polluted river stretches. Out of 271 rivers across 32 states and Union Territories, 296 stretches were identified as polluted, down from 311 in the previous assessment. Maharashtra continues to report the highest number of polluted stretches (54), followed by Kerala (31), Madhya Pradesh and Manipur (18 each), and Karnataka (14).

 

Polluted stretches are defined as two or more consecutive locations where the biochemical oxygen demand (BOD) exceeds 3 mg/L, rendering water unfit for bathing. BOD measures the oxygen consumed by microorganisms in decomposing organic matter, serving as a key indicator of organic pollution. The CPCB classifies polluted stretches into five priority categories, with Priority I (BOD >30 mg/L) representing the most contaminated stretches requiring urgent remediation. Currently, 37 stretches fall under Priority I, including the Yamuna (Delhi), Sabarmati (Ahmedabad), Chambal (Madhya Pradesh), and Tungabhadra (Karnataka).

 

However, despite marginal improvements, certain rivers have recorded deterioration in water quality. Notable examples include the Jhelum (J&K), Ganga and Sikrahna (Bihar), Hasdeo and Mahanadi (Chhattisgarh), Cauvery and Tungabhadra (Karnataka), Periyar (Kerala), and Krishna (Telangana).

Major Causes

  • Untreated Sewage: Urban centres generate over 72,000 million litres/day (MLD) of sewage, with only 30% treated.
  • Industrial Effluents: Chemical, textile, and other industrial hubs discharge toxic waste despite regulatory frameworks.
  • Agricultural Runoff: Fertilisers and pesticides enter rivers during monsoons, affecting aquatic ecosystems.
  • Encroachments and Sand Mining: These activities degrade riverbeds and floodplains, compounding pollution impacts.

Impacts

Polluted rivers compromise aquatic biodiversity, pose health risks via waterborne diseases, and lead to economic losses in fisheries and agriculture. Social unrest, as seen along the Yamuna and Ganga, underscores the public concern over deteriorating river health.

Institutional Interventions

In 2018, the National Green Tribunal (NGT) mandated states and the Centre to prepare river rejuvenation action plans. The CPCB, in collaboration with State Pollution Control Boards, monitors water quality at over 2,155 locations on 645 rivers under the National Water Quality Monitoring Programme. Recommended measures include catchment and basin management, floodplain protection, and sewage treatment.

While initiatives such as the Namami Gange Mission, Jal Jeevan Mission, and promotion of decentralised sewage treatment plants show progress, persistent infrastructure gaps, coordination failures, and urbanisation pressures remain major challenges.

Way Forward

Sustainable river rejuvenation requires holistic approaches—strengthening sewage treatment, enforcing industrial compliance, controlling agricultural runoff, and fostering community participation. Integrating scientific monitoring with participatory governance can help restore rivers as ecological lifelines while ensuring water security, public health, and environmental sustainability.

H-1B Visa Overhaul and Its Implications for India–US Tech Relations

  • 26 Sep 2025

In News:

The United States government has announced a sweeping change to its H-1B visa programme, introducing a $100,000 annual entry fee per visa effective September 21, 2025. Framed as a measure to protect American workers, this move has significant geopolitical and economic implications, particularly for India, whose citizens constitute over 70% of all H-1B beneficiaries annually.

What the New Rule Entails

Under the new proclamation signed by President Donald Trump, no petition filed for an H-1B worker outside the US will be approved unless the sponsoring employer pays the $100,000 fee upfront. Applications without proof of payment will be denied at consular processing. The rule applies to new entrants or those seeking re-entry after travel, though workers already in the US on valid H-1B status are exempt.

The order, valid for 12 months with scope for review, also directs the Department of Labor to raise wage levels for H-1B jobs and asks the Department of Homeland Security (DHS) to prioritise petitions offering higher salaries. A discretionary clause empowers DHS to waive the fee for specific individuals, companies, or entire industries if deemed in the “national interest.” However, the proclamation does not define which sectors qualify—though healthcare, defence, and critical technology are likely candidates.

Rationale and Political Context

Immigration has become a central and polarising issue in US politics. Public concern on immigration rose from 2.1% in 2012 to 14.6% in 2024 as a top voter priority. Trump’s political narrative has long linked immigration—both low-skilled and skilled—to job displacement and wage depression among the American working class. The H-1B programme, originally designed to attract top global talent in STEM (Science, Technology, Engineering, and Mathematics) fields, is now portrayed by nativist factions as a vehicle for outsourcing and wage suppression.

Data from the US Citizenship and Immigration Services (USCIS) indicate that nearly 70% of H-1B approvals for Indian workers in FY2023 were for salaries below $100,000, while the median US IT salary was $104,420.

Economic and Industrial Impact

The fee fundamentally alters the cost structure of hiring global talent. The new surcharge, in addition to existing statutory fees, transforms the H-1B from a skill-mobility programme into a premium channel accessible mainly to top-tier corporations or sectors granted exemptions.

Big Tech firms such as Amazon, Microsoft, Meta, Google, and Apple—already the largest H-1B sponsors—face millions in additional costs. Indian IT service giants like Infosys, TCS, Wipro, and HCL, who rely on the visa for onsite client delivery, are particularly vulnerable. The policy may push more work to offshore hubs in Bengaluru, Hyderabad, and Pune, reinforcing India’s role as a global back-office and development centre rather than an onsite service provider.

Startups, universities, and research labs, often operating on tight budgets, may scale back recruitment or face disruption to innovation and research projects if waivers are not granted.

Implications for India

For India, this measure could limit opportunities for young professionals transitioning from student visas (OPT) to H-1Bs, while families already in the US may face travel restrictions and uncertainty. However, it may also spur reshoring of tech investment to India, as multinational firms expand local operations to mitigate costs.

Conclusion

The $100,000 H-1B fee marks a decisive shift in US immigration policy—from selective reform to fiscal deterrence. While it may serve short-term political optics of job protectionism, it risks undermining America’s long-standing advantage in global innovation. For India, the challenge lies in turning this disruption into opportunity—by strengthening domestic tech ecosystems, skilling talent, and positioning itself as a preferred global innovation hub amid shifting international labour dynamics.

State Finances publication 2025 by CAG

  • 25 Sep 2025

In News:

The Comptroller and Auditor General (CAG) of India released the State Finances Publication 2025, providing a comprehensive assessment of revenue, expenditure, debt, and fiscal sustainability across India’s 28 states. The report highlights critical trends in committed expenditure, salary and subsidy bills, and public debt, offering insights for policy planning and fiscal management.

Salary and Subsidy Expenditure

  • Over the last decade (2013-14 to 2022-23), states’ salary bills have grown 2.5 times, reaching ?16.6 lakh crore, forming the largest component of committed expenditure.
  • Subsidy spending, defined as day-to-day operations that do not create or enhance assets, more than trebled to ?3.09 lakh crore, accounting for 8.61% of total revenue expenditure.
  • The distribution of subsidy expenditure is highly uneven. In 2022-23, Punjab, Gujarat, Andhra Pradesh, and Rajasthan spent over 10% of their total expenditure on subsidies, with Punjab at 17%, the highest among states. By contrast, 10 states, including Sikkim, Nagaland, Kerala, and Goa, reported subsidies below 2%, and Arunachal Pradesh recorded no subsidy spending.

Committed Expenditure Patterns

Committed expenditure, comprising salaries, pensions, and interest payments, constituted 43.49% of states’ revenue expenditure in FY 2022-23. The share varied widely across states:

  • Nagaland: 74%
  • Kerala: 63%
  • Tamil Nadu: 51%
  • Andhra Pradesh: 42%
  • Telangana: 41%
  • Karnataka: 33%
  • Maharashtra: 32%

In total, 15 states reported committed expenditure exceeding 50% of revenue expenditure, seven between 40–50%, and six below 40%. The report indicates that committed expenditure and subsidies together have frequently exceeded states’ own tax revenues, reaching 102% in 2013-14 and 134% in 2020-21, signaling fiscal pressure and limited flexibility.

Public Debt and Fiscal Risk

Public debt has risen 3.4 times over the last decade, reaching ?59.6 lakh crore, approximately 23% of the combined Gross State Domestic Product (GSDP). This increase in debt, coupled with rising committed expenditure, poses medium-term fiscal risks, necessitating prudent fiscal management and reforms.

Union Tax Devolution and Revenue Sources

States’ major revenue sources include own taxes and non-tax revenues, grants-in-aid, and their share of Union taxes. Between 2013-14 and 2022-23, states’ average share of Union taxes remained around 27% of total revenue receipts, with FY 2022-23 showing the same share.

Distribution of devolved taxes is concentrated:

  • Top 5 states (UP, Bihar, MP, West Bengal, Maharashtra) received 50% of devolved taxes.
  • Southern states’ shares: Tamil Nadu 4.08%, Andhra Pradesh 4.02%, Karnataka 3.65%, Telangana 2.07%, and Kerala 1.93%.

Policy Implications

The CAG report underscores the rising fiscal pressures on states due to expanding salary bills, high subsidies, and growing debt. With committed expenditure consuming a large portion of revenue, states have limited fiscal space for development and capital investment. The findings highlight the need for targeted reforms in public expenditure management, subsidy rationalisation, and debt sustainability, ensuring that states can maintain service delivery without compromising fiscal health.

Mana Mitra: Andhra Pradesh’s WhatsApp Governance Model

  • 24 Sep 2025

In News:

  • The Central Government, through the Department of Administrative Reforms and Public Grievances (DARPG), has decided to study and replicate Andhra Pradesh’s “WhatsApp Governance Model”, recognized as a national best practice in e-governance.
  • The announcement came during the 28th National Conference on e-Governance 2025, held in Visakhapatnam on the theme “Viksit Bharat: Civil Service and Digital Transformation.”

About Mana Mitra

  • Mana Mitra, launched by the Andhra Pradesh government in January 2025, is India’s first WhatsApp-based governance platform.
  • It integrates 36 departments and provides 738 citizen services through a single WhatsApp number — 9552300009 — ensuring accessibility, efficiency, and transparency in public service delivery.

Objectives

  • Ease of Access: Deliver services through WhatsApp, a widely used platform, reducing citizens’ dependence on physical offices.
  • Transparency & Trust: Digital certificates are issued with QR-coded verification, minimizing fraud and fake documentation.
  • Inclusivity: Brings governance to the mobile phones of rural and remote citizens, fostering last-mile digital inclusion.

How It Works

  • Single-Number Access: Citizens initiate a chat by sending “Hi” on WhatsApp.
  • Menu-Driven Services: A chatbot guides users through departments and available services—education, revenue, endowments, RTC, tourism, and health.
  • Instant Document Delivery: Documents such as income and caste certificates, hall tickets, and tax receipts are generated digitally with verifiable QR codes.
  • Real-Time Dashboard: Tracks service delivery, ensuring accountability and performance monitoring.
  • Next-Gen Tech Integration: Future phases will use AI chatbots, voice-based assistance, and blockchain authentication for secure transactions.

Key Features

  • Wide Coverage: 738 services across 36 departments.
  • Security: Built-in encryption and QR verification to prevent misuse.
  • Partnership with Meta: Ensures robust backend infrastructure and global-grade security.
  • Scalability: Phase-II aims to include AI, voice, and real-time grievance redressal systems.

Significance and Impacts

  • Citizen-Centric Governance: Empowers citizens by providing services at their fingertips, in line with the vision of Minimum Government, Maximum Governance.
  • Administrative Efficiency: Reduces paperwork, manual processing, and delays through automation.
  • Cost and Time Savings: Citizens save travel and administrative costs; departments save on manpower and logistics.
  • Digital Inclusion: Leverages WhatsApp’s nearly 500 million Indian users, ensuring access even in areas with limited digital literacy.
  • Model for Replication: DARPG recognized it as a national model to be documented and replicated across all states.

Challenges

  • Digital Divide: Connectivity issues in remote and tribal regions can hinder equitable access.
  • Cybersecurity Threats: Phishing, fake accounts, or data breaches must be prevented through strong encryption and verification systems.
  • Capacity Building: Frontline staff need training for effective digital grievance handling.
  • Data Privacy: Must comply with the Digital Personal Data Protection Act (DPDPA) 2023.
  • Scalability and Reliability: Systems must withstand heavy user loads without technical failures.

Way Forward

  • AI & Voice Integration: Enable predictive service delivery and multilingual assistance.
  • Strengthen Cybersecurity: Introduce two-factor authentication and blockchain-based certification.
  • Enhance Digital Literacy: Awareness campaigns targeting rural, elderly, and marginalized populations.
  • Institutionalization: Provide legislative backing to make WhatsApp governance legally accountable.
  • Nationwide Replication: Integrate with platforms like DigiLocker, UPI, and CoWIN to create a unified digital service ecosystem.

The 28th National Conference on e-Governance 2025

  • Venue: Visakhapatnam, Andhra Pradesh.
  • Organizers: DARPG and the Ministry of Electronics & IT in collaboration with the AP Government.
  • Theme:Viksit Bharat: Civil Service and Digital Transformation.
  • Participants: Delegates from 28 States and 8 Union Territories, including 70 speakers.
  • Focus Areas:
    • AI for Viksit Bharat: Driving inclusive and scalable solutions.
    • Cybersecurity and digital sovereignty in e-governance.
    • Gram Panchayat-level innovations and agri-stack development.
    • Role of subsea cables and AI data centers in digital infrastructure.

Conclusion

Mana Mitra represents a transformative step in India’s digital governance journey, bridging citizens and the state through a simple yet powerful medium — WhatsApp. By ensuring transparency, efficiency, and inclusivity, it exemplifies how technology can democratize governance. If successfully replicated nationwide, this model could become a cornerstone of Viksit Bharat 2047, bringing governance truly “to the people’s fingertips.”

ICMR’s Impact of Research and Innovation Scale (IRIS)

  • 23 Sep 2025

In News:

  • The Indian Council of Medical Research (ICMR) — India’s apex body for biomedical and health research — has introduced the Impact of Research and Innovation Scale (IRIS) to systematically measure the impact of biomedical, public health, and allied research projects.
  • As India’s foremost grants-giving and policy-shaping institution in health research, ICMR’s adoption of IRIS is expected to significantly influence the country’s scientific and academic landscape.

Objective and Design

IRIS seeks to create a uniform and quantifiable metric to evaluate research outcomes. It introduces the concept of “publication-equivalents” (PEs) as the unit of measurement.

  • A peer-reviewed research paper or systematic review carries 1 PE.
  • A paper cited in policies or guidelines earns 10 PEs.
  • A patent is valued at 5 PEs, while a commercially used device attracts 20 PEs.

By linking these metrics to funding and recognition, IRIS aims to encourage outcome-oriented research, policy translation, and innovation across disciplines such as biochemistry, clinical medicine, public health, and biomedical engineering.

Potential Benefits

  • Standardisation of Evaluation:IRIS offers a common yardstick across scientific domains, enabling fairer comparisons of research productivity and impact.
  • Recognition Beyond Citations:Unlike traditional citation-based indices, IRIS recognises diverse contributions such as patents, policy impact, and product development — providing a broader view of research value.
  • Policy and Funding Integration:The framework can help align funding priorities with national health goals by linking measurable impact to resource allocation, thus encouraging translation of research into public health outcomes.
  • Encouragement for Innovation:The model rewards applied research, particularly innovations that reach commercialization or large-scale public use, which may accelerate India’s biomedical innovation ecosystem.

Concerns and Limitations

Despite its intent, the framework faces methodological and ethical challenges.

  • Conceptual Weakness: The PE values appear arbitrary and lack robust theoretical justification. Influential works — such as commentaries or perspective papers — receive zero PEs, despite their historical significance in shaping medical thought.
  • Skewed Incentives: By assigning higher PEs to commercial devices (20) than to policy-level impact (10), IRIS risks overemphasizing commercialization at the cost of basic science and public health research. Transformative community-based interventions like India’s Home-Based Neonatal Care or nutrition trials in tuberculosis (RATIONS) may be undervalued.
  • Ethical Concerns: The model could encourage metric manipulation or narrow research choices, especially in an ecosystem where research integrity is still evolving.
  • Erosion of Science as a Public Good: Over-commercialization may undermine the ethos of research serving societal well-being rather than profit motives.

Way Forward

For IRIS to gain legitimacy, transparency, inclusivity, and peer validation are essential. Experts suggest conducting a national-level Delphi study to achieve consensus among researchers on PE assignment. Moreover, independent data verification and periodic review of the framework can ensure its adaptability and credibility.

Conclusion

Measuring research impact is inherently complex, and no single metric can capture the multifaceted nature of scientific contribution. While IRIS holds promise in standardizing research evaluation and fostering innovation, it must balance quantitative assessment with qualitative judgment, ensuring that India’s public health priorities and the spirit of science as a public good remain at its core. The success of IRIS will depend not merely on what it measures, but on whether it nurtures a research culture driven by ethics, relevance, and societal impact.

Rising State Debt in India: CAG’s Decadal Analysis and Fiscal Implications

  • 22 Sep 2025

In News:

The Comptroller and Auditor General (CAG) of India has released a first-of-its-kind decadal report (2013–14 to 2022–23) analysing the fiscal health of Indian states, highlighting a worrying surge in public debt and its implications for fiscal sustainability and cooperative federalism.

Understanding Public Debt

  • Public debt arises when government expenditure exceeds revenue from taxes and other receipts, prompting borrowing to bridge the fiscal gap. For states, such debt includes liabilities under the Consolidated Fund of the State, comprising internal debt and loans and advances from the Centre.
  • Internal debt consists of marketable securities like government bonds and treasury bills, and non-marketable debt such as loans from financial institutions like LIC and NABARD or the Reserve Bank’s Ways and Means Advances (WMA).
  • The Debt-to-GSDP ratio is a key indicator of fiscal sustainability, reflecting a state’s capacity to service its debt. A higher ratio implies greater fiscal stress.
  • The NK Singh Committee on FRBM (2016) recommended a combined general government debt ceiling of 60% of GDP — 40% for the Centre and 20% for states.

Key Findings of the CAG Report

  • The CAG report reveals that the aggregate public debt of 28 states trebled over the past decade — from ?17.57 lakh crore in 2013–14 to ?59.60 lakh crore in 2022–23.
  • As a share of combined GSDP, debt rose from 16.66% to 22.96%, with state debt accounting for 22.17% of India’s GDP in FY 2022–23.

Inter-State Variations

Fiscal vulnerability varies widely:

  • Highest debt-to-GSDP ratios: Punjab (40.35%), Nagaland (37.15%), and West Bengal (33.70%).
  • Lowest ratios: Odisha (8.45%), Maharashtra (14.64%), and Gujarat (16.37%).
    As of March 2023, eight states had debt exceeding 30% of GSDP, while six states maintained it below 20%.

Debt Sustainability and Composition

  • The states’ debt-to-revenue receipts ratio ranged from 128% (2014–15) to 191% (2020–21), averaging about 150% of total receipts.
  • The debt-to-GSDP ratio oscillated between 17–25%, with a sharp rise during the COVID-19 pandemic year (2020–21) due to falling GSDP and increased borrowing for relief and GST compensation.
  • Major sources of debt include open market borrowings, RBI advances, institutional loans, and back-to-back loans from the Centre in lieu of GST shortfall and capital assistance.

Fiscal Management Concerns

  • The report flags a violation of the “golden rule of borrowing”, which stipulates that governments should borrow only for capital formation, not to finance revenue expenditure.
  • Eleven states, including Andhra Pradesh, Punjab, Kerala, and West Bengal, used borrowings to fund current expenses.
  • In Andhra Pradesh, only 17% of borrowings went to capital expenditure; in Punjab, 26%.

Such practices threaten fiscal sustainability, crowd out productive investments, and risk pushing states into a debt trap, thereby undermining macroeconomic stability.

Way Forward

  • Fiscal Discipline: States must prioritise borrowing for productive infrastructure and avoid financing recurring expenditure.
  • Debt Management Reforms:Operationalising the Public Debt Management Agency (PDMA) could ensure transparency and better coordination in debt operations.
  • Revenue Strengthening: Enhancing tax buoyancy, rationalising subsidies, and diversifying revenue bases can reduce dependence on central transfers.
  • Adherence to FRBM Targets: States should align fiscal deficit and debt ratios with FRBM norms to ensure long-term sustainability.
  • Institutional Oversight: Strengthening State Finance Commissions and CAG monitoring can promote accountable and sustainable fiscal federalism.

Conclusion

The surge in state-level debt underscores the growing strain on subnational fiscal capacity. While borrowing is essential for development, unchecked debt accumulation and non-productive spending threaten fiscal stability. Ensuring fiscal prudence, efficient debt management, and adherence to reform frameworks like FRBM are vital to preserving India’s long-term macroeconomic resilience and cooperative federal balance.

WAVES Bazaar 2.0

  • 21 Sep 2025

In News:

India’s media and entertainment (M&E) industry is experiencing rapid digital transformation, fueled by rising global collaborations and the growing influence of independent creators. To channel this momentum and establish India as a global content hub, the Ministry of Information and Broadcasting (I&B) launched WAVES Bazaar in January 2025—a first-of-its-kind hybrid content marketplace that connects creators, investors, and distributors across various media segments.

Now entering its second phase, WAVES Bazaar is expanding with AI-driven matchmaking, online pitching sessions, and secure viewing rooms—initiatives aimed at strengthening India’s creative ecosystem and democratizing access for new talent.

About WAVES Bazaar

WAVES Bazaar serves as a digital platform bringing together diverse stakeholders from films, television, animation, gaming, music, radio, advertising, and podcasts. It allows creators to network, pitch ideas, and collaborate with OTT platforms, production houses, distributors, and financiers.

Key Features of the Second Phase

  • Online Pitching and Viewing Rooms:Budding creators will now be able to pitch directly to production houses, OTT platforms, and investors through virtual sessions. The addition of secure online viewing rooms will allow content buyers to preview projects safely, ensuring transparency and intellectual property protection.
  • AI-Driven Matchmaking and Profiling:Artificial Intelligence will enhance the platform’s efficiency by recommending suitable collaborators—such as financiers, distributors, or genre-specific buyers—based on project details. The system will also support automated profile building, pitch deck creation, and project scoring, guiding creators to improve their market visibility.
  • Skill Development and Knowledge Hub:The second phase introduces a knowledge ecosystem comprising webinars and masterclasses by industry experts. These sessions aim to bridge the knowledge gap for emerging creators and provide mentorship on project development, financing, and global trends.
  • Global Outreach and Co-Production Opportunities:WAVES Bazaar will expand its international footprint through delegations and participation in global festivals. It also seeks to strengthen co-production treaties with partner countries, promoting cross-border collaboration and investment in India’s creative sectors.

Significance for India’s Creative Economy

The initiative aligns with India’s ambition to become a global content hub by enabling equal opportunities for small and independent creators. It aims to diversify creative exports beyond films into music, gaming, animation, podcasts, and short-form content, while also enhancing India’s soft power and digital cultural economy.

By integrating technology, mentorship, and market access, WAVES Bazaar could emerge as the central gateway for Indian creative exports, fostering innovation and sustainable growth in the sector.

Challenges and Way Forward

While the portal’s potential is immense, its success will depend on addressing data security, ensuring inclusive access for regional creators, and maintaining long-term international partnerships. If implemented effectively, WAVES Bazaar 2.0 can position India as a leading creative powerhouse, bridging the gap between talent and opportunity in the global digital age.

Rising Extreme Rainfall in the Himalayas

  • 20 Sep 2025

In News:

The 2025 monsoon season has witnessed intense and destructive rainfall across North India, particularly in the Himalayan states of Uttarakhand, Himachal Pradesh, and Jammu & Kashmir. Cloudbursts, landslides, and flash floods have resulted in widespread devastation, exposing the growing vulnerability of India’s mountain ecosystems and urban regions. The intensification of monsoon rainfall can be traced to the complex interplay of global climate change, regional topography, and anthropogenic factors such as urbanisation and deforestation.

Scientific Basis of Intensified Rainfall

Dry regions like northwestern India lie at the confluence of tropical and extratropical systems. Moist monsoon currents from the Bay of Bengal and Arabian Sea increasingly collide with western disturbances, producing strong atmospheric instability and torrential rainfall. This interaction has become more frequent as climate change alters the behaviour of mid-latitude westerlies.

Global warming weakens and destabilises the jet stream, allowing westerly troughs to extend southward and interact with the monsoon more often. A warmer atmosphere holds more moisture, intensifying the hydrological cycle and leading to heavier downpours. These processes have made events like the recent Udhampur (630 mm in 24 hours) and Leh (59 mm in two days) rainfall episodes more common, even in regions historically considered semi-arid.

Why the Himalayas Are More Vulnerable

The Himalayas sit at the convergence of moist tropical monsoon winds and mid-latitude westerlies, creating ideal conditions for orographic uplift and deep convection that trigger extreme precipitation and cloudbursts. When moisture-laden air is forced up steep slopes, it cools rapidly and condenses into intense, localised storms.

Climate change compounds this natural vulnerability. Rapid Arctic warming is weakening the jet stream, causing slower and more meandering weather systems that linger over regions, leading to prolonged heavy rainfall. Similar dynamics have been linked to the Pakistan floods (2010), Germany (2021), and West Asia (2024) events.

In mountainous terrain, rainfall that would be manageable in coastal plains becomes catastrophic — flash floods and landslides occur as water cascades downhill, carrying debris, loose soil, and boulders. Over the last month, such incidents have been recorded in Mandi, Kullu, Dharali, Tharali, and Jammu, destroying homes and cutting off roads.

Challenges in Prediction and Preparedness

Despite technological advances, forecasting cloudbursts remains challenging. Current systems employ Doppler Weather Radars (DWRs), satellites (INSAT-3D/3DR, GPM, Himawari), rain gauges, and high-resolution numerical weather prediction (NWP) models. However, coverage in Himalayan terrain is sparse, satellite resolution is coarse, and models require ultra-fine grid scales (<1 km) with precise initial conditions.

Improved dense observation networks, enhanced process-based models, and integration of AI/ML techniques for real-time data assimilation are critical for reliable nowcasting.

Urban and Developmental Pressures

Rapid urbanisation, deforestation, and construction on unstable slopes have magnified the flood risks in both mountain towns and plains cities. Urban drainage systems, designed for rainfall of only 10–20 mm/hour, are ill-equipped for cloudbursts exceeding 100 mm/hour. Concretised surfaces increase runoff, while encroachments block natural drainage, turning heavy rain into urban deluges.

Mitigation demands a multi-pronged approach—redesigning stormwater systems, enforcing land-use regulations, restoring natural water channels, and incorporating climate risk assessments in infrastructure planning.

Conclusion

The increasing frequency of extreme rainfall and cloudbursts in India’s Himalayan and urban regions reflects the intersection of climate dynamics, fragile topography, and unsustainable development. Strengthening early warning systems, integrating scientific forecasting with local planning, and promoting climate-resilient infrastructure are essential to mitigate future disasters. The Himalayan crisis underscores a broader reality—climate change is no longer a distant threat but an unfolding challenge demanding immediate, coordinated action.

Central Civil Services (Unified Pension Scheme) Rules, 2025

  • 19 Sep 2025

In News:

The Government of India has notified the Central Civil Services (Implementation of the Unified Pension Scheme under the National Pension System) Rules, 2025, in the official gazette. The rules, issued by the Department of Pension and Pensioners’ Welfare (DoPPW), operationalize the Unified Pension Scheme (UPS) introduced earlier in April 2025 and regulate service matters and retirement benefits for Central Government employees opting for it under the National Pension System (NPS).

Evolution of Pension Systems in India

  • Historically, Central Government employees appointed before January 1, 2004 were covered under the Old Pension Scheme (OPS), a defined-benefit system guaranteeing 50% of the last drawn basic pay without employee contribution. Employees joining after this date were brought under the National Pension System (NPS)—a market-linked, contributory framework where the pension depends on corpus accumulation and market returns.
  • In response to persistent demands to restore the security of OPS while maintaining fiscal prudence, the Union Cabinet approved the Unified Pension Scheme (UPS) in August 2024. Effective from April 1, 2025, it offers a middle ground between the assured benefits of OPS and the sustainability of NPS.

Salient Features of the Unified Pension Scheme

The UPS guarantees an assured pension of 50% of the average basic pay of the last 12 months before retirement, provided the employee has completed at least 25 years of service. In the event of the pensioner’s death, the spouse is entitled to 60% of the pension.

  • Contribution pattern: Both employee and employer contribute 10% of basic pay plus DA, while the government adds an additional 8.5% to create a pooled corpus ensuring assured payouts.
  • Minimum pension: ?10,000 per month after 10 years of service.
  • Lump-sum benefit: One-tenth of the last basic pay plus DA for every six months of service.
  • Ineligibility: Employees dismissed, removed, or compulsorily retired as a penalty are excluded from UPS benefits.

This structure blends assured returns with shared contributions, balancing financial security for employees and fiscal discipline for the government.

Switch Facility: UPS–NPS Flexibility

The 2025 Rules provide employees a one-time switch option between the two schemes:

  • Employees under UPS may switch to NPS once—but cannot revert to UPS thereafter.
  • The option must be exercised at least one year before superannuation or three months before voluntary retirement (VRS).
  • The switch is prohibited in cases involving dismissal, removal, or ongoing disciplinary action.
  • Those not exercising the option within the stipulated time (September 30, 2025) will continue under UPS.
  • Employees switching to NPS will receive its benefits plus a 4% differential contribution.

The provision seeks to ensure informed choice and flexibility in retirement planning.

Implementation and Challenges

Though 23.94 lakh employees are eligible to opt for UPS, only around 40,000 have done so. The DoPPW is conducting awareness campaigns to clarify benefits, yet many employees perceive UPS as less attractive than the non-contributory OPS. Employee associations, including the Central Secretariat Service Forum, have continued to advocate for a full return to the old system.

Significance

The Unified Pension Scheme represents a recalibration of India’s pension architecture, merging assured post-retirement income with contributory discipline. It aims to protect employees from market volatility while containing long-term fiscal liabilities. Through the CCS (UPS) Rules, 2025, the government has institutionalized a flexible, transparent, and sustainable framework, marking an important step in public financial management and social security reform.

SEBI Announces Major Market Reforms to Enhance Investment and Governance

  • 18 Sep 2025

In News:

The Securities and Exchange Board of India (SEBI) recently announced a set of comprehensive reforms aimed at improving foreign investment inflows, easing IPO norms for large issuers, strengthening governance in market infrastructure institutions (MIIs), and promoting financial inclusion. These reforms are introduced amid heightened global uncertainty, with foreign portfolio investors (FPIs) withdrawing over ?63,500 crore from Indian markets since July 2025 due to weak earnings, high valuations, and international trade tensions.

SWAGAT-FI: Single Window Access for Foreign Investors

A cornerstone of SEBI’s reforms is the Single Window Automatic &Generalised Access for Trusted Foreign Investors (SWAGAT-FI) framework, designed to simplify investment access for FPIs and Foreign Venture Capital Investors (FVCIs).

Eligibility and Scope:

  • Sovereign wealth funds, central banks, regulated public retail funds (mutual funds, insurance companies, pension funds).
  • Existing FPIs meeting criteria can migrate to SWAGAT-FI status.

Features:

  • Unified registration and KYC cycle, reducing repeated compliance.
  • Exemption from the 50% cap on contributions by NRIs, OCIs, and resident Indians.
  • Simplified access through the India Market Access portal, reducing regulatory complexity.
  • Implementation over a six-month timeline, aiming to restore investor confidence and enhance India’s global competitiveness.

Relaxed IPO Norms for Large Companies

To encourage large issuers to raise capital efficiently:

  • Companies with market capitalization of ?1–5 lakh crore must now offer 2.75–2.8% of post-issue market cap, down from 5%.
  • Minimum public offer for mega-IPOs raised to ?6,250 crore.
  • Public shareholding timeline relaxed: Firms with <15% float at listing get 10 years to meet 25% minimum, and those with ≥15% float get 5 years.
  • Anchor investor quota increased from one-third to 40%, reserving one-third for domestic mutual funds and the rest for life insurers and pension funds.

These measures help promoters reduce immediate dilution while facilitating broad investor participation.

Strengthened Governance in Market Infrastructure Institutions

SEBI has introduced structural reforms to improve transparency and accountability in exchanges and clearing corporations:

  • Two executive directors appointed to oversee critical operations (trading, clearing, settlement) and regulatory compliance (risk, investor grievances).
  • Defined roles and responsibilities for Managing Directors and Key Managerial Personnel to enhance succession planning.
  • Scale-based thresholds introduced for material related-party transactions.
  • Separate AIF schemes for accredited investors with flexible compliance norms.

Mutual Fund and Retail Investor Reforms

To promote financial inclusion and investor protection:

  • Maximum exit load reduced from 5% to 3%.
  • Distributor incentives revised to encourage inflows from B-30 cities and women investors.
  • Enhanced transparency in investor reporting and compliance requirements.

Significance and Implications

  • For India’s markets: Provides operational flexibility for large issuers, simplifies compliance, and reduces procedural hurdles for trusted foreign investors.
  • For global competitiveness: Positions India as a stable, long-term investment hub amid capital volatility.
  • For retail investors: Encourages broader participation from smaller cities and underrepresented groups, aligning with inclusive financial growth objectives.

Overall, SEBI’s reforms reflect a balance between market facilitation, investor protection, and governance standards, reinforcing India’s ambition to be an attractive, transparent, and globally competitive capital market.

India-Mauritius Relations

  • 17 Sep 2025

In News:

India and Mauritius share deep-rooted historical, cultural, and economic ties, which have been further strengthened through recent diplomatic engagements. In September 2025, Prime Minister Narendra Modi met Mauritius PM Navinchandra Ramgoolam in Varanasi, reaffirming the partnership as more than a diplomatic arrangement, describing it as a “family bond” rooted in shared history, values, and strategic interests.

Special Economic Package and Development Cooperation

During the meeting, India announced a special economic package worth $680 million, aimed at supporting Mauritius in infrastructure, healthcare, defence preparedness, and maritime security. Key components of the package include:

  • Healthcare: Establishment of a 500-bed Sir Seewoosagur Ramgoolam National Hospital, an AYUSH Centre of Excellence, and a Veterinary School and Animal Hospital. The first Jan Aushadhi Kendra outside India was also inaugurated.
  • Infrastructure: Development of roads, highways, ring roads, and the ATC Tower at SSR International Airport.
  • Strategic and Maritime Security: Assistance in Exclusive Economic Zone (EEZ) surveillance, hydrographic surveys, navigation charting, and maritime domain awareness over the next five years.
  • Chagos Marine Protected Area: India will support Mauritius in monitoring, developing, and protecting the Chagos EEZ, following Mauritius’ sovereignty agreement with the UK.

These initiatives are positioned as hard and soft power diplomacy, enhancing India’s strategic reach in the Indian Ocean while improving Mauritius’ development and security capabilities.

Economic and Technological Cooperation

Mauritius is one of India’s closest economic partners in Africa, ranking as the second-largest source of FDI into India after Singapore. The two nations signed the Comprehensive Economic Cooperation and Partnership Agreement (CECPA) in 2021, India’s first trade deal with an African country. Last year, UPI and RuPay services were launched in Mauritius, and both nations are now exploring trade in local currencies.

India also supports academic and civil service capacity building through collaborations between IIT Madras, Indian Institute of Plantation Management, and the University of Mauritius, as well as the launch of Mission Karmayogi training modules.

Geopolitical and Strategic Significance

Mauritius views India as a trusted partner and net security provider in the Indian Ocean, reinforcing a free, open, and secure maritime domain. India’s support aligns with its Neighbourhood First and Vision Mahasagar policies, countering the growing influence of China, Russia, Iran, and Gulf nations in the region. By assisting Mauritius with EEZ surveillance and maritime capacity building, India strengthens its strategic leverage while bolstering Mauritius’ sovereignty, particularly in the Chagos Archipelago.

Cultural and People-to-People Connect

The bond between the two nations is also cultural and historical. Approximately 70% of Mauritius’ 1.3 million population are of Indian descent, and Indian culture, traditions, and languages are deeply embedded in daily life. During the Varanasi visit, the Mauritian Prime Minister participated in the Ganga Aarti and planned prayers at Shri Kashi Vishwanath Dham, highlighting the symbolic spiritual dimension of bilateral relations.

Conclusion

India’s multi-dimensional engagement with Mauritius demonstrates a blend of strategic foresight, development diplomacy, and cultural affinity. Through the special economic package, maritime cooperation, and people-centric initiatives, India not only strengthens Mauritius’ development and security but also consolidates its influence in a geopolitically vital part of the Indian Ocean, fostering mutual prosperity, stability, and strategic partnership.

Judicial Pendency in the Supreme Court

  • 16 Sep 2025

In News:

The Supreme Court of India, the apex guardian of constitutional justice, is witnessing an unprecedented surge in pendency, reflecting deeper structural and procedural challenges in the judicial system. As of 2025, according to the National Judicial Data Grid (NJDG), the number of pending cases has reached an all-time high of 88,492, comprising 69,605 civil and 18,887 criminal cases. This marks a 35% rise in five years, even as the Court functions at its full sanctioned strength of 34 judges.

Causes of Rising Pendency

  • Several systemic factors have contributed to this backlog. Despite digitization and virtual hearing reforms, the rate of disposal lags behind fresh filings — in August 2025 alone, 7,080 cases were filed while only 5,667 were disposed of, indicating a disposal rate of around 80%.
  • The limited number of working days, frequent adjournments, and procedural complexities hinder case progression. India’s judge-to-population ratio remains alarmingly low at 21 judges per million people, far below the recommended 50. Moreover, the indiscriminate filing of Special Leave Petitions (SLPs) under Article 136 has transformed the Court into a general appellate body rather than a constitutional one.
  • The government, as the largest litigant, contributes nearly 50% of total cases, many of which are repetitive or avoidable. In addition, outdated infrastructure, slow AI integration, and underutilization of Alternative Dispute Resolution (ADR) mechanisms like arbitration and mediation continue to strain the system.

Implications of Judicial Delay

The consequences of prolonged pendency are far-reaching. The oft-quoted maxim “justice delayed is justice denied” holds especially true in India, where delays erode public trust and institutional credibility. Prolonged trials lead to social injustice, particularly for vulnerable groups awaiting resolution of criminal and civil disputes.

Economically, legal uncertainty deters investment, slows contract enforcement, and raises transaction costs. The Indian Justice Report 2025 highlights that over 76% of prisoners are undertrials, leading to chronic prison overcrowding — a direct fallout of judicial delays.

Reform Measures and Innovations

  • The Supreme Court has initiated multiple steps under its “Unclogging the Docket” initiative. The Differentiated Case Management (DCM) system categorizes cases based on complexity, allowing short and infructuous cases to be fast-tracked. This reform has achieved a disposal rate of 104%, setting a benchmark for judicial efficiency.
  • Arrears Committees monitor long-pending cases and ensure compliance with the Malimath Committee recommendations, which advocate stricter timelines and reduced adjournments. Structural reforms like increasing judicial capacity, reducing vacation periods, and filling vacancies promptly have also been proposed.
  • Legislative changes such as the Arbitration and Conciliation (Amendment) Acts of 2015 & 2019, the Commercial Courts Act (2018), and amendments to the Negotiable Instruments Act (2018) aim to streamline procedures and promote out-of-court settlements.
  • Technological innovations like e-filing, virtual hearings, and the National Judicial Data Grid (NJDG) have improved transparency, though integration across courts remains incomplete. The Chief Justice’s recent move to convert part of the summer recess into working days underscores an institutional willingness to reform.

Way Forward

Experts have long advocated for dividing the Supreme Court into a Constitutional Division (for fundamental rights and constitutional issues) and a Legal Division (for statutory appeals), as proposed by the 10th and 11th Law Commissions. Expanding judicial strength, adopting AI-based case management, and promoting ADR mechanisms are equally vital.

Conclusion

The mounting pendency in the Supreme Court underscores a structural crisis demanding urgent multi-pronged reforms. While the Court’s efficiency initiatives and government’s prompt action on judicial appointments are encouraging, sustainable change requires institutional restructuring, procedural streamlining, and technological modernization. Upholding the ideal of “Speedy Justice as a Fundamental Right” is imperative for maintaining the faith of citizens in India’s democratic and judicial institutions.

India and Iran: Ancient Civilisations and the Shaping of a Multipolar World

  • 15 Sep 2025

In News:

The contemporary global order is in the midst of a profound transition. For decades, the international system was dominated by a Western-led order, particularly the United States, which wielded disproportionate influence through control over global finance, technology, media, and international institutions. However, this model now faces a crisis. Blatant violations of international law, unilateral military interventions, trade wars, disregard for multilateralism, and environmental degradation have eroded the credibility of Western dominance.

Rise of the Global South and Civilisational States

Amidst this flux, the Global South—comprising countries across Asia, Africa, and Latin America—has emerged as a collective force asserting strategic autonomy, indigenous development models, and self-reliance in science, technology, and security. Within this, ancient civilisational states like India and Iran occupy a unique position. With their histories of resilience, cultural depth, and governance wisdom, both countries embody values of peace, spirituality, respect for diversity, and sovereignty.

Despite repeated invasions, both civilisations absorbed and reshaped external powers through philosophy, art, and administration. In modern times too, India’s anti-colonial struggle and leadership of the Non-Aligned Movement, and Iran’s oil nationalisation in the 1950s and Islamic Revolution of 1979, underscore their quest for independence.

Contemporary Strategic Convergence

Today, both India and Iran face external pressures but continue to safeguard strategic autonomy. India pursues a balanced foreign policy amidst U.S.-China rivalry, while Iran has withstood sanctions and “economic terrorism” without compromising sovereignty. Their convergence is reflected in:

  • Energy and Connectivity: The International North-South Transport Corridor (INSTC) and Chabahar Port enhance Eurasian and Indian Ocean linkages.
  • Maritime Security: Cooperation in West Asia underlines their shared interest in regional stability.
  • Civilisational Diplomacy: Both uphold dialogue, pluralism, and respect for sovereignty as guiding principles.

Palestine: A Symbol of Global South’s Resistance

The Palestinian struggle epitomises the Global South’s broader resistance to domination and double standards in international law. For India and Iran, support for Palestine reflects their commitment to justice, sovereignty, and peaceful conflict resolution.

Towards a Multipolar World Order

The emerging order is increasingly multipolar, with power distributed across diverse actors like India, China, Brazil, and regional middle powers. This shift emphasises equality, mutual respect, and sovereignty rather than unilateral dominance. India and Iran, by combining civilisational heritage with modern strategic partnerships, can shape this transformation in key ways:

  • South-South Cooperation: Deepening BRICS, SCO, and NAM as platforms for financial and technological alternatives.
  • Reforming Multilateralism: Advocating UN Security Council reform and inclusive global governance.
  • Strategic Autonomy: Maintaining independence while deepening Eurasian, African, and Indo-Pacific linkages.
  • Civilisational Values: Promoting peace, sustainability, diversity, and human dignity as anchors of a fairer order.

Conclusion

The erosion of Western hegemony presents both challenges and opportunities. India and Iran, rooted in civilisational resilience and guided by strategic independence, are well placed to contribute to the evolution of a just multipolar order. By advancing cooperative frameworks in connectivity, energy, and regional security, and by upholding values of sovereignty and inclusivity, the two nations can not only strengthen their bilateral partnership but also offer the Global South a vision of shared prosperity, dignity, and stability.

Vultures and Public Health: Linking Conservation with Pandemic Preparedness

  • 14 Sep 2025

Introduction

Vultures, often overlooked in mainstream conservation discourse, are vital ecological assets that deliver critical ecosystem services. As nature’s most efficient waste managers, they swiftly consume animal carcasses, thereby preventing the spread of deadly pathogens such as anthrax, botulism, and rabies. Their decline in South Asia, particularly in India, is not only an ecological concern but also a pressing public health challenge with implications for pandemic preparedness.

Ecological and Public Health Role

Vultures are unique as obligate scavengers capable of consuming large quantities of rotting flesh and bone. By doing so, they prevent the accumulation of carcasses that otherwise become breeding grounds for zoonotic diseases. Studies link the disappearance of vultures to rising cases of rabies and other infections, as feral dogs and rodents, which proliferate in their absence, act as alternative scavengers and reservoirs of disease.

The economic value of this “free service” is immense. Between 1993 and 2006, India’s vulture collapse—among the worst human-caused wildlife die-offs—was estimated to have cost the economy nearly USD 34 billion and indirectly contributed to around 50,000 human deaths due to rabies. This highlights the underestimated yet indispensable role of vultures in sustaining public health and economic stability.

India’s Vulture Crisis

India once hosted more than 40 million vultures, but populations crashed by over 95% since the 1990s, mainly due to the veterinary use of diclofenac, a drug toxic to vultures when ingested through livestock carcasses. Other threats include habitat loss, poisoning, and electrocution from power lines. Although the National Action Plan for Vulture Conservation (2016–25) sought to mitigate these risks, the species remains critically endangered.

The vulture decline demonstrates a direct link between biodiversity loss and increased pandemic risks. Carcass dumps once swarmed with hundreds of vultures, but today many remain unprocessed, heightening risks of disease spillover from animals to humans.

Regional Dimensions: The Central Asian Flyway

Vultures in India are part of the Central Asian Flyway (CAF), a migratory corridor spanning over 30 countries and connecting ecosystems across Asia. Poorly managed landfills, slaughter sites, and carcass dumps along this route can become hotspots for pathogen spillover. Thus, the CAF is not only a biodiversity corridor but also a public health corridor, demanding transboundary collaboration under regional and global frameworks.

Post-2025 Strategy and One Health Approach

As India prepares its post-2025 vulture conservation strategy, a shift from recovery to resilience is crucial. Key priorities include:

  • Satellite telemetry to map habitats and carcass hotspots.
  • A Decision Support System integrating wildlife, livestock, and health data.
  • Embedding vulture conservation within One Health frameworks linking human, animal, and environmental health.
  • Cross-border cooperation under CAF to align conservation with global health security.
  • Community stewardship, empowering women, youth, and local groups in surveillance and awareness.

Such measures would safeguard vultures as keystone species while strengthening systemic resilience against pandemics at relatively low cost compared to outbreak responses.

Conclusion

Vultures exemplify the interdependence of biodiversity and human health. Their conservation is not merely an ecological obligation but a strategic investment in pandemic preparedness, public health, and economic security. By integrating vulture protection into One Health strategies and regional cooperation frameworks, India can lead in showcasing how biodiversity conservation can double as a frontline defence against future health crises. Protecting vultures, therefore, is not just about saving a species—it is about safeguarding humanity itself.

India’s Strategic Autonomy in a Multipolar World

  • 13 Sep 2025

In News:

In international relations, few ideas have evolved as dynamically as strategic autonomy. Once a subject of academic debate, it is now central to India’s foreign policy. It reflects the country’s determination to take sovereign decisions without succumbing to external pressures or rigid alliances. Neither isolationism nor neutrality, strategic autonomy embodies flexibility, pragmatism, and the ability to engage with multiple powers on one’s own terms.

Historical Roots and Contemporary Shifts

The roots of strategic autonomy lie in India’s colonial past and its post-independence resolve to safeguard sovereignty. Jawaharlal Nehru’s policy of non-alignment during the Cold War laid the foundation. In the contemporary era, this has transformed into a policy of multi-alignment, where India partners with diverse global actors without being tied to any bloc.

The present world order is far from unipolar. U.S. dominance is contested by China’s assertiveness, Russia’s revisionism, and the West’s internal divisions. For India, this fragmented landscape presents both opportunities and dilemmas. Its national interests — territorial integrity, economic development, technological capacity, and regional stability — must be protected while navigating competing pressures.

India and the United States

Over the last two decades, Indo-U.S. relations have grown significantly. Defence cooperation, joint military exercises, intelligence sharing, and technology transfer mark this partnership. India plays a vital role in forums such as the Quad, Indo-Pacific dialogues, I2U2, and the India-Middle East-Europe Economic Corridor (IMEC). Shared concerns about China’s rise also drive convergence.

Yet, friction persists. U.S. tariffs, sanctions, and demands to dilute India’s ties with Russia test New Delhi’s resolve. India’s measured response — engaging deeply but resisting external diktats — reflects strategic autonomy in action. It is not anti-Americanism, but an insistence on independent choices.

China: Rivalry and Engagement

China poses the most complex challenge. The 2020 border clashes exposed the fragility of bilateral ties. Despite strained relations, China remains one of India’s largest trading partners and an influential actor in multilateral bodies like BRICS and the Shanghai Cooperation Organisation (SCO). India’s approach balances deterrence with engagement: strengthening border infrastructure, deepening Indo-Pacific partnerships, and simultaneously keeping communication channels open. Strategic autonomy here means neither capitulation nor reckless confrontation.

Russia: Historical Partnership amid Global Shifts

India’s relationship with Russia has endured since the Cold War, anchored in defence cooperation and shared strategic goals. Despite Moscow’s growing dependence on Beijing and its global isolation after the Ukraine conflict, India continues energy imports and defence ties with Russia. While diversifying suppliers and building indigenous defence industries, India refuses to let external powers dictate its Russia policy — again underscoring strategic autonomy.

Broader Dimensions of Autonomy

Strategic autonomy is not confined to geopolitics. In today’s interconnected world, it extends to economic resilience, technological sovereignty, cyber security, and climate diplomacy. India’s initiatives in digital infrastructure, critical minerals, indigenous platforms, and global technology governance highlight its efforts to secure autonomy in new domains.

Domestic stability is equally critical. Economic vulnerabilities, political polarisation, and institutional capacity influence how effectively India can exercise autonomous choices. True autonomy rests on national strength, innovation, and coherence.

Conclusion

India envisions itself as a sovereign pole in a multipolar world — neither aligning blindly nor withdrawing into isolation. Its foreign policy is assertive, interest-driven, and reflective of civilisational depth. As Prime Minister Narendra Modi asserted during India’s G-20 presidency, India seeks to be the “voice of the Global South,” advocating agency and inclusivity.

Strategic autonomy, therefore, is not a slogan but a strategy — the art of balancing major powers while securing national interest. In an era of shifting power equations, India must continue to engage with the U.S. without dependence, deter China without war, and cooperate with Russia without inheriting its isolation. Standing tall, India seeks not to reject the world but to shape its place within it — on its own terms.

India’s Export Challenges

  • 12 Sep 2025

In News:

India’s merchandise and services exports, once a key driver of economic growth, face mounting challenges amid global protectionism and domestic structural constraints. Recently, the imposition of a 50% tariff by the United States, which accounts for roughly 20% of India’s exports, threatens stagnation in the country’s largest trading partner market, highlighting vulnerabilities in export competitiveness.

Historical Export Trends

Between 1990 and 2010, India’s exports as a share of GDP rose from 7.1% to 20.4%, supported by liberalisation, reforms, and global integration. Merchandise and services exports contributed jointly, with sectors such as textiles, pharmaceuticals, and IT-BPM emerging as strong performers. However, from 2010 to 2024, India’s export growth decelerated; the GDP share dipped to 17.7% by 2020, recovering only marginally to 21.2% by 2024, while India’s global merchandise share rose modestly from 0.51% (1990) to 1.81% (2024). Most of the early gains were concentrated in the first two decades of liberalisation.

Sector-wise performance shows uneven growth: agricultural exports increased from 0.85% to 2.22%, fuel and mining exports surged from 0.32% to 2.62%, led by petroleum, while manufacturing, despite tripling to 1.73%, continues to lag. Services exports have outperformed goods, rising from 2.9% of global share in 2010 to 4.2% in 2024, largely concentrated in IT, telecom, and business services.

Structural Challenges

India’s exports confront multiple structural constraints:

  1. Tariff Shock from US: The punitive 50% tariffs jeopardise India’s most buoyant market and compound the effects of a global slowdown.
  2. Competitiveness Erosion: Rising production costs, inefficient logistics, and regulatory complexity reduce India’s global manufacturing edge.
  3. Overdependence on Services: India’s services exports are twice that of goods, with IT/ITES dominating and other sectors contributing only around 40%.
  4. Narrow Manufacturing Base: While textiles, pharma, steel, and chemicals perform well, high-value sectors such as electronics, precision machinery, and advanced materials remain underrepresented.
  5. Global Headwinds: Protectionist policies, reshoring trends, non-tariff barriers, and a weakened WTO dispute settlement system limit India’s options.

Policy Initiatives

Several steps have been undertaken to revive exports:

  • Export Promotion Mission (EPM 2025): Sector-specific programs like NiryatProtsahan (credit facilitation) and Niryat Disha (market access, branding, logistics).
  • RoDTEP Scheme: Refunds hidden central, state, and local taxes on exports, expanded to steel, pharma, and chemicals.
  • Simplified EPCG Scheme: Facilitates duty-free import of capital goods, with eased compliance.
  • BHARATI Initiative for Agri-Food Exports: APEDA’s 2025 program to incubate 100 startups with AI quality checks and blockchain traceability.
  • E-Commerce Export Hubs: Warehousing, customs clearance, and logistics support for MSMEs.

Way Forward

  • Enhance Manufacturing Competitiveness: Improve logistics efficiency (from 13–14% of GDP to global benchmark 8%), integrate with global value chains, and focus on electronics, EVs, green technologies, and semiconductors.
  • Diversify Export Markets: Reduce dependence on US/EU markets by targeting Africa, Latin America, and ASEAN; leverage FTAs with UAE, Australia, and UK.
  • Deepen Services Export Base: Expand beyond IT to healthcare, tourism, education, financial and creative services.
  • Agriculture and Fuels: Promote agro-processing, value addition in petrochemicals, and branded exports.
  • Policy and Institutional Support: Advocate WTO reforms, pursue bilateral/multilateral agreements, and incentivise R&D and quality upgradation in MSMEs.

Conclusion

India’s exports face weak merchandise growth, concentrated services reliance, and external shocks such as US tariffs. A multi-pronged strategy—strengthening manufacturing, diversifying markets, deepening services, and fostering value addition—remains critical to reclaim India’s global export momentum and support sustainable economic growth.

Should Reservations Exceed the 50% Cap?

  • 11 Sep 2025

Context:

The question of whether caste-based reservations should cross the 50% threshold has re-emerged in policy and judicial debates. Political commitments promising higher quotas, demands for deeper social justice, and judicial reviews—such as the Supreme Court’s recent notice on applying the creamy layer rule to Scheduled Castes (SCs) and Scheduled Tribes (STs)—have intensified the discussion.

Constitutional Framework

Articles15 and 16 of the Constitution enshrine equality in access to education and public employment while empowering the state to frame special provisions for Socially and Educationally Backward Classes (SEBCs), OBCs, SCs, and STs. At present, the reservation percentages at the Union level are:

  • OBCs – 27%, SCs – 15%, STs – 7.5%, and EWS – 10%.This brings the total to 59.5%, already breaching the ceiling in practice. The debate centres on whether these provisions are exceptions to the rule of equality or instruments for achieving substantive equality.

Judicial Trajectory of the 50% Ceiling

  • Balaji v. State of Mysore (1962): Declared that reservations should remain “reasonable” and introduced the 50% benchmark.
  • State of Kerala v. N.M. Thomas (1975): Shifted focus toward substantive equality, treating reservations as a means to realise real equality.
  • Indra Sawhney v. Union of India (1992): Reaffirmed the 50% cap, upheld 27% OBC quota, and introduced the creamy layer exclusion.
  • Janhit Abhiyan (2022): Validated the 10% EWS quota, clarifying that the 50% ceiling applied only to caste-based quotas, thereby legitimising its breach.
  • State of Punjab v. Davinder Singh (2024): Suggested extending the creamy layer principle to SCs and STs for equitable distribution of benefits.

Thus, the 50% rule is not a constitutional mandate but a judicially crafted balance.

Arguments for Raising the Ceiling

  • Population Profile: Backward classes make up over 60% of India’s population (Mandal Commission, state surveys), yet reservations remain capped.
  • Political Demand: States like Bihar have sought quotas up to 85%, citing under-representation.
  • Unequal Access Within OBCs: The Rohini Commission reported that 97% of OBC benefits go to 25% of sub-castes, leaving ~1,000 groups unrepresented. Expanding and sub-categorising quotas could address this.
  • Substantive Equality: Addressing historical disadvantages may require flexibility in ceilings.
  • Precedents: Tamil Nadu, Maharashtra, and Haryana have legislated beyond the 50% cap, reflecting local realities.

Arguments Against Breaching the Cap

  • Judicial Safeguards: The 50% rule maintains a balance between equity and merit.
  • Unfilled Vacancies: Nearly 40–50% of reserved seats remain vacant; raising quotas without systemic reform will not resolve this.
  • Creamy Layer Issues: Without stricter exclusions, higher quotas may further consolidate benefits among dominant groups.
  • Efficiency Concerns: Excessive reservations could undermine administrative performance.
  • Alternative Tools: Skill-building, better implementation, and private-sector inclusion can deliver justice without endlessly expanding quotas.

Way Ahead

  • Caste Census (2027): Data-driven policy-making requires updated and accurate caste data.
  • Sub-Categorisation: Implement Rohini Commission recommendations for fairer distribution within OBCs.
  • Prioritisation Within SCs/STs: A two-tier system to protect the most deprived sections.
  • Flexible Ceiling: Replace rigid caps with evidence-based, contextual ceilings.
  • Beyond Reservations: Focus on education, entrepreneurship, healthcare, and livelihood generation.

Conclusion

The 50% ceiling emerged from judicial interpretation rather than constitutional text. While it has served as a stabilising principle, social realities demand a more nuanced approach. Instead of mechanically raising quotas, India must pursue a data-backed, sub-categorised, and efficiency-oriented reservation framework, complemented by investments in human development. This ensures that affirmative action remains an empowerment tool for the truly disadvantaged rather than a political instrument.

Land Subsidence in Uttarakhand

  • 10 Sep 2025

Introduction

  • Uttarakhand, a state already prone to natural calamities such as cloudbursts, flash floods, and landslides, is witnessing a new and alarming hazard—land subsidence.
  • The phenomenon has recently surfaced in Chamoli district’s Nanda Nagar, destroying homes, displacing families, and highlighting the fragile ecological balance of the Himalayan region.

Understanding Land Subsidence

Land subsidence is the gradual settling or sudden sinking of the Earth’s surface, caused when the ground loses its ability to support weight. It may occur due to:

  • Natural factors: seismic or volcanic activity, collapse of underground cavities, or compaction of fine-grained deposits.
  • Anthropogenic factors: excessive groundwater extraction, mining, subsurface energy withdrawal, or unregulated construction.

Globally, nearly 12 million sq. km of land is susceptible to subsidence, with major hotspots in the USA, China, Iran, Indonesia, Vietnam, and Japan. In India, the Himalayas are increasingly vulnerable due to their fragile geology and unplanned development pressures.

The Chamoli Crisis

  • In Nanda Nagar, Band Bazar and Lakshmi Market have become epicentres of subsidence. To date, seven buildings have been destroyed and 16 more are at risk, with cracks widening daily. Water seepage from underground fissures has aggravated fears, prompting diversion efforts by Jal Sansthan using pipelines.
  • The disaster has displaced several families. While temporary relief camps have been established in wedding halls, many residents have opted for rented houses due to lack of facilities. 18 families have shifted voluntarily, while only a few essential volunteers remain in the camps. Authorities have provided tin sheets, tarpaulins, and fodder for livestock.
  • Local administration and police are engaged in evacuation, restricting access to high-risk areas, and issuing rainfall-triggered alerts. Political representatives, including the local MLA, have assured compensation of ?5 lakh per affected family, aligning it with earlier precedents in nearby Thrali.

Causes and Concerns

The Chamoli episode underlines how over-extraction of groundwater and unregulated urbanisation exacerbate subsidence in mountain ecosystems. Groundwater overexploitation reduces pressure in aquifers, compacting porous formations and triggering ground collapse. Additionally, Himalayan terrain, already tectonically active, becomes more unstable with haphazard infrastructure expansion, tunnelling for hydropower, and inadequate drainage systems.

Impacts

  • Infrastructure damage: Buildings, roads, and markets are rendered unsafe.
  • Displacement: Families lose homes and livelihoods, straining relief systems.
  • Water management challenges: Seepage alters drainage gradients and may increase risks of flooding and salinity intrusion.
  • Security implications: Frequent disasters weaken borderland resilience in strategically sensitive districts like Chamoli.

Government Response

Authorities have taken short-term measures including relocation, compensation, and infrastructure support. Police and disaster management teams are actively engaged in restricting hazardous zone entry and ensuring safety. Yet, the lack of long-term risk assessment and early warning systems remains a critical gap.

Way Forward

  • Scientific mapping of subsidence-prone areas using satellite and ground-based surveys.
  • Regulated groundwater extraction and promotion of rainwater harvesting.
  • Disaster-resilient urban planning with strict building codes in ecologically fragile zones.
  • Community preparedness through awareness, relocation plans, and livelihood diversification.
  • Integrated Himalayan policy, balancing development needs with ecological sustainability.

Conclusion

The Nanda Nagar subsidence crisis is not an isolated incident but part of a broader trend of human-induced ecological stress in fragile Himalayan ecosystems. As disasters intensify in frequency and scale, climate-resilient planning and sustainable resource management must become central to India’s mountain development strategy. Addressing land subsidence requires coordinated scientific, administrative, and community-level interventions to safeguard lives, infrastructure, and ecosystems.

India’s Humanitarian Assistance and Disaster Relief (HADR) & Soft Diplomacy

  • 09 Sep 2025

Introduction

Humanitarian Assistance and Disaster Relief (HADR) has emerged as a cornerstone of India’s foreign policy and regional engagement. Rooted in the ethos of “VasudhaivaKutumbakam” (the world is one family), India has actively extended aid during natural disasters, reflecting both compassion and strategic foresight. The recent dispatch of 21 tonnes of relief material to Afghanistan after the devastating 6.0-magnitude earthquake, which killed over 1,400 people, underlines India’s commitment to humanitarian outreach and its role as a responsible global actor.

Understanding HADR and Soft Diplomacy

  • HADR refers to India’s coordinated relief and rescue operations in disaster-hit regions, at home and abroad. It includes the supply of food, medicines, shelter, sanitation, and technical support.
  • Soft Diplomacy implies the use of non-coercive instruments—humanitarian aid, cultural goodwill, and capacity-building initiatives—to enhance India’s global influence and strengthen bilateral trust.

Together, HADR and soft diplomacy enable India to project power through empathy rather than force.

Key Features of India’s HADR Approach

  • Rapid Response: The Indian Air Force and Navy ensure swift deployment of relief materials and evacuation missions. For instance, the IAF’s strategic airlift capabilities enable timely supply drops in inaccessible regions.
  • Inclusive Relief: Aid packages typically include medicines, food, water, tents, blankets, and water purifiers, focusing on essential survival needs.
  • Neutral Assistance: India provides aid without attaching political preconditions, strengthening credibility and neutrality.
  • Global Footprint: Beyond neighbours, India has extended assistance to Africa, Pacific Island states, and West Asia, thereby widening its humanitarian outreach.
  • Institutional Mechanisms: Agencies like NDMA, NDRF, IAF, Indian Navy, and the Ministry of External Affairs ensure coordination for effective large-scale responses.

Strategic Importance of HADR

  • Regional Goodwill: India has earned the reputation of being the “first responder” in South Asia and the Indian Ocean Region. Operations during the Nepal earthquake (2015), Sri Lanka floods, and Maldives water crisis (2014) highlight this proactive role.
  • Trust-Building: Humanitarian gestures strengthen bilateral ties, particularly with vulnerable neighbours such as Afghanistan, Nepal, Sri Lanka, and the Maldives.
  • Soft Power Projection: Such assistance reinforces India’s image as a responsible rising power committed to collective security and humanitarian values.
  • Security Dimension: Active engagement through HADR enhances maritime security partnerships and counters external influences in the region, particularly China’s growing footprint in the Indian Ocean.

Contemporary Relevance

In a world marked by climate change, extreme weather events, and fragile states, the frequency of humanitarian crises is increasing. India’s HADR capacity demonstrates both moral leadership and strategic autonomy. For example, during the COVID-19 pandemic, India’s “Vaccine Maitri” initiative delivered vaccines to over 90 countries, merging humanitarianism with diplomacy.

Furthermore, India’s active participation in multilateral frameworks like BIMSTEC, IORA, and QUAD’s disaster response initiatives showcases its evolving role in shaping global disaster governance.

Challenges

  • Logistical hurdles in conflict zones like Afghanistan.
  • Resource constraints given India’s vast domestic vulnerabilities.
  • The need for greater coordination between civilian and defence agencies.

Conclusion

India’s HADR efforts, anchored in soft diplomacy, reflect a balance of humanitarian compassion and strategic pragmatism. By acting as a credible first responder, India not only saves lives but also nurtures trust, stability, and regional cooperation. In the long run, strengthening institutional mechanisms, enhancing maritime capacity, and integrating climate resilience will further consolidate India’s role as a humanitarian power in a volatile world.

Gender Imbalance in the Supreme Court of India

  • 08 Sep 2025

In News:

The Supreme Court of India, the apex judicial body, suffers from a severe gender imbalance, raising questions about inclusivity, representation, and public trust. With the retirement of Justice Sudhanshu Dhulia in August 2025, only one woman judge, Justice B.V. Nagarathna, remains out of a sanctioned strength of 34 judges.

Historically, since 1950, only 11 women judges (3.8%) have been appointed to the Court, beginning with Justice Fathima Beevi in 1989. This under-representation is stark, considering the constitutional guarantees of equality under Articles 14, 15, and 16.

Causes of Gender Imbalance

Several structural and societal factors contribute to this disparity:

  • Opaque Collegium System: Judicial appointments are governed by the Collegium, led by the Chief Justice of India and four senior judges. Criteria for selection are neither public nor institutionalised, unlike considerations for caste, religion, or regional representation. Gender, notably, is not treated as a mandatory criterion.
  • Late Elevation and Short Tenures: Women judges are often appointed later in their careers, limiting their tenure and chances of rising to senior positions or entering the Collegium. Of the 11 women judges to date, only five have served in the Collegium, and the first woman CJI, Justice Nagarathna, is scheduled for a brief 36-day tenure in 2027.
  • Barriers from the Legal Profession: Very few women lawyers are elevated directly from the Bar; only Justice Indu Malhotra has achieved this. Structural biases, gender stereotypes, and lack of mentorship impede women’s career progression in law.
  • Institutional and Societal Resistance: Male-dominated professional culture and low political prioritisation of gender diversity exacerbate the exclusion of women from the judiciary.

Implications

  • On the Judiciary: The lack of women judges narrows the Court’s perspectives, undermines legitimacy, and limits jurisprudential growth, particularly on gender-sensitive issues. Short tenures prevent women from influencing appointments or policy within the judiciary.
  • On Society: The gender gap weakens citizens’ trust in the judiciary, discourages aspiring women lawyers, and contradicts the spirit of constitutional morality. A judiciary that does not reflect societal diversity risks democratic and representative deficits.

Way Forward

  • Institutional Reforms: Appointment resolutions should mandate gender diversity. Criteria and reasons for appointments must be publicly disclosed.
  • Pipeline Development: Increase women judges in High Courts, encourage women from the Bar through mentorship, and create structured pathways to the higher judiciary.
  • Policy Anchoring: Adopt a written diversity policy, integrating constitutional morality and substantive equality, as recommended by the 2nd Administrative Reforms Commission.
  • Global Lessons: Countries like Canada and the UK institutionalise diversity in their top courts; India can adopt similar frameworks.

Conclusion

Bridging the gender gap in the Supreme Court is not mere tokenism—it is a constitutional and ethical imperative. Women judges bring unique perspectives, enrich judicial reasoning, and strengthen public confidence in justice. To uphold its credibility as India’s guardian of equality, the Supreme Court must institutionalise gender diversity, ensuring that the judiciary reflects the society it serves.

Revisiting RTE Exemption for Minority Schools

  • 07 Sep 2025

In News:

The Supreme Court has recently reopened the debate on whether minority institutions should be exempt from the Right to Education (RTE) Act, questioning the validity of the 2014 Pramati Educational and Cultural Trust judgment, which granted blanket immunity to minority schools—both aided and unaided—from RTE provisions. This issue lies at the intersection of Article 21A (Right to Education) and Article 30(1) (minority rights to establish and administer institutions), raising questions of inclusivity, equality, and constitutional morality.

The RTE Act and Its Objectives

Enacted in 2009, the RTE Act operationalises Article 21A, guaranteeing free and compulsory education for children aged 6–14 years. Its key mandates include:

  • Government schools: Free education for all.
  • Aided schools: Free seats proportional to state funding.
  • Private unaided schools: Reservation of 25% seats at entry level for disadvantaged children (Section 12(1)(c)), with state reimbursement.

The Act also prescribes standards on infrastructure, pupil-teacher ratios, teacher eligibility, and prohibits corporal punishment and capitation fees. Rooted in child-centric philosophy, RTE aims to build inclusive classrooms as spaces of democracy, equality, and social justice.

The 2014 Pramati Judgment

A five-judge Constitution Bench ruled that applying RTE to minority institutions violated Article 30(1). It held that enforcing quotas and norms could alter their composition, thereby infringing minority rights. Consequently, both aided and unaided minority schools were exempted from RTE obligations.

Fallout

  • Many private schools sought minority status to escape compliance.
  • Exemption diluted inclusivity, particularly the 25% quota, undermining the spirit of Article 21A.
  • Loopholes allowed elite minority institutions to function without admitting disadvantaged children—even from their own communities.

The 2025 Reconsideration

In September 2025, while hearing a case on the applicability of the Teacher Eligibility Test (TET) to minority schools, a two-judge bench led by Justice Dipankar Datta observed that Pramati had gone too far. The Court argued that:

  • Articles 21A and 30 must co-exist. Institutional autonomy cannot override children’s rights.
  • Standards like qualified teachers and infrastructure do not erode minority character.
  • Blanket exemption weakens inclusivity and creates a “regulatory loophole.”
  • Compliance with the 25% quota could be interpreted flexibly, e.g., by prioritising disadvantaged children from the same minority group.

Since only a larger bench can overturn Pramati, the matter has been referred to the Chief Justice of India for constitution of a bigger bench.

Challenges Ahead

  • Legal Precedent: Overturning a Constitution Bench ruling requires judicial restraint and careful balancing.
  • Autonomy vs Inclusivity: Reconciling group rights with universal child rights is constitutionally complex.
  • Weak Enforcement: Even where RTE applies, compliance remains patchy.
  • Social Resistance: Elite institutions and parents often resist socio-economic mixing in classrooms.

Implications

  • For Education: Denial of access to elite minority schools undermines equity and India’s democratic ethos.
  • For the Constitution: Current exemption skews the balance, privileging institutional rights over individual rights.
  • For Society: Misuse of minority status widens educational inequality, weakening India’s human capital base.

Way Forward

  • Judicial Harmonisation: Larger benches must strike a balance, clarifying that autonomy does not equal immunity.
  • Policy Realignment: At minimum, teacher qualifications and infrastructure norms should apply to all schools.
  • Strengthening Public Schools: Improving government schools can reduce over-reliance on private/minority institutions.
  • Social Awareness: Campaigns to highlight inclusive classrooms as spaces of democratic socialisation are vital.

Conclusion

The exemption of minority schools from RTE is not merely a legal question but a test of constitutional morality. Upholding the child’s right to inclusive education must prevail over institutional privileges. The forthcoming larger bench decision offers an opportunity to harmoniseArticles 21A and 30, reaffirming that education is not a privilege of groups but a universal right essential to democracy and nation-building.

Pulses Production in India: Pathways to Atmanirbharta

  • 06 Sep 2025

In News:

Pulses hold a unique place in India’s agricultural economy, food security, and nutritional well-being. As a protein-rich staple in largely vegetarian diets, they not only address malnutrition but also contribute to sustainable farming through nitrogen fixation, low water requirements, and reduced carbon emissions. Despite being the world’s largest producer and consumer of pulses, India continues to import sizeable quantities, making self-reliance a critical national goal.

Current Scenario and Progress

India cultivates 12 pulse crops across kharif, rabi, and summer seasons, supported by diverse agro-climatic conditions. Production, however, is highly concentrated—Madhya Pradesh, Maharashtra, and Rajasthan together account for over 55% of total output, while the top 10 states contribute more than 91%.

Historically, the sector suffered from low yields and import dependence. Production declined to 16.35 million tonnes (MT) in 2015–16, forcing imports of nearly 6 MT. However, government interventions such as the National Food Security Mission (NFSM) and higher Minimum Support Prices (MSP) have significantly reversed this trend. By 2022–23, production surged by 59.4% to 26.06 MT, while productivity improved by 38%. Import dependence fell from 29% to just 10.4%, marking substantial progress.

Yet, challenges remain. Nearly 80% of pulses cultivation is rain-fed, leaving it vulnerable to monsoon fluctuations. The sector supports the livelihood of over five crore farmers, making policy stability and targeted support crucial.

NITI Aayog’s Roadmap

Recognising the pivotal role of pulses, NITI Aayog released a report titled “Strategies and Pathways for Accelerating Growth in Pulses towards the Goal of Atmanirbharta” in September 2025. The report projects domestic production to reach 30.59 MT by 2030 and 45.79 MT by 2047, thereby reducing imports and strengthening India’s food sovereignty.

Key Recommendations:

  1. Area Retention and Diversification – Establish region-specific crop clusters to optimise land use.
  2. Technology Adoption – Promote customised technologies suited for varied agro-ecological zones.
  3. Seed Quality and Distribution – Ensure timely availability of high-quality seeds, with special focus on 111 high-potential districts that account for 75% of national output.
  4. Cluster-Based Hubs – Implement the “One Block–One Seed Village” model through farmer producer organisations (FPOs) to enhance productivity.
  5. Mission for Atmanirbharta in Pulses – A six-year initiative targeting key crops such as pigeonpea, black gram, and lentil to fast-track self-sufficiency.

According to NITI Aayog, India could achieve self-sufficiency in pulses within the next decade if the current pace of growth is sustained.

Nutritional and Environmental Significance

Pulses are indispensable in addressing India’s protein deficiency and micronutrient gaps, particularly in iron and folate. Their role in combating hidden hunger makes them vital to achieving Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs) related to nutrition.

Environmentally, pulses act as natural soil enrichers through nitrogen fixation, reduce dependence on chemical fertilisers, and have a lower water footprint compared to cereals. Thus, scaling up their production aligns with both climate resilience and sustainable agriculture goals.

Conclusion

India has made commendable progress in reducing import dependence and improving productivity in pulses production over the past decade. However, achieving complete self-sufficiency requires sustained, region-specific strategies, robust seed systems, and technology-driven interventions. NITI Aayog’s roadmap, backed by focused initiatives like the Mission for Atmanirbharta in Pulses, provides a viable pathway.

By 2047, India not only aims to meet its domestic demand but also emerge as a global leader in pulses production—ensuring food security, nutritional well-being, and environmental sustainability for its growing population.

25th SCO Summit 2025

  • 05 Sep 2025

In News:

  • The 25th Summit of the Shanghai Cooperation Organisation (SCO) was held in Tianjin, China, marking an important milestone in the evolution of the Eurasian grouping.
  • Established in 2001 by China, Russia, Kazakhstan, Kyrgyzstan, Tajikistan and Uzbekistan, the SCO has since expanded to include India and Pakistan (2017), with 10 full members, 17 partners, and representation from Asia, Europe and Africa.
  • At Tianjin, Laos was granted partner status, expanding the SCO’s reach and underlining its role as a pan-regional forum.

Major Decisions and Institutional Reforms

The summit adopted over 20 key documents shaping SCO’s long-term trajectory.

  • Tianjin Declaration emerged as the central political statement, reaffirming commitments to peace, security and sustainable development.
  • A Development Strategy (2026–2035) and Cooperation Programme (2026–2030) to counter extremist ideology were approved.
  • A Roadmap for Energy Cooperation (till 2030) and new initiatives in digital economy, AI, climate-friendly industry and education were launched.
  • Institutional strengthening included creation of four SCO centres for:
    1. Countering security threats,
    2. Combating organised crime,
    3. Cybersecurity, and
    4. Anti-drug cooperation.
  • Decision was taken to establish an SCO Development Bank to finance infrastructure and social development.
  • In a major structural reform, observer states and dialogue partners were merged into a single category of “SCO partners”, streamlining expansion and cooperation mechanisms.

Additionally, Cholpon Ata (Kyrgyzstan) was declared the SCO tourist and cultural capital for 2025–26, reinforcing people-to-people exchanges.

Counter-Terrorism and Security Dimensions

  • Terrorism featured prominently in the summit’s deliberations. The Tianjin Declaration explicitly condemned the Pahalgam terror attack (April 2025) in India that killed 26 people, along with the Jaffer Express hijacking and Khuzdar school bus bombing in Pakistan.
    • This mention was politically significant, as India had earlier refused to endorse the SCO Defence Ministers’ statement at Qingdao when terrorism concerns were omitted due to Pakistan’s objection.
  • India’s firm stance ensured that the leaders’ summit corrected this omission, marking progress in embedding terrorism—including cross-border movement of terrorists—within the SCO’s security agenda. While the declaration avoided naming Pakistan, the acknowledgment of Pahalgam reflected growing recognition of India’s concerns.

India’s Strategic Priorities

Prime Minister Narendra Modi’s address outlined India’s SCO vision under three pillars—Security, Connectivity, and Opportunity:

  • On security, he reiterated zero tolerance towards terrorism, radicalisation and terror financing, urging collective accountability for states that support cross-border terrorism.
  • On connectivity, India reaffirmed support for projects like the Chabahar Port and the International North-South Transport Corridor, vital for regional integration while preserving strategic autonomy.
  • On opportunities, India highlighted cooperation in start-ups, innovation, youth empowerment and cultural dialogue, including a proposal for a Civilizational Dialogue Forum to deepen mutual understanding.

India also supported SCO’s reformist agenda, especially new initiatives on organised crime, drug trafficking and cybersecurity, while calling for similar reforms in global institutions like the United Nations, to make them more representative and effective.

Geopolitical Context and India-China Dynamics

The summit was notable for PM Modi’s first visit to China in seven years and his meeting with President Xi Jinping. The inclusion of Pahalgam in the declaration is seen as a potential signal of Beijing’s willingness to recalibrate ties with New Delhi amid its global challenges, though the SCO stopped short of naming Pakistan. The China-Pakistan nexus, particularly through the China-Pakistan Economic Corridor, continues to limit consensus on terrorism.

Conclusion

The 25th SCO Summit in Tianjin highlighted the grouping’s evolution into a multidimensional platform addressing security, development, and institutional reforms. For India, it was a diplomatic success to have its terrorism concerns reflected in the final declaration, while also advancing connectivity and reformist goals. However, challenges remain in reconciling divergences within SCO, especially with China’s protective stance towards Pakistan. The summit underlines both the opportunities and limitations of India’s engagement with multilateral Eurasian forums, making it a crucial case study in India’s foreign policy strategy.

India’s Cancer Burden

  • 04 Sep 2025

In News:

Cancer has emerged as one of India’s most pressing public health challenges. Globally, in 2022, nearly 20 million new cases and 9.7 million deaths were recorded. In India, cancer incidence is rising sharply: in 2023, more than 14 lakh new cases were reported, and in 2024, 15.6 lakh cases with 8.74 lakh deaths were registered. The lifetime risk of developing cancer in India is now 11%, making cancer control a critical priority for health policy, infrastructure, and research.

Trends in India’s Cancer Burden

The National Cancer Registry Programme (NCRP), based on 43 population-based registries across 23 states and UTs, has mapped incidence and mortality patterns. Between 2015–2019, 7.08 lakh cancer cases and 2.06 lakh deaths were recorded.

  • Gender Disparities: Women account for 51% of cases but only 45% of deaths, as breast and cervical cancers—the most common among women—are more detectable and treatable. Men suffer higher mortality due to difficult-to-diagnose cancers like lung and gastric cancer.
  • Oral Cancer Surge: Oral cancer has overtaken lung cancer as the most common among men, despite a decline in tobacco use, due to latency effects and risk multipliers like alcohol.
  • Regional Hotspots: The Northeast, especially Mizoram (21.1% lifetime risk for men, 18.9% for women), shows the highest burden, linked to tobacco, dietary habits, and infections (HPV, H. pylori, hepatitis).
  • Geographical Variations:
    • Breast cancer highest in Hyderabad (54/100,000).
    • Cervical cancer peaks in Aizawl (27.1/100,000).
    • Lung cancer most common in Srinagar men (39.5) and Aizawl women (33.7).
    • Oral cancer highest in Ahmedabad men (33.6) and East Khasi Hills women (13.6).

Government Response: Policy and Infrastructure

India has adopted a multi-pronged approach:

  • NPCDCS (National Programme for Prevention and Control of Cancer, Diabetes, Cardiovascular Diseases and Stroke) – Community-level screening for oral, breast, and cervical cancers, awareness, and infrastructure strengthening.
    • 770 District NCD Clinics, 233 Cardiac Care Units, 372 Day Care Centres, 6,410 CHC-level NCD clinics.
  • Tertiary Care Expansion – 19 State Cancer Institutes, 20 Tertiary Care Cancer Centres, and apex centres like the National Cancer Institute, Jhajjar and CNCI, Kolkata.
  • Ayushman Bharat – PMJAY – Covers chemotherapy, radiotherapy, and surgery, with 90% of registered patients receiving treatment.
  • Health Minister’s Cancer Patient Fund (HMCPF) – Up to ?15 lakh assistance per patient at 27 Regional Cancer Centres.
  • National Cancer Grid (NCG) – World’s largest cancer network (287 centres), treating 7.5 lakh new patients annually, ensuring standardized evidence-based care.

Budget and Innovation

The Union Budget 2025–26 allocated nearly ?1 lakh crore for health, including Day Care Cancer Centres in all districts and customs duty exemptions on 36 lifesaving cancer drugs.

Breakthroughs include:

  • NexCAR19 CAR-T Cell Therapy (2024) – India’s first indigenous gene therapy for blood cancers.
  • Quad Cancer Moonshot (2024) – India, US, Japan, and Australia collaborating to eliminate cervical cancer through HPV vaccination and screening.
  • ACTREC Expansion (2025) – Enhancing advanced cancer research and treatment capacity.

Awareness and Prevention

WHO estimates 30–50% of cancers are preventable through lifestyle changes and early detection. Campaigns like Eat Right India, Fit India Movement, and Yoga programmes promote healthy habits. National Cancer Awareness Day and World Cancer Day are leveraged for mass outreach.

Conclusion

India’s cancer map highlights both epidemiological challenges and systemic gaps. While government schemes, financial aid, and research innovations mark progress, the rising burden demands greater investment in awareness, early detection, and equitable access. A sustained multi-sectoral approach, integrating prevention, affordable care, and cutting-edge research, will be crucial for India to move towards a cancer-resilient future.

Regulating Social Media in India

  • 03 Sep 2025

In News:

The Supreme Court of India, in a recent case concerning derogatory remarks by comedians, observed that social media influencers commercialise free speech, often blurring the line between legitimate expression and harmful speech. It stressed that while humour and satire are constitutionally protected, derogatory jokes against vulnerable groups perpetuate stigma and undermine inclusivity. The Court urged the Union Government to frame effective guidelines with enforceable consequences to ensure accountability in the digital space. This development underscores the growing debate on the regulation of social media in India.

Judicial Observations and Recommendations

  • Commercialisation& Accountability: Free speech is increasingly monetised by influencers, creating overlaps with prohibited speech. Such expression cannot become a shield for targeting disadvantaged groups.
  • Humour vs. Dignity: The Court emphasised that humour should not compromise dignity, particularly of persons with disabilities, women, children, minorities, and senior citizens.
  • Guidelines with Consequences: Directed the Union Government, in consultation with industry bodies, to frame proportionate and enforceable rules.
  • Digital Responsibility: Called for sensitisation and ethical conduct on social media, along with unconditional apologies for derogatory remarks.

Existing Legal and Regulatory Framework

  • Information Technology Act, 2000 – Principal legislation for digital communication.
    • Section 79(1): Provides safe harbour to intermediaries if they act neutrally.
    • Section 69A: Allows government to block content for sovereignty, security, and public order.
  • IT (Intermediary Guidelines and Digital Media Ethics Code) Rules, 2021 – Mandates due diligence, grievance redressal, and removal of unlawful content.
  • 2023 Amendment – Required intermediaries to remove false/misleading content about the government; however, its enforcement was stayed by SC.
  • Key Judicial Precedents:
    • Shreya Singhal v. Union of India (2015): Struck down Section 66A of IT Act for vagueness, reaffirming free speech under Article 19(1)(a).
    • K.S. Puttaswamy v. Union of India (2017): Recognised privacy as a fundamental right under Article 21, shaping later data protection measures.

Need for Regulation

  • Protecting Vulnerable Groups: Prevents cyberbullying, trolling, and derogatory content.
  • Curbing Misinformation & Hate Speech: Essential to check fake news, deepfakes, and extremist propaganda that threaten social harmony and security.
  • Mental Health Safeguards: Addresses anxiety, depression, and addictive behaviours linked to excessive use.
  • Influencer Accountability: Prevents consumer harm through undisclosed endorsements and fraudulent promotions.
  • Data Privacy & Security: Ensures user rights under Article 21 are not compromised by exploitative data practices.
  • Balancing Free Speech & Responsibility: Draws boundaries within Article 19(2) restrictions (public order, morality, security).

Challenges in Regulation

  • High Volume & Anonymity: Makes monitoring difficult.
  • Transparency Gaps: Platforms’ opaque moderation policies lack accountability.
  • Defining Harmful Content: Subjectivity and cultural sensitivities complicate consensus.
  • Risk of Overreach: Regulations can be misused as censorship.
  • Cross-Border Jurisdiction: Large share of harmful content originates outside India.
  • Political Neutrality Concerns: Allegations of bias in content moderation decisions.

Way Forward

  • Comprehensive Legal Framework: Update IT Act with the proposed Digital India Act, ensuring balance of rights and responsibilities.
  • Algorithmic Transparency: Mandate audits, reporting, and oversight of AI-driven content moderation.
  • Institutional Capacity: Invest in cyber forensic labs and AI-enabled monitoring.
  • Digital Literacy Campaigns: Encourage ethical online behaviour and awareness of misinformation.
  • Global Cooperation: Strengthen cross-border regulatory partnerships and multi-stakeholder governance.

Conclusion

Regulating social media in India requires a balanced approach—one that safeguards freedom of expression under Article 19(1)(a) while addressing harms that erode dignity, social harmony, and democratic discourse. A mix of robust laws, technological innovation, ethical guidelines, and digital literacy can build a safe, inclusive, and accountable digital ecosystem aligned with India’s constitutional vision of justice, liberty, equality, and fraternity.

Civil Society in India: Strengthening Democracy and Human Dignity

  • 02 Sep 2025

Introduction

Civil Society Organizations (CSOs) form the third pillar of democracy beyond the state and market, playing a crucial role in mobilizing communities, protecting rights, and addressing gaps in governance. From social reform movements of the 19th century to present-day advocacy for rights, CSOs have evolved into indispensable actors shaping India’s democratic landscape.

Evolution of Civil Society in India

  • Ancient–Medieval roots: Guided by concepts of dharma, daan, and karma, religious and social movements emphasized community service.
  • Pre-independence era: Organizations like Brahmo Samaj (1828), Theosophical Society (1879), and Ramakrishna Mission (1897) linked voluntary action with reform. Gandhiji’s philosophy of constructive work and self-reliance inspired mass mobilization.
  • Post-independence: The First Five-Year Plan (1951–56) recognized voluntary action in development. The Panchayati Raj system deepened community participation. During the 1965–67 droughts, foreign aid through NGOs strengthened India’s civil society base.
  • Contemporary era: CSOs shifted from welfare delivery to a rights-based approach, visible in the Chipko (1973) and Narmada Bachao (1985) movements, and campaigns for RTI, MGNREGA, RTE, and food security.

Today, India has around 1.5 million NGOs engaging over 19 million volunteers, though most remain small and resource-constrained.

Role of Civil Society in a Democracy

  • Accountability and Transparency: Groups like Mazdoor Kisan Shakti Sangathan spearheaded the RTI Act (2005), strengthening citizen oversight. CSOs monitor elections, detect fraud, and counter corruption.
  • Citizen Empowerment: They spread awareness of laws and rights, enabling participation of marginalized groups. For instance, Jagori and Swayam advanced women’s rights, while SEWA empowered informal sector workers.
  • Social Justice and Inclusion: CSOs amplify voices of women, Dalits, Adivasis, and persons with disabilities. The Rights of Persons with Disabilities Act (2016) was shaped through sustained advocacy.
  • Service Delivery and Humanitarian Work: During COVID-19, organizations like Goonj launched relief programmes. In healthcare, civil society has been pivotal in palliative care, advocating for dignity of terminally ill patients by mobilising volunteers, spreading awareness, and supplementing public health gaps.
  • Leadership and Political Socialization: CSOs nurture grassroots leadership, especially among women in Panchayati Raj Institutions, challenging entrenched hierarchies.
  • Global Governance: Indian CSOs engage with international human rights, climate change, and sustainable development discourses, influencing domestic reforms.

Challenges Facing Civil Society

  • Regulatory hurdles: The FCRA (2010) and its 2020 amendment have restricted foreign funding, reducing financial independence.
  • Funding constraints: Overdependence on international donors and weak domestic philanthropy limit sustainability.
  • Internal undemocracy: Lack of transparency and inclusive decision-making undermines credibility.
  • State–CSO friction: Governments often view rights-based activism as adversarial, creating tensions.
  • Representation gaps: Elite capture and urban bias may sideline grassroots voices.
  • Volunteer retention and professionalism remain persistent challenges.

Way Forward

  • Enhancing transparency: Mandatory impact audits and a national CSO database can strengthen trust.
  • Institutionalized consultation: Formal representation of CSOs in policy committees ensures evidence-based policymaking.
  • Diversified funding: Domestic philanthropy, CSR initiatives, and social impact investing must be promoted.
  • Simplified regulation: A single-window digital compliance system for registrations and reporting can reduce bureaucratic friction.
  • Boosting volunteerism: Integrating service into school and university curricula can create a culture of civic participation.

Conclusion

Civil society in India has evolved from religious charity to rights-based activism, standing as a bridge between state and society. From advocating landmark legislations like RTI to ensuring the dignity of palliative care patients, CSOs embody participatory democracy in action. Strengthening their autonomy, inclusivity, and accountability is essential for a resilient, equitable, and responsive democracy.

Comprehensive Modular Survey: Education 2025

  • 01 Sep 2025

In News:

The Comprehensive Modular Survey: Education (CMS:E), 2025, conducted under the 80th round of the National Sample Survey (NSS), provides valuable insights into household expenditure, enrolment trends, and private coaching patterns in school education.

Covering 52,085 households and 57,742 students, this survey, conducted through Computer-Assisted Personal Interviews (CAPI), offers nationally representative data at a critical juncture when India’s education sector is undergoing reforms under NEP 2020 and rapid digital transformation.

Key Findings of CMS: Education 2025

1. Enrolment Patterns

  • Government schools dominate enrolment at 55.9%, with higher presence in rural areas (66%) compared to urban (30.1%).
  • Private unaided schools account for 31.9% of enrolment, with stronger urban dominance.

2. Education Expenditure

  • Average household spending per student:
    • Government schools – ?2,863
    • Non-government schools – ?25,002
  • Overall, expenditure is significantly higher in urban areas (?23,470) than in rural areas (?8,382).
  • Course fees constitute the largest expense (?7,111), followed by textbooks and stationery (?2,002).

3. Private Coaching

  • Nearly 27% of students availed coaching, higher in urban areas (30.7%) than rural (25.5%).
  • Expenditure gap: ?3,988 per student annually in urban areas vs ?1,793 in rural areas.
  • At the higher secondary level, coaching costs rise to ?9,950 in urban areas compared to ?4,548 in rural areas.

4. Sources of Education Finance

  • 95% of educational expenses were funded by household members.
  • Only 1.2% students cited government scholarships as their primary funding source, highlighting weak institutional financial support.

Structural Developments in India’s Education Sector

  • Digital and STEM Education: Initiatives like PM e-Vidya and Atal Tinkering Labs (8,000+ labs) promote digital and innovation-driven learning. India’s edtech sector attracted USD 3.94 billion (FY22), projected to grow further.
  • Vocational and Skill Integration: NEP 2020 emphasizes skilling; the Union Budget 2025–26 allocated ?500 crore for AI Centres of Excellence in education.
  • Rising Private Investment: With 100% FDI permitted, the Indian education market is projected to reach USD 125.8 billion by 2032.
  • Higher Education Expansion: India now has 1,362 universities and 52,538 colleges, with Gross Enrolment Ratio (GER) rising to 28.4% (FY25).
  • Multilingual & Inclusive Education: Under NEP 2020, focus on regional languages and digital content aims to bridge disparities.

Challenges in Indian Education

  • Infrastructure Gaps – Only 47% schools have drinking water; 53% have separate girls’ toilets (2023 data).
  • Teacher Shortage – Over 4,500 secondary teachers lack proper training; sanctioned positions declined by 6% (2021–24).
  • Low Public Spending – India spends 3–4% of GDP on education, below NEP’s target of 6%.
  • Socio-Economic Disparities – Tribal and disadvantaged children face linguistic and access barriers.
  • Learning Outcomes75% of Class 3 students cannot read Grade 2 text, highlighting rote learning dependence.
  • Digital Divide – Only 18.47% of rural schools have internet, compared to 47.29% in urban areas.
  • Gender Barriers33% of girls drop out due to domestic responsibilities (UNICEF).

Way Forward

  • Enhanced Investment in infrastructure, teacher training, and digital access.
  • Targeted scholarships and financial aid to reduce household burden.
  • Curriculum reforms to shift from rote learning to competency-based assessments (e.g., PARAKH).
  • Inclusive education policies for tribal, rural, and girl students.
  • Public-Private Partnerships to leverage innovation, funding, and technology.

Conclusion

The CMS: Education 2025 survey underscores the centrality of government schools, the rising cost burden on families, and the growing role of private coaching in shaping education outcomes. While India is witnessing rapid expansion, digitalization, and global investment, challenges of equity, quality, and access persist. Addressing these gaps through sustained policy focus, enhanced funding, and inclusive reforms is essential for realizing the NEP 2020 vision and achieving SDG 4: Quality Education.

Migration and Globalisation

  • 31 Aug 2025

Context:

Migration has historically been central to human survival, cultural enrichment, and economic development. Nobel laureate Amartya Sen, in a recent interaction with students in Kolkata (August 2025), underlined that migration is not merely a by-product of globalisation but an essential driver of it. He argued that without the movement of people, exchange of ideas, and diversity, “almost nothing would happen” in society. His observations highlight the need to place migration at the core of discussions on inclusive development and global integration.

Migration and Globalisation: A Two-Way Link

Migration represents both a cause and consequence of globalisation. The growing interconnectedness of economies, labour markets, and cultures compels people to move in search of livelihood, education, and security. Conversely, migration sustains the very processes of globalisation by ensuring labour mobility, knowledge transfer, and cultural exchange.

Remittances from international migrants significantly support local economies in poorer regions, while in ageing industrial societies, migrants fill labour shortages and keep welfare systems functional. Similarly, internal migration within developing countries responds to shifts in industrial location and the expansion of tourism, service, and construction sectors.

Economic and Social Contributions of Migrants

Migration plays a critical role in sustaining households and reshaping communities:

  • Economic Support: Remittances are often the backbone of rural economies, enabling investments in agriculture, housing, and small enterprises.
  • Skill Transfer: Return migrants bring exposure, technology, and non-farm opportunities, provided there is institutional support.
  • Cultural Exchange: Migrants enrich host societies by introducing new languages, cuisines, music, and traditions, fostering cosmopolitan growth.
  • Empowerment: For many youth and women, migration becomes a pathway to independence, autonomy, and expanded life choices.

Sen himself cited historical examples—such as Arabic translations of Brahmagupta’s mathematical works—that demonstrate how migration and cultural contact drive intellectual advancement.

Key Challenges

Despite its benefits, migration remains highly contested. Restrictive immigration policies in developed nations often strengthen illegal smuggling networks and leave migrants vulnerable to exploitation. Within India, internal migrants frequently face exclusion from basic urban services such as housing, education, and healthcare.

Undocumented and unskilled migrants are particularly prone to labour exploitation, earning low wages under insecure conditions. Women migrants confront additional gender disparities, ranging from wage inequality to social stigma, although they can emerge as strong agents of change where given resources and support.

Policy Imperatives

Migration must be recognised not as a threat but as an enabler of development. The policy framework should:

  • Protect migrant rights and improve workplace safety.
  • Facilitate the productive use of remittances through training, financial literacy, and infrastructure.
  • Ensure equitable access to resources for women migrants.
  • Address structural constraints such as rural distress, which force people into migration as a survival strategy.

India has already witnessed tensions, including attacks on migrant workers from West Bengal in other states, highlighting the urgency of a protective and inclusive approach.

Conclusion

Migration is inseparable from globalisation and has historically propelled human progress. It strengthens economies, sustains welfare systems, and enriches cultures. Yet, the absence of supportive policies leaves migrants vulnerable to exclusion and exploitation. As Amartya Sen emphasised, diversity is the foundation of Indian society and the movement of people is the essence of globalisation. Recognising migrants as partners in development rather than problems to be managed is essential for building an inclusive, equitable, and resilient global future.

UGC Draft Curriculum Highlights Ancient Wisdom in Higher Education

  • 30 Aug 2025

Background

The University Grants Commission (UGC) has released a draft Learning Outcomes-based Curriculum Framework (LOCF) for undergraduate programmes in fields such as anthropology, chemistry, commerce, economics, geography, mathematics, political science, home science, and physical education.

A defining feature of this framework is the inclusion of Indian Knowledge Systems (IKS), aiming to blend traditional philosophies and practices with contemporary pedagogy. The draft has been made public for feedback from stakeholders.

Integration of Indian Knowledge Systems

The framework seeks to position higher education within India’s cultural and intellectual heritage, reflecting the vision of the National Education Policy (NEP) 2020, which emphasiseddecolonisation of curricula and recognition of indigenous wisdom.

Every subject has been asked to incorporate aspects of Indian traditions, linking them to modern learning outcomes.

Subject-Wise Highlights

  • Mathematics
    • Modules on mandala geometry, yantras, rangoli, kolam as algorithmic art forms.
    • Study of temple architecture through ?y?di ratios.
    • Contributions of Indian mathematicians in arithmetic, algebra, geometry, and calculus, and their influence on global traditions.
  • Commerce
    • Incorporation of Bhartiya philosophy and Gurukul pedagogy, focusing on holistic learning.
    • Study of Kautilya’sArthashastra for insights into trade and financial systems.
    • Ideas like Ram Rajya, Shubh-labh (profit with responsibility), CSR, and ESG frameworks integrated into modern governance discussions.
  • Economics
    • Emphasis on dharmic perspectives on wealth and prosperity.
    • Exploration of indigenous exchange systems, agrarian values, dana (charity), and state-led economic roles.
    • Ethical trade and collective enterprise highlighted as core themes.
  • Chemistry
    • Introduction of traditional Indian fermented drinks (kanji, mahua, toddy) in modules on alcoholic beverages.
    • Integration of parmanu (ancient atomic concept) with modern atomic theory.
  • Anthropology
    • Curriculum draws on Charaka, Sushruta, Buddha, and Mahavira, focusing on their insights into the relationship between culture and nature.

Criticism and Concerns

  • While NEP 2020 promotes interdisciplinarity, the LOCF allocates a large portion of credits to single-major courses. For example, chemistry students must take 96 out of 172 credits in core courses, reducing scope for cross-disciplinary learning.
  • Critics, including some opposition-led states, allege that the draft encourages “saffronisation” of education.
  • The key challenge lies in ensuring that cultural heritage is respected while preserving academic rigour, scientific temper, and global competitiveness.

Significance

The draft framework represents a paradigm shift in Indian higher education, with potential to:

  • Decolonise curricula by embedding indigenous systems.
  • Offer culturally rooted yet globally relevant education.
  • Encourage ethical, sustainable practices across professional fields.
  • Highlight India’s contributions to mathematics, medicine, governance, and economics.

Way Forward

The draft is currently open for feedback and may be revised before implementation. If adopted, it could reshape the intellectual foundation of higher education, grounding it more deeply in India’s heritage while aligning with international standards.

The real challenge, however, will be to ensure that ancient wisdom complements — rather than replaces — critical thinking, scientific inquiry, and multidisciplinary exploration.

Haryana’s New Forest Definition and Its Implications for the Aravallis

  • 29 Aug 2025

Introduction

The debate on what constitutes a “forest” in India has resurfaced with the Haryana government’s recent notification defining forests based on “dictionary meaning.” While the state claims its definition aligns with Supreme Court precedents, environmentalists warn that it narrows the scope of protection, particularly threatening the fragile Aravalli ecosystem. The issue reflects the larger legal and ecological contestation over forest governance in India, especially after the 2023 amendment to the Forest (Conservation) Act, 1980 (FCA).

Haryana’s Definition of Forests

As per the notification (August 18, 2025), a patch of land qualifies as forest if:

  • It covers at least 5 hectares in isolation or 2 hectares if contiguous with government-notified forests.
  • It has a canopy density of 40% or more.

The definition excludes linear or compact plantations (along roads, canals, railways), agro-forestry plantations, and orchards outside notified forests. Officials argue this provides clarity for surveys mandated by the Supreme Court, but critics fear it sets thresholds too high for naturally sparse ecosystems like the Aravallis.

Supreme Court Directives

In March 2025, the Supreme Court directed all States/UTs to define forests and begin mapping them, in line with the 2011 Lafarge Umiam Mining guidelines. These guidelines mandate:

  • A GIS-based decision-support system.
  • District-wise mapping of forest-like areas, community lands, eco-sensitive zones, wildlife corridors, and previously diverted forest lands.
  • Accountability of Chief Secretaries for non-compliance.

This directive came during hearings on petitions challenging the 2023 FCA amendment (Ashok Kumar Sharma, IFS (Retd) &Ors. vs Union of India).

Godavarman Case and FCA Amendment

The FCA, 1980 originally restricted dereservation and diversion of forest land without Central approval. In the 1996 Godavarman case, the Supreme Court broadened “forest” to its dictionary meaning, bringing all statutorily recognised or naturally forested areas under FCA protection.

However, the 2023 amendment limited FCA applicability to:

  1. Notified forests, and
  2. Lands recorded as forests in government records.

The government argued that the Godavarman interpretation hindered developmental projects, even minor ones. Retired IFS officers and NGOs contested this, alleging dilution of forest safeguards. In February 2024, the Court ordered States to continue applying the Godavarman definition until the matter is resolved.

Implications for the Aravallis

The Aravalli range, spread across Haryana, Delhi, Rajasthan, and Gujarat, is ecologically critical for groundwater recharge, biodiversity, and as a green buffer against desertification. Its vegetation is naturally stunted, thorny, and scrub-like due to low rainfall (300–600 mm annually) and rocky terrain. Experts argue that imposing a 40% canopy cover threshold would exclude much of the Aravallis, leaving it open to urbanisation, illegal mining, and real estate encroachments.

Furthermore, the minimum area thresholds (2–5 hectares) are considered too high for a dry state like Haryana, where smaller forest patches play a vital ecological role. Analysts call the state’s approach violative of the Godavarman principle, which recognised even small and degraded forests under FCA protection.

Conclusion

Haryana’s restrictive definition exemplifies the ongoing tension between developmental priorities and ecological safeguards. While compliance with the Supreme Court’s directive is necessary, adopting narrow thresholds risks excluding ecologically fragile zones from legal protection. The debate underscores the need for a balanced, scientifically informed, and ecologically sensitive framework, recognising regional variations in vegetation and ensuring long-term sustainability of ecosystems like the Aravallis.

Criminalisation of Politics in India

  • 28 Aug 2025

In News:

The criminalisation of politics—the entry of individuals facing serious criminal charges into legislative bodies—remains one of the gravest challenges to Indian democracy. Despite repeated judicial observations and public debates, the problem has only deepened over the past decade, threatening the integrity of representative institutions.

Scale of the Problem

Recent data highlights the alarming rise in lawmakers with serious criminal records. In the Lok Sabha, the share of MPs with such cases has increased from 14% in 2009 to 31% in 2024, more than doubling in just 15 years. Certain states reflect extreme cases: Telangana (71% of MPs), Bihar (48%), and Uttar Pradesh (34 MPs, the highest in absolute numbers).

At the state level, the trend is equally stark. In 2024, nearly 29% of MLAs (around 1,200) faced serious criminal charges. Andhra Pradesh (56%), Telangana (50%), and Uttar Pradesh (154 MLAs or 38%) illustrate how deeply entrenched the issue has become.

These figures cover offences punishable by five years or more, including non-bailable crimes such as murder, kidnapping, and corruption, thereby going beyond minor infractions.

Causes of Criminalisation

Several systemic factors perpetuate this trend:

  • Electoral Financing – High campaign costs create incentives for parties to field “winnable” candidates, many of whom have criminal clout and access to large financial resources.
  • Weak Enforcement of Laws – While conviction leads to disqualification under the Representation of the People Act (RPA), slow judicial processes allow accused legislators to contest multiple elections.
  • Patronage Politics – Candidates with criminal backgrounds often command local influence, mobilise voters, and provide muscle power for parties, making them electorally attractive.
  • Voter Rationality – In certain constituencies, voters see such candidates as problem-solvers who can deliver despite weak state capacity, reinforcing their acceptability.

Consequences for Democracy

The rising criminalisation of politics undermines the rule of law and corrodes democratic legitimacy. Legislators facing serious charges may prioritise personal or group interests over public welfare. Policy decisions risk being distorted by vested interests, while governance is compromised by declining ethical standards. Over time, this erodes citizen trust in institutions, weakens the credibility of Parliament and Assemblies, and fuels cynicism about democratic accountability.

Judicial and Institutional Responses

The Supreme Court has repeatedly emphasised the need to curb criminalisation. In Lily Thomas v. Union of India (2013), it ruled that convicted legislators would be immediately disqualified. In Public Interest Foundation v. Union of India (2018), it directed parties to publish criminal antecedents of candidates, citing the “urgent need for cleansing politics.”

The Election Commission of India (ECI) has also recommended barring candidates against whom charges have been framed for serious offences. However, political consensus on reforms remains elusive.

Way Forward

Addressing this structural malaise requires a multi-pronged strategy:

  • Legal Reforms – Amend the RPA to disqualify candidates at the stage of framing of charges for heinous crimes.
  • Judicial Fast-Tracking – Establish special courts for speedy trial of cases against politicians.
  • Political Will – Parties must adopt internal reforms, refusing tickets to tainted candidates, with penalties for violations.
  • Voter Awareness – Civil society campaigns and public disclosure of candidate records can empower voters to make informed choices.
  • State Capacity – Strengthening law enforcement and reducing reliance on “muscle power” will make clean candidates more competitive.

Conclusion

The criminalisation of politics is not merely a legal or electoral issue but a crisis of democratic legitimacy. With nearly one-third of legislators facing serious charges, India risks normalising the presence of alleged criminals in the highest law-making bodies. Urgent institutional, legal, and political reforms are essential to reverse this trend and safeguard the constitutional promise of “purity of elections” and the rule of law.

Nari Shakti and India’s Economic Transformation

  • 27 Aug 2025

In News:

Women’s participation in India’s workforce has witnessed a remarkable turnaround in recent years, emerging as a cornerstone of the country’s economic transformation and a critical driver for the vision of Viksit Bharat 2047.

Data from the Periodic Labour Force Survey (PLFS) shows that the female workforce participation rate (WPR) nearly doubled from 22% in 2017-18 to 40.3% in 2023-24, while the unemployment rate (UR) fell from 5.6% to 3.2% during the same period. This trend reflects not only improved economic opportunities but also the success of multiple policy interventions promoting gender-inclusive growth.

Rising Participation Across Sectors

The surge in women’s employment has been particularly pronounced in rural India, with a 96% rise in female employment, compared to 43% in urban areas. Importantly, self-employment among women grew from 51.9% to 67.4%, showcasing the increasing entrepreneurial orientation of India’s female workforce. Formal employment has also expanded, with 1.56 crore women joining the formal workforce in the last seven years as per EPFO payroll data. Additionally, over 16.6 crore women workers have registered on the e-Shram portal, providing them access to social security schemes.

Education, Employability, and Skills

Employability of women has improved significantly. Reports show that employability among female graduates rose from 42% in 2013 to 47.5% in 2024, while women with postgraduate education saw their WPR increase from 34.5% to 40% between 2017 and 2024. The India Skills Report 2025 projects that more than half of Indian graduates will be globally employable, marking a substantial improvement in skill readiness.

Policy Push for Women-Led Development

Government initiatives have been central to this transformation. The gender budget increased by 429% in the last decade, reaching ?4.49 lakh crore in FY 2025-26, supporting more than 70 central schemes and 400 state-level initiatives targeted at female entrepreneurship and welfare.

Flagship programmes like Startup India have created a thriving ecosystem where nearly half of DPIIT-registered startups have at least one-woman director. Schemes such as PM Mudra Yojana (with women receiving 68% of 35.38 crore loans worth ?14.72 lakh crore) and PM SVANidhi (where 44% of beneficiaries are women) have provided critical financial inclusion. Complementary initiatives like Namo Drone Didi, Deendayal Antyodaya Yojana–NRLM, and the Lakhpati Didi scheme are equipping women with resources to become economically self-reliant.

Women-Led MSMEs and Job Creation

The rise of women-led MSMEs further reflects this shift. Their number almost doubled from 1 crore in 2010-11 to 1.92 crore in 2023-24, generating 89 lakh additional jobs for women between FY21–FY23. The share of women-owned establishments grew from 17.4% to 26.2% in the same period. This expansion highlights the growing role of women as both job creators and drivers of inclusive growth.

Towards Viksit Bharat 2047

Women are no longer seen as mere beneficiaries of welfare schemes but as leaders of India’s growth story. From rural entrepreneurs to corporate directors, their contributions are reshaping the economy. Achieving the vision of 70% women workforce participation by 2047 is now integral to India’s developmental roadmap.

Conclusion

India is undergoing a paradigm shift from women’s development to women-led development. The surge in women’s employment, financial inclusion, and entrepreneurship reflects both a social transformation and an economic imperative. As Nari Shakti takes centre stage, empowering women through education, skills, and supportive policies will be crucial for India to achieve inclusive and sustainable growth on its path to Viksit Bharat.

Kerala: India’s First Fully Digitally Literate State

  • 26 Aug 2025

In News:

Kerala has become the first fully digitally literate state in India, marking a historic milestone in bridging the digital divide. The achievement follows the successful completion of Phase I of the Digi Kerala project, a grassroots initiative aimed at equipping citizens with essential digital skills.

Origins of the Digital Literacy Movement

Kerala’s digital literacy journey began with the Akshaya Project in 2002, launched by President A.P.J. Abdul Kalam, which aimed to make at least one member of every family digitally literate.

The recent drive was inspired by the Digi Pullampara initiative (2021) in Thiruvananthapuram, where local officials trained daily wage labourers and MGNREGS workers in basic smartphone-based services to prevent loss of wages due to long queues at banks. The success of Pullampara, which became the state’s first fully digitally literate panchayat, laid the foundation for statewide expansion.

Survey and Training Model

The programme followed a mass literacy campaign model reminiscent of Kerala’s 1980s literacy drive. Surveys covered 1.51 crore individuals across 83.45 lakh households, identifying 21.88 lakh digitally illiterate persons. Of these, 21.87 lakh (99.98%) successfully completed training and evaluation.

Training included 15 basic digital tasks such as making voice/video calls, using WhatsApp, accessing e-governance platforms, and conducting digital transactions. Volunteers—drawn from NSS units, Kudumbashree groups, SC/ST promoters, and libraries—delivered training at worksites, neighbourhood groups, and homes, ensuring inclusivity. Evaluations required participants to perform at least six out of the 15 tasks, with retraining provided where necessary.

Inclusivity and Grassroots Orientation

Unlike the National Digital Literacy Mission (NDLM) and Digital Saksharta Abhiyan (DISHA), which capped training at 60 years of age, Kerala’s programme included all age groups—even centenarians. Data shows 15,221 trainees above 90 years, and over 7.77 lakh between 60–75 years benefitted. Women (13 lakh), men (8 lakh), and 1,644 transgender persons also participated, showcasing inclusivity.

The programme also targeted marginalized communities and homemakers, ensuring that digital literacy did not remain confined to urban or privileged groups.

Integration with Kerala’s Digital Ecosystem

Kerala’s digital literacy drive is not a standalone initiative but part of a larger ecosystem:

  • Kerala Fibre Optic Network (KFON): Provides universal internet access, including free connections to BPL families.
  • K-SMART (Kerala Solutions for Managing Administrative Reformation and Transformation): Integrates all local self-government services onto a single digital platform.
  • Digi Kerala 2.0: Expands the mission beyond basic literacy to include cyber fraud awareness, misinformation detection, and advanced e-governance training.

This smartphone-centric approach reflects ground realities, where mobile phones are the most accessible digital tool for citizens.

National Context

Digital literacy in India remains limited: only 38% households are digitally literate (61% in urban, 25% in rural areas). Past initiatives like NDLM and DISHA trained over 53 lakh people, while PMGDISHA (Pradhan Mantri Gramin Digital Saksharta Abhiyan) has trained 6.39 crore individuals till March 2024. Kerala’s model stands out for its grassroots orientation, inclusivity, and integration with governance.

Significance

  • Governance & Transparency: Enhances access to schemes like Ayushman Bharat, PM-Kisan, and Jan Dhan, while enabling online grievance redressal and RTI filing.
  • Socio-Economic Empowerment: Equips women, elderly, and marginalized groups with livelihood-relevant skills.
  • Disaster Resilience: Ensures continuity of education, services, and financial transactions during crises such as pandemics.
  • Scalable Model: Provides a blueprint for other states under the Digital India mission, focusing not only on infrastructure but also on citizen capacity.

Conclusion

Kerala’s declaration as the first fully digitally literate state represents more than a symbolic achievement; it reflects a transformative model of participatory governance, inclusivity, and socio-economic empowerment. By bridging the last-mile digital divide, Kerala positions itself as a leader in India’s march towards a digitally empowered society.

India–China Relations

  • 25 Aug 2025

In News:

The recent visit of Chinese Foreign Minister Wang Yi to New Delhi marked the first ministerial-level engagement from China since India and China agreed in October 2024 to complete disengagement at the border. Wang, meeting Prime Minister Narendra Modi, acknowledged that bilateral relations had experienced “ups and downs” and emphasised learning from past experiences. He urged that India and China view each other as partners rather than adversaries, signalling cautious attempts at resetting ties.

 

Historical Context

Bilateral optimism peaked in October 2019, during the second informal summit between PM Modi and President Xi Jinping at Mahabalipuram. However, eight months later, the Galwan Valley clash in eastern Ladakh resulted in 20 Indian and at least four Chinese casualties, triggering a rupture in relations. Both sides amassed 50,000–60,000 troops along the Line of Actual Control (LAC), leading to a prolonged standoff with frequent confrontations and infrastructure build-ups. Partial disengagement occurred in subsequent years, but the situation remained tense until mid-2024.

 

The 2024 disengagement agreement at remaining flashpoints in Depsang and Demchok, followed by a Modi–Xi meeting in Kazan, paved the way for a diplomatic thaw. Since then, exchanges at the levels of External Affairs, Defence, and National Security have contributed to restoring dialogue and confidence.

 

Twin-Track Strategy

India and China have revived the dual-track approach, pursuing border management and broader bilateral cooperation simultaneously. Key mechanisms under the Working Mechanism for Consultation and Coordination (WMCC) include:

  • An Expert Group to explore early harvest options in boundary delimitation
  • A Working Group for effective border management to maintain peace and tranquillity
  • Expansion of General-Level Mechanisms to include Eastern and Middle sectors

This strategy ensures that border issues do not obstruct the development of bilateral ties, while also recognising the need for a political perspective in settling boundary disputes.

Bilateral Cooperation

In the economic and connectivity domain, both sides agreed to:

  • Resume direct flights and facilitate visas for tourists, businesses, and media
  • Reopen border trade at Lipulekh Pass, Shipki La Pass, and Nathu La Pass
  • Promote trade and investment flows through concrete measures

In the water resources sector, China committed to sharing hydrological information on trans-border rivers during emergencies on humanitarian grounds. The Kailash Mansarovar Yatra has resumed, reflecting thawing people-to-people exchanges.

Trust Deficit and Security Concerns

Despite progress, several issues continue to hinder trust:

  • Repeated Chinese incursions (Depsang 2013, Chumar 2014, Doklam 2017, and ongoing standoffs)
  • Continued deployment of over 50,000 troops in eastern Ladakh
  • China–Pakistan military cooperation, including weapon and intelligence support
  • Potential risks from China’s mega dam on the YarlungTsangpo (Brahmaputra) affecting downstream states
  • Concerns regarding cross-border terrorism and China’s export restrictions on rare earths, fertilisers, and industrial equipment

Strategic Context

The recent thaw also comes amid shifting global dynamics, including strained India–US ties, US tariffs on Indian imports, and broader geopolitical competition. Both India and China aim to maintain stability, enhance economic cooperation, and pursue a multipolar Asia. However, sustainable rapprochement depends on Beijing addressing Indian concerns on security, water, and economic vulnerabilities, alongside constructive engagement on the border.

Migrant Disenfranchisement in India: A Democratic Challenge

  • 24 Aug 2025

In News:

India, the world’s largest democracy, faces a silent yet critical challenge: the systematic disenfranchisement of internal migrants. Recent reports indicate that during the Special Intensive Revision (SIR) of Bihar’s electoral rolls, nearly 3.5 million voters—about 4.4% of the state’s electorate—were removed. Most affected are migrant workers who were absent during house-to-house verification and subsequently labelled as “permanently migrated,” effectively losing the right to vote both at their home and destination states. This development underscores a structural weakness in India’s electoral system and highlights the democratic deficit faced by mobile citizens.

Understanding Migrant Disenfranchisement

Migrant disenfranchisement occurs when workers are excluded from voting due to absence from their home constituencies and lack of registration in destination states. This results in a “political limbo,” particularly for circular and split-family migrants, who move seasonally for economic survival. Bihar alone has around 7 million annual out-migrants, many of whom live in rented accommodations, slums, or temporary worksites, often lacking the documentation required for voter registration.

Legal Framework and Safeguards

The Representation of the People Acts, 1950 & 1951, guarantees citizens the right to be enrolled in their ordinary residence constituency. ERONET facilitates continuous updating of electoral rolls, and the Election Commission of India (ECI) has proposed portability measures such as “One Nation, One Voter ID,” though these remain largely unimplemented. Proxy voting exists for overseas Indians but does not extend to internal migrants. Civil society initiatives, including surveys in Kerala, have highlighted gaps in voter registration and access for mobile populations.

Structural Causes of Disenfranchisement

  • Sedentary Electoral Framework: Voter registration is tied to fixed residence and physical verification, disadvantaging migrants in transient living conditions.
  • Circular and Split-Family Migration: Seasonal migration is often misread as permanent relocation, prompting administrative deletion from rolls.
  • Administrative and Social Barriers: Migrants face bureaucratic hurdles, digital illiteracy, and social exclusion, while host states may discourage enrolment due to perceived political consequences.
  • Regionalism and Sub-Nationalism: Migrants are frequently viewed as outsiders, and domicile norms for jobs can restrict political participation.

Consequences
Disenfranchisement deepens inequalities and disproportionately affects poor, seasonal, and vulnerable populations, including women near border areas. Bihar’s average voter turnout (53.2%) lags behind Gujarat (66.4%) and Karnataka (70.7%), reflecting the systemic exclusion of mobile citizens. The result is a two-tier democracy where the economically marginalized are politically voiceless.

Way Forward

  • Portable Voter Identity: Develop Aadhaar-linked, mobile electoral IDs enabling voting across home and work constituencies, with privacy safeguards.
  • Cross-State Coordination: EC should implement cross-verification before deletion and enable temporary voter registration for seasonal migrants.
  • Civil Society Outreach: Panchayats and NGOs can facilitate re-enrolment campaigns, replicating Kerala’s successful survey models.
  • Policy Harmonisation: Align electoral reforms with labour codes and welfare portability, recognising circular migration as an economic reality.

Conclusion
India’s democracy depends on the participation of all citizens, including migrants whose remittances underpin state economies. Without urgent reforms to ensure portable voter rights, inter-state coordination, and inclusive outreach, millions risk losing their political voice. Addressing migrant disenfranchisement is not merely an administrative task but a fundamental imperative for a representative and inclusive democracy.

Constitution (130th Amendment) Bill, 2025

  • 23 Aug 2025

In News:

  • The Constitution (One Hundred and Thirtieth Amendment) Bill, 2025, represents a significant step in strengthening constitutional morality and accountability of those holding high executive offices.
  • It seeks to amend Articles 75, 164, and 239AA to provide for the automatic removal of the Prime Minister, Chief Ministers, and Ministers in the Union and state governments, if they remain under judicial custody for a prolonged period on charges of serious criminal offences.
  • The Bill also extends similar provisions to Union Territories, including Delhi, Puducherry, and Jammu & Kashmir, through amendments in relevant legislations.

Key Provisions of the Bill

  • Grounds for Removal:Applicable when a Minister is accused of an offence punishable with imprisonment of five years or more and has been in custody for 30 consecutive days.
  • Procedure:
    • At the Union level, the President must remove a Minister on the advice of the Prime Minister by the 31st day.
    • At the state level, Governors act on the advice of Chief Ministers.
    • In Delhi, the President acts on the Chief Minister’s advice.
    • For the Prime Minister or Chief Minister, resignation is mandatory on the 31st day of custody; otherwise, their office will stand vacated automatically.
  • Reappointment:The Bill does not bar reappointment after release from custody, ensuring due process for those acquitted.

Rationale and Objectives

  • Constitutional Morality: Upholding values of integrity in governance and preventing the spectacle of governments being run from prisons.
  • Public Trust: Protecting the legitimacy of the executive by ensuring that leaders under grave suspicion cannot continue in office.
  • Good Governance: Preventing misuse of official machinery by incarcerated Ministers.

The Statement of Objects and Reasons highlights that the Bill aims to keep executive positions free from “any ray of suspicion,” thereby strengthening public confidence in democratic institutions.

Challenges and Concerns

  • Opposition’s Objections: Concerns about misuse of investigative agencies and politically motivated arrests have been raised. Critics argue that automatic disqualification on custody, without conviction, may undermine the presumption of innocence.
  • Judicial Safeguards: The reliance on timely judicial intervention (bail within 30 days) assumes speedy functioning of courts, which may not always be realistic.
  • Federal Sensitivities: Extending the provision to Union Territories, particularly Delhi and Jammu & Kashmir, may invite political contestation.

Significance

The 130th Amendment Bill underscores India’s evolving constitutional morality by mandating that executive authority cannot coexist with criminal custody. By including the Prime Minister within its scope, the Bill strengthens democratic accountability, contrasting sharply with earlier attempts at immunity. If passed, it will create a robust ethical standard for public office, ensuring that governance is not conducted under the shadow of criminality, while allowing reappointment post-exoneration to balance fairness.

In essence, the Bill reflects an effort to reconcile democratic legitimacy, public morality, and constitutional governance, thereby reinforcing citizens’ faith in the integrity of the Indian executive.

Why India needs a national space law urgently

  • 22 Aug 2025

In News:

India’s space programme has made remarkable strides in recent years, with missions such as Chandrayaan-3, the upcoming Gaganyaan human spaceflight, and plans for the Bharat Antariksh Station. Alongside, private participation in launch services, satellite communication, and space-based applications has grown significantly. However, despite being a signatory to key international treaties like the Outer Space Treaty (OST) 1967, India still lacks a comprehensive national space legislation. This gap creates uncertainty for private enterprises, investors, and regulators, making a space law an urgent necessity.

International Context and Treaty Obligations

The OST of 1967 provides foundational principles:

  • Outer space as the common heritage of mankind with no claims of sovereignty.
  • Activities limited to peaceful purposes and free scientific exploration.
  • State responsibility for activities conducted by both government and non-government actors.
  • Liability of states for damage caused by space objects launched from their territory.

While India is bound by these obligations, the treaty is not self-executing. National legislation is required to translate these commitments into enforceable domestic rules. Many countries such as the U.S., Luxembourg, Japan, and UAE have enacted laws clarifying ownership, licensing, and liability frameworks, thereby attracting global investments in their space sectors.

India’s Current Approach

India has followed an incremental strategy, relying on policies and guidelines rather than legislation:

  • Indian Space Policy, 2023 opens space activities to private players.
  • IN-SPACe Norms and Guidelines, 2024 provides authorization mechanisms.
  • Catalogue of Indian Standards for Space Industry, 2023 ensures safety and quality.

However, these are executive measures without statutory authority. The Indian National Space Promotion and Authorisation Centre (IN-SPACe) currently functions without legal backing, undermining its ability to act as a credible single-window regulator.

Key Challenges in the Absence of a Law

  • Regulatory Fragmentation: Space activities involve multiple ministries (Defence, Telecom, Commerce, DoS), leading to duplication and delays. For instance, satellite communication projects require parallel clearances from DoT, Defence, and ISRO.
  • Liability Concerns: Under OST, India is internationally liable for damages caused by private launches. Without domestic liability-sharing norms, startups face prohibitive insurance costs.
  • FDI Uncertainty: India allows partial FDI in satellite manufacturing, but unclear automatic routes deter investors. Competitor nations offer liberal FDI frameworks, drawing startups away.
  • Intellectual Property Issues: Ambiguity in IP ownership discourages innovation and risks talent migration to IP-friendly jurisdictions.
  • Innovation Barriers: Overlapping clearances and unclear rules delay project timelines, stifling private-sector growth.

Way Forward

  • Comprehensive Space Activities Law: Clearly define licensing, liability, insurance, IP rights, and dispute resolution in line with OST.
  • Statutory Empowerment of IN-SPACe: Grant it legal authority as an independent single-window regulator with transparent, time-bound processes.
  • Insurance Framework: Establish government-backed reinsurance pools to make liability coverage affordable for startups.
  • Liberalised FDI Norms: Allow 100% FDI in satellite component manufacturing under the automatic route with safeguards for national security.
  • IP and Innovation Ecosystem: Protect private patents, encourage industry–academia collaboration, and retain domestic talent.

Conclusion

India stands at a decisive moment in its space journey. The absence of a comprehensive space law risks slowing down private participation, deterring investment, and exposing the country to unmitigated liability under international law. Enacting robust legislation would not only provide clarity and predictability but also align India with global best practices, nurture its commercial space ecosystem, and position it as a trusted global leader in space governance. With India aspiring to host major international space events and expand its presence in global markets, the urgency for a national space law has never been greater.

AI-Powered Early Warning System for Elephant Conservation

  • 21 Aug 2025

Introduction

Human-elephant conflict is a persistent challenge in India, particularly in regions where railway lines intersect traditional migratory routes of elephants. In response, the Tamil Nadu Forest Department, in collaboration with the railways, has pioneered an AI-enabled early warning system in the Walayar–Madukkarai forest range along the Kerala–Tamil Nadu border. This initiative, operational since February 2024, has emerged as a model for technology-driven wildlife conservation.

Background

The Western Ghats, a UNESCO World Heritage Site and a critical biodiversity hotspot, serves as a migratory corridor for elephants moving between the Nilgiris, Sathyamangalam, and Kerala forests. However, expanding rail and road infrastructure, coupled with land-use changes and increasing human presence, has fragmented these habitats.

The Coimbatore Forest Division alone reported nearly 9,000 elephant straying incidents between 2021 and 2023. The Madukkarai range, traversed by two railway tracks through reserved forests, has been particularly vulnerable. Since 2008, 11 elephants, including calves, have died due to train collisions in this area, underscoring the urgency for preventive measures.

The AI-Powered Surveillance System

  • Infrastructure: The system comprises 12 surveillance towers fitted with 24 high-resolution thermal cameras, strategically placed along a vulnerable 7-km stretch of railway track.
  • Technology: Using artificial intelligence and machine learning, the cameras detect elephant presence up to 100 feet near tracks. The system is modeled on surveillance technology used by the Indian Army at border areas.
  • Command Centre: Located near Walayar, it is staffed by trained forest personnel and local tribal youth. The system operates 24×7, sending real-time alerts to railway control rooms, loco pilots, and patrol teams.
  • Integration with Railways: Alerts prompt loco pilots to slow down or halt trains, while forest staff guide elephants safely across or divert them through designated underpasses.
  • Results: Since its commissioning, the system has facilitated over 6,500 safe elephant crossings and generated over 5,000 alerts, with zero elephant fatalities reported.

Broader Significance

  1. Wildlife Safety: The system ensures unhindered migratory movement of elephants, mitigating human-wildlife conflict.
  2. Community Involvement: Employment of tribal youth in monitoring enhances local participation in conservation.
  3. Judicial Oversight: The initiative aligns with the Madras High Court’s 2021 directive to minimize elephant deaths on railway tracks.
  4. Multi-Species Benefit: The cameras also detect human presence, reducing risks of accidents and aiding in conflict management.

Challenges and Way Forward

Elephants are highly adaptive and often circumvent traditional barriers such as trenches or solar fences, making AI-driven monitoring more reliable. However, scaling up faces challenges of financial allocation, technical expertise, and maintenance. The Tamil Nadu government has announced plans to expand the system to four more vulnerable areas including Dharmapuri and Hosur, indicating policy commitment.

To ensure long-term success:

  • Similar AI-based systems should be introduced across critical elephant corridors in states like Assam, Odisha, and Karnataka.
  • Railway infrastructure should integrate wildlife underpasses and overpasses with AI monitoring.
  • A national-level database linking forest departments and railways could enhance coordination.
  • Awareness campaigns and community engagement must complement technological solutions.

Conclusion

The AI-powered early warning system in Coimbatore division demonstrates how advanced technology, when integrated with local knowledge and institutional support, can resolve persistent conservation challenges. With elephants being a keystone species vital to ecosystem stability, such interventions are crucial to balance developmental imperatives with biodiversity conservation. Replicating and scaling up this initiative across India could significantly reduce human-elephant conflict and serve as a global model for AI-driven wildlife protection.

“Master of the Roster” Controversy: Balancing Judicial Independence & Accountability

  • 20 Aug 2025

Context

A recent incident involving the Supreme Court’s censure of an Allahabad High Court judge has reignited debate about the apex court’s authority over High Courts’ internal administration—specifically, the Chief Justice’s exclusive “Master of the Roster” (MoR) power. The case, involving Justice Prashant Kumar, raised broader issues of judicial discipline, institutional autonomy, and constitutional hierarchy.

The Incident & Its Fallout

A Bench led by Justices Pardiwala and Mahadevan directed that Justice Prashant Kumar be removed from the criminal roster and paired with a senior judge after an “erroneous” judgment. This triggered objections from the Allahabad High Court, which argued it constituted a breach of its administrative autonomy. Following communications from the Chief Justice of India, the Supreme Court clarified that its ruling did not intend to infringe on the Chief Justice’s MoR powers.

Constitutional Principles at Stake

  • Master of the Roster Principle:
    • Entrails the exclusive right of a Chief Justice—High Court or Supreme Court—to constitute benches and allocate cases. Key precedents affirm this prerogative: State of Rajasthan v. Prakash Chand (1998), State of Rajasthan v. Devi Dayal (1959), and Mayavaram Financial Corporation (Madras HC, 1991).
  • Supreme Court’s Binding Authority:
    • Article 141 mandates that decisions of the Supreme Court are binding throughout India.
    • Article 142 empowers the Court to issue orders necessary for “complete justice,” enabling it to take corrective measures.
  • Judicial Independence vs. Oversight:
    • High Courts enjoy constitutional autonomy (Art. 214), and the Supreme Court lacks superintendence over them. Yet, the integrated judiciary framework permits intervention when integrity or rule of law is at stake. In Tirupati Balaji Developers (2004), the SC described itself as the “elder brother,” not an administrative overlord.

Issues Raised

  • Scope of SC Intervention: Can the Supreme Court issue administrative directives affecting a High Court Chief Justice’s roster authority?
  • Judicial Discipline vs. Undermining Autonomy: How can errors be corrected without compromising institutional independence?
  • Use of Article 142: Does preventive intervention under this provision set a precedent for future interventions?
  • Separation within the Judiciary: Where is the line between hierarchical oversight and judicial autonomy?

In-House Mechanism vs. Public Correction

While serious misconduct among judges is typically addressed through confidential in-house procedures or through impeachment by Parliament, the Supreme Court’s public directive in open court was corrective rather than punitive. The approach—pairing the errant judge with a senior adjudicator—was meant to enhance judicial quality while signaling accountability.

Way Forward

  • Define clear guidelines elucidating when the Supreme Court may legitimately intervene in High Courts’ administrative matters.
  • Strengthen internal supervisory mechanisms to address judicial errors without resorting to public admonishment.
  • Enhance capacity-building, mentorship, and training to minimize repeated lapses in judicial decisions.

Conclusion

The MoR principle is a foundational safeguard of judicial independence, but it does not immune the judiciary from scrutiny or intervention when errors threaten the rule of law. The Supreme Court’s constitutional powers under Article 142 enable exceptional corrective action—but such powers must be exercised judiciously to preserve institutional autonomy and public trust.

US–China Trade Truce and the Role of Agricultural Imports in Geoeconomics

  • 19 Aug 2025

In News:

The United States and China, the world’s two largest economies, have extended their trade truce for another 90 days until November 10, 2025, averting a sharp escalation of tariffs. The pause keeps US duties on Chinese goods at 30% (against a threatened 145%) and Chinese tariffs on US shipments at 10% (down from an earlier 125%). This temporary reprieve reflects the complex mix of economics, politics, and strategic leverage shaping bilateral relations.

Tariffs and Negotiation Dynamics

Since his return to office, US President Donald Trump has pursued aggressive tariff measures to reduce America’s $300 billion trade deficit with China (2024), arguing that higher duties encourage domestic production and investment. Beijing retaliated with counter-tariffs and restrictions, sparking a tit-for-tat escalation that threatened global supply chains.

The extension of the truce provides space for negotiations over trade imbalances, unfair practices, national security concerns, and market access. It also underscores the challenges of balancing protectionism with the risks of inflation, uncertainty for businesses, and potential disruption to global economic stability.

China’s Leverage: Rare Earths and Agriculture

Beijing has strategically wielded two levers of influence. First, it controls the global supply chain of rare-earth elements and magnets, crucial for the US auto, aerospace, defence, and semiconductor industries. Second, it has employed its role as a major importer of agricultural commodities as a “trump card.”

US farm exports to China fell sharply from $13.1 billion (Jan–June 2024) to $6.4 billion (Jan–June 2025), continuing a downward trend from the 2022 peak of $40.7 billion. The steepest decline has been in soybean exports, dropping from $17.9 billion (2022) to just $2.5 billion (Jan–June 2025). China has redirected much of its soybean imports—74.7 million tonnes in 2024—to Brazil, Argentina, and Canada, significantly hurting American “corn belt” states and livestock producers reliant on feed crops.

Beyond soybeans, imports of US corn, sorghum, barley, cotton, beef, pork, poultry, and tree nuts such as almonds and pistachios have also contracted. This has created pressure on Trump from politically influential farm states, prompting him to publicly urge Beijing to expand soybean purchases.

Impact on the US and India

While American agricultural exports to China have fallen by 51.3% (Jan–June 2025 over 2024), those to India have surged 49.1% in the same period. India has emerged as the largest market for US tree nuts, importing over $1.1 billion in 2024, with a 42.8% year-on-year rise in early 2025. At the same time, the US has become India’s largest buyer of seafood, with frozen shrimp exports worth $1.9 billion in 2024–25.

This divergence highlights India’s growing importance in US agricultural trade, even as tariff disputes persist—Washington recently doubled duties on Indian imports to 50%, citing penalties linked to Russian oil purchases.

Broader Strategic Context

The US–China trade confrontation extends beyond tariffs and agriculture. Issues under negotiation include curbs on semiconductor exports, the role of Chinese platforms like TikTok, and energy security linked to Russian oil purchases. Beijing emphasizes “win-win cooperation,” while Washington continues to pursue coercive tools to address trade imbalances and safeguard national security.

Conclusion

The current trade truce reflects a fragile pause rather than resolution. China’s use of agriculture and rare earths as instruments of economic statecraft illustrates the growing intertwining of trade, technology, and geopolitics. For the US, balancing domestic political pressures from farmers and industries with long-term strategic objectives remains a challenge. For India, the shifting trade landscape offers both opportunities for greater market access and risks of tariff retaliation, underlining the complexity of navigating major power rivalries.

Documenting India’s Endangered Languages

  • 18 Aug 2025

Context:

India is home to one of the world’s richest linguistic landscapes, with the 2011 Census recording over 2,800 mother tongues, of which 1,369 were classified as recognized languages. However, many languages remain vulnerable: those spoken by fewer than 10,000 people are categorized as endangered.

According to the Scheme for Protection and Preservation of Endangered Languages (SPPEL) of the Central Institute of Indian Languages (CIIL), 117 endangered languages have been identified, and efforts are underway to document nearly 500 lesser-known languages in the future.

The Case of the Toda Tribe

The Toda tribe of the Nilgiri Hills in Tamil Nadu exemplifies India’s efforts at language preservation. Toda is a proto-South Dravidian language without a native script, spoken by only a few thousand people today. Traditionally oral, it encapsulates the community’s myths, rituals, and ecological knowledge. Under SPPEL, Toda elders have collaborated with linguists to record stories, songs, and vocabulary, producing primers in the Tamil script for schoolchildren and uploading digital archives to Sanchika, CIIL’s online repository launched in 2025. This initiative not only preserves linguistic material but also strengthens cultural identity.

Government and Institutional Efforts

SPPEL employs a systematic process of recording, transcription, grammar construction, cultural documentation, and digital archiving. Advanced tools—such as high-end audio-video equipment and linguistic analysis software—are used to create bilingual dictionaries, pictorial glossaries, and ethno-linguistic profiles.

Complementary schemes also support linguistic diversity. The Ministry of Tribal Affairs, through the TRI-ECE initiative, has funded AI-based translation tools to convert Hindi/English text into tribal languages. The Ministry of Culture promotes folk and tribal arts through programs such as the National Mission for Cultural Mapping and the Rashtriya Sanskriti Mahotsavs, while the Sahitya Akademi organizes annual tribal writers’ meets. These interventions align with the National Education Policy 2020, which emphasizes multilingual education.

Global Perspective

The erosion of linguistic diversity is not unique to India. UNESCO estimates that nearly half of the world’s 7,000 languages are endangered, with the loss of each language erasing irreplaceable cultural heritage. Recognizing this, UNESCO has declared 2022–2032 as the International Decade of Indigenous Languages, urging global stakeholders to act. The International Day of the World’s Indigenous Peoples (August 9) further highlights indigenous rights and cultural preservation.

Technology has emerged as both a challenge and a solution. While AI systems often appropriate indigenous knowledge without consent, initiatives such as New Zealand’s Te Hiku Media for M?ori and Polynesian reef conservation projects demonstrate AI’s potential for revitalization. In India, the integration of AI into language preservation efforts reflects this global trend.

Way Forward

Preserving endangered languages is critical for safeguarding traditional ecological knowledge, oral heritage, and cultural diversity. India’s multilingual character—where 22.9 crore people are bilingual and 8.6 crore are trilingual—creates opportunities for inclusive education models that protect minor languages while enabling wider communication. Community-driven documentation, AI-enabled tools, and government support can ensure continuity across generations.

As UNESCO Director-General Audrey Azoulay has noted, “Language is what makes us human. When people’s freedom to use their language is not guaranteed, this limits their freedom of thought and expression.” For India, the preservation of endangered languages is not merely cultural—it is a matter of equity, identity, and sustainable development.

India’s Unique Genetic Legacy

  • 17 Aug 2025

Context:

India, with a population of over 1.4 billion and nearly 5,000 distinct ethnic groups, represents one of the richest reservoirs of human genetic diversity in the world. This diversity, shaped by ancient migrations, interbreeding with archaic humans, and centuries of endogamy, makes India a living archive of evolutionary history as well as a frontier for personalised medicine.

Evolutionary Roots and Genetic Mixing

The genetic history of Indians can be traced to a single out-of-Africa migration around 50,000 years ago. These early settlers interbred with archaic humans such as Neanderthals and Denisovans, leaving modern populations with 1–2% of archaic DNA. Some of these variants continue to influence present-day biology—for example, Denisovan genes aiding Tibetan high-altitude adaptation and Neanderthal genes linked to immune responses and even COVID-19 severity.

Within India, genetic blending between Ancestral North Indians (ANI) and Ancestral South Indians (ASI) created a distinct genetic signature. Later contributions from ancient hunter-gatherers, early Iranian farmers, and Steppe pastoralists added further complexity. This intricate demographic history is preserved in the unique genomic architecture of Indian populations, which remains poorly represented in global studies such as the UK Biobank or 1000 Genomes Project.

Endogamy and Disease Patterns

A distinctive feature of Indian society has been endogamy, or marrying within one’s community. While this preserved ancient traits, it also intensified genetic relatedness and strengthened “founder effects.” As a result, many rare recessive diseases occur at unusually high frequencies within specific groups.

For instance, the Vysya community shows a hundred-fold higher prevalence of butyrylcholinesterase deficiency, while other groups carry unique mutations linked to progressive pseudorheumatoid dysplasia or congenital disorders. Large-scale genome sequencing of ~2,700 Indians revealed that each person, on average, has at least one fourth-degree relative, underscoring the depth of relatedness. More than 1.6 lakh previously unreported variants have been identified, many linked to neurological, metabolic, and cardiovascular conditions.

Scientific and Healthcare Potential

This diversity is not merely of anthropological interest but holds transformative implications for medicine. Each Indian community functions as a natural genetic laboratory, preserving rare variants that allow scientists to study gene functions without laboratory-induced mutations. This provides an unprecedented opportunity to advance precision medicine, drug discovery, and disease prevention strategies tailored to Indian populations.

The Genome India Project, which has already sequenced 10,000 genomes, is a milestone towards this goal. Scaling it to millions of individuals, coupled with the creation of a national biobank on the lines of the UK Biobank, could position India as a global hub for genome-driven healthcare and innovation.

Challenges and Way Forward

Despite these opportunities, India faces major gaps. Representation in international genomic databases remains minimal. The risks of genetic discrimination and privacy breaches call for a robust ethical and legal framework. Moreover, integrating genetic screening into public health policy requires awareness campaigns, trained professionals, and equitable access to avoid deepening existing inequalities.

Conclusion

India’s genetic mosaic is both a scientific treasure and a public health imperative. By scaling up sequencing, building inclusive biobanks, and embedding genomics into healthcare policy, India can simultaneously improve disease management, reduce the burden of rare disorders, and emerge as a leader in global genomics research. With foresight, investment, and ethical safeguards, India’s genetic legacy can be harnessed to transform healthcare and strengthen its knowledge economy.

Judicial Pendency in India

  • 14 Aug 2025

In News:

The Indian judiciary today faces an unprecedented backlog of over 5 crore pending cases across all levels—Supreme Court, High Courts, and District Courts. This crisis not only weakens the justice delivery system but also erodes citizen trust in governance and constitutional values.

Magnitude of Pendency

As of mid-2025:

  • District Courts account for nearly 90% of pendency, with 4.6 crore+ cases.
  • High Courts face a backlog of 63.3 lakh+ cases.
  • The Supreme Court has 86,700+ pending cases.

A notable disparity exists between criminal and civil case disposal. While 85.3% of criminal cases in High Courts are resolved within a year, only 38.7% of civil cases in district courts meet this timeline. Alarmingly, nearly 20% of civil cases remain unresolved for more than five years. The Chief Justice of India has flagged the issue of excessive caution in granting bail as one contributor to this delay.

Causes of Judicial Pendency

  • Low Judge-Population Ratio: With only 15 judges per 10 lakh population, India lags behind the Law Commission’s recommendation of 50 judges per million. Though women constitute 38% of lower judiciary, their representation in High Courts remains at just 14%.
  • Adjournment Culture: Excessive adjournments worsen pendency. A Delhi High Court study found 70% of delayed cases involved over three adjournments, leading to the infamous “tareek pe tareek” phenomenon.
  • Underutilized ADR: Mediation, arbitration, and conciliation are not fully tapped despite their cost-effectiveness. Absence of comprehensive ADR performance data further hampers evaluation.
  • Rising Litigation: Greater legal awareness, increasing PILs, and non-meritorious cases fuel the backlog. Notably, nearly half of pending cases involve government departments, where routine appeals prolong litigation.
  • Structural Deficits: Shortage of courtrooms, staff, weak ICT systems, delays in evidence and witness availability, and lack of case management frameworks further strain judicial functioning.

Reform Initiatives

  • National Mission for Justice Delivery and Legal Reforms (2011): Enhancing access and efficiency.
  • e-Courts Project: Paperless filing, virtual hearings, faster processing.
  • Fast Track Special Courts: Speedy trials for specific offences.
  • Tele-Law & Nyaya Bandhu: Expanding legal aid through technology and pro bono services.
  • Appointments: Between 2014–2024, 62 Supreme Court and 976 High Court judges were appointed; district courts saw strength rise from 19,518 to 25,609.

Lok Adalats remain highly effective, having disposed of 27.5 crore cases between 2021–2025.

Strengthening the Judicial System

  • Capacity Expansion: Raise judge strength to 50 per million, expedite appointments, enhance collegium transparency, and establish specialized courts.
  • Infrastructure & Technology: Create a National Judicial Infrastructure Authority, expand e-Courts, use AI for case clustering and tracking, and adopt tools like FASTER for electronic transmission of orders.
  • Procedural Reforms: Enforce strict limits on adjournments, adopt summary trials, pre-trial conferences, and time-bound hearings.
  • Promote ADR: Effective implementation of the Mediation Act, 2023, expansion of arbitration centres, and scaling up of Lok Adalats can significantly reduce court burden.
  • Legal Access: Strengthen Tele-Law, legal aid clinics, and NALSA’s outreach for marginalized groups.

Conclusion

India’s judiciary stands at a crossroads. The sheer volume of pending cases undermines the principle that “justice delayed is justice denied.” Addressing judicial vacancies, modernizing infrastructure, embracing technology, and institutionalizing ADR mechanisms are no longer policy options but constitutional imperatives. Strengthening the justice delivery system is vital not only for effective governance but also for sustaining the rule of law and democratic trust.

ESG Oversight and the Challenge of Greenwashing in India

  • 13 Aug 2025

Introduction

Environmental, Social, and Governance (ESG) practices are increasingly shaping corporate accountability and sustainable development worldwide. In India, where environmental degradation, social inequality, and governance failures remain pressing challenges, ESG assumes even greater significance. Recognising rising risks of greenwashing—the practice of making false or exaggerated sustainability claims—a Parliamentary Standing Committee on Finance has recently recommended the establishment of a dedicated ESG oversight body under the Ministry of Corporate Affairs (MCA).

Understanding ESG

  • Environmental: Evaluates a company’s impact on the climate, energy use, waste management, and biodiversity.
  • Social: Measures inclusivity, labour standards, community engagement, and equitable growth.
  • Governance: Focuses on transparency, ethical decision-making, compliance, and protection of shareholder interests.

In India, ESG is critical because of:

  • Climate vulnerability: India experienced 322 extreme weather days in 2024 (CSE), making sustainability practices urgent.
  • Social concerns: Persistent poverty and inequality require businesses to prioritise inclusivity.
  • Governance needs: Strong corporate ethics help attract investment and build long-term trust.

Key Recommendations of the Standing Committee

  • ESG Oversight Authority: A specialised body under MCA to verify sustainability claims, detect fraud, and design sector-specific ESG guidelines.
  • Strengthening Legal Mandate: Amendments to the Companies Act, 2013 to embed ESG responsibilities into directors’ duties, making sustainability a core element of business strategy.
  • Support for MSMEs: Providing frameworks and guidance to help small enterprises adopt ESG without excessive compliance burden.
  • Deterrence Measures: Faster penalties for false claims to curb greenwashing.
  • Strengthening Institutions: Empowering SFIO and NFRA to detect financial crimes linked with ESG misreporting.
  • CSR Transparency: Better monitoring to ensure Corporate Social Responsibility efforts are genuine and impactful.

India’s ESG Initiatives

  • SEBI’s BRSR Framework: Mandates top 1,000 listed companies to disclose ESG performance, aligned with international norms like GRI and SASB.
  • CSR Mandate (Companies Act, 2013): Encourages companies to invest in social and environmental causes.
  • Green Rating Project (CSE): Rates industries on environmental performance.

The Challenge of Greenwashing

Greenwashing undermines ESG credibility by misleading consumers and investors. It often involves vague labels (“eco-friendly,” “natural”), token CSR activities, or misuse of traditional systems like Ayurveda to project sustainability without genuine practices.

Factors driving greenwashing in India

  • Eco-consumerism: Rising demand for sustainable goods, especially among youth.
  • Weak enforcement: Non-mandatory standards like BIS Eco-Mark limit accountability.
  • Fragmented regulations: ESG rules spread across multiple agencies, creating compliance gaps.
  • Cultural exploitation: Misuse of heritage-based terms for marketing.
  • CSR marketing: Highlighting symbolic actions while continuing harmful operations.

Regulatory Safeguards

  • Consumer Protection Act, 2019: Central Consumer Protection Authority can penalise misleading environmental claims.
  • ASCI Guidelines: Ensure environmental claims in advertising are evidence-based.
  • Plastic Waste Management Rules: Aim to regulate reduction claims, though gaps remain.

Conclusion

The rise of ESG reflects India’s journey towards balancing economic growth with sustainability and ethics. However, greenwashing threatens this transition, diluting genuine efforts. The Parliamentary Committee’s recommendation for a centralised ESG oversight authority is timely, offering a pathway to ensure accountability, strengthen investor confidence, and align India’s corporate governance with global sustainability standards.

For India, integrating ESG into the corporate ethos is not merely regulatory compliance—it is a strategic imperative for long-term resilience, social equity, and climate security.

Commemoration of 80 Years Since Hiroshima and Nagasaki

  • 11 Aug 2025

In News:

August 2025 marks 80 years since the atomic bombings of Hiroshima (6 August) and Nagasaki (9 August) in 1945, events that not only ended World War II but heralded the beginning of the nuclear age. These bombings remain the only wartime use of nuclear weapons, claiming over 150,000 to 246,000 lives, predominantly civilians, by the end of 1945.

From Stalemate to Nuclear Intervention

  • Pearl Harbor (7 December 1941) instigated U.S. entry into WWII and initiated several brutal battles across the Pacific—the likes of Guadalcanal, Iwo Jima, and Okinawa—underscoring the mounting cost of a ground invasion of Japan.
  • Japan’s continued resistance despite devastating firebombing campaigns (notably Tokyo in March 1945) and the Potsdam Declaration (July 1945) demanding surrender set the stage for nuclear escalation.
  • The Manhattan Project, secret since 1942, culminated in the Trinity test (16 July 1945), proving the atomic bomb's feasibility.

The Bombings Unfold

  • Hiroshima (6 August 1945): ‘Little Boy’, a uranium-fission bomb dropped by the B-29 Enola Gay, caused roughly 80,000 immediate deaths; total fatalities reached ~140,000 by end of that year.
  • Nagasaki (9 August 1945): ‘Fat Man’, a plutonium-fueled implosion device, dropped amid weather delays on Kokura, killed about 40,000 immediately—totaling ~70,000 by year-end.

Motives Behind the Bombing

  • Avoiding invasion casualties: Operation Downfall, the planned invasion, projected massive Allied and Japanese losses.
  • Psychological pressure: The bomb's unprecedented devastation aimed to force Japan's surrender.
  • Geo-strategic signaling: The bombings demonstrated U.S. might—curbing Soviet advances—and launched the world into a new Cold War dynamic.
  • Domestic justification: Following decades and billions invested into the Manhattan Project, prevailing sentiment demanded usage for war-ending impact.

The Aftermath and Long-Term Impact

  • Japan surrendered on 14 August 1945, formalizing it on 2 September aboard USS Missouri.
  • The nuclear age dawned, introducing doctrines like Mutual Assured Destruction (MAD) and fueling a global arms race visible in treaties and strategic postures to this day.
  • Institutions like the Hiroshima Peace Memorial (Genbaku Dome) were later established as symbols for peace and reminders of nuclear risks.

Legacy: Memory and Contemporary Discourse

  • Each year, Hiroshima and Nagasaki hold solemn ceremonies—featuring lanterns, peace pledges, and remembrance—to honour victims and renew calls for nuclear disarmament.
  • Survivors (hibakusha) testimonials, such as shared during the 80th anniversary, continue to fuel global nuclear abolition movements.
  • Contemporary debates persist: while some argue the bombings were a necessary evil to hasten peace, others denounce them as moral travesties — a discourse still evolving with new declassified archival evidence.

Conclusion

The atomic bombings of Hiroshima and Nagasaki were more than wartime events—they ushered in a nuclear epoch marked by existential security threats, ideological competition, and ethical dilemmas. As the world reflects on this 80th anniversary, it must balance historical comprehension with vigilant advocacy for disarmament, remembering that nuclear weapons’ destructive legacy persists, as relevant and grave as ever.

Medical Tourism in India

  • 10 Aug 2025

In News:

India has emerged as one of the leading destinations for medical tourism, attracting foreign patients due to its cost-effective treatments, advanced healthcare infrastructure, and traditional wellness systems. The surge in foreign tourist arrivals (FTAs) for medical purposes highlights the sector’s growing role in India’s economy, diplomacy, and healthcare landscape.

Current Trends in Medical Tourism

  • Between January–April 2025, India recorded 1,31,856 medical FTAs, accounting for 4.1% of total FTAs in this period.
  • In 2024, medical FTAs stood at 6.44 lakh, a sharp increase from 1.82 lakh in 2020, indicating robust growth despite global pandemic disruptions.
  • Top source countries (2024):
    • Bangladesh – 4.82 lakh arrivals (largest contributor).
    • Iraq – 32,008 arrivals.
    • Somalia – 11,717 arrivals.
    • Oman – 10,431 arrivals.
    • Uzbekistan – 8,921 arrivals.

This surge reflects both India’s healthcare competitiveness and rising global demand for affordable, high-quality treatment.

Why India attracts Medical Tourists

  1. Affordability & Quality – Advanced medical procedures at a fraction of Western costs.
  2. Specialised Expertise – Strong presence in cardiology, orthopaedics, oncology, organ transplants, and IVF.
  3. Traditional Wellness – Ayurveda, Yoga, and naturopathy complement allopathic care, attracting wellness tourists.
  4. Regulatory Support – Extension of e-Medical visa and attendant visa facilities to 171 countries, easing travel for patients.
  5. Integrated Ecosystem – Hospitals, facilitators, hotels, airlines, and regulatory bodies work together under the ‘Heal in India’ initiative.

Government Initiatives

  • National Efforts:
    • ‘Heal in India’ campaign (Ministry of Health & Family Welfare) promoting India as a global healthcare hub.
    • Encouraging public-private partnerships (PPP) to expand hospital capacity, improve service delivery, and enhance medical infrastructure.
    • Branding and showcasing India’s medical expertise at international platforms.
  • Visa Facilitation:E-medical visa/e-medical attendant visa for 171 countries to smoothen entry of international patients.
  • State-level Initiatives (Case Study: Gujarat):
    • Registration of wellness retreats on official tourism websites.
    • Participation in global health & wellness exhibitions, seminars, and conferences.
    • Familiarisation trips (FAM) for industry stakeholders to promote wellness centres.
    • Training paramedical staff to improve quality of care for foreign patients.
    • Use of social media and global outreach to project Gujarat’s health infrastructure and wellness potential.

Economic & Strategic Significance

  • Foreign Exchange Earnings – Growing inflows from high-value medical travellers.
  • Employment Generation – Creation of jobs in healthcare, tourism, and allied sectors.
  • Soft Power & Health Diplomacy – India’s outreach in medical care strengthens its global image and fosters bilateral goodwill, especially with neighbouring and developing countries.
  • Regional Leadership – With Bangladesh, Iraq, and African nations as major contributors, medical tourism strengthens India’s role as a regional healthcare hub.

Challenges

  • Uneven distribution of healthcare infrastructure across states.
  • Regulatory concerns regarding quality assurance in smaller hospitals and clinics.
  • High dependence on a few source countries.
  • Competition from emerging medical tourism destinations like Thailand, Singapore, and Turkey.

Way Forward

  • Standardisation& Accreditation – Enforcing global quality standards across hospitals to build trust.
  • Digital Integration – Expanding telemedicine, AI-based diagnostics, and digital health records for seamless cross-border care.
  • Wellness Tourism Synergy – Combining allopathic treatments with Ayush-based wellness offerings.
  • Infrastructure Development – Strengthening airports, medical hubs, and hospitality sectors near healthcare clusters.
  • Diversification of Source Countries – Targeting Africa, Middle East, and Latin America for expansion.

Conclusion

India’s medical tourism sector is a sunrise industry, merging healthcare excellence with tourism potential. With over 1.3 lakh medical FTAs in early 2025 alone, the sector underscores India’s strength as a global healthcare destination. By addressing challenges and scaling up initiatives like ‘Heal in India’, India can transform medical tourism into a key pillar of economic growth, soft power, and international diplomacy.

National Handloom Day and the Legacy of the Swadeshi Movement

  • 09 Aug 2025

In News:

Every year on 7th August, India celebrates National Handloom Day, commemorating the launch of the Swadeshi Movement (1905), which emerged as a response to the Partition of Bengal by Lord Curzon. The movement marked a turning point in India’s struggle for self-reliance by promoting indigenous industries, especially handlooms, as an instrument of economic resistance against colonial rule.

Historical Background: Swadeshi Movement

The Calcutta Townhall meeting of 1905 formally initiated the Swadeshi Movement. Its key methods included:

  • Boycott of British goods like Manchester cloth and Liverpool salt, encouraging Indian-made products.
  • National Education, leading to the founding of institutions such as Bengal National College and Bengal Technical Institute.
  • Formation of Samitis, e.g., Swadesh Bandhab Samiti led by Ashwini Kumar Dutta.
  • Use of festivals and cultural symbols, such as Raksha Bandhan by Rabindranath Tagore, to foster unity.
  • Social reform agenda, linking Atma Shakti (self-strength) with campaigns against caste oppression, dowry, and alcoholism.

The movement evolved from a moderate phase led by Surendranath Banerjee to a radical phase under Lal-Bal-Pal, demanding Swaraj through boycott, passive resistance, and mass mobilization.

Impact

  • Political: The 1906 INC session under DadabhaiNaoroji declared Swaraj as the ultimate goal. However, ideological differences caused the Surat split (1907).
  • Economic: Boosted Indian industries like handloom and textiles, with enterprises such as Bengal Chemicals and Lakshmi Cotton Mills. Imports declined significantly between 1905–1908.
  • Social & Cultural: Rabindranath Tagore composed Amar Sonar Bangla, later Bangladesh’s national anthem. Artists like Abanindranath Tagore infused nationalism into Indian art. Women actively boycotted foreign goods and promoted indigenous crafts.
  • Administrative Response: Rising unrest compelled the British to annul the Partition of Bengal in 1911.

Contemporary Relevance

The ideals of Swadeshi find resonance in India’s current policies:

  • Atmanirbhar Bharat Abhiyan (2020): Aims for self-reliance with a ?20 lakh crore stimulus (~10% of GDP). It emphasizes local for global and vocal for local.
  • Make in India: Improved FDI inflows from USD 45 bn (2015) to USD 81.04 bn (2024–25). Exports reached USD 437 bn in 2024, including global dominance in pharmaceuticals and vaccine production.
  • PLI Schemes: Covering 14 sectors to boost domestic manufacturing and exports.
  • Revival of Khadi: KVIC reported a 347% rise in production and 447% rise in sales (2013–2025), generating employment for 1.94 crore people.

Role of Handloom Sector in India’s Economy

  • Employment: Largest cottage industry employing 35 lakh workers, 72% of whom are women.
  • Sustainability: Handloom products are eco-friendly and preserve cultural heritage.
  • Exports: India contributes 95% of global handwoven fabric and exported USD 10.94 bn worth of cotton yarn, fabrics, and made-ups in FY23.
  • Initiatives:
    • National Handloom Development Programme (NHDP) for raw materials, design, and marketing.
    • Raw Material Supply Scheme (RMSS): 15% yarn subsidy.
    • Pradhan Mantri MUDRA Yojana (PMMY): Low-interest loans to weavers.
    • Workshed Scheme: Financial aid for family-based weaving units.
    • Geographical Indication (GI): 104 registered handloom products.
    • GeM Platform: 1.8 lakh weavers onboarded for direct sales.

Conclusion

National Handloom Day is not merely a tribute to India’s textile heritage but also a reminder of the Swadeshi spirit of self-reliance, sustainability, and economic nationalism. From the fight against colonial exploitation to the vision of Atmanirbhar Bharat, the movement underscores the enduring power of indigenous industries in shaping India’s economic and cultural identity.

Navigating the New Techno-Capitalist World Order

  • 08 Aug 2025

Introduction:

The 21st century is witnessing the rise of a new techno-capitalist world order, where technology and capital converge as key instruments of power. Unlike the earlier developmental model, where states regulated and directed technology for social progress, the current shift—most prominently driven by the United States—places the state as an enabler of private technological monopolies. This transformation has significant implications for global geopolitics, economic security, and India’s technological future.

Understanding Techno-Capitalism

Techno-capitalism refers to a system in which technological innovation and financial capital are co-architects of state power. Its features include:

  • Deregulation of critical sectors like AI and fintech.
  • Public–private partnerships driving massive investment flows.
  • A “tech-broliarchy” of Silicon Valley elites collaborating with state institutions.
  • Technology as a geopolitical tool rather than a developmental ideal.

For example, the Trump administration’s AI policy dismantled regulatory barriers, channelled billions into AI-driven manufacturing, and prioritised strategic dominance over global governance norms.

Global Shifts in Tech Ecosystems

United States

The US has transitioned from state-led scientific advancement (e.g., NASA in the 20th century) to private sector-led innovation (e.g., SpaceX, Google DeepMind). Techno-capitalism is now a deliberate strategy blending libertarian individualism with techno-nationalism, reinforcing American primacy in AI, fintech, and crypto.

China

China follows a mission-driven, centralised model, where the state directly steers technological innovation. Its focus areas include AI, digital surveillance, space technology, and the Digital Silk Road. Unlike the US, China treats technology as both a governance tool and an export of state power.

India

India represents a hybrid model, with strong digital public goods (UPI, Aadhaar) and an expanding space programme, but faces systemic challenges:

  • Low R&D investment (<0.7% of GDP vs. US 3.5% and China 2.4%).
  • Weak linkages between universities and industry.
  • Regulatory uncertainty in AI, data, and fintech.
  • Limited scaling capacity for start-ups.

India–US Technology Cooperation

Historically, India–US scientific collaboration oscillated between optimism and distrust. The SITE project (1975) reflected Cold War-era cooperation, but the 1974 nuclear test created a trust deficit. Recently, the Initiative on Critical and Emerging Technologies (iCET) has revived ties, though divergences on trade, Russia, and US techno-nationalism pose challenges.

Challenges for India in the Techno-Capitalist Era

  1. AI-driven job displacement in IT-BPO sectors.
  2. Visa uncertainties in the US affecting skilled migration.
  3. Underinvestment in R&D, limiting innovation.
  4. Fragmented regulation, with gaps in AI ethics, crypto, and data governance.
  5. Start-up ecosystem constraints, including capital shortages and limited government procurement support.

Way Forward for India

  • National Tech-Industrial Strategy integrating defence, space, semiconductors, AI, and quantum computing.
  • Higher education reform to link universities with mission-mode projects and innovation clusters.
  • Balanced regulation that encourages innovation while ensuring consumer rights and systemic safeguards.
  • Strategic engagement with the US for co-innovation, while maintaining technological sovereignty.
  • Human capital reskilling through a National AI Reskilling Mission and integration of emerging technologies in curricula.

Ethanol Blending

  • 07 Aug 2025

Introduction:

India has achieved a significant milestone in its clean energy transition by rolling out E20 fuel (20% ethanol blended petrol) nationwide in 2025, five years ahead of the original 2030 target. The initiative aligns with the Ethanol Blended Petrol (EBP) Programme, launched in 2003, and marks a sharp rise from just 1.5% ethanol blending in 2014 to 20% in 2025.

The policy aims to enhance energy security, reduce carbon emissions, cut crude oil imports, and support farmers. However, concerns have emerged regarding its impact on vehicle performance, consumer costs, and technical feasibility.

Ethanol Blending: Policy Context

  • Nature of Fuel: Ethanol is an alcohol-based biofuel derived mainly from sugarcane, maize, and biomass.
  • Benefits:
    • Reduces dependency on crude imports (saving ~?1.36 lakh crore in foreign exchange).
    • Provides ?1.18 lakh crore to farmers, boosting rural incomes.
    • Cuts CO? emissions by ~698 lakh tonnes.
    • Strengthens domestic biofuel industry (ethanol production rose from 38 crore litres in 2014 to 661 crore litres in 2025).
  • Global Context: Ethanol blending is used in several countries (e.g., USA, Brazil) to curb fossil fuel reliance.

Economic and Environmental Gains

  • Macroeconomic Benefits:
    • Estimated to lower crude oil imports by ?50,000 crore annually.
    • Strengthened India’s energy self-reliance under the National Bio-Energy Programme.
  • Environmental Benefits:
    • Lower greenhouse gas emissions.
    • Promotion of renewable energy use.
  • Agricultural Support: Higher demand for sugarcane and related feedstock increases farmer incomes.

Challenges and Concerns

1. Vehicle Compatibility Issues

  • Vehicles manufactured before April 2023 are not designed for E20 and risk damage.
  • Hero MotoCorp & TVS highlight the need to replace rubber, elastomer, and plastic components (e.g., gaskets, O-rings, fuel tubes) with ethanol-compatible materials.
  • Ethanol’s corrosive nature leads to:
    • Metal corrosion (fuel tanks, injectors, exhausts).
    • Degradation of rubber/plastic parts.
    • Moisture absorption (phase separation in fuel).
    • Altered air-fuel ratio causing knocking, poor combustion, and reduced performance.

2. Drop in Fuel Efficiency

  • Government stance: Mileage loss is “marginal” (1–2% for calibrated vehicles; 3–6% for others), reducible by engine tuning.
  • Independent experts: Real-world mileage drop may be 6–7%, raising consumer costs.
  • Many consumers report higher fuel consumption, sluggish acceleration, and reduced efficiency in older vehicles.

3. Consumer Concerns

  • Rising fuel expenses due to frequent refuelling.
  • Lack of consumer choice between E20 and pure petrol.
  • Demand for awareness campaigns and clear labelling at fuel stations.

Industry and Policy Response

  • Automobile manufacturers are producing E20-compliant vehicles since April 2023.
  • Retrofitting advisories issued for older models.
  • Government maintains that minor modifications (rubber part replacements, engine recalibration) can mitigate risks at low costs.

Future Outlook: Beyond E20

  • Discussions are underway on higher blends (E30, E40).
  • Experts warn of greater risks:
    • More severe corrosion and efficiency loss.
    • Need for dual fuel dispensing infrastructure.
    • Retrofitting or phased replacement of older vehicles.
  • Policy direction must balance energy security goals with consumer interests.

Conclusion

The rollout of E20 fuel represents a major stride in India’s path toward sustainable energy and reduced import dependence. However, the transition is accompanied by technical, economic, and consumer-level challenges, particularly for pre-2023 vehicles.

Going forward, India’s ethanol blending strategy must ensure:

  • Consumer awareness and choice.
  • Targeted retrofitting supportfor older vehicles.
  • Sustainable ethanol production without compromising food security or causing ecological stress.

Balancing macroeconomic and environmental gains with micro-level consumer impacts will determine the long-term success of India’s ethanol blending programme.

Recognition of Palestine

  • 06 Aug 2025

In News:

The Israel–Palestine conflict has once again entered a critical phase, with growing international momentum for recognising Palestinian statehood. British Prime Minister Keir Starmer recently announced that the UK will recognise the State of Palestine at the UN General Assembly in September, unless Israel agrees to a ceasefire in Gaza, allows greater humanitarian access, and recommits to a two-state solution. This announcement marks a dramatic shift in British policy, given its century-old involvement in shaping the conflict.

Growing Global Recognition Drive

The UK’s position is echoed by France, Canada, and Portugal, which have also indicated readiness to recognise Palestine. Out of 193 UN member states, 147 have already extended recognition. Traditionally, major Western powers resisted unilateral recognition, tying it to the outcome of a negotiated peace settlement. However, the ongoing 21-month Gaza conflict has altered this calculus, with Israel facing mounting diplomatic isolation.

Russia and China—both permanent members of the UN Security Council (UNSC)—already recognise Palestine. If the UK and France proceed, the United States will remain the only P5 member opposing recognition, potentially weakening its diplomatic standing. The involvement of key G7 members adds further weight, increasing pressure on other Western nations to reconsider their stance.

Britain’s Historic Role: From Balfour to Partition

Britain’s move is particularly symbolic due to its historic responsibility in the conflict. The Balfour Declaration of 1917, issued by British Foreign Secretary Arthur Balfour to Zionist leader Lord Rothschild, pledged support for the creation of a “Jewish national home” in Palestine. At that time, Jews constituted only about 9% of the population under Ottoman rule. The declaration was influenced by Britain’s wartime strategy to secure global Jewish support during World War I.

Following the Ottoman Empire’s collapse, Britain assumed control of Palestine under a League of Nations Mandate (1920–1948). It encouraged Jewish immigration and facilitated the creation of parallel institutions, fuelling tensions with the Arab majority. By the end of World War II, Jews made up nearly 30% of the population, and the situation became unmanageable. Britain referred the matter to the UN, which proposed the 1947 Partition Plan. On 14 May 1948, Zionist leaders unilaterally declared the establishment of Israel, immediately recognised by the US. This triggered the First Arab-Israel War, resulting in large-scale displacement of Palestinians—the “Nakba.”

Britain’s Recognition: A Symbolic Shift

Now, 108 years after the Balfour Declaration, Britain’s decision to recognise Palestine signals a historic reversal. While recognition alone may not end Israel’s occupation or resolve the conflict, it carries deep symbolic value. It reflects the erosion of unconditional Western support for Israel, particularly as global outrage grows over civilian casualties in Gaza and accusations of war crimes.

Significance for the International Order

Britain’s recognition could catalyse broader diplomatic shifts. If multiple Western powers formally acknowledge Palestinian statehood, it will strengthen the legitimacy of the two-state solution, long considered the most viable framework for peace. It may also increase pressure on Israel to engage in negotiations under international scrutiny.

At the same time, the development underscores the changing balance of global diplomacy. With the US increasingly isolated on the issue, emerging alignments among Europe, Russia, China, and the Global South highlight a multipolar contest over norms of sovereignty, humanitarian accountability, and conflict resolution.

Conclusion

Britain’s decision to recognise Palestine is not merely a policy adjustment; it is a profound historical reckoning. From endorsing a Jewish homeland through the Balfour Declaration to recognising a Palestinian state more than a century later, Britain’s stance symbolises both continuity and correction in international diplomacy. Whether it translates into tangible progress on the ground depends on Israel’s response, US engagement, and the broader international community’s ability to revive a credible peace process.

Five Years of the National Education Policy 2020

  • 05 Aug 2025

In News:

The National Education Policy (NEP) 2020, India’s third education policy since Independence, was envisioned as a transformative roadmap to make India a “global knowledge superpower.” Five years since its launch, the policy has driven important reforms in both school and higher education. However, progress has been uneven—while curriculum redesign, early childhood education, and digital learning have taken shape, federal tensions, institutional inertia, and funding constraints continue to slow its full realization.

Key Gains in School Education

The NEP replaced the 10+2 structure with a 5+3+3+4 model (foundational, preparatory, middle, secondary). The National Curriculum Framework (2023) set competency-based outcomes, and NCERT released new textbooks for classes 1–8, integrating subjects such as history and geography into a single volume.

Early childhood care and education (ECCE) has gained traction through the JaaduiPitara kits and a national ECCE curriculum. Delhi, Karnataka, and Kerala have enforced the minimum age of six for class 1. However, improving Anganwadi training and infrastructure remains critical.

Under NIPUN Bharat (2021), literacy and numeracy by class 3 became a national focus. Yet, survey data show proficiency levels at 64% (language) and 60% (math)—progressive but below NEP’s universal goals.

Higher Education Reforms

One of NEP’s boldest ideas, the Academic Bank of Credits (ABC) and National Credit Framework (NCrF), introduced flexibility with multiple entry-exit options: a certificate after one year, a diploma after two, and a four-year degree. While nearly 90% of HEIs report multidisciplinary curricula, only 36% have implemented multiple entry-exit, and just 64% maintain ABC records, indicating patchy adoption.

The Common University Entrance Test (CUET), introduced in 2022, streamlined admissions by replacing multiple entrance exams. Global outreach expanded, with IIT Madras (Zanzibar), IIT Delhi (Abu Dhabi), and IIM Ahmedabad (Dubai) opening campuses abroad, while foreign universities such as the University of Southampton entered India.

Digital education emerged as a strong adoption area: 96% of HEIs use SWAYAM/DIKSHA, and 94% invested in digital infrastructure. Yet, equitable access and integration of MOOCs into degree programs remain challenges.

Reforms in Progress

  • Board exams: From 2026, CBSE will allow class 10 students to appear twice a year to reduce stress.
  • Holistic assessment: PARAKH has developed competency-based report cards, though most boards are yet to implement them.
  • Four-year undergraduate degrees: Adopted by some central universities and Kerala, but slowed by faculty shortages and weak infrastructure.
  • Mother tongue instruction: Encouraged till class 5, with NCERT preparing multilingual textbooks.

Sticking Points and Bottlenecks

Some reforms remain stalled:

  • Three-language formula has been rejected by Tamil Nadu as linguistic imposition.
  • Teacher education reform lags, with the National Curriculum Framework for Teacher Education still pending.
  • Higher Education Commission of India (HECI), meant to replace UGC, remains in draft stage.
  • Breakfast alongside midday meals, recommended by NEP, was rejected due to financial constraints.

Federalism poses a key hurdle. Kerala, Tamil Nadu, and West Bengal refused to adopt PM-SHRI schools, citing central overreach, leading to funding freezes under Samagra Shiksha. Karnataka oscillated—adopting and later scrapping the four-year UG model—while pursuing its own state education policy.

Conclusion

Five years on, NEP 2020 has delivered structural reforms in school curricula, foundational learning, higher education flexibility, and digital adoption. Yet, its transformative potential remains unrealized due to limited faculty capacity, uneven state cooperation, and financial bottlenecks. For NEP to succeed, the Union and states must collaborate, ensuring adequate funding, teacher training, and institutional autonomy. Without resolving these foundational issues, the NEP risks remaining a vision more on paper than in classrooms.

Slums in Flood-Prone Areas: India’s Dual Challenge of Urbanisation and Climate Risks

  • 04 Aug 2025

In News:

A global study published in Nature Cities has revealed that India has the highest number of slum clusters in flood-prone areas worldwide, underscoring the nexus between rapid urbanisation, poverty, and increasing climate-related risks. This trend highlights both developmental and governance challenges for India as it seeks to balance inclusive growth with climate resilience.

Global Trends in Flood Risk and Slum Settlements

  • India at the Forefront: Over 158 million slum dwellers live in flood-prone areas in India, particularly in the Ganga delta. Nearly 40% of slum residents inhabit high-risk urban and peri-urban zones.
  • Regional Pattern: India is followed by Indonesia, Bangladesh, and Pakistan in terms of vulnerable populations. Globally, slum dwellers are 32% more likely to reside in floodplains than other communities.
  • Global South Impact: About 33% of informal settlements in low- and middle-income countries are already exposed to flooding. Hotspots include Rwanda, Morocco, and coastal Brazil.
  • Cities at Risk: High slum density correlates with flood-prone megacities such as Mumbai and Jakarta.

Drivers of Flood Vulnerability in India

  • Riverine Floods: Frequent in the Brahmaputra, Ganga, and Krishna basins, driven by monsoon rains, snowmelt, and dam-related issues.
  • Urban Expansion: Between 1985–2015, India ranked third globally in urban growth into flood-prone areas. Cities like Mumbai and Bengaluru have expanded into natural floodplains.
  • Flash Floods: Incidents rose from 132 (2020) to 184 (2022), with severe events in Himachal Pradesh (2025), Wayanad (2024), Ladakh (2024), and Sikkim (2023).
    • 75% of flash floods stem from a mix of extreme rainfall and saturated soils.
  • Climate Change: Between 1981–2020, extreme rainfall events doubled, with monsoon rains intensifying by 56%, raising flood frequency.
  • Poor Drainage & Encroachments: Urban floods in Delhi, Mumbai, Hyderabad, and Chennai worsened by clogged drains and plastic waste (e.g., Chennai floods 2015).
  • Weak Local Planning: Absence of region-specific flood risk assessments hampers effective urban land-use planning and disaster preparedness.

Slums in India: Extent and Challenges

  • Definitions:
    • Pranab Sen Committee (2010) – compact settlements of ≥20 households with poor housing, sanitation, and water facilities.
    • UN-Habitat – lack of durable housing, secure tenure, sufficient living space, safe water, or sanitation.
  • Census 2011: 17% of urban India lived in 1.39 crore slum households.
  • NSSO 2012: 33,510 slums identified nationwide.
  • Hotspot States: Maharashtra, Andhra Pradesh, Uttar Pradesh, and West Bengal.
  • Major Cities: Mumbai and Kolkata host some of the densest slum populations.
  • Regulation: The Slum Areas (Improvement and Clearance) Act, 1956 governs slum rehabilitation in Union Territories; “Land” and “Colonisation” are State subjects.

Existing Initiatives

  • Pradhan Mantri Awas Yojana – Urban (PMAY-U): Pucca houses with amenities; as of Dec 2024, 118.64 lakh houses sanctioned, 29 lakh for slum dwellers.
  • AMRUT & Smart Cities Mission: Infrastructure upgrades in water, sanitation, and drainage.
  • Swachh Bharat Mission – Urban 2.0: Target of garbage-free cities.
  • IFLOWS-Mumbai and CFLOWS-Chennai: Integrated flood warning systems.

Way Forward: Towards Sustainable Urban Flood and Slum Management

  • Region-Specific Flood Strategies: Based on topography and soil; integrate into the National Disaster Management Plan (NDMP).
  • Restrict Expansion into Floodplains: Enforce zoning laws and incorporate flood-resilient infrastructure under Smart Cities Mission.
  • Sustainable Urban Drainage Systems (SUDS): Rain gardens, permeable pavements, and green spaces.
  • Upgrading Slums: Use PMAY-U for resilient housing, raised plinths, and better drainage.
  • Data-Driven Risk Mapping: Use NRSC, IMD, and satellite imagery to monitor risks and emerging hotspots.
  • Sponge City Model: Adopt Shanghai-style rainwater absorption systems; Mumbai has begun implementing this.
  • Eco-Restoration of Water Bodies: Revive urban lakes/wetlands (e.g., Jakkur Lake in Bengaluru) for natural flood control.
  • Climate Adaptation Mainstreaming: Integrate climate resilience into urban planning and housing policies.

Conclusion

India’s dual challenge of informal urbanisation and intensifying floods poses a direct threat to sustainable urban development. As the 2030 Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs) approach, urgent focus is needed on SDG 11 (Sustainable Cities), SDG 6 (Clean Water and Sanitation), and SDG 1 (No Poverty).
Strengthening governance, upgrading slum infrastructure, and integrating climate resilience into planning are critical to safeguard millions living at the intersection of poverty and environmental risk.

Why the World Needs Better Green Technologies

  • 03 Aug 2025

In News:

The 21st century energy transition is unfolding under multiple pressures: climate change, geopolitical conflicts, rising energy demand, and the pursuit of energy self-sufficiency. While the rapid deployment of silicon photovoltaics and the promotion of green hydrogen represent important milestones, critical questions remain about their long-term efficiency, sustainability, and ability to meet net-zero goals. The urgency lies not only in scaling up renewable deployment but also in accelerating innovation in next-generation green technologies.

Green Technologies: Definition and Scope

Green technologies encompass scientific innovations and engineering systems that reduce environmental harm, minimize carbon emissions, and promote sustainable energy generation and resource use. They include solar, wind, hydrogen, artificial photosynthesis, and emerging renewable fuels.

Limits of Existing Technologies

1. Silicon Photovoltaics (PV)

  • Efficiency Constraints: Conventional silicon solar panels deliver only 15–18% field efficiency, while advanced alternatives such as gallium arsenide thin-film panels can reach ~47% efficiency.
  • Land-Use Pressure: Low efficiency translates into vast land requirements. Doubling efficiency would halve land needs—critical for densely populated countries like India, where land is contested between urbanisation, agriculture, and biodiversity conservation.
  • Geopolitical Dependence: Nearly 80% of global solar panel supply comes from China, creating vulnerabilities for India despite its domestic capacity of ~6 GW (and growing).

2. Green Hydrogen Challenges

  • Energy Balance: Electrolysis requires more energy input than the usable output of hydrogen.
  • Storage & Transport: Hydrogen’s low density and high leakage risk make it costly and difficult to handle.
  • Conversion Losses: Transforming hydrogen into ammonia or methanol for easier transport adds further energy penalties. Thus, the "greenness" of green hydrogen is often overstated.

3. Rising CO? Despite Renewable Growth

Despite exponential solar expansion (global renewable capacity ~4.45 TWh by 2024), atmospheric CO? levels have risen from 350 ppm (1990) to ~425 ppm (2025). This underscores the gap between renewable deployment and rising global energy demand.

The Case for Disruptive Innovation

Artificial Photosynthesis (APS)

Mimicking natural photosynthesis, APS aims to produce fuels directly from sunlight, water, and CO?. Though currently in the laboratory stage, it offers a future pathway to bypass multi-step conversion processes.

Renewable Fuels of Non-Biological Origin (RFNBO)

Already being pursued in Europe, RFNBOs seek to generate carbon-neutral fuels directly from renewable resources without biomass. India, currently importing nearly 85% of its energy resources (oil, coal, gas), could benefit immensely by investing in such technologies.

Challenges to Adoption

  • High R&D Costs and Long Gestation Periods for technologies like APS and multi-junction photovoltaics.
  • Supply Chain Dependence on China for solar components.
  • Lack of Large-Scale Validation of emerging technologies.
  • Private Sector Hesitation due to uncertain returns on futuristic innovations.

Way Forward for India

  • Boost R&D Funding: Allocate a larger share of climate finance to disruptive technologies such as APS, RFNBOs, and high-efficiency photovoltaics.
  • Public-Private Partnerships: Encourage startups and industries to collaborate with national labs and global players.
  • Technology Diversification: Develop an ecosystem combining solar, wind, hydrogen, nuclear, and waste-to-energy.
  • Land-Efficient Solutions: Promote rooftop solar, floating solar, and building-integrated PVs to mitigate land scarcity.
  • Global Collaboration: Strengthen engagement in initiatives such as Mission Innovation and the India–EU Green Deal for technology transfer and joint innovation.

Conclusion

Current green technologies, though pivotal, are insufficient to meet the scale of the climate crisis. The challenge is not just to be “green” in name, but to ensure measurable efficiency, sustainability, and independence. For India, energy security and climate goals converge on a common path: technology foresight, not just technology deployment. Investing in next-generation innovations today will be far cheaper than bearing the costs of climate inaction tomorrow.

Surrogacy Age Cap Debate before the Supreme Court

  • 02 Aug 2025

Background – The Legal Framework on Surrogacy in India

India has been a global hub for assisted reproductive technologies (ART) and surrogacy for many years. To address ethical concerns, prevent exploitation, and regulate practices, Parliament enacted two laws in 2021:

  • The Assisted Reproductive Technology (Regulation) Act, 2021
  • The Surrogacy (Regulation) Act, 2021

These Acts, effective from January 2022, prohibit commercial surrogacy and allow only altruistic surrogacy (where a woman volunteers without financial compensation, apart from medical expenses and insurance).

Key Provisions:

  • Age limits:
    • Married woman (intending mother): 23–50 years
    • Married man (intending father): 26–55 years
    • Single women: only widows or divorcees aged 35–45 years
  • Certificate of essentiality: Proof of infertility, parentage order, and insurance for the surrogate are mandatory.
  • Purpose of the law: To prevent commodification of reproduction, ensure surrogacy is used only for genuine medical necessity, and safeguard the health of both surrogate and child.

The Case before the Supreme Court

Recently, the Supreme Court reserved judgment in a set of petitions challenging the age caps under these Acts.

Petitioners’ Concerns:

  • Many couples had already begun fertility procedures before January 2022, but became ineligible midway due to the new law.
  • Example: A couple aged 62 (husband) and 56 (wife) lost their only child in 2018, started fertility treatment in 2019, but after a failed embryo transfer in 2022, they were barred from further surrogacy attempts due to age restrictions.
  • They argue that applying the age limits retrospectively is unfair, as no “grandfather clause” was provided to protect ongoing cases.

Constitutional Arguments:

  • Article 14 (Right to Equality): Age-based exclusion is arbitrary.
  • Article 21 (Right to Life & Personal Liberty): Reproductive autonomy and the right to family are integral to personal liberty.
  • Discrimination against unmarried women: The law only allows widows and divorcees to access surrogacy, excluding single, never-married women.

Government’s Stand

  • Age limits reflect natural reproductive timelines and medical safety.
  • Advanced parental age poses risks:
    • Higher complications for the surrogate.
    • Genetic/epigenetic risks for the child.
    • Concerns about parents’ ability to provide long-term care.
  • Provisions align with international best practices in reproductive health.

Supreme Court’s Observations

The Bench, led by Justices B.V. Nagarathna and K.V. Viswanathan, raised critical questions:

  • Why prohibit surrogacy at advanced ages when natural late pregnancies are not barred?
  • The intent of the law was to regulate commercial surrogacy, not to deny genuine parenthood.
  • The absence of compassionate transitional provisions is problematic: “Stop, no children! Look how harsh it is,” remarked Justice Nagarathna.

Ethical and Social Dimensions

  • Balancing Autonomy and State Regulation:Reproductive choice vs. state’s role in safeguarding health and welfare.
  • Rights of Single Women:Exclusion of unmarried women raises concerns of gender equality and individual autonomy.
  • Best Interests of the Child:Child’s welfare, upbringing, and stability are central concerns in surrogacy regulation.
  • Medical Ethics:Need to prevent exploitation of surrogates and maintain ethical standards in ART practices.

Broader Constitutional Questions

  • Right to Parenthood as a Fundamental Right? The Court has earlier recognised reproductive rights as part of Article 21.
  • Equality vs. Reasonable Classification: Can the state justify different treatment based on age or marital status?
  • Legislative Gaps: The lack of a grandfather clause highlights issues in legislative foresight and transitional justice.

Conclusion

The Supreme Court’s verdict will be pivotal in shaping India’s approach to assisted reproduction. At stake is the balance between medical ethics, legislative intent, and individual reproductive rights.

The outcome may not only determine the fate of couples stuck mid-process but could also set precedents for:

  • Expanding reproductive rights,
  • Recognising unmarried women’s autonomy
  • Ensuring compassionate legal transitions in sensitive health matters.

Coral Reef Decline in Lakshadweep

  • 01 Aug 2025

Introduction:

Coral reefs, often called the “rainforests of the sea,” are vital ecosystems that sustain biodiversity, support coastal economies, and act as natural barriers against climate hazards. However, a 24-year study (1998–2022) on Lakshadweep reefs has revealed a 50% decline in coral cover—from 37.2% in 1998 to 19.6% in 2022. The findings underscore the vulnerability of India’s reef ecosystems to climate change, while also highlighting the limits of local resilience efforts without global climate action.

Key Findings of the Study

  • Drastic Decline in Coral Cover
    • Repeated marine heatwaves linked to El Niño (1998, 2010, 2016) and global warming have triggered large-scale bleaching events.
    • Reef recovery requires at least 6 years without heat stress, which is increasingly rare.
  • Distinct Coral Response Patterns
    • Six coral response “clusters” were observed depending on depth, wave exposure, and recovery rate.
    • Some corals showed resilience, but many collapsed under repeated stress.
  • Limits of Local Efforts
    • Restoration methods like coral gardening provide short-term relief.
    • Long-term survival depends on global emission cuts to slow warming and allow recovery time.

Causes of Coral Depletion

  • Rising Sea Temperatures
    • Ocean warming disrupts coral–algae symbiosis, causing bleaching.
    • El Niño events exacerbate stress, making bleaching more frequent.
  • Ocean Acidification
    • Increased CO? lowers ocean pH, weakening calcium carbonate skeletons.
    • Reduced skeletal strength makes corals more fragile and slows growth.
  • Pollution & Sedimentation
    • Runoff from agriculture and sewage fosters algal blooms, smothering corals.
    • Coastal development increases sedimentation, blocking sunlight needed for photosynthesis.
  • Human Activities
    • Dynamite and cyanide fishing destroy reefs.
    • Tourism-related anchoring, snorkeling, and diving add further stress.

Implications of Coral Decline

  • Biodiversity Loss
    • Coral reefs support ~25% of marine life.
    • Collapse threatens fish populations, marine food webs, and species survival.
  • Economic Impact
    • Reduced reef fisheries affect food security.
    • Coral bleaching diminishes eco-tourism, affecting local livelihoods.
  • Coastal Vulnerability
    • Reefs act as natural seawalls.
    • Their loss increases risks from storm surges, erosion, and sea-level rise—critical for islands like Lakshadweep.
  • Loss of Scientific Potential
    • Many coral-associated species could hold biomedical value (anti-cancer, anti-arthritis compounds).
    • Decline erodes opportunities for future discoveries.
  • Climate Regulation
    • Corals aid in carbon cycling and water purification.
    • Their death accelerates algal blooms and weakens ocean-based carbon sinks.

Global and National Initiatives

  • International Coral Reef Initiative (ICRI): Partnership for global reef conservation.
  • Global Fund for Coral Reefs (GFCR): Finance platform mobilizing grants and investments.
  • Biorock Technology: Mineral accretion method for coral restoration (trialed in Gulf of Kachchh).
  • Super Corals: Human-assisted evolution to breed heat-resistant strains.
  • Cryomesh Technology: Preserving coral larvae at ultra-low temperatures for long-term conservation.
  • Indian Efforts: Coral monitoring in Gulf of Mannar, Andaman & Nicobar, and Lakshadweep under various MoEFCC and research institute programs.

The Way Forward

  • Tackling Climate Change
    • Shift to renewable energy, strengthen climate finance, and uphold Paris Agreement targets.
    • Protect blue carbon ecosystems like mangroves and seagrasses that support reefs.
  • Reducing Local Stressors
    • Strengthen wastewater treatment and reduce runoff.
    • Enforce marine protected areas (MPAs) and ban destructive fishing practices.
  • Active Reef Restoration: Transplant heat-tolerant corals, deploy 3D-printed reef structures, and promote artificial reef habitats.
  • Community-Led Conservation
    • Promote eco-tourism with reef-safe practices.
    • Provide alternative livelihoods to reduce overfishing pressure.

Conclusion

The Lakshadweep study is a warning that coral reefs are reaching a tipping point. Local interventions, while important, cannot offset the pace of climate-driven destruction. Without urgent global emission cuts, India risks losing not only its reef ecosystems but also the livelihoods, biodiversity, and coastal resilience they sustain. A mix of global climate action, national policies, technological innovation, and community participation is essential to secure the future of reefs.

India’s First Legal Framework for Contaminated Site Management

  • 31 Jul 2025

In News:

The Government of India, through the Ministry of Environment, Forest and Climate Change (MoEFCC), has taken a landmark step toward formalising the management of chemically polluted land. The government notified the Environment Protection (Management of Contaminated Sites) Rules, 2025 under the Environment (Protection) Act, 1986, offering for the first time a legal framework to identify, assess, and remediate contaminated sites across the country.

Understanding Contaminated Sites

Contaminated sites refer to locations where hazardous chemicals or waste have been dumped historically, often prior to the existence of environmental regulation. These sites typically include:

  • Abandoned industrial landfills
  • Defunct chemical handling units
  • Waste storage and spill zones

According to the Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB), 103 such sites have been identified across India, though remediation has been initiated in only 7. The lack of legal clarity and the inability to identify responsible parties have long hindered remediation efforts.

Salient Features of the 2025 Rules

The rules codify a five-step process that places the onus on local administrations and pollution control authorities to address environmental contamination:

  • Identification & Reporting: District administrations must compile biannual reports of “suspected contaminated sites” and forward them to the State Pollution Control Boards (SPCBs) or a designated reference agency.
  • Preliminary Assessment: Within 90 days, these agencies must assess the site for probable contamination.
  • Detailed Site Survey: If contamination is suspected, a follow-up survey—within another 90 days—will test for any of the 189 hazardous chemicals notified under the Hazardous and Other Wastes Rules, 2016.
  • Remediation Plan: A scientific reference organisation will draft a remediation strategy. The SPCB must identify the polluter within 90 days of confirming contamination.
  • Cost Recovery & Liability: The principle of “polluter pays” is invoked. If the responsible party is untraceable or insolvent, costs will be shared equally by the Centre and State. Criminal liability for severe environmental damage will be addressed under the Bharatiya Nyaya Sanhita, 2023.

Exclusions and Scope Clarity

To prevent regulatory overlap, certain domains remain outside the ambit of these rules:

  • Radioactive waste (Atomic Energy Act)
  • Mining-related contamination
  • Marine oil pollution
  • Municipal solid waste landfills

These exclusions ensure that domain-specific legislation governs complex or hazardous waste streams more effectively.

Significance of the Notification

This is the first national-level regulatory framework to manage contaminated land in India. It provides:

  • A time-bound process for site assessment and clean-up
  • Clear delineation of institutional roles
  • Enforceable liability mechanisms
  • Legal visibility for public health and ecological risks tied to contaminated land

Earlier, the lack of a structured response mechanism led to regulatory inertia, leaving vulnerable communities at risk.

Implementation Challenges

Despite its promise, implementation will depend on:

  • Strengthening technical capacity at district and state levels
  • Enhanced coordination among SPCBs, CPCB, and reference agencies
  • Financial mechanisms for cases where the polluter is absent
  • Public engagement in identifying contaminated areas

Conclusion

The 2025 rules mark a paradigm shift in environmental governance. By embedding scientific assessment, legal accountability, and institutional responsibility into one framework, India takes a decisive step toward sustainable land management and environmental justice. However, effective capacity-building and cooperative federalism will be essential to translate these legal provisions into on-ground success.

China’s Brahmaputra Mega Dam

  • 30 Jul 2025

In News:

China’s construction of a $167.8 billion hydropower dam on the Yarlung Zangbo (Brahmaputra) river near the “Great Bend” in Tibet has raised significant geopolitical, ecological, and strategic concerns, particularly for downstream nations like India and Bangladesh. Once completed, this 60,000 MW project—three times the capacity of the Three Gorges Dam—will be the world’s largest.

Strategic and Environmental Concerns

The dam is being built in the seismically active and ecologically fragile Medog region, just before the river enters Arunachal Pradesh as the Siang. The Chief Minister of Arunachal Pradesh has termed the project an “existential threat,” warning that sudden release of water or structural failure could lead to catastrophic flooding and irreversible damage to tribal livelihoods and ecosystems.

Experts reinforce these concerns, citing the risks posed by potential seismic activity, landslides, and unregulated dam operations in a region lacking robust transboundary water governance. Any significant disruption to the river’s natural flow could also affect biodiversity, agriculture, and hydrological patterns in India’s northeast.

The Assam Perspective

Assam, heavily dependent on the Brahmaputra, faces both risks and possible benefits. The state’s Chief Minister has noted that only 30–35% of the river’s flow originates in China, with the majority contributed by monsoon rains and tributaries from Arunachal Pradesh and Bhutan. He suggested that reduced upstream flow might even aid in managing Assam’s annual floods. Nonetheless, the absence of definitive impact assessments necessitates caution.

India’s Diplomatic Position

India, as a lower riparian state, has consistently raised its concerns regarding upstream hydroelectric projects on transboundary rivers. The Ministry of External Affairs (MEA) has reiterated the need for transparency, data-sharing, and prior consultation, aligning with global principles of equitable and reasonable use of international rivers.

China, while asserting its sovereign right to develop its rivers, has claimed it is cooperating with downstream nations through hydrological data sharing and disaster mitigation. However, the lack of a legally binding treaty between India and China on water-sharing limits enforceability and fosters mistrust.

Recent diplomatic engagements—including talks in October 2024 and March 2025—have included discussions on river cooperation. India’s decision to resume visas for Chinese tourists and reinitiate the Kailash Mansarovar Yatra indicates a cautious yet strategic engagement policy amid persistent challenges.

Mitigation and Strategic Preparedness

India’s policy response must be comprehensive. Key mitigation measures include:

  • Scientific Assessment and Monitoring: Real-time hydrological monitoring and risk modeling are essential.
  • Infrastructure Development: Projects like the Upper Siang hydroelectric dam in Arunachal Pradesh, despite environmental concerns, are strategically vital as buffers against sudden flow variations.
  • Interlinking of Rivers: Long-term plans to link Brahmaputra tributaries with the Ganga basin can help redistribute water during surplus and scarcity.
  • Regional Cooperation: Coordination with other riparian nations such as Bangladesh, Bhutan, and Myanmar is vital for developing early warning systems and emergency protocols.

Conclusion

The Brahmaputra dam issue encapsulates the complex interplay of sovereignty, ecology, security, and diplomacy in transboundary river management. For India, it presents both a strategic challenge and an opportunity to strengthen its internal preparedness while advancing regional cooperation. A balanced, evidence-driven, and diplomatically assertive approach is critical to safeguarding national interests and promoting regional water security.

NISAR Mission: A Landmark in Indo-US Space Cooperation and Earth Observation

  • 29 Jul 2025

In News:

The upcoming launch of the NASA-ISRO Synthetic Aperture Radar (NISAR) satellite represents a landmark in Indo-U.S. collaboration in space science. Scheduled for deployment from Sriharikota onboard a GSLV Mk-II rocket, NISAR is poised to become one of the most sophisticated Earth observation missions globally, with wide-ranging scientific, environmental, and developmental implications.

Background and Mission Overview

NISAR, developed jointly by NASA and ISRO over the past decade at a cost of approximately ?12,000 crore, is designed to provide high-resolution, all-weather, day-and-night radar imaging of the Earth’s surface. It is the first satellite globally to incorporate dual-frequency synthetic aperture radar (SAR)—combining NASA’s L-band radar (1.257 GHz) and ISRO’s S-band radar (3.2 GHz).

This dual-frequency capability enables it to penetrate forest canopies and surface layers, allowing comprehensive monitoring of dynamic Earth processes such as land deformation, biomass change, glacier dynamics, and infrastructure stability.

Technical Capabilities and Orbit

The satellite will operate from a sun-synchronous polar orbit at an altitude of 747 km. It features a 12-metre deployable mesh antenna and uses SweepSAR technology for electronically steering radar beams. With a 240 km swath width and spatial resolution between 3–10 meters, it can revisit every point on Earth every 12 days, facilitating consistent long-term monitoring.

Applications Across Critical Sectors

NISAR’s data will address six broad thematic areas:

  • Solid Earth Processes: Detecting earthquakes, landslides, and urban subsidence.
  • Ecosystem Dynamics: Estimating forest biomass, carbon stocks, and biodiversity changes.
  • Cryosphere Studies: Tracking glacier movements and polar ice thickness.
  • Coastal Monitoring: Observing shoreline erosion and marine hazards.
  • Disaster Management: Generating damage proxy maps within five hours of events like floods or cyclones.
  • Agriculture and Infrastructure: Supporting food security, yield estimation, and infrastructure health monitoring.

India-specific applications include real-time soil moisture analysis, crop forecasting, flood mapping, and disaster relief planning. The S-band will be operated more intensively over Indian territory, addressing national developmental priorities.

Collaborative Contributions

The mission reflects a balanced international partnership. ISRO has provided the spacecraft bus, S-band radar, telemetry systems, and launch services, while NASA has contributed the L-band radar, antenna system, onboard electronics, and global data infrastructure. Final integration and testing were conducted in Bengaluru, reinforcing India's growing capability in complex space missions.

Data Policy and Accessibility

Following an open data policy, NISAR will make its data freely accessible to scientists, governments, and the public. ISRO’s Shadnagar ground station and Antarctica node will handle domestic reception and processing, while NASA will manage global downlink via its Near Earth Network.

Significance for India and the World

NISAR enhances India’s Earth observation portfolio and strengthens climate resilience, agricultural sustainability, and disaster preparedness. It also elevates India’s profile in global space diplomacy, aligning with goals under climate action, SDGs, and science diplomacy.

In conclusion, NISAR is not just a technological achievement but a strategic asset for planetary monitoring and sustainable development, embodying the spirit of science for global good and showcasing India’s capacity to lead in international space cooperation.

PM Modi’s Visit to the Maldives: A Strategic Reset in India’s Indian Ocean Diplomacy

  • 28 Jul 2025

In News:

Prime Minister Narendra Modi’s visit to the Maldives in July 2025 marked a significant diplomatic milestone, especially as it came amid shifting regional dynamics. Invited as the Guest of Honour for the 60th Independence Day celebrations, this was his third visit to the Maldives and the first by a foreign Head of Government under President Mohamed Muizzu's tenure. The event also symbolised a remarkable shift from the earlier phase of strained bilateral ties to renewed strategic alignment.

Diplomatic and Developmental Engagements

The visit featured a multifaceted agenda underscoring India’s "Neighbourhood First" and "Vision MAHASAGAR" policies. A commemorative stamp was released jointly by both leaders to mark 60 years of India-Maldives diplomatic relations, symbolised through traditional maritime vessels—India’s Uru boat and Maldives’ Vadhu Dhoni—highlighting shared Indian Ocean heritage.

 

India handed over two BHISHM Health Cubes—portable medical kits capable of treating 200 casualties and sustaining medical staff for 72 hours—demonstrating commitment to regional humanitarian support. PM Modi also inaugurated the new Ministry of Defence building in Malé, constructed with Indian assistance, enhancing Maldives’ institutional capacity.

A series of high-impact projects were launched, including:

  • 3,300 social housing units in Hulhumale under Indian Buyer’s Credit,
  • Road and drainage infrastructure in Addu City,
  • Six community development initiatives, and
  • 72 vehicles and utility equipment to support local governance.

Economic Assistance and Strategic Commitments

India extended a Line of Credit (LoC) worth ?4,850 crore, notably in Indian Rupees—marking the first such transaction for Maldives. This aims to address Maldives’ twin deficit crisis and reduce dependence on foreign currency. Additionally, an agreement was signed to reduce annual debt repayments from $51 million to $29 million, providing significant fiscal relief.

Other announcements included the launch of negotiations for an India-Maldives Free Trade Agreement (IMFTA) and joint climate action through synchronized tree-planting campaigns: India’s Ek Ped Maa Ke Naam and Maldives’ 5 Million Tree Pledge.

Diplomatic Turnaround: From 'India Out' to 'India In'

The symbolism of this visit lies in its contrast to recent tensions. After assuming office in 2023, President Muizzu’s administration aligned more closely with China and ran a vocally anti-India campaign. Early signals—including calls to remove Indian military personnel—suggested a possible strategic rupture. However, India opted for diplomatic engagement over confrontation, facilitating dialogue at COP28 and replacing its military presence with civilian HAL technicians in May 2024.

This calculated patience coincided with Maldives’ economic vulnerabilities, limited Chinese assistance, and the ruling PNC’s consolidation of power. The tide began to turn with high-level Maldivian visits to India and the announcement of a shared vision for maritime and economic cooperation in late 2024.

Conclusion

President Muizzu’s recent statement that "Maldives will not do anything to harm India's security interests" reflects a diplomatic recalibration driven by pragmatism and mutual necessity. The invitation extended to PM Modi for a ceremonial role in Maldives' Independence Day, once unthinkable amid the 'India Out' rhetoric, stands as a testament to the success of India’s calibrated diplomacy in the Indian Ocean region.

Draft National Telecom Policy 2025

  • 27 Jul 2025

In News:

  • The Government of India has released the Draft National Telecom Policy 2025 through the Department of Telecommunications (DoT), marking a significant update after the 2018 National Digital Communications Policy (NDCP).
  • The new draft aims to transform India into a “telecom product nation” through indigenous innovation, sustainable connectivity, and digital inclusion, aligning with broader national goals like Digital India, Make in India, and Atmanirbhar Bharat.

Vision and Strategic Objectives

  • The policy envisions universal, meaningful, secure, and sustainable connectivity for all citizens while simultaneously boosting domestic innovation and employment.
  • It reflects a shift from viewing telecom as a service enabler to treating it as a critical infrastructure sector capable of driving economic growth and strategic autonomy.

Key Focus Areas

  1. Universal Connectivity
    • Target of 100% 4G coverage and 90% 5G coverage by 2030.
    • Increase fiber-connected towers from 46% to 80% to enhance service quality.
    • Establish 1 million new public Wi-Fi hotspots.
    • Promote satellite internet to bridge digital divides in remote and border areas.
  2. Employment and Skilling
    • Create 10 lakh new jobs in the telecom sector.
    • Reskill another 10 lakh existing workers, addressing the evolving demands of the digital economy.
  3. Strengthening Domestic Manufacturing
    • Target a 150% increase in domestic telecom manufacturing by 2030.
    • Establish Telecom Manufacturing Zones (TMZs) with integrated infrastructure.
    • Support R&D in next-generation technologies, including 6G.
    • Include telecom R&D under Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) activities to encourage private sector investment.
  4. Cybersecurity and Artificial Intelligence (AI)
    • Deploy AI-based tools for proactive cyber threat detection and response.
    • Counter generative AI-based attacks and enhance cross-border telecom signal surveillance.
    • Use AI-powered chatbots for unified grievance redressal systems.
  5. Green Telecom and Circular Economy
    • Reduce the sector’s carbon emissions by 30%.
    • Promote recycling and reuse of telecom equipment to encourage circular economy practices.
  6. Technological Innovations
    • Promote quantum-secure communications to strengthen network security.
    • Enable mobile number-based identity verification for secure digital transactions.
    • The removal of lawful interception provisions suggests a nuanced approach balancing security and privacy.

Comparative Outlook: 2018 NDCP vs. 2025 Draft Policy

  • The 2018 policy had a broader digital communications focus; the 2025 draft is telecom-specific and more targeted.
  • Job creation targets are more realistic (10 lakh vs. 40 lakh), reflecting the refined sectoral scope.
  • AI, sustainability, and domestic manufacturing receive significantly enhanced attention in the 2025 draft.
  • The shift from 10 million to 1 million Wi-Fi hotspot target indicates a pragmatic policy recalibration.

Conclusion

The Draft National Telecom Policy 2025 is a timely and ambitious framework aimed at ensuring digital sovereignty, innovation-driven growth, and inclusive access. By focusing on indigenous technology, sustainable infrastructure, and cybersecurity, it has the potential to position India as a global leader in next-generation telecommunications, including 6G and quantum tech. Effective implementation and coordination with state and private stakeholders will be key to translating this vision into ground reality.

India’s Ethanol Blending Success

  • 26 Jul 2025

In News:

India has achieved a significant milestone by reaching 20% ethanol blending in petrol by March 2025, five years ahead of the original 2030 target under the National Policy on Biofuels (2018). This landmark achievement represents a transformative step in India’s journey toward energy self-reliance, environmental sustainability, and inclusive rural development.

Genesis and Policy Framework

The Ethanol Blended Petrol (EBP) Programme, launched in 2003 and significantly scaled up post-2014, aims to reduce dependence on imported crude oil, promote clean fuels, and support the agricultural economy. The programme is spearheaded by the Ministry of Petroleum and Natural Gas in collaboration with the Ministries of Agriculture and Food Processing. The National Policy on Biofuels expanded the permissible feedstocks for ethanol production, including sugarcane juice, B-molasses, damaged grains, maize, and agricultural residues.

Complementary initiatives like PM-JI-VAN Yojana, SATAT, PLI for ethanol production, and the National Bio-Energy Programme have accelerated infrastructure creation and second-generation (2G) ethanol technologies.

Progress and Scaling

The ethanol blending rate rose from 1.53% in 2014 to 8.17% in 2020–21, then to 12.06% in 2022–23, and reached 14.6% in 2023–24, culminating in the 20% target in early 2025. This scaling was supported by ?40,000 crore in investments and proactive procurement by Oil Marketing Companies (OMCs) at pre-fixed prices, providing market stability for distilleries and farmers.

Over 17,000 fuel retail outlets now offer E20 fuel, with 400 E100 pumps operational. Automakers such as Honda and Hero MotoCorp have ensured vehicle compatibility with E20 fuels, ensuring consumer acceptance.

Economic and Rural Impact

The EBP programme has delivered strong macroeconomic and grassroots benefits. By reducing crude oil imports, India has saved substantial foreign exchange and improved energy security. At the micro level, farmers—particularly sugarcane and maize growers—have benefited from assured off-take and stable prices, reducing rural distress and boosting income security.

Moreover, the ethanol ecosystem has generated rural employment, supported local manufacturing under ‘Make in India’, and catalyzed investment in agro-industrial infrastructure.

Environmental and Climate Gains

India’s ethanol blending drive aligns with its climate commitments, especially its Net Zero by 2070 target. Ethanol blending has helped avoid 698 lakh tonnes of CO? emissions, reduced particulate pollution, and improved urban air quality. The shift also supports circular economy principles by utilizing agricultural surplus, foodgrains unfit for consumption, and residues—converting waste to wealth.

Future strategies emphasize 2G ethanol from non-food biomass and municipal waste, thereby reducing land and water stress associated with first-generation biofuels. Advanced technologies like lignocellulosic processing, sustainable aviation fuel (SAF), and ethanol-to-hydrogen conversion are in focus.

Conclusion

India’s early achievement of 20% ethanol blending demonstrates the success of coordinated policymaking, technological adoption, and stakeholder alignment. It serves as a model of how energy policy can intersect with rural prosperity, environmental stewardship, and industrial growth. Going forward, India’s biofuel roadmap not only reinforces its clean energy leadership but also strengthens its resolve for energy Atmanirbharta, sustainable development, and climate resilience.

India’s Early Achievement of Climate Targets

  • 25 Jul 2025

In News:

India has achieved a key milestone in its climate commitments under the Paris Agreement by fulfilling one of its core targets five years ahead of schedule. As of June 2025, non-fossil fuel sources contribute over 50% of India’s installed electricity generation capacity — a significant achievement originally set for 2030.

According to the Ministry of Power, India’s installed capacity reached 484.82 GW, of which 242.78 GW is from non-fossil sources like solar, wind, large hydropower, and nuclear energy. This rapid growth, particularly in solar (24 GW added in 2024 alone), underlines India’s leadership in renewable energy deployment. However, it also highlights key structural challenges in decarbonizing the broader energy economy.

India’s updated Nationally Determined Contributions (NDCs) under the Paris Climate Agreement (2015) comprise three primary targets for 2030:

  1. At least 50% of installed electricity capacity from non-fossil fuel sources.
  2. 45% reduction in emissions intensity (GHG emissions per unit of GDP) from 2005 levels.
  3. Creation of an additional 2.5–3 billion tonnes of CO?-equivalent carbon sink through increased forest and tree cover.

Substantial progress is also evident in the other two targets. By 2020, India had already reduced its emissions intensity by 36%, and given current economic and technological trajectories, the 45% target by 2030 appears achievable. On the forestry front, India added 2.29 billion tonnes of carbon sink by 2021. Given the annual increase of around 150 million tonnes CO? equivalent reported in the India State of Forest Report (ISFR), the carbon sink target may already be met by 2023, although official confirmation is pending.

Yet, these achievements warrant a closer look. Electricity comprises less than 22% of India’s total energy consumption. Most energy use — particularly in transport, industry, and residential sectors — still relies on direct combustion of fossil fuels like coal, oil, and gas. Furthermore, while non-fossil sources account for over 50% of capacity, they contribute only 28% to actual electricity generation due to intermittency in renewables. Consequently, clean energy forms only around 6% of India’s total energy consumption, which though modest, aligns with the global average.

The road ahead is demanding. India must now focus on decarbonizing non-power sectors through accelerated adoption of electric mobility, green hydrogen, energy-efficient technologies, and clean cooking solutions. Scaling stable power sources like nuclear and hydro is crucial to complement solar and wind. India's Small Modular Reactor (SMR) program remains in the R&D phase and is unlikely to contribute significantly by 2030.

Internationally, India’s climate leadership contrasts with the underperformance of many developed nations, especially regarding climate finance and technology transfer. While India has met and even surpassed its targets, its ability to raise ambition depends on receiving support as promised under the Paris Agreement.

In conclusion, India’s early success in achieving climate targets reflects a commitment to sustainable growth, but true climate leadership will require systemic decarbonization across all sectors, just energy transitions, and global equity in climate action.

Matter-Antimatter Asymmetry

  • 24 Jul 2025

Context:

One of the most fundamental questions in cosmology and particle physics is: Why does the universe contain more matter than antimatter? The Big Bang, which occurred around 13.8 billion years ago, should have produced equal amounts of matter and antimatter. However, the observable universe today is overwhelmingly composed of matter, with antimatter being nearly absent except in trace amounts created in high-energy environments or particle accelerators. This puzzling imbalance—known as baryon asymmetry—continues to challenge scientists worldwide.

Recent breakthroughs, particularly a discovery made on July 16 at the Large Hadron Collider (LHC) in Europe, have added a significant piece to this puzzle. For the first time, scientists observed CP violation in baryons—heavy subatomic particles such as protons and neutrons made of three quarks. CP stands for Charge Conjugation (C) and Parity (P), which together form a symmetry principle stating that the laws of physics should be the same if a particle is replaced with its antiparticle and viewed in a mirror. A violation of this symmetry implies that matter and antimatter behave slightly differently—a necessary condition for the observed dominance of matter.

The experiment focused on a baryon called Λb0 (lambda-b-zero), which contains one up quark, one down quark, and one bottom quark. Scientists at LHCb measured the decay rates of Λb0 and its antimatter counterpart (Λb0-bar) into a proton, kaon, and two pions. The results showed a CP asymmetry of about 2.45%, with a statistical significance of over 5 sigma, a threshold used in particle physics to confirm a discovery. This historic observation is the first evidence of CP violation in baryons and expands our understanding beyond earlier CP violation detected in mesons (quark-antiquark pairs).

While this asymmetry is still insufficient to fully explain the matter-antimatter imbalance, it marks a critical advancement. It suggests that there could be undiscovered sources of CP violation in other particles or interactions that the Standard Model of particle physics does not yet account for. Theoretical and experimental physicists are now exploring whether other decays exhibit similar asymmetries and whether new physics—beyond the Standard Model—might be at play.

Parallel efforts are also underway deep underground. In Italy, physicists are assembling detectors 1.4 km below the mountains to observe neutrinoless double beta decay, a hypothetical nuclear process that, if confirmed, would indicate that neutrinos are Majorana particles—particles that are their own antiparticles. This would offer a different mechanism for matter creation without equivalent antimatter, further contributing to the asymmetry.

Moreover, U.S. institutions such as the Department of Energy (DOE) support advanced antimatter research through projects like the Deep Underground Neutrino Experiment (DUNE) and experiments at Brookhaven’s Relativistic Heavy Ion Collider, which have created antimatter versions of elements such as helium.

In conclusion, the recent detection of CP violation in baryons and continued investigations into rare decays and neutrino properties are gradually illuminating the deep cosmic mystery of why something exists instead of nothing. This line of inquiry not only bridges particle physics and cosmology but also exemplifies human curiosity’s power in probing the origins of existence itself.

Feeding Community Dogs: Balancing Constitutional Compassion with Public Order in India

  • 23 Jul 2025

Context:

The issue of feeding stray or community dogs has evolved into a contentious legal and social debate in India. A recent case involving a Noida resident, allegedly harassed for feeding stray dogs in the common areas of her housing society, once again brought this matter to the judicial spotlight. While the Supreme Court refrained from issuing a specific directive, it observed that citizens should consider feeding strays within their own homes—an observation that, while not binding, reignited debate on reconciling individual compassion with community concerns.

Legal Framework: The ABC Rules, 2023

The Animal Birth Control (ABC) Rules, 2023, framed under the Prevention of Cruelty to Animals Act, 1960, serve as the primary legal instrument governing the care of community animals. These rules replaced the 2001 version and introduced the term “community animals” instead of “stray dogs,” recognizing them as territorial beings who coexist with human residents.

Rule 20 of the ABC Rules mandates that Resident Welfare Associations (RWAs) or local bodies must facilitate the feeding of community dogs if any resident voluntarily chooses to do so. Designated feeding spots must be located away from high-footfall zones like staircases, entrances, and children’s play areas. Cleanliness and fixed feeding times are essential requirements. Additionally, the Rules lay down a dispute resolution mechanism involving veterinary officers, police representatives, and local welfare groups.

Constitutional and Ethical Dimensions

The legal protection of animals finds support in Article 21 of the Constitution. In the 2014 Animal Welfare Board of India vs. A. Nagaraja case, the Supreme Court interpreted the right to life and liberty to include animal life. Further, Article 51A(g) enshrines the fundamental duty of citizens to show compassion to all living beings. Thus, feeding community dogs is not merely an act of personal kindness but a constitutional obligation.

The petitioner in the Noida case was arguably fulfilling this duty. Allegedly harassed by her RWA president—who reportedly destroyed water pots and killed sterilised dogs—she faced institutional apathy when authorities failed to act. Her appeal to the Allahabad High Court was dismissed, citing inconvenience to the "common man," despite the ABC Rules’ clear guidelines.

Judicial Precedents and Clarifications

Contrary to popular media interpretation, the Supreme Court in the current case did not issue an order compelling the petitioner to feed dogs at home. Observations made during hearings are not judicial directions. Notably, the apex court had earlier stayed a 2022 Bombay High Court (Nagpur Bench) order that banned public feeding and required adopters to take dogs home—asserting that such rules violate statutory rights and compassionate duties.

Conclusion

Feeding community dogs intersects with animal rights, public safety, and civic coexistence. The ABC Rules, 2023, strike a legal and ethical balance between compassion and community order. Sterilisation and designated feeding are not only humane solutions but also public health imperatives. Going forward, increased awareness, community dialogue, and strict adherence to legal norms are vital to avoid polarisation and ensure harmonious urban living.

U.S. Designation of The Resistance Front (TRF)

  • 22 Jul 2025

In News:

India’s sustained diplomatic campaign against cross-border terrorism received a significant fillip with the United States designating The Resistance Front (TRF) as a Foreign Terrorist Organization (FTO) and a Specially Designated Global Terrorist (SDGT). The decision, announced by U.S. Secretary of State Marco Rubio, marks a strong step in countering global terror networks and reaffirms the deepening Indo-U.S. cooperation in counter-terrorism.

The TRF is widely recognized as a proxy outfit of the Pakistan-based Lashkar-e-Taiba (LeT), formed soon after the abrogation of Article 370 in 2019. Projecting itself as an indigenous, secular “resistance” movement, TRF has sought to legitimize militancy under a veneer of local identity while continuing to rely on the operational, logistical, and financial support of LeT and Pakistan’s Inter-Services Intelligence (ISI). Its rebranding strategy is aimed at evading scrutiny by international watchdogs such as the Financial Action Task Force (FATF).

TRF has claimed responsibility for several high-profile terror attacks in Jammu and Kashmir, including the Pahalgam attack in April 2025, which killed 26 tourists. Other attacks attributed to it include the Ganderbal killings (October 2024), Reasi bus attack (June 2024), and a 2020 shooting in Lal Chowk, Srinagar. Its leadership, including current chief Sheikh Sajjad Gul and spokesperson Ahmad Khalid, operate largely from Pakistani soil.

The group also runs an elaborate digital propaganda and recruitment ecosystem. Portals like KashmirFight and Jhelum Media House disseminate extremist narratives, claim responsibility for attacks, and operate as fronts for psychological operations and radicalization. These digital tools further complicate counter-terrorism efforts, allowing TRF to recruit and spread misinformation under the guise of human rights advocacy.

India banned TRF under the Unlawful Activities Prevention Act (UAPA), 1967, in January 2023, recognizing its existential threat to national security. India has consistently provided evidence of TRF’s linkages with LeT and other Pakistan-backed outfits like Jaish-e-Mohammed (JeM) in its submissions to the UN 1267 Sanctions Committee, responsible for imposing sanctions on terror-linked entities.

The U.S. designation of TRF as an FTO and SDGT is not just symbolic. It imposes concrete legal and financial restrictions, making it illegal for U.S. individuals or entities to provide support to the group. The move mandates American financial institutions to block any assets tied to TRF and enables further actions through the Office of Foreign Assets Control (OFAC). These actions aim to globally isolate the outfit and can also trigger secondary sanctions against foreign entities that deal with it.

India has welcomed this move, calling it a “strong affirmation” of India-U.S. cooperation in the fight against terrorism. The Ministry of External Affairs (MEA) emphasized that such steps are vital to dismantle terror infrastructure and hold proxy actors accountable. The decision also underscores a growing international consensus on the need for zero tolerance towards terrorism.

This development marks a pivotal moment in India’s counter-terror diplomacy and reinforces the need for global synergy in combating the evolving threat of state-sponsored and hybrid terrorism.

The Need to Protect India’s Linguistic Secularism

  • 20 Jul 2025

In News:

India’s identity as a democratic and pluralistic society rests not only on its religious diversity but also on its remarkable linguistic heterogeneity. According to the 2011 Census, India is home to 121 languages and 270 mother tongues, with 22 languages recognized under the Eighth Schedule of the Constitution. This linguistic diversity forms a critical part of India’s secular ethos, often overshadowed by the more frequently discussed religious dimension of secularism.

Unlike the Western model of secularism, which advocates a strict separation between religion and state, India’s secularism is inclusive and interventionist. It allows the state to engage positively in ensuring equality among different religious and linguistic groups. The Indian state does not privilege any single religion or language but guarantees all communities the right to preserve their cultural and linguistic identity.

This commitment is constitutionally enshrined. Article 343 declares Hindi in Devanagari script as the official language of the Union, but also provides space for states to choose their own official languages. Article 29 guarantees every section of citizens the right to conserve their distinct language, script, or culture. The Eighth Schedule ensures recognition and development support for 22 scheduled languages, while allowing the space for inclusion of others over time. This decentralized and accommodating approach prevents linguistic hegemony while nurturing India’s cultural mosaic.

However, recent incidents of language-based violence and exclusion — such as attacks on non-Marathi speakers in Maharashtra — signal growing tensions rooted in identity politics. While movements to preserve linguistic heritage are legitimate, they must not mutate into exclusionary practices. Historical resistance to Hindi imposition in Tamil Nadu and similar sentiments in Northeastern states stem from real concerns over cultural erasure and centralisation of linguistic power.

Such developments point to the misuse of linguistic identity as a political mobilization tool, undermining the foundational values of unity in diversity. The imposition of one language, directly or indirectly, poses a threat not just to federalism but also to the democratic fabric of the country. Language cannot be a tool for dominance; it must be a bridge for mutual respect and integration.

It is crucial to note that India does not have a national language, only an official language at the Union level. The Constitution deliberately avoids conferring national status to any language to prevent alienation and protect linguistic plurality. The respect for all languages, including non-scheduled ones and dialects, is central to India’s linguistic secularism.

Therefore, the responsibility lies with political parties, civil society, media, and educational institutions to nurture this ethos. The political class, in particular, must refrain from exploiting linguistic emotions for electoral gains. Instead, they should promote policies that encourage multilingual education, cultural exchange, and preservation of regional languages.

In an increasingly globalized and polarized world, India’s linguistic secularism must be viewed not as a passive principle but as an active commitment — essential for national unity, inclusive development, and constitutional morality. Only by valuing each language equally can India uphold the promise of democratic citizenship and cultural dignity for all.

Safe Harbour Doctrine

  • 21 Jul 2025

In News:

In a significant development shaping India’s digital governance framework, the Centre has defended its expanded use of Section 79 of the Information Technology Act and the Sahyog Portal to compel online intermediaries—including social media platforms—to remove or disable unlawful content. The debate, currently before the Karnataka High Court, arises from a challenge by platform X (formerly Twitter), which terms the Sahyog Portal a "censorship portal."

Safe Harbour vs. Government Oversight: The Legal Framework

Section 79 of the IT Act grants “safe harbour” protection to intermediaries from liability over third-party content, provided they act upon government takedown notices. However, failure to comply may lead to the withdrawal of this immunity. By contrast, Section 69A empowers the government to block content under specific grounds such as national security, public order, or foreign relations, in line with Article 19(2) of the Constitution, and backed by procedural safeguards.

Platform X argues that the Centre is bypassing Section 69A’s narrower and more legally constrained provisions by issuing de facto blocking orders under Section 79, without adequate procedural checks. This, it contends, infringes upon digital freedom of expression.

Sahyog Portal and the Government's Rationale

The Sahyog Portal, developed under the Indian Cyber Crime Coordination Centre (I4C) of the Ministry of Home Affairs, has onboarded 38 intermediaries as of March 2025—including Google, Microsoft, Amazon, Telegram, and YouTube. Meta has allowed API-based integration, while X has refused, citing legal overreach.

Defending its stance, the government argues that algorithmic content curation systems—unlike traditional editorial processes—operate at unprecedented speed and scale, without human oversight or transparency. These systems can amplify harmful or misleading content, targeting users individually in ways that traditional media cannot. Moreover, the anonymity and pseudonymity offered by online platforms, along with encrypted messaging, encourage unaccountable and extreme speech, posing serious risks to public order.

Algorithmic Curation vs. Traditional Editorial Control

The government contends that in traditional media, editors and broadcasters act as gatekeepers, ensuring a degree of content quality and moderation. Social media algorithms, however, lack such discretion, often functioning without clear standards, and thereby require regulatory intervention distinct from that applied to conventional media.

This foundational difference, the government argues, justifies a broader interpretive scope under Section 79 to address a wider class of “unlawful content” that may not directly fall under the remit of Section 69A but still demands intervention.

Balancing Freedom of Speech with Public Interest

At the heart of the issue lies the constitutional balancing of free speech (Article 19(1)(a)) with reasonable restrictions (Article 19(2)). While Section 69A aligns with specific constitutional limitations, the government argues that a broader net under Section 79 is needed to tackle content harmful to national security, social harmony, and public order—even if it doesn’t squarely fall within 19(2).

In its submission, the Centre emphasizes that the matter should be viewed not only from the lens of content creators but also from the rights and safety of content recipients and society at large.

Conclusion

This case marks a crucial intersection of digital freedom, platform responsibility, and state regulation. The government's bid to reinterpret Section 79 reflects the growing challenges of algorithmic governance in the digital era. The Karnataka High Court’s verdict will likely set a precedent in defining the limits of intermediary liability, scope of safe harbour, and the State’s role in regulating online content—all central to India’s evolving digital constitutionalism.

Cybersecurity Threats from Southeast Asia: Rising Cyber Frauds Targeting India

  • 19 Jul 2025

Introduction

Cybersecurity has emerged as a critical component of national security in the digital era. India, with its expanding digital footprint, is increasingly facing threats from transnational cybercrime syndicates. A recent analysis by the Ministry of Home Affairs (MHA) reveals a staggering Rs 1,000 crore loss per month due to cyber frauds originating from Southeast Asian countries, posing a serious threat to the Indian economy and internal security.

Magnitude of the Threat

  • According to the Indian Cyber Crime Coordination Centre (I4C) under MHA: In the first five months of 2025, cyber frauds caused a total loss of around Rs 7,000 crore.
  • Over 50% of the losses were attributed to networks operating from Cambodia, Myanmar, Laos, Thailand, and Vietnam.

Modus Operandi

  • Fraud Centers: Operate from high-security scam compounds, primarily in Cambodia (45 identified), Laos (5), and Myanmar (1), allegedly run by Chinese operators.
  • Forced Labor: Trafficked individuals, including more than 5,000 Indians, were reportedly forced to carry out cyber frauds under coercion.
  • Types of Scams:
    • Stock trading/investment scams
    • Digital arrest scams
    • Task-based/investment-based scams

Recruitment Networks and Source States

  • Recruitment agents operate largely from:
    • Maharashtra (59 agents)
    • Tamil Nadu (51)
    • Jammu & Kashmir (46)
    • Uttar Pradesh (41)
    • Delhi (38)
  • Travel Routes Tracked:
    • Routes include India to Cambodia via Dubai, China, Thailand, Vietnam, Singapore, etc.
    • Cities involved include Mumbai, Chennai, Delhi, Jaipur, Lucknow, Kochi, and Kolkata.

Government Response

  • Diplomatic Engagement:
    • Cambodian officials met Indian authorities (MEA and Central agencies) in Delhi.
    • Requested geographical coordinates of scam centers for local enforcement action.
  • Inter-Ministerial Committee: Formed to identify systemic loopholes in banking, telecom, and immigration sectors.
  • CBI Investigation: Registered FIRs against PoS agents involved in issuing ghost SIM cards aiding cybercrime.

Wider Implications

  • Global Human Trafficking Concern: Victims from Africa, East Asia, South Asia, Central Asia, Europe, and the Americas have been found in these compounds.
  • Transnational Organized Crime: The scams highlight growing cooperation between international criminal networks, using digital tools to exploit vulnerabilities across borders.

Conclusion

The scale and transnational nature of cyber frauds targeting India from Southeast Asia require a coordinated national and international response. Strengthening cyber intelligence, cross-border cooperation, digital infrastructure resilience, and public awareness are vital to securing India's cyberspace. Proactive steps such as bilateral cooperation, inter-agency coordination, and targeted enforcement are crucial to mitigate this growing internal security threat.

Protection of Civil Rights (PCR) Act

  • 18 Jul 2025

Context:

The Protection of Civil Rights (PCR) Act, 1955, a legislative tool to eliminate untouchability as mandated under Article 17 of the Indian Constitution, remains grossly under-implemented. The 2022 report by the Ministry of Social Justice and Empowerment paints a dismal picture of enforcement, revealing structural deficiencies in India's pursuit of social justice, cultural preservation, and inclusive development.

Despite the Act’s objective of eradicating untouchability—manifested in denial of access to public spaces, religious institutions, and essential services—there has been a sharp decline in First Information Reports (FIRs) over the years. Only 13 cases were registered in 2022, compared to 24 in 2021 and 25 in 2020. Alarmingly, no State or Union Territory has declared any area as “untouchability-prone,” raising concerns over administrative apathy and underreporting.

The judicial and police response has been equally lackluster. Out of 1,242 cases pending trial under the PCR Act in 2022, over 97% remain unresolved. Out of 31 cases disposed that year, 30 ended in acquittal, with only one conviction, reflecting a near-total failure in ensuring accountability. Similarly, of the 51 cases pending with police, chargesheets were filed in just 12. This highlights serious procedural and evidentiary lapses, lack of capacity, and perhaps, implicit biases in law enforcement and judicial systems.

In contrast, cases under the Scheduled Castes and Scheduled Tribes (Prevention of Atrocities) Act, 1989 (PoA Act) have shown an increasing trend, suggesting better awareness and enforcement. This disparity calls for equal policy attention to the PCR Act, especially considering its centrality in upholding the constitutional promise of equality and dignity.

What makes the findings even more concerning is their impact on India’s cultural and linguistic diversity. Many communities that are victims of untouchability also belong to linguistic or tribal minorities. These include speakers of endangered languages, regional dialects, and culturally distinct groups. The systemic neglect of untouchability cases undermines not just civil rights but also the preservation of traditional knowledge systems, oral histories, and linguistic secularism enshrined in Article 29 of the Constitution.

The absence of proactive policy measures—such as identification of vulnerable zones, awareness programs, legal aid, or cultural inclusion initiatives—threatens the composite culture of the nation. Moreover, the decline in registration indicates a lack of trust in legal redressal mechanisms and failure to empower marginalized communities through effective grievance redressal.

To address these challenges, a multi-pronged strategy is essential. This includes:

  • Strengthening special courts and fast-tracking trials under the PCR Act.
  • Capacity-building and sensitization programs for police and judiciary.
  • Empowering local governance institutions to report and act on untouchability practices.
  • Implementing UNESCO-backed initiatives to preserve linguistic heritage.
  • Introducing language training and interpretation services to reduce communication gaps.
  • Leveraging multilingual education policies to integrate cognitive development with cultural preservation.

In conclusion, the declining efficacy of the PCR Act undermines India's constitutional ethos of equality, fraternity, and cultural integration. A robust, inclusive, and culturally sensitive legal framework is imperative to protect the rights of the marginalized and to uphold the pluralistic spirit of the Indian nation.

Trump’s Tariff Threats and BRICS

  • 17 Jul 2025

In News:

The recent 17th BRICS Summit in Rio de Janeiro (2025) has reignited tensions between the United States and the expanding BRICS grouping. Former U.S. President Donald Trump, who remains a dominant figure in Republican politics, has threatened to impose 10% tariffs on all BRICS nations, framing the bloc as a challenge to American economic hegemony. These threats signal a continuation of Trump's confrontational approach to global trade and reflect deeper anxieties about de-dollarisation efforts emerging from the Global South.

Trump’s concerns stem from what he perceives as an "anti-American" orientation of BRICS. The group's discussions around a common currency, increased use of national currencies, and the development of alternative cross-border payment systems have been interpreted by Trump as an attempt to weaken the U.S. dollar’s central role in international finance. This fear has been intensified post the Russia-Ukraine conflict, which saw several countries reconsider their reliance on dollar-based systems like SWIFT, particularly after Russia’s exclusion from them due to Western sanctions.

In response, Trump has floated punitive trade measures: a 10% tariff on BRICS-aligned nations, 50% on Brazil for its domestic political stance, and 30% on South Africa citing trade disputes and minority rights issues. He is also advocating for the Sanctioning Russia Act, 2025, which proposes an astronomical 500% tariff on Russian oil and related products. Such a move could disrupt oil-importing economies like India and China, both of which have deepened energy ties with Moscow in recent years.

However, BRICS leaders have clarified that de-dollarisation is not about dismantling the dollar-based order but about financial diversification and resilience. The Rio Declaration 2025 stopped short of any anti-U.S. language, instead emphasizing interoperability of payment systems and equitable reform of global institutions. This demonstrates a cautious diplomatic approach aimed at asserting economic agency without triggering direct confrontation.

India, in particular, has taken a measured stance. In Parliament, the Indian government distanced itself from suggestions that BRICS was pursuing an aggressive de-dollarisation agenda. External Affairs Minister S. Jaishankar reiterated that India has no official policy to replace the U.S. dollar, and that BRICS decisions are not monolithic but reflect the diversity of its member states. This is crucial, given India’s strategic balancing between the West and the Global South.

Founded in 2009 amid discontent with Western-dominated financial structures, BRICS has expanded to include 10 members, with new entrants like Iran, Egypt, Ethiopia, UAE, and Indonesia. While united by frustration over Western dominance, internal diversity—economic, political, and strategic—ensures that BRICS does not function as a rigid anti-West alliance.

At the Rio summit, BRICS condemned unilateral tariff practices and expressed concern over attacks on Iranian civilian infrastructure, showcasing solidarity without directly naming the U.S. or its allies. This signals a shift toward multilateral diplomacy grounded in soft balancing rather than confrontation.

In conclusion, while Trump’s tariff threats underline U.S. anxiety over shifting global power structures, BRICS’ response suggests a nuanced recalibration of the international order—not a radical overhaul. For India, the challenge remains to harness BRICS for strategic autonomy without undermining its multi-aligned foreign policy posture.

AI 171 Crash

  • 16 Jul 2025

In News:

On June 12, 2025, Air India flight AI 171, a Boeing 787-8 Dreamliner en route from Ahmedabad to London Gatwick, tragically crashed shortly after takeoff, killing 260 people—including 19 on the ground—in what is now the deadliest aviation disaster involving an Indian airline in four decades. A preliminary report by the Aircraft Accident Investigation Bureau (AAIB) has placed the aircraft’s fuel control switches at the centre of the crash investigation.

Fuel Control Switches: Function and Design

Fuel control switches are critical safety components that regulate the flow of fuel to aircraft engines. On a Boeing 787, equipped in this case with two GE engines, these switches are located below the thrust levers and are spring-loaded and bracket-protected to prevent accidental activation. They require a deliberate two-step manual action—lifting the switch and moving it between two positions:

  • RUN: Allows fuel flow for engine operation.
  • CUTOFF: Cuts fuel flow, effectively shutting down the engine.

These switches are typically used on the ground for engine startup and shutdown, and only in-flight during an engine failure or critical damage. Modern twin-engine aircraft like the 787 are capable of continuing flight on a single engine, making the simultaneous use of both switches highly unusual and dangerous.

Sequence of Events: Preliminary Findings

According to flight data from the Flight Data Recorder (FDR) and Cockpit Voice Recorder (CVR), both engine fuel control switches were moved from ‘RUN’ to ‘CUTOFF’ within seconds of each other, shortly after takeoff. This led to simultaneous loss of thrust in both engines. Moments later, both switches were returned to the ‘RUN’ position, but by then the aircraft had lost critical altitude and control.

The cockpit recording captured one pilot asking the other why the fuel was cut off. The other responded that he had not done so. The pilots—Captain Sumeet Sabharwal with over 8,600 flying hours on the 787, and Co-pilot Clive Kundar with 1,100 hours—were both adequately experienced.

Technical and Human Factors under scrutiny

Aviation experts argue that accidental activation of both switches is nearly impossible due to the stop-lock mechanism and protective brackets. However, speculation persists over a possible technical malfunction, human error, or incorrect engine identification. A theory suggests that one engine may have failed and the pilots mistakenly shut down the working engine, though this remains unconfirmed.

Attention has also turned to the switches themselves, manufactured by Honeywell (Part No. 4TL837-3D). A 2018 FAA advisory had flagged potential issues with their locking mechanisms but did not mandate corrective action. Air India reportedly did not conduct voluntary checks, raising questions about maintenance protocols.

Conclusion:

The AI 171 crash highlights critical lapses in cockpit procedures, technical maintenance, and possibly design flaws. It underscores the need for stringent implementation of safety advisories, thorough crew training, and the use of redundant safety mechanisms. As investigations continue, the incident may prompt global regulatory reviews on cockpit ergonomics and fuel system safety protocols, reinforcing the imperative of fail-safe systems in civil aviation.

Maharashtra’s Special Public Security Bill, 2024

  • 15 Jul 2025

In News:

The Maharashtra Special Public Security Bill, 2024, passed by the Legislative Assembly, aims to combat “urban Maoism” and left-wing extremism (LWE). Modeled on the Unlawful Activities (Prevention) Act (UAPA), the Bill introduces stringent provisions to identify and dismantle urban support networks aiding insurgents. However, it has generated significant legal and civil liberty concerns due to its vague definitions, broad executive powers, and pre-trial punitive measures.

Understanding Urban Maoism

Urban Maoism refers to the strategy of the banned CPI (Maoist) to infiltrate cities and mobilise intellectuals, students, professionals, and minorities through NGOs, protests, and media campaigns. This ideology, outlined in the 2004 document Strategies and Tactics of Indian Revolution (STIR), aims to build urban logistical support for rural armed struggles while operating under the legal guise of activism, journalism, or civil society work. Notable examples include the Elgar Parishad case (2018), where activists were arrested for alleged Maoist links following Bhima Koregaon violence.

Key Provisions of the Bill

The Bill allows the government to declare an organisation “unlawful” and penalises individuals associated with it—whether through membership, fundraising, or aiding operations. It defines “unlawful activity” as interference with public order, use of criminal force against officials, incitement to disobedience of the law, or even disrupting communication systems. Punishments range from 2 to 7 years of imprisonment along with fines. All offences are cognizable and non-bailable.

A major provision allows pre-trial forfeiture of property belonging to accused persons or organisations, with only 15 days’ notice. While the affected party can appeal to the High Court within 30 days, the initial declaration is confirmed only by an Advisory Board comprising High Court-qualified persons.

Constitutional and Legal Concerns

Civil society and legal experts argue that the Bill risks criminalising legitimate dissent and peaceful protest, given its ambiguous phrasing like “practising disobedience” or “generating apprehension in the public.” Unlike the UAPA, which requires a higher threshold for proving threat to national integrity, Maharashtra’s Bill introduces lower benchmarks that could conflate dissent with sedition.

The pre-trial forfeiture of property mirrors provisions in the Prevention of Money Laundering Act (PMLA), yet lacks equivalent safeguards like adjudication by a quasi-judicial body. Moreover, principles of natural justice, such as presumption of innocence and burden of proof on the state, appear diluted.

Broader Implications

While the state’s intent to counter urban LWE influence is valid—especially given the shift of Maoist strategies from forested hinterlands to urban centres—the means adopted pose risks to constitutional rights and federal norms. The legislation exemplifies a growing trend where extraordinary laws designed for national threats are adapted at the state level, potentially disrupting the balance between security imperatives and civil liberties.

Conclusion

The Maharashtra Special Public Security Bill reflects the complex challenge of safeguarding national security while upholding democratic freedoms. Any future enactment must incorporate judicial oversight, clearer definitions, and proportionate safeguards to ensure that the fight against extremism does not erode the fundamental rights enshrined in the Constitution.

India’s Reinvigorated Outreach to the Global South

  • 14 Jul 2025

In News:

India’s foreign policy has witnessed a dynamic recalibration with Prime Minister Narendra Modi’s expansive visit to Brazil, Ghana, Trinidad & Tobago, Argentina, and Namibia. While participation in the BRICS Summit in Rio de Janeiro was central, the broader aim was to deepen India’s leadership role within the Global South — a diverse group of developing nations in Asia, Africa, Latin America, and Oceania.

Reclaiming Leadership in the Global South

India has long championed the cause of the Global South, grounded in its non-aligned foreign policy legacy and postcolonial solidarity. This identity was rejuvenated through:

  • Hosting two Voice of the Global South Summits (2023, 2024), giving a platform to over 125 developing countries.
  • Advocating for and securing African Union’s permanent membership in the G20 during its presidency, symbolizing India’s commitment to an inclusive global governance architecture.

These initiatives portray India as a bridge between the Global North and South, positioning itself as a leader that represents the interests of the voiceless in multilateral forums.

Diplomatic Course Correction: The Gaza Challenge

India’s explicit support for Israel during the Gaza conflict (post-October 7, 2023) triggered discomfort among many Global South countries, especially in the Arab and African regions that strongly support the Palestinian cause. Consequences included:

  • India’s defeat to Pakistan in the UNESCO Executive Board Vice-Chair election.
  • Limited engagement from key Global South nations in the Second Voice of the Global South Summit.

Recognizing these diplomatic setbacks, India recalibrated its stance. At the BRICS Foreign Ministers’ Meeting (2024) and the 2025 Rio BRICS Summit, India joined in expressing grave concern over Israeli military operations in Gaza and condemned strikes on Iran, signaling a return to its balanced, multivector diplomacy.

Strategic Gains at BRICS: Securing Core Interests

India also used the BRICS platform to secure vital national interests. The BRICS Leaders’ Declaration condemned the Pahalgam terror attack in Kashmir and called for combating terrorism, including cross-border terror financing. This was diplomatically significant, given:

  • China’s prior reluctance to name Pakistan-based terror actors.
  • BRICS’ growing relevance in shaping global narratives.

India’s success in inserting its security concerns into multilateral dialogue marks a maturing assertiveness in diplomacy.

Countering China, Offering Alternatives

India’s proactive outreach also serves to counter China’s rising influence in the Global South. Unlike Beijing’s Belt and Road Initiative, India emphasizes:

  • Transparent, demand-driven development assistance.
  • Capacity-building and digital partnerships.
  • Ethical, sustainable models of cooperation.

Through initiatives like International Solar Alliance, Digital Public Infrastructure partnerships, and humanitarian aid, India offers a democratic, credible alternative to Chinese financing and infrastructure diplomacy.

Conclusion:

India’s current foreign policy trajectory reflects a delicate balancing act—protecting strategic partnerships with global powers while retaining the trust of fellow developing nations. As global multipolarity deepens, India’s role as a consensus builder, ethical voice, and pragmatic actor will shape its success in becoming the leading voice of the Global South.

UNFCCC and the Crisis of Credibility in Global Climate Governance

  • 13 Jul 2025

In News:

The United Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change (UNFCCC), signed in 1992 at the Earth Summit in Rio de Janeiro and enforced from 1994, is the central international treaty to combat climate change by limiting greenhouse gas emissions. With 198 member countries and an annual Conference of the Parties (COP), the UNFCCC provides the primary forum for negotiating global climate action. However, in recent years, its credibility has come under scrutiny due to persistent inaction, structural inefficiencies, and failure to deliver climate justice—particularly for developing nations.

The Credibility Crisis: Key Concerns

A major source of discontent is the failure of developed countries to meet both emission reduction targets and financial commitments under the Paris Agreement and earlier protocols. Vulnerable nations—especially small island developing states (SIDS) and low-income countries—have raised concerns over exclusion from critical negotiations, lack of accountability from wealthier nations, and limited progress on equity and justice.

The withdrawal of the United States from the Paris Agreement during the Trump administration further damaged trust in the multilateral climate process, reinforcing perceptions of the UNFCCC as an ineffective and increasingly irrelevant institution.

Bonn Meeting and Brazil’s Role Ahead of COP30

The mid-year climate talks in Bonn (June 2025) aimed to restore faith in the negotiation process ahead of COP30, to be hosted by Brazil. Brazil has taken an active leadership role by proposing a comprehensive 30-point reform agenda, seeking to make negotiations more inclusive, transparent, and results-oriented.

Proposed Structural Reforms

Key reform suggestions emerging from Brazil and other stakeholders include:

  • Streamlining negotiation procedures by eliminating repetitive agenda items, reducing negotiation time, and capping delegation sizes to prevent overcrowding and domination by rich nations.
  • Restricting host eligibility: Proposals advocate barring countries with poor climate records—particularly fossil fuel-reliant nations—from hosting COPs. This follows criticism over COP28 (UAE) and COP29 (Azerbaijan).
  • Mainstreaming climate discourse across other international platforms, such as the UN General Assembly, IMF, and multilateral banks, to enable faster action through complementary mechanisms.

The Unmet Climate Finance Pledge

Climate finance remains the most contentious issue. Under the Paris Agreement, developed countries had pledged $100 billion per year by 2020 to support climate action in developing countries. However, at the Baku (COP29) meeting, a new proposal of $300 billion per year starting 2035 fell far short of the actual requirement—estimated at $1.3 trillion annually.

Developing countries, especially BRICS and G77, have demanded urgent action to define a new climate finance goal. They stressed the need for finance to be predictable, equitable, and accessible to all vulnerable nations.

Role of Civil Society and Observers

There is growing demand from civil society organizations and observer groups for reforms to ensure greater transparency, restrict the influence of fossil fuel lobbies, and democratize the negotiation process.

Conclusion

While significant reforms may face resistance due to entrenched geopolitical and economic interests, Brazil’s proactive approach marks a turning point. If supported, these efforts could rejuvenate the UNFCCC process by embedding inclusivity, accountability, and justice at its core—essential for addressing the escalating global climate crisis.

Tamil Nadu’s TB Death Prediction Model

  • 12 Jul 2025

In News:

Tamil Nadu has become the first Indian state to integrate a predictive model for tuberculosis (TB) deaths into its State TB Elimination Programme. This initiative, in partnership with the Indian Council of Medical Research’s National Institute of Epidemiology (ICMR-NIE), marks a significant step in India’s public health innovation, aimed at reducing TB-related mortality through data-driven, early intervention strategies.

The model has been embedded within the existing TB SeWA (Severe TB Web Application) platform, launched under the state’s Tamil Nadu Kasanoi Erappila Thittam (TN-KET), a differentiated care initiative operational since 2022. It enables real-time triaging and prioritisation of severely ill patients at the time of diagnosis, improving early access to hospital care—a crucial step, as over 70% of TB deaths occur within the first two months of treatment.

How the Predictive Model Works

The model is based on five triage indicators:

  • Body Mass Index (BMI)
  • Pedal oedema (foot/ankle swelling)
  • Respiratory rate
  • Oxygen saturation
  • Ability to stand without support

Healthcare workers input these variables into the TB SeWA app, which calculates a predicted probability of death, ranging from 10% to 50% for severely ill patients. For those not flagged, the risk ranges between 1% and 4%. This objective risk estimate empowers frontline health workers to make urgent and informed decisions about hospital admission and care.

Data used for model development included nearly 56,000 TB patients diagnosed in Tamil Nadu’s public health facilities between July 2022 and June 2023. Notably, 10–15% of adults with TB in the state were found to be severely ill at diagnosis. The model's predictive accuracy has been validated as equivalent to the national Ni-kshay portal, which captures a broader range of data but with a delay of up to three weeks—often too late for timely intervention.

Implementation and Impact

The model is now functional across all 2,800 public health facilities in Tamil Nadu, from Primary Health Centres to Medical Colleges. The average time from diagnosis to hospital admission is already around one day, but delays of 3–6 days still occur in about 25% of cases. By introducing objective, real-time risk assessment, the model aims to eliminate such delays and further reduce early TB deaths.

The TN-KET initiative has shown promising results: nearly two-thirds of districts have documented reduced mortality and losses in the TB care cascade. Tamil Nadu remains the only Indian state to systematically record and act upon these five triage variables at the point of diagnosis.

National and Global Relevance

India carries the highest TB burden globally, with two TB-related deaths every three minutes, according to the WHO. Tamil Nadu’s model aligns with global findings, such as those from Ethiopia, identifying low body weight, age, and TB/HIV co-infection as key mortality predictors. Addressing these early improves outcomes significantly.

This innovation presents a scalable, replicable model for other Indian states and developing nations striving to eliminate TB by 2030, in line with WHO’s End TB Strategy and India’s National Strategic Plan.

The Role of ‘Invisible’ Trade in India’s Foreign Exchange Earnings

  • 11 Jul 2025

In News:

India's foreign trade landscape has undergone a fundamental transformation, with "invisible" trade—comprising services exports and private remittance inflows—emerging as a dominant contributor to foreign exchange earnings. Traditionally, international trade is associated with the export and import of physical goods. However, the increasing weight of intangibles such as services and remittances has positioned India as the “office of the world” in contrast to China’s role as the “factory of the world.”

Trends in India’s Visible vs Invisible Trade

India’s merchandise exports rose from $66.3 billion in 2003–04 to $456.1 billion in 2022–23, before dipping slightly to $441.8 billion in 2024–25. While goods exports have fluctuated with global economic cycles, invisibles have exhibited resilient and consistent growth.

  • Invisible receipts increased from $53.5 billion in 2003–04 to $233.6 billion in 2013–14, and further to $576.5 billion in 2024–25.
  • In 2024–25, invisible receipts exceeded merchandise exports by $135 billion, reversing the trend from a decade earlier.

Composition of Invisible Earnings

  • Services Exports:
    • Valued at $387.5 billion in 2024–25, up from $26.9 billion in 2003–04.
    • Software services remain dominant ($180.6 billion), but significant growth has also been noted in business, financial, and communication services ($118 billion).
  • Private Transfers (Remittances):
    • Amounted to $135.4 billion in 2024–25, up from $22.2 billion in 2003–04.
    • Reflects the export of Indian human capital, with inflows from expatriates, especially in the Gulf and North America.

Economic Significance

  • Current Account Management: India’s merchandise trade deficit ballooned to $287.2 billion in 2024–25, but this was substantially offset by a net invisible surplus of $263.8 billion, keeping the current account deficit at $23.4 billion, lower than 2013–14 levels.
  • Geopolitical Immunity: Invisible earnings have remained relatively insulated from global trade tensions, protectionist tariffs, and geopolitical shocks. Unlike goods trade, services have not been significantly impacted by events such as the pandemic or global conflicts.
  • Limited Policy Support, High Impact: Despite minimal reliance on FTAs, tariff negotiations, or production-linked incentives, invisibles have flourished—highlighting the natural comparative advantage India holds in the global services and remittances market.

Comparison with China

China recorded a merchandise trade surplus of $768 billion in 2024, but faced a deficit of $344.1 billion on the invisibles front. In contrast, India posted a services trade surplus of $188.8 billion, emphasizing its role as a global service hub rather than a manufacturing powerhouse.

Conclusion

India’s foreign trade narrative has shifted decisively towards intangible exports. With robust growth in services and remittances, invisibles have become the invisible hand stabilizing India’s external sector. For sustained macroeconomic resilience, policymakers must now institutionalize support for the services sector, facilitate human capital mobility, and leverage digital infrastructure to enhance India’s global footprint in knowledge-based trade.

AI-Based Warfare in the Agentic Age

  • 10 Jul 2025

In News:

Artificial Intelligence (AI) is transforming the character of warfare, ushering in an era of “agentic warfare—a paradigm where autonomous systems, not humans, are poised to dominate the battlefield. Military strategies today increasingly hinge on multi-domain operations (MDO) involving land, air, sea, cyber, and space, where decision-making speed, precision, and adaptability are crucial. AI is central to enabling this shift—but it comes with a critical caveat: energy dependency.

AI and the New Battlefield

Modern warfare relies on Big Data analytics, machine learning (ML), predictive modelling, and natural language processing (NLP)—tools that demand not only computational power but also massive energy inputs. Countries like China have already made significant strides. Its military, the People’s Liberation Army (PLA), is actively integrating AI into combat functions under the doctrine of “intelligentised warfare.” Applications range from automating artillery systems to deploying generative AI-enabled drones for radar targeting.

China’s AI developments, such as the DeepSeek model, complement battlefield deployments. Of concern to India is China’s support to Pakistan’s Centre of Artificial Intelligence and Computing (PAIC), which focuses on Cognitive Electronic Warfare. India’s Deputy Chief of Army Staff, Lt Gen Rahul Singh, revealed that Pakistan possibly used real-time Chinese satellite intelligence and AI analytics during Operation Sindoor.

India’s Response and Gaps

India was an early mover, establishing the DRDO’s Centre for Artificial Intelligence and Robotics (CAIR) in 1986 to develop AI applications for target recognition, navigation, logistics, and mine detection. However, the pace of deployment has lagged, especially compared to China. Lt Gen Amardeep Singh Aujla underlined the increasing intensity of warfare, emphasizing the necessity of C4ISR (Command, Control, Communications, Computers, Intelligence, Surveillance and Reconnaissance) and civil-military fusion to enhance readiness.

The Centre for Joint Warfare Studies (CENJOWS) notes the growing global use of AI in weapon systems, battlefield simulation, and cyber defence. For instance, Ukraine’s AI-powered drones have autonomously struck Russian oil facilities. Israel’s “Lavender” AI system has reportedly identified over 37,000 Hamas targets, exemplifying the real-time integration of AI in warfare.

Energy: The Hidden Backbone

While AI’s capabilities are evident, its energy appetite is equally significant. AI infrastructure—data centres, servers, and cooling systems—requires vast amounts of electricity, often from stable sources like nuclear energy. India’s current installed nuclear capacity (~7.5 GW) is starkly inadequate when compared to countries like South Korea (over 22 GW), limiting India's long-term AI defence potential.

Kris P. Singh, CEO of Holtec International, argues that Small Modular Reactors (SMRs) placed near AI data hubs could be the solution. He proposes co-locating SMRs with military or strategic data centres to power next-generation capabilities like drones, smart soldiers, and robotics. India's past policy to limit thermal power and insufficient storage in renewable energy has created grid instability, further compounding the challenge.

Way Forward

To remain strategically relevant, India must:

  • Accelerate AI adoption in defence through institutional synergy and private sector participation.
  • Invest in energy infrastructure, particularly clean, stable sources like SMRs.
  • Promote indigenous AI R&D, focusing on secure, sovereign data ecosystems.
  • Establish MDO doctrines incorporating AI, space, and cyber capabilities.

In the agentic age, the nation that combines AI mastery with robust energy capacity will define the future of warfare. India’s security strategy must urgently align with this reality.

India’s Emerging Equity Model

  • 09 Jul 2025

In News:

According to the World Bank’s latest estimates, India has emerged as the fourth most income-equal country in the world, registering a Gini Index of 25.5 in 2022–23. This significant milestone places India just behind the Slovak Republic, Slovenia, and Belarus, surpassing many advanced and developing economies in income equality.

This achievement is paralleled by a sharp decline in extreme poverty—from 16.2% in 2011–12 to 2.3% in 2022–23—with over 171 million people lifted out of poverty in the past decade. It reflects the combined impact of sustained economic growth and the Indian state’s proactive welfare architecture.

Understanding the Gini Index and India’s Ranking

The Gini Index measures income inequality on a scale from 0 (perfect equality) to 100 (maximum inequality). With a score of 25.5, India falls into the "moderately low inequality" bracket (25–30), indicating a fair distribution of income. This is in sharp contrast to countries like China (35.7) and the United States (41.8). India's position is particularly noteworthy given its population size and diversity.

Poverty Reduction as a Catalyst for Equality

A key driver of this improved equality has been the drastic reduction in poverty, based on the World Bank’s threshold of $2.15/day (PPP). The decline to 2.3% extreme poverty signals successful poverty alleviation through targeted welfare, representing one of the most remarkable social transitions globally in the last decade.

Government Schemes and Inclusive Interventions

India’s equity gains are not accidental but the result of well-designed and executed social policies, supported by digital infrastructure and targeted delivery.

1. Financial Inclusion and DBT

  • PM Jan Dhan Yojana enabled over 55 crore bank accounts, promoting financial access across rural and urban populations.
  • Aadhaar-linked Direct Benefit Transfers (DBT) reduced leakages, saving ?3.48 lakh crore by March 2023.

2. Health Security: Ayushman Bharat provides ?5 lakh insurance coverage, with over 41 crore beneficiaries enhancing access to secondary and tertiary healthcare.

3. Food Security: PM Garib Kalyan Anna Yojana (PMGKAY) ensured food availability to 80 crore people during COVID-19 and beyond, securing nutrition and resilience.

4. Livelihood Support: Stand-Up India and PM Vishwakarma Yojana support entrepreneurship, skilling and credit access for SCs, STs, women, and traditional artisans.

A Model of Equity-Oriented Growth

India has demonstrated that inclusive digital governance, if integrated with fiscal discipline and political will, can lead to tangible socioeconomic transformation. The convergence of growth, inclusion, and resilience sets a strong foundation for social equity.

A Social Welfare Department official aptly noted, “The Gini Index of 25.5 reflects real change—better access to jobs, food, healthcare, and dignity.”

Global Context and India’s Unique Approach

Unlike Scandinavian countries that rely on entrenched welfare states, India’s equality model stems from scalable digital infrastructure, direct cash transfers, and community-centric schemes. Among 167 countries surveyed, India’s outcome stands as a beacon for other developing nations striving to achieve balanced and sustainable development.

Global Drought Hotspots 2023–2025

  • 08 Jul 2025

In News:

Between 2023 and 2025, the world has witnessed one of the most extensive drought-induced crises in recorded history. According to the UN Convention to Combat Desertification (UNCCD) and the U.S. National Drought Mitigation Center (NDMC), droughts intensified by climate change, El Niño, and poor land and water management are triggering cascading failures in food, water, energy, and socio-economic systems across continents.

A Slow-Moving Catastrophe

Labelled as “slow-moving catastrophes,” these droughts have disrupted the lives of millions across Africa, the Mediterranean, Latin America, and Asia, creating a silent but widespread humanitarian emergency. In Eastern and Southern Africa, over 90 million people face acute hunger. Zimbabwe’s maize production declined by 70% in 2024, while Zambia's Kariba Dam fell to 7% capacity, resulting in 21-hour daily blackouts and the collapse of health and industrial services.

The Mediterranean region faces shrinking agriculture and groundwater reserves. Spain's olive oil production dropped by 50%, leading to price spikes across Europe. In Türkiye, groundwater depletion triggered over 1,600 sinkholes, raising alarm over infrastructure safety and aquifer depletion.

In the Amazon Basin, rivers reached record low levels, killing over 200 endangered dolphins and leaving Indigenous communities without drinking water. The Panama Canal, vital for global trade, saw daily ship transits fall from 38 to 24, forcing rerouting and delaying supply chains. Similarly, Southeast Asia, including India and Thailand, suffered drought-related disruptions in rice and sugar production, affecting global food prices.

Social Disintegration and Vulnerabilities

The report underscores how drought disproportionately affects women, children, and marginalized communities. In Ethiopia, child marriages doubled in drought-hit regions as families exchanged dowries for survival. Zimbabwe reported mass school dropouts due to hunger and sanitation challenges. In Somalia, 4.4 million people now face food crises, with 1.7 million children suffering from acute malnutrition.

India in the Drought Lens

India, though not as severely impacted, faces growing intra-seasonal monsoon variability. River basins like Krishna and Godavari endure recurrent droughts due to groundwater over-extraction, deforestation, and inefficient irrigation. Drought-prone states like Maharashtra, Rajasthan, and Karnataka are witnessing farmer distress, inflationary pressures, and internal migration.

 

Drivers and Consequences

The principal drivers include global warming, unsustainable land use, El Niño amplification, and poor governance. Drought is no longer a mere meteorological event but a multi-dimensional crisis affecting health, education, biodiversity, economy, and social stability. The OECD estimates droughts today cost twice as much as in 2000, with an expected rise of 35–110% by 2035.

Call to Action: Building Drought Resilience

The report calls for urgent global and national action:

  • Early Warning Systems: For real-time drought and impact monitoring.
  • Nature-Based Solutions: Restoring watersheds, adopting drought-resilient crops.
  • Drought-Resilient Infrastructure: Off-grid power, alternative water sources.
  • Gender-Sensitive Adaptation: Empowering women and girls during crises.
  • Transboundary Cooperation: Joint management of river basins and trade routes.
  • Financial Mobilization: Through platforms like IDRA for vulnerable nations.

Conclusion

Droughts are no longer sporadic natural phenomena; they are structural emergencies threatening the planet’s sustainability and human well-being. Without urgent investment in resilience, governance, and international cooperation, these creeping crises could become the defining climate emergency of the 21st century.

Employment-Linked Incentive (ELI) Scheme

  • 07 Jul 2025

In News:

The Government of India has approved the Employment-Linked Incentive (ELI) Scheme with an outlay of ?99,446 crore, aimed at promoting formal employment generation, particularly in the manufacturing sector. Announced in the 2024–25 Union Budget, the scheme is part of a broader employment strategy that includes internships, skill development, and youth engagement initiatives.

Key Features of the Scheme

The ELI scheme, operational from August 1, 2025 to July 31, 2027, targets the creation of over 3.5 crore jobs. Of these, 1.92 crore newly employed individuals are expected to benefit directly. It is being implemented through the Employees Provident Fund Organisation (EPFO).

For eligible new recruits earning up to ?1 lakh/month:

  • EPFO will transfer one month’s EPF wage (up to ?15,000) in two instalments—after 6 and 12 months of continuous service.
  • Part of the incentive will be deposited in a fixed savings instrument, withdrawable later by the employee.

Incentives for employers include:

  • ?3,000 per employee/month for two years for each new employee retained for at least six months.
  • For the manufacturing sector, this benefit may extend into the third and fourth years.

Who Benefits?

The scheme primarily benefits:

  • New entrants into the formal labour market.
  • Labour-intensive sectors, especially manufacturing.
  • Employers incentivized to sustain job creation.
  • Small businesses, if implementation is expanded inclusively.

Industry Response

The industry has largely welcomed the initiative. According to FICCI’s former president, it is an “innovative” step that rewards both employees and employers. The Confederation of Indian Industry (CII) noted its potential to reshape India’s employment architecture.

However, Laghu Udyog Bharati, representing micro and small businesses, emphasized the need to include units with less than 20 employees, which dominate India’s enterprise landscape. Entrepreneurs’ associations also called for simplified and direct reimbursement models linked to verified payroll data, particularly under the MSME Ministry.

Trade Union Perspectives

While the Bharatiya Mazdoor Sangh (BMS) cautiously endorsed the scheme, other central trade unions criticized it for allegedly favoring corporates. They compared it to the Production-Linked Incentive (PLI) Scheme of 2020, where funds reportedly failed to create jobs and ended up benefiting large firms. Unions have demanded expansion of social security coverage and improved quality of employment, rather than subsidizing private sector wage bills.

Concerns and Challenges

Key concerns include:

  • The role of EPFO, traditionally a custodian of worker savings, now being tasked with implementing a government-funded job creation scheme.
  • Lack of clarity on fund disbursement responsibilities, raising doubts over accountability and oversight.
  • Fear of misuse, given past precedents of incentive leakage.
  • The structural issue of economic slowdown and stagnant worker incomes, which the scheme doesn’t directly address.

Conclusion

The ELI Scheme is a bold intervention in India’s formal employment landscape, combining wage subsidies with retention incentives. However, for it to be truly transformative, it must ensure inclusive coverage, maintain transparency, and be integrated into a broader strategy that enhances domestic demand and quality of employment. As India aims for equitable economic growth, effective implementation and stakeholder trust will be critical to its success.

PM-POSHAN

  • 06 Jul 2025

In News:

The midday meal scheme, introduced a century ago by the Madras Municipal Corporation in 1925, has evolved into a cornerstone of India’s social welfare and education policy. Now known as PM-POSHAN (Pradhan Mantri Poshan Shakti Nirman), the scheme provides cooked meals to students up to Class 8 in government and aided schools. However, despite its proven benefits in enhancing enrolment, retention, and learning outcomes, the scheme continues to face serious implementation challenges across Indian states.

Originally launched nationwide in 1995 as the National Programme of Nutritional Support to Primary Education, the scheme was rebranded as PM-POSHAN for 2021–2026, with shared funding between the Centre and States. Yet, funding shortfalls, delayed disbursements, and logistical bottlenecks have undermined its effectiveness. In states like Kerala and Uttar Pradesh, headteachers report borrowing funds and delaying salaries to cover rising food and fuel costs. Teachers are forced to juggle between administrative duties and managing meals, often without adequate staff or infrastructure.

Tamil Nadu has emerged as a success story with the Chief Minister’s Breakfast Scheme launched in 2022, now reaching over 17.5 lakh students. The state also assesses students’ Body Mass Index (BMI), integrates Anganwadis for early nutrition, and prioritizes public investment in health and education, reflecting the Dravidian model. This has led to a measurable decline in malnutrition and school dropout rates, especially among girls.

In contrast, states like Bihar lag behind, with widespread complaints of mismanagement and food safety lapses. Caste-based discrimination further mars the scheme’s inclusive vision, with reports from both north and south India highlighting segregated seating and removal of cooks from marginalized communities due to social prejudice.

Despite PM-POSHAN’s intended goals, its design often reflects a one-size-fits-all approach, neglecting state-specific challenges. For example, nutrition gardens or IT-based monitoring systems remain tokenistic in under-resourced regions. The uniform allocation norms do not account for price inflation, regional dietary needs, or additional requirements like eggs or milk, leading to nutritional gaps.

Experts argue for a context-sensitive redesign. Dipa Sinha, a development economist, emphasizes that centrally sponsored schemes must account for states’ limited fiscal capacity, especially as most taxes are collected by the Union government. There is a need for increased central assistance and flexibility in fund allocation to match ground realities.

Moving forward, replicating best practices from Tamil Nadu, Kerala, and Odisha, promoting community-level engagement, and allowing NGOs to address psychosocial gaps can help strengthen the programme. Customizing menus based on local needs, ensuring timely fund flow, recruiting adequate staff, and addressing social discrimination are essential to achieve the dual goals of universal education and child nutrition.

Conclusion

PM-POSHAN, though visionary, struggles in its current form. To fulfill its true potential as a tool for social justice and inclusive development, it must shift from being a centrally driven subsidy programme to a locally empowered, child-centric nutrition model embedded within the education system.

A New BHARAT: Establishing India-Specific Parameters for Healthy Ageing

  • 05 Jul 2025

Introduction

As India advances toward becoming a super-aged society by the middle of this century, the focus must shift from merely increasing lifespan to enhancing healthspan—the period of life spent in good health. Recognising this, the Indian Institute of Science (IISc), Bengaluru, launched a pioneering research initiative titled BHARAT (Biomarkers of Healthy Aging, Resilience, Adversity, and Transitions). It aims to map physiological, genetic, environmental, and socio-economic indicators that define healthy ageing in the Indian context.

The Need for India-Specific Healthy Ageing Parameters

Global research in ageing has largely been Western-centric, leading to the development of diagnostic thresholds, biomarkers, and treatment regimes based on non-Indian populations. This lack of contextual relevance often results in misdiagnosis and inappropriate treatments in countries like India. For instance, biomarkers such as cholesterol, vitamin D, or C-reactive protein (CRP) may exhibit different baseline levels among Indians due to genetic, nutritional, and environmental factors, but are often interpreted using Western standards.

Furthermore, while life expectancy has increased globally, the incidence of age-related disorders like Parkinson’s and dementia is projected to rise sharply in India—by 168% and 200%, respectively, by 2050. Thus, there is an urgent need to identify early biomarkers that can predict organ deterioration before the onset of overt disease.

BHARAT Study: Objectives and Methodology

BHARAT is part of IISc’s Longevity India Programme, and seeks to establish a Bharat Baseline—a reference for what is physiologically normal for the Indian population across age groups. It will build a comprehensive, multidimensional database that includes:

  • Genomic biomarkers (genetic predisposition to diseases)
  • Proteomic and metabolic profiles (pathway-level health indicators)
  • Environmental and lifestyle factors (pollution exposure, dietary habits)

Crucially, it acknowledges that chronological age does not always match biological age, and seeks to develop more nuanced, organ-specific age markers that could enable preventive and personalised interventions.

Role of Artificial Intelligence

Given the complexity and volume of biological and lifestyle data, artificial intelligence (AI) and machine learning models are essential tools in this initiative. These technologies will aid in pattern recognition, risk prediction, and simulation of intervention outcomes, ultimately helping researchers select the most effective strategies before launching costly human trials.

Challenges and the Way Ahead

India’s vast genetic, geographic, and socio-economic diversity presents both opportunities and challenges. The BHARAT team faces hurdles such as:

  • Difficulty in recruiting healthy adult volunteers
  • Securing long-term public and private funding
  • Scaling the study to ensure pan-India representation

However, the potential impact is profound. By building an India-specific ageing dataset, BHARAT can influence the development of better diagnostics, public health policies, and preventive healthcare systems for an ageing population.

Conclusion

The BHARAT study marks a critical shift in India’s biomedical research priorities, focusing not only on longevity but on quality of life during ageing. As India prepares to navigate the challenges of demographic transition, initiatives like BHARAT will be instrumental in creating a resilient, inclusive, and health-aware society, rooted in evidence that reflects its own people.

Changing Patterns in Agricultural Output

  • 04 Jul 2025

In News:

The Ministry of Statistics and Programme Implementation (MoSPI) recently released the “Value of Output from Agriculture and Allied Sectors” report (June 2025), revealing significant structural changes in India’s agricultural production and consumption over the past decade. The data reflects a shift away from staple cereals toward high-value crops such as fruits, vegetables, and spices—mirroring broader socio-economic transformations.

Key Findings: Rise of High-Value Crops

The Gross Value of Output (GVO)—the total value of agricultural production before deducting input costs—highlights changing food habits and production priorities. Between 2011–12 and 2023–24, the GVO of several non-traditional crops rose sharply. For example:

  • Strawberries saw a 40-fold rise in GVO at constant prices (from ?1.32 crore to ?55.4 crore), and nearly 80-fold at current prices.
  • Pomegranate GVO quadrupled to ?9,231 crore.
  • Parmal (parwal) and pumpkin increased by 17 and 10 times, respectively.
  • Mushroom and dry ginger witnessed 3.5x and 285% growth, the latter aided by improved agro-processing infrastructure.

This transformation indicates increasing demand for horticultural and niche crops with higher returns, aligning with government focus on nutritional security and export diversification.

Declining Importance of Cereals

Contrasting the rise of high-value crops is the decline in cereal dominance. The share of cereals in agricultural GVO fell from 17.6% (2011–12) to 14.5% (2023–24). Simultaneously, consumption data shows cereals’ share in urban MPCE dropped from 6.61% to 3.74%, and in rural MPCE from 10.69% to 4.97% over the same period. This trend aligns with Engel’s Law, where rising incomes lead to a shift in spending from staples to diversified food categories.

Rising Animal Product Consumption

The share of meat in agricultural GVO increased from 5% to 7.5%, reflecting higher protein intake as incomes grew. However, its GVO growth (131%) was still lower than that of some horticultural produce like strawberry (4,000%).

Changing Consumption Patterns

Data from the 2023–24 Household Consumption Expenditure Survey (HCES) supports this structural shift. The share of fresh fruits in rural MPCE rose slightly from 2.25% to 2.66%, while in urban areas it slightly declined. Yet, a 2024 study co-authored by Shamika Ravi indicates broader accessibility, with the proportion of rural households consuming fresh fruits increasing from 63.8% to 90.3%, especially among the bottom 20% income group.

Policy and Economic Implications

This transition from staple grains to high-value crops is driven by technological advancements, shifting consumer preferences, nutritional awareness, export potential, and government support for crop diversification. It reflects a move toward a more resilient, market-oriented agricultural system.

However, challenges remain in ensuring equitable access to high-value markets, stabilizing prices, and addressing risks associated with monoculture trends.

Conclusion

The MoSPI data reveals a critical inflection point in Indian agriculture. While traditional staples are declining in prominence, the rise of high-value horticulture and livestock signals both economic opportunity and the need for targeted policy to support inclusive, nutrition-sensitive agricultural growth.

Conserving the Western Ghats

  • 03 Jul 2025

Context:

The Western Ghats, a UNESCO World Heritage Site and one of the world’s eight hottest biodiversity hotspots, stretch across six Indian states—Gujarat, Maharashtra, Goa, Karnataka, Kerala, and Tamil Nadu. Rich in endemic flora and fauna, they play a critical role in influencing the Indian monsoon, regulating climate, and sustaining major river systems like the Godavari, Krishna, and Kaveri. However, this ecologically sensitive region faces growing environmental and governance challenges.

Renowned ecologist Madhav Gadgil has strongly advocated for a community-led conservation model, citing the failures of top-down forest bureaucracy and the neglect of the Forest Rights Act (FRA), 2006. He argues that without empowering local communities, conservation efforts will remain ineffective.

Geological and Ecological Background

The Western Ghats are ancient, formed through Precambrian cratonic uplift and Deccan Traps volcanism over 600 million years ago. The western edge of the Deccan Plateau subsided post-Gondwana breakup, forming the escarpments we see today. Over time, monsoon-fed rivers carved deep valleys, resulting in the current terrain of lateritic plateaus and ridges.

With over 7,400 species—many of them endemic—the region is home to unique ecosystems. Yet, despite its ecological importance, conservation has suffered due to flawed governance, industrial exploitation, and neglect of community rights.

Challenges in Western Ghats Conservation

  • Flawed Forest Governance:Government agencies often rely on outdated and inflated forest data. For instance, Gadgil's 1975 study in Uttara Kannada revealed bamboo stocks were overestimated tenfold to justify resource extraction.
  • Industrial Pollution:Unregulated industries operate in fragile zones. The Grasim Rayon Factory in Kerala discharged mercury into the Chaliyar River, decimating fisheries and affecting tribal livelihoods.
  • Non-implementation of FRA (2006):Despite legal entitlements, Community Forest Rights (CFR) remain unimplemented in most districts, particularly in Kerala and Karnataka.
  • Monoculture Plantations:Replacement of native forests with eucalyptus and acacia has led to biodiversity loss, declining soil health, and reduced pollinator populations, as seen in Wayanad.
  • Forest Fires from Unsustainable Practices:Fire-based tendu leaf collection methods degrade forest cover. For instance, Gadchiroli and Karnataka have witnessed increased fire incidents.
  • Inaccessible Ecological Data:Forest data remains aggregated and delayed. Studies using NRSC and Global Forest Watch have exposed discrepancies in official forest cover claims.

Committee Recommendations

  • WGEEP (2011), led by Gadgil, advocated for Ecologically Sensitive Area (ESA) zoning, Gram Sabha-led conservation, and strict implementation of CFR.
  • The Kasturirangan Committee (2013) diluted these recommendations by reducing ESA coverage and favouring development-centric governance.

Way Forward

  • Implement CFR Provisions: E.g., Pachgaon in Maharashtra demonstrates how CFR-based governance can lead to sustainable bamboo harvesting and fire prevention.
  • Promote Democratic Decentralisation: Empowering Gram Sabhas, as in Kerala’s VSS model, ensures accountability and local participation.
  • Modernise Ecological Monitoring: Tools like Google Earth and Bhuvan offer real-time forest tracking, countering manipulated datasets.
  • Ban Unsustainable Industries in ESA: SC orders on mining bans in wildlife corridors must be enforced, especially in states like Goa and Kerala.
  • Support Biodiversity-Friendly Livelihoods: NTFP-based enterprises, eco-tourism, and agroforestry, like Wayanad tribal co-operatives selling organic turmeric and wild honey, can align conservation with income.

Conclusion

The Western Ghats are central to India’s ecological, hydrological, and cultural stability. Conservation rooted in community empowerment, transparent governance, and ecological integrity is essential. Only a democratic, decentralized, and data-driven model, as envisioned by Gadgil, can secure the future of this ecological treasure.

Statistical Report on Value of Output from Agriculture and Allied Sectors (2011–12 to 2023–24)

  • 02 Jul 2025

In News:

The National Statistics Office (NSO), under the Ministry of Statistics and Programme Implementation, released its annual publication, Statistical Report on Value of Output from Agriculture and Allied Sectors (2011–12 to 2023–24). This comprehensive report provides granular data on output values across crop, livestock, forestry, and fisheries sectors at both current and constant (2011–12) prices, offering crucial insights into trends, sectoral contributions, and regional dynamics in Indian agriculture.

Growth Trajectory and Sectoral Contributions

The Gross Value Added (GVA) of agriculture and allied sectors at current prices rose by 225%, from ?1,502 thousand crore in 2011–12 to ?4,878 thousand crore in 2023–24. At constant prices, the Gross Value of Output (GVO) increased by 54.6%, from ?1,908 thousand crore to ?2,949 thousand crore during the same period.

The crop sector remained the backbone of the agricultural economy, contributing ?1,595 thousand crore or 54.1% of the total GVO in 2023–24. Within this, cereals and fruits & vegetables together formed 52.5% of the crop output. Notably, paddy and wheat alone accounted for 85% of cereal GVO. Five states—Uttar Pradesh, Madhya Pradesh, Punjab, Telangana, and Haryana—contributed 53% of the total cereal output, with Uttar Pradesh maintaining its top position despite a decline in share from 18.6% to 17.2%.

Shifting Dynamics in Horticulture

The horticulture sector has witnessed dynamic changes. In fruits, banana (?47,000 crore) surpassed mango (?46,100 crore) in 2023–24, breaking mango’s longstanding dominance. In the vegetable group, potato retained its lead, with GVO rising from ?21,300 crore to ?37,200 crore between 2011–12 and 2023–24.

Floriculture emerged as a growing commercial interest, with its GVO nearly doubling from ?17,400 crore to ?28,100 crore. The shifts in leading states in the production of fruits, vegetables, and floriculture underscore regional diversification in agricultural growth.

Rise of Livestock and Allied Sectors

The livestock sector experienced substantial growth, with its GVO nearly doubling from ?488 thousand crore to ?919 thousand crore. While milk remained the dominant product, its share slightly decreased from 67.2% to 65.9%, whereas meat products increased their share from 19.7% to 24.1%.

In the condiments and spices category, Madhya Pradesh emerged as the top contributor with a 19.2% share, followed by Karnataka (16.6%) and Gujarat (15.5%).

The forestry and logging sector saw a moderate increase in GVO from ?149 thousand crore to ?227 thousand crore. Significantly, the share of industrial wood surged from 49.9% to 70.2%, indicating growing commercialization.

Emerging Importance of Fisheries

The fishing and aquaculture sector is becoming increasingly vital, with its contribution to total agricultural GVO rising from 4.2% to 7.0% over the period. While inland fish share declined from 57.7% to 50.2%, marine fish increased from 42.3% to 49.8%. States like West Bengal and Andhra Pradesh witnessed substantial structural shifts in fisheries production patterns.

China-Led Trilateral Nexus: A Strategic Challenge for India

  • 01 Jul 2025

Context:

In a significant development, China recently hosted the first China-Pakistan-Bangladesh trilateral dialogue in Kunming, following a similar China-Pakistan-Afghanistan meeting. These efforts signal Beijing’s strategic push to consolidate its influence in South Asia, creating new geopolitical challenges for India.

Understanding the Emerging Nexus

The trilateral arrangements—China-Pakistan-Bangladesh and China-Pakistan-Afghanistan—are part of China’s broader strategic framework to establish deeper regional roots. China drives the agenda, with Pakistan gaining strategic relevance, while Bangladesh and Afghanistan are drawn in for economic, political, and connectivity incentives.

Motivations Behind the Trilateralism

  • China aims to dilute India’s regional influence, expand the Belt and Road Initiative (BRI), and leverage Pakistan to complicate India's neighbourhood strategy.
  • Pakistan seeks Chinese economic and strategic backing to offset India, especially after facing diplomatic isolation globally.
  • Bangladesh and Afghanistan are attracted by Chinese infrastructure investment, diplomatic weight, and development assurances in a multipolar Asia.

Historical Context

  • 1962 Indo-China War: Set the foundation for Sino-Pakistan convergence as a counterweight to India.
  • 1965 Siliguri Strategy: Pakistan attempted to encircle India with support from China, Nepal, and East Pakistan, a strategy echoing today.
  • China’s Shielding at UNSC: Regular blocking of India’s attempts to designate Pakistan-based terrorists, such as Lashkar-e-Taiba operatives, at the United Nations.
  • Operation Sindoor, 2025: Pakistan deployed Chinese drones and radars; Beijing criticized India’s counterstrike, reaffirming its alliance.

Implications for India

  • Security Threats: China-Pakistan cooperation now gains a regional sheen, legitimizing their cross-border strategies, e.g., the Pahalgam attack (2025).
  • Diplomatic Setbacks: China’s increasing footprint in Dhaka and Kabul limits India’s traditional influence.
  • Strategic Encroachment: Enhanced trilateralism boosts BRI's presence in South Asia, undercutting India-led alternatives like BBIN or the Chabahar corridor.

Impact on South Asian Stability

  • Regional Polarization: Smaller nations are forced to balance between India and China, causing strategic fragmentation.
  • Risk of Proxy Conflicts: Chinese cover may embolden Pakistan’s use of cross-border terrorism.
  • Dilution of Regional Forums: SAARC and other platforms may become ineffective under Chinese influence.

Way Forward for India

  • Assert Strategic Redlines: India must clearly articulate consequences for neighbours compromising its sovereignty.
  • Deepen Regional Cooperation: Utilize BIMSTEC, IORA, and the Indo-Pacific frameworks to counterbalance Chinese presence.
  • Economic Diplomacy: Increase targeted investments, credit lines, and market access to offer credible alternatives to BRI.
  • Defence Engagement: Expand military and strategic ties with Bangladesh, Maldives, and Afghanistan.
  • Narrative Building: Promote India as a cooperative, non-hegemonic regional partner to counter Chinese narratives.

Conclusion
The China-led trilateral dialogues mark a recalibration in South Asia’s geopolitical landscape aimed at constraining India’s rise. India’s response must be multifaceted—merging strategic assertiveness with regional diplomacy and economic outreach. A confident and inclusive India can safeguard its interests and lead a stable, multipolar South Asian order.

Foreign Universities in India: A New Era in Higher Education

  • 30 Jun 2025

Context:

India is witnessing a transformative moment in its higher education sector with globally reputed foreign universities preparing to set up campuses within the country. Enabled by the UGC (Setting up and Operation of Campuses of Foreign Higher Educational Institutions in India) Regulations, 2023, and inspired by the vision of the National Education Policy (NEP) 2020, this move could reshape the academic landscape. Locations such as GIFT City (Gujarat) and Navi Mumbai have been identified as early sites for these institutions. As of mid-2025, seven universities from the UK, five from Australia, and one each from the US, Canada, and Italy have initiated or secured regulatory approvals.

Drivers of Foreign University Interest in India

  • Demographic and Economic Potential:India hosts over 40 million students in higher education, with a Gross Enrolment Ratio (GER) below 30% (AISHE 2021–22), indicating untapped potential. A growing urban middle class, rising aspirations, and the need for globally competitive education have made India an attractive destination.
  • Global Decline in Student Numbers:Countries in the Global North face declining domestic enrolments due to falling birth rates. In 2023, international students accounted for 22% in the UK, 24% in Australia, and 30% in Canada. Top U.S. universities reported up to 27% international enrolments, underscoring their reliance on overseas students for revenue.
  • Policy Tightening in Host Nations:Visa caps and policy restrictions in Australia, the UK, and Canada have constrained student inflows. Consequently, foreign institutions are exploring in-country campuses in emerging markets like India to maintain their global reach and financial sustainability.

Opportunities and Advantages

  • Academic Diversification: Indian students will gain access to internationally benchmarked curricula, faculty, and research ecosystems without the need to go abroad.
  • Cost-Effective Alternative: For students unable to afford international education, foreign campuses in India provide a more affordable and accessible option.
  • Quality Enhancement: The presence of foreign institutions could push Indian universities to raise academic standards through competition and collaboration.
  • Regional Education Hub: India may also attract students from South Asia and Africa, enhancing its regional soft power.

Challenges Ahead

  • Affordability: Tuition fees at foreign university campuses may still be beyond the reach of average Indian households, potentially limiting their impact to elite segments unless subsidized.
  • Mixed Global Precedents: Similar ventures in China and Southeast Asia have seen varied success, with some facing regulatory and financial hurdles.
  • Regulatory and Cultural Complexities: India’s bureaucratic processes, socio-cultural diversity, and policy uncertainties could pose operational challenges.
  • Modest Initial Scale: In the short term, student intake and institutional presence are expected to be limited, with success depending on market response and adaptability.

Regulatory Framework and Future Outlook

The UGC’s FHEI Regulations, 2023, provide foreign institutions with autonomy in curriculum design, faculty recruitment, admissions, and repatriation of surplus funds. Only top 500 globally ranked universities, or those with exceptional expertise in niche domains, are eligible. These reforms reflect India’s commitment to making higher education globally competitive.

If effectively implemented, foreign campuses can act as catalysts for academic reform, foster global partnerships, and elevate India’s position as an education hub. However, ensuring affordability, equitable access, and academic integrity will be key to long-term success.

Strait of Hormuz Blockade

  • 29 Jun 2025

Context:

The recent approval by Iran’s Parliament to potentially close the Strait of Hormuz, pending a final decision by its Supreme National Security Council, has intensified global concerns about energy security and geopolitical stability. This comes in response to U.S. strikes on Iranian military sites, marking a serious escalation in the Gulf region.

Strategic Significance of the Strait of Hormuz

  • The Strait of Hormuz is a 33 km-wide maritime chokepoint linking the Persian Gulf with the Gulf of Oman and, subsequently, the Arabian Sea. It handles over 25% of global seaborne oil trade, 20% of global oil consumption, and 20% of LNG trade, primarily from Qatar.
  • The geographical location of the strait—falling within Iranian and Omani territorial waters—makes it one of the most sensitive energy corridors globally.
  • The strait’s vulnerability is compounded by its narrow 3 km-wide navigational channels, making it susceptible to blockades, naval mines, missile strikes, or cyberattacks.
  • Historically, Iran has issued such threats without actual closure, even during periods of conflict, largely due to its own dependency on the strait for oil exports, especially to China.

Implications of a Blockade

A complete or even partial blockade could have catastrophic global impacts:

  • Disruption of Global Energy Supply: With no alternative sea route, any disruption would curtaildaily movement of 20 million barrels of oil, causingsharp price spikes.
  • Limited Overland Alternatives: Saudi Arabia’s East-West pipeline (5 million bpd) and the UAE’s Fujairah pipeline (1.8 million bpd) cannot compensate for the loss of Hormuz transit.
  • Higher Shipping and Insurance Costs: Perceived risk increases freight rates, insurance premiums, and logistical expenses globally.

Impact on India

India, the third-largest crude oil consumer, imports over 85% of its oil and 50% of its natural gas. In May 2025 alone, 47% of India’s crude imports passed through the Strait of Hormuz. Disruption would result in:

  • Price Volatility: Even if supplies are not entirely blocked, oil and gas prices will spike, stressing the economy.
  • Macroeconomic Stress: A surge in energy prices could widen the trade deficit, weaken the rupee, reduce forex reserves, and raise inflation.
  • Competitive Pressure: If Iran’s exports to China are blocked, Beijing may seek oil from other producers, increasing global demand and costs, impacting India’s energy budget.

India’s Resilience and Strategic Measures

Despite the vulnerabilities, India has certain buffers:

  • Diversification of Energy Sources: Imports from Russia, the U.S., Africa, and Latin America are not dependent on Hormuz. Russian oil arrives via the Suez Canal or Cape of Good Hope, while Qatar’s LNG also uses alternate maritime routes.
  • Strategic Reserves: India maintains 9–10 days’ worth of strategic oil reserves for emergencies.
  • Government Policy Levers: In case of a prolonged crisis, the government may offer price subsidies for diesel and LPG to contain inflation.

Conclusion

The Strait of Hormuz remains a vital artery of global energy supply and a flashpoint of geopolitical tensions. While India has taken commendable steps toward energy diversification and crisis preparedness, continued diplomatic engagement in West Asia, investments in energy alternatives, and strengthening strategic reserves will be key to mitigating the fallout from any potential blockade.

Fossil Fuel Financing in 2024

  • 28 Jun 2025

In News:

In a stark contradiction to global climate goals, the world’s 65 largest banks increased their fossil fuel financing by $162 billion in 2024, reaching a total of $869 billion, up from $707 billion in 2023, according to the Fossil Fuel Finance Report 2025. This trend threatens to derail global commitments under the Paris Agreement and undermines the International Energy Agency’s (IEA) roadmap to achieving net-zero emissions by 2050.

India’s Position:

Among global lenders, the State Bank of India (SBI) was the only Indian bank featured in the top 65, rising from the 49th to 47th position. SBI’s fossil fuel financing increased modestly by $65 million, taking its 2024 total to $2.62 billion. Cumulatively, between 2021 and 2024, SBI extended $10.6 billion to fossil fuel projects. In contrast, JPMorgan Chase topped the global list with $53.5 billion in 2024 alone.

Despite this, SBI has also signalled intent to transition. It has pledged to become net zero by 2055, and aims to ensure that 7.5% of its domestic advances are green by 2030. As of March 2024, SBI had sanctioned ?20,558 crore in sustainable finance. However, this dual-track financing model raises questions about the coherence of India's green finance agenda.

Global Setbacks and Policy Rollbacks

2024 witnessed a rollback in climate-related financial commitments, particularly in the United States. The withdrawal of the US from the Paris Agreement, scheduled to take effect in 2026, was accompanied by policy shifts like exiting the Net Zero Banking Alliance and the Network for Greening the Financial System (NGFS). Major banks such as Wells Fargo abandoned their net-zero commitments, signaling a broader retreat from climate-aligned finance.

This global trend is no longer confined to North America. European banks, traditionally viewed as progressive, also weakened fossil fuel exclusion policies. The result: a global rise in fossil fuel merger and acquisition financing, which reached $82.9 billion in 2024, up by $19.2 billion from 2023. Although M&As do not directly add infrastructure, they consolidate fossil fuel power at a time when the world urgently needs to pivot to renewables.

Indian Banks and the Coal Dilemma

Indian financial institutions, barring a few exceptions like Federal Bank and RBL Bank, lack explicit coal exclusion policies. According to Climate Risk Horizons, this constitutes a major blind spot. The economics of energy is shifting — renewables and storage are now often cheaper than coal, making continued fossil fuel investments financially and environmentally risky.

Conclusion

The rise in fossil fuel financing reflects a disconnect between climate rhetoric and financial action, threatening the global transition to clean energy. For India, this highlights the need for a coherent climate finance strategy, integrating environmental, financial, and developmental priorities. As a signatory to the Paris Agreement and a G20 economy, India must not only align public finance with green goals but also push for global financial reforms that discourage fossil fuel dependencies and reward sustainable investments.

Rising Participation and Casualties of Women in Left-Wing Extremism

  • 27 Jun 2025

Context:

There has been a sharp surge in the number of women Maoist cadres killed in anti-Naxal operations in Chhattisgarh since 2024. This rise has coincided with the intensification of counter-insurgency efforts under the Ministry of Home Affairs’ (MHA’s) renewed push to eliminate Left-Wing Extremism (LWE) by March 2026.

Behind these numbers lies a disturbing narrative of coercion, indoctrination, gender-based exploitation, and the systemic use of women and children as tools in extremist strategies.

Trends in Women Maoist Casualties (2024–2025)

  • 2024: Out of 217 Maoists killed, 74 were women (~34%)
  • 2025 (till June 20): Out of 195 killed, 82 were women (~42%)
  • Comparison with previous years:
    • 2019: 65 total killed | 17 women
    • 2020: 40 total | 7 women
    • 2021: 51 total | 13 women
    • 2022: 30 total | 9 women
    • 2023: 20 total | 5 women

This data indicates a doubling of women fatalities as a proportion of total casualties in Maoist operations since the launch of targeted operations.

Recruitment Through Coercion: Bal Dastas and Gendered Exploitation

According to the MHA, Maoists have been increasingly recruiting young Adivasi girls and forming “Bal Dastas” (child squads) in Chhattisgarh and Jharkhand. Key observations include:

  • Parental coercion: Many impoverished tribal families are forced to give up their girl children under threats and pressure.
  • Ideological indoctrination: Children are brainwashed to adopt Maoist ideology from an early age.
  • Gendered exploitation: Although the Maoists outwardly reject patriarchy, the representation of women in leadership roles such as the Polit Bureau and Central Committee remains negligible.
  • Use of women as foot soldiers and human shields, exposing them disproportionately to fatal encounters with security forces.

Underlying Issues: Security, Society, and Maoist Strategy

  • Deliberate Alienation Strategy:
    • Maoists systematically attack schools and educational infrastructure.
    • As per MHA, education fosters critical thinking and alternate livelihoods, which are seen as a threat to Maoist influence.
  • Civilian and Infrastructure Loss:
    • Since 2019:
      • 725 civilians killed in LWE violence.
      • 263 incidents of attacks on economic infrastructure recorded.
  • Socio-Economic Backdrop:
    • Lack of education, healthcare, livelihood options, and state presence in remote tribal areas fuel Maoist recruitment.
    • Women and children from these regions become the most vulnerable and easily exploited demographic.

Security Forces' Perspective and Response

  • Initial recruitment of women was largely based on coercion and misinformation.
  • Once inside the Maoist ranks, women face physical, mental, and emotional exploitation.
  • Maoists use women primarily as human shields and expendable foot soldiers.

However, the security forces are increasingly pursuing a sensitive, gender-aware approach, prioritizing:

  • Voluntary surrender schemes
  • Gender-sensitive rehabilitation policies offering:
    • Education
    • Vocational training
    • Healthcare access
    • Social reintegration pathways

Way Forward: A Multi-Pronged Strategy

  • Strengthen Surrender and Rehabilitation Frameworks:
    • Expand socio-economic reintegration schemes tailored for women ex-cadres.
    • Ensure psycho-social counselling, particularly for minors and survivors of exploitation.
  • Enhance State Presence and Welfare Delivery:
    • Accelerate development of infrastructure, education, and healthcare in LWE-affected districts.
    • Promote community policing and tribal leadership in governance processes.
  • Child Protection Measures:
    • Strengthen child protection systems, including monitoring of Bal Dastas.
    • Empower and engage Anganwadi workers, school teachers, and local NGOs in vulnerable zones.
  • Gender-Sensitive Counter-Insurgency Doctrine:Train forces in humane engagement, protection of rights, and de-escalation tactics when dealing with women and child cadres.

India’s Quantum Leap in Secure Communication

  • 26 Jun 2025

In News:

Recently, India marked a major milestone in quantum technology with the successful demonstration of quantum secure communication over free space by IIT Delhi, in collaboration with the Defence Research and Development Organisation (DRDO). This achievement represents a significant step forward in India’s pursuit of quantum cybersecurity, quantum networks, and the future quantum internet, with vital applications in both defence and civilian domains.

What is Quantum Communication?

Quantum communication leverages principles of quantum mechanics, particularly quantum entanglement, to enable secure data transmission. In entanglement, the quantum state of two or more particles (usually photons) becomes correlated such that the measurement of one instantly determines the state of the other—regardless of the distance between them.

Security Advantage: Any attempt to intercept or measure the entangled photons disturbs their state, instantly revealing the breach. This makes quantum communication unbreakable by classical computational means.

Quantum Key Distribution (QKD): The Core Mechanism

Quantum communication is often employed for Quantum Key Distribution (QKD)—a method to securely generate and share encryption keys between two parties. Once both parties obtain identical secret keys via QKD, traditional algorithms (like AES) can be used to encrypt and decrypt actual messages.

There are two main types of QKD:

  • Prepare-and-Measure QKD: Single photons are prepared in specific states and then measured.
  • Entanglement-Based QKD: Pairs of entangled photons are distributed between users; any interception disturbs the entanglement, flagging the intrusion.

IIT-Delhi’s 2025 Breakthrough: Key Highlights

  • Achievement: Demonstrated entanglement-assisted free-space QKD over a distance of more than 1 km at IIT Delhi campus.
  • Secure Key Rate: ~240 bits per second.
  • Quantum Bit Error Rate (QBER): <7%, which is acceptable under current protocols.
  • Setting: Conducted under the DRDO-funded project “Design and development of photonic technologies for free space QKD”, in the presence of senior dignitaries from DRDO and IIT Delhi.

Free-space QKD offers a critical advantage—eliminating the need for laying optical fibres, making it viable in mountainous terrain and congested urban zones.

Previous Achievements by the IIT-Delhi & DRDO Team

  • 2022: India’s first intercity quantum communication link established between Vindhyachal and Prayagraj using commercial dark optical fibre.
  • 2023: Achieved QKD over 380 km using optical fibre with a QBER of 1.48%.
  • 2024: Demonstrated entanglement-based QKD over 100 km using telecom-grade optical fibre.

Significance:

Strategic Applications:

  • Defence Communication: Enables tamper-proof messaging and data sharing during operations.
  • Cybersecurity: Shields critical infrastructure from quantum and AI-based cyber threats.
  • Surveillance Immunity: Makes quantum networks resilient to conventional hacking or surveillance.

Civilian Applications:

  • Banking and Finance: Secure real-time financial data transmission.
  • Telecommunications: Enhances privacy in communication systems.
  • Quantum Internet: Enables ultra-secure networking, distributed quantum computing, and time-synchronised communication.

Quantum Networks and the Road Ahead

India’s long-term goal is to establish a multi-node quantum network capable of secure long-range communication. This includes establishing:

  • Satellite-to-ground QKD links, enabling nation-wide secure key distribution.
  • Urban quantum networks, ensuring secure communication for government and military hubs.

India is drawing inspiration from China’s 4,600 km quantum network and U.S. plans for a quantum internet by the 2030s.

To this end, the National Quantum Mission (NQM) was approved in 2023, with an outlay of ?6,000 crore (2023–2031). It aims to:

  • Develop 20–50 qubit quantum computers.
  • Build quantum communication and sensing technologies.
  • Establish four Thematic Hubs on quantum applications in computing, metrology, communication, and materials.

Institutional Mechanism: DIA-CoEs

The work was conducted under the DRDO-Industry-Academia Centre of Excellence (DIA-CoE) model. DIA-CoEs are collaborative platforms set up in premier academic institutions such as IITs and IISc, focused on developing cutting-edge defence technologies.

There are 15 DIA-CoEs currently operational across India.

Conclusion: India’s Quantum Communication Trajectory

India’s demonstration of free-space quantum secure communication marks a critical leap in strategic technology self-reliance. With continued support through the National Quantum Mission and institutional synergy between academia, industry, and the military, India is well-positioned to emerge as a global leader in quantum-enabled security infrastructure.

Reforming India’s Food and Fertiliser Subsidies

  • 25 Jun 2025

In News:

India’s food and fertiliser subsidy regime has played a critical role in ensuring food security and supporting farm productivity. However, with extreme poverty declining from 27.1% in 2011 to a historic low of 5.3% in 2022, and the combined food and fertiliser subsidy bill exceeding ?3.5 lakh crore in FY26, there is a growing policy imperative to reimagine these subsidies for greater efficiency, fiscal prudence, and long-term sustainability.

The Current Landscape

Food and fertiliser subsidies in India are a mix of direct and indirect support mechanisms. Direct subsidies include schemes like PM-KISAN, while indirect subsidies include low-cost foodgrains under the National Food Security Act (NFSA) and price-controlled fertilisers. As per government data:

  • Food subsidy is budgeted at ?2.03 lakh crore, reaching over 800 million beneficiaries through the Public Distribution System (PDS).
  • Fertiliser subsidy is pegged at ?1.56 lakh crore, driven by rising global prices and a skewed demand for urea.

Challenges in the Current Subsidy System

  • Mismatch Between Poverty and Coverage: Despite poverty falling to 5.3%, 84% of households still possess ration cards, many of whom are no longer poor. This reflects poor targeting and leads to welfare leakages.
  • Nutritional Deficiency in PDS: The PDS remains cereal-centric, primarily distributing rice and wheat, while nutrition insecurity persists due to insufficient supply of pulses, edible oils, and micronutrients.
  • Fertiliser Misuse: The overuse of nitrogen-based fertilisers (particularly urea) has caused an ecological imbalance, deteriorating soil health and reducing long-term farm productivity.
  • Fiscal Constraints: Massive subsidy expenditures are crowding out investments in rural infrastructure such as irrigation, cold storage, and extension services—critical for doubling farmer incomes.
  • Leakages and Ghost Beneficiaries: Despite digitisation and Aadhaar seeding, leakages continue in both PDS and fertiliser channels, with instances like card cancellations in Jharkhand pointing to persistent inefficiencies.

Government Initiatives So Far

  • PMGKAY during COVID-19 extended free foodgrains to NFSA beneficiaries, and has now been merged with NFSA provisions.
  • Digitisation of ration cards and Aadhaar-enabled ePoS machines are being used to plug PDS leakages.
  • Neem-coated urea and the Nutrient-Based Subsidy (NBS) policy aim to reduce misuse and promote balanced fertilisation.
  • Direct Benefit Transfer (DBT) for fertilisers is being piloted to streamline subsidy flows and reduce diversion.

Reform Measures Needed

  • Targeting and Gradation: Use PM-KISAN, SECC, and Aadhaar-linked databases to better identify the poorest 15% households and gradually taper subsidies for others.
  • Digital Food Coupons: Introduce ?700/month digital wallets or coupons for nutrient-rich food purchases (pulses, eggs, milk), improving dietary diversity and nutrition security.
  • Fertiliser Coupons & Price Rationalisation: Introduce fertiliser coupons, deregulate prices, and incentivise eco-friendly inputs like bio-fertilisers and organic compost.
  • Improve Monitoring: Strengthen data triangulation using land records, crop surveys, and income data to reduce inclusion/exclusion errors.
  • Farmer Sensitisation: Communicate the rationale for reforms clearly to farmers to avoid mistrust or resistance, as witnessed during earlier protests.

Conclusion

India’s welfare architecture must evolve with its changing socio-economic landscape. With poverty rates at historic lows, continued universal subsidies are both fiscally unsustainable and inefficient. Smartly targeted reforms in food and fertiliser subsidies are vital for improving nutritional outcomes, restoring soil health, and ensuring optimal allocation of public resources. A calibrated transition to a more efficient, inclusive, and sustainable system will enhance welfare delivery without compromising economic growth.

Reshaping Energy and Geopolitics in West Asia

  • 24 Jun 2025

In News:

The geopolitical landscape of West Asia is undergoing a profound transformation driven by escalating conflicts, realignments of power, and the increasing weaponisation of energy. The Israel-Iran conflict, rising threats to critical maritime routes, and the shifting allegiances of Gulf states are redefining the region’s strategic and energy equations, with direct implications for global stability and India’s national interests.

 

West Asia’s Centrality to Global Energy Security

  • The Gulf region holds over 50% of global proven oil reserves, producing around 33% of the world’s oil and 17% of global natural gas.
  • Despite a global shift to renewables, the world still consumes ~100 million barrels of oil daily, with ~50% used for transport and ~20% for petrochemicals.
  • Natural gas accounts for 23% of global energy consumption, supplying a quarter of global electricity.

 

Geopolitical Flashpoints: Conflict and Energy Disruption

  • Israel’s airstrikes on Iran’s nuclear facilities and Iran’s missile retaliation have heightened the risk of regional war.
  • Iran may block the Strait of Hormuz, through which ~20% of global oil trade passes. Even the threat has increased insurance and freight rates.
    • Charter costs for Very Large Crude Carriers (VLCCs) from the Gulf to China have risen from ~$20,000 to ~$48,000 per day.
  • Iran’s oil exports (~2 million barrels/day) form ~2% of global oil supply, difficult to replace due to limited spare capacity among other producers.
  • Threat of attacks on energy infrastructure by Iran-backed militias adds to regional instability.

 

Strategic Realignments in West Asia

  • Gulf states (Saudi Arabia, UAE, Qatar) are moving toward multi-polar engagements, strengthening ties with China and Russia, and reducing dependence on the US.
  • Historical precedent: The 1973 Arab oil embargo demonstrated the region's ability to influence global politics through oil.
  • Arab monarchies’ reluctance to support Western-backed regime change in Iran stems from fears of regional destabilisation and domestic backlash.
  • Public sentiment in Gulf nations remains strongly pro-Palestinian and anti-Western, adding internal pressures on ruling elites.

 

Weaponisation of Energy as a Strategic Tool

  • The use of oil embargoes or supply disruptions is re-emerging as a geopolitical instrument.
  • Iran could resort to asymmetric warfare or encourage proxy attacks on rival oil facilities, particularly in Iraq (which produces over 4 million barrels/day) and the Gulf.

 

Implications for India

Opportunities:

  • Scope to diversify energy suppliers and enhance strategic petroleum reserves (SPR).
  • India’s position in BRICS and SCO offers diplomatic space to act as a moderating influence.

Risks:

  • 40–50% of India’s energy imports transit through the Strait of Hormuz—any disruption threatens energy security.
  • Surging oil prices can fuel imported inflation, impacting transport, agriculture, and industrial costs.
  • Indian projects like Chabahar Port, the International North-South Transport Corridor (INSTC), and the India-Middle East-Europe Corridor (IMEC) face operational uncertainties.
  • Strain on India’s balanced ties with Israel and Iran, with diplomatic fallout possible.
  • Gulf remittances (a vital source of foreign exchange) may decline if regional conflict escalates.

Conclusion

West Asia’s reconfiguration is a reminder of the enduring nexus between energy and geopolitics. For India, navigating this complex terrain requires strategic autonomy, energy diversification, and robust regional diplomacy. Balancing relations amid shifting alliances, while securing national interests in energy and trade, must remain central to India’s foreign policy calculus.

Panch Parivartan Strategy

  • 23 Jun 2025

In News:

As India approaches its centenary of independence in 2047, the focus on reshaping its educational landscape has gained significant momentum. A noteworthy initiative in this direction is the Panch Parivartan Strategy launched by Vidya Bharati Akhil Bharatiya Shiksha Sansthan under its Vision 2047 roadmap. This five-pronged reform framework aims to redefine Indian education by integrating cultural values, social inclusivity, gender equity, environmental consciousness, and self-reliance.

What is the Panch Parivartan Strategy?

The strategy envisions a transformative shift in the Indian education system through five core components, collectively aimed at holistic nation-building. It seeks to develop not only knowledge and skills but also instill values rooted in India’s civilizational ethos.

1. Samajik Samrasata (Social Harmony)

This component focuses on inclusive education, bridging divides across caste, class, region, and religion. By ensuring that educational institutions become spaces of social integration, it promotes equality and mutual respect—core principles enshrined in the Constitution of India. This aligns with the larger vision of social justice and unity in diversity.

2. Kutumb Prabodhan (Family Value Integration)

Recognizing the family as the primary institution of socialization, this strategy integrates cultural practices such as Matri-Pitri Pujan (reverence for parents) and traditional joint family values into the educational process. The goal is to strengthen inter-generational bonds and instill respect for elders, thereby reinforcing India’s intangible cultural heritage.

3. Paryavaran Sanrakshan (Environmental Protection)

Environmental stewardship is another cornerstone of the strategy. Vidya Bharati has facilitated the planting of over 5.2 lakh saplings, developed 3,400 green campuses, and implemented water conservation practices in more than 1,800 schools. This aligns closely with the principles of sustainable development and promotes ecological consciousness among students, in line with India’s commitments under SDG-13 (Climate Action).

4. Swa (Self-Identity and Self-Reliance)

With a strong emphasis on vocational education, skilling, and rootedness, this pillar nurtures youth empowerment by offering training through ITIs, local crafts, and digital technologies even in remote areas like Kargil and Kiphire. It seeks to instill a sense of Bharatiyata (Indianness) while preparing students to be globally competent. This component supports the Atmanirbhar Bharat Abhiyan, aimed at creating a self-reliant India.

5. Nari Samman (Dignity of Women)

Focusing on girls’ education, leadership training, and self-defence programs, this strategy has already benefited over 14.4 lakh girls. By empowering women through education and capacity-building, it addresses gender disparities and aligns with SDG-5 (Gender Equality), promoting women as key agents of social transformation.

Significance for India@100

The Panch Parivartan Strategy serves as a unique model of value-based, inclusive, and sustainable education, blending modern learning tools (AI, robotics, coding) with India’s traditional wisdom (yoga, Sanskrit, dharmic values). It promotes an education model that is contextually Indian yet globally relevant, echoing the goals of the National Education Policy (NEP) 2020.

In a rapidly changing global order, this initiative represents a bottom-up approach to educational reform, fostering a generation of youth who are skilled, ethical, environmentally aware, and socially responsible—hallmarks of a Viksit Bharat (Developed India).

National Green Hydrogen Mission

  • 22 Jun 2025

In News:

India’s green hydrogen sector stands at a critical crossroads. Once buoyed by global enthusiasm for clean fuels, it now faces export-related headwinds due to geopolitical uncertainties and wavering international policy commitments. In response, India has strategically pivoted toward building a robust domestic ecosystem to ensure long-term energy security and decarbonisation.

National Green Hydrogen Mission

Launched in 2023, the National Green Hydrogen Mission aims to establish India as a global green hydrogen hub. With an outlay of ?19,744 crore, the mission targets the production of 5 million metric tonnes (MMT) of green hydrogen by 2030, along with domestic manufacturing of electrolysers under the SIGHT (Strategic Interventions for Green Hydrogen Transition) programme.

To ensure credibility and transparency, the Ministry of New and Renewable Energy (MNRE) introduced a measurement and certification framework in April 2025 to verify green hydrogen at the production stage. These foundational steps are essential for market integrity, both domestically and internationally.

Export Slowdown: Policy and Geopolitical Challenges

India’s early ambitions to become a major green hydrogen exporter have been hampered by global developments. Projects like ReNew’s green ammonia facility in Odisha face uncertain prospects due to declining international demand. Contributing factors include policy uncertainty in key markets like the United States, where a potential rollback of the Inflation Reduction Act (via the “Big Beautiful Bill”) threatens long-term clean energy investments.

Moreover, European procurement initiatives, such as Germany’s Hintco under the H2Global Foundation, have seen low industry response, reflecting weak investor confidence. In response, India has initiated talks with European ports like Rotterdam and Antwerp, and is pushing for FTA provisions to lower import duties on green hydrogen, aiming to keep future export channels open.

Domestic Market Creation:

Faced with uncertain exports, India is actively cultivating domestic demand. A recent tender for 8 lakh tonnes of green hydrogen received full bids, indicating growing interest from Indian firms. The Solar Energy Corporation of India (SECI) is managing another tender for 7 lakh tonnes, primarily for the fertiliser sector.

Pilot initiatives are also being deployed in sectors such as steel, shipping, and transportation. For example, hydrogen fuel cell buses are being tested in five cities, including Ladakh. Industry experts advocate for mandatory blending in sectors like fertilisers to accelerate adoption.

Cost Competitiveness: The Core Challenge

At present, green hydrogen costs $4–$5 per kg, significantly higher than $2.3–$2.5 per kg for grey hydrogen. A report by CII, Bain & Co., and RMI attributes this to immature supply chains, high capital costs, and limited scale. The report recommends pragmatic interventions such as:

  • Blending green hydrogen into existing grey hydrogen or natural gas systems.
  • Promoting uptake in niche sectors like ceramics and chemicals.
  • Public procurement of green steel to create economies of scale.

Conclusion:

While India’s long-term vision to lead the green hydrogen transition remains intact, current challenges necessitate a strategic rebalancing. Prioritising domestic demand creation, infrastructure development, and cost reduction over near-term exports will be key. If implemented effectively, India may replicate its renewable energy success, positioning itself as a global leader in green hydrogen by the next decade.

The Rising Cost of Imports: A Concern for India's Food Security and Farmers

  • 21 Jun 2025

In News:

India’s increasing dependence on imports of pulses and edible oils has raised serious concerns about agricultural sustainability, trade deficits, and farmer welfare. Despite policy claims of self-reliance in agriculture, recent trends highlight structural imbalances in domestic production and pricing mechanisms, especially for pulses and oilseeds.

Farmers at the Receiving End

Farmers cultivating pulses and oilseeds, such as moong, chana, masoor, and soyabean, are struggling due to poor price realization and lack of systematic procurement at Minimum Support Prices (MSP). Rao Gulab Singh Lodhi, a farmer from Madhya Pradesh, harvested 90 quintals of moong in summer 2025. Despite an MSP of ?8,682/quintal, he had to sell his produce in the open market at ?6,000/quintal due to the absence of procurement infrastructure. Soyabean prices, too, are well below MSP, selling at ?4,100–4,200/quintal against an MSP of ?5,328 (for 2025–26).

Unlike rice and wheat, for which procurement is extensive and assured, pulses and oilseeds lack institutional support, even in regions where agro-climatic conditions favour their cultivation. This discourages farmers from growing these critical crops, despite using high-yielding and climate-resilient varieties.

Pulses: From Self-Reliance to Import Surge

India witnessed a record 7.3 million tonnes (mt) of pulses imports worth $5.5 billion in 2024–25, surpassing the previous high of 6.6 mt in 2016–17. This comes after years of reduced imports, thanks to improved domestic production which had peaked at 27.3 mt in 2021–22.

However, the El Niño-induced drought in 2023–24 brought down production to 24.2 mt, leading to higher retail inflation in pulses and prompting duty cuts on imports. While these imports helped control prices—with CPI inflation in pulses falling to –8.2% by May 2025—they also depressed mandi prices. In Maharashtra, arhar and chana are currently trading below MSPs, impacting farmer incomes.

Major pulse imports in 2024–25 included:

  • 2.2 mt of yellow/white peas (Canada, Russia),
  • 1.6 mt of chana (Australia),
  • 1.2 mt each of arhar and masoor (Africa, Canada, Australia),
  • 0.8 mt of urad (Myanmar, Brazil).

Edible Oils: Worsening Import Dependency

India’s vegetable oil imports more than doubled in a decade—from 7.9 mt in 2013–14 to 16.4 mt in 2024–25. In value terms, imports jumped from $7.2 billion to $20.8 billion, driven partly by global supply disruptions (e.g., Russia-Ukraine war) and high domestic consumption.

India now imports over 60% of its edible oil needs, with palm (7.9 mt), soyabean (4.8 mt), and sunflower oil (3.5 mt) forming the bulk. In May 2025, CPI inflation for vegetable oils stood at 17.9%. In response, the Centre slashed import duties on crude palm, soyabean, and sunflower oil from 20% to 10%, reducing the overall tariff to 16.5%.

While the move may lower consumer prices, industry bodies like the Soyabean Processors Association of India have warned it will "flood the market with cheap imports", making domestic oilseed cultivation less viable. Farmers may shift to alternative crops in the coming kharif season, further weakening India’s self-sufficiency goals.

Conclusion

India’s growing import reliance for essential food commodities like pulses and edible oils, coupled with poor farm-level price realization and weak procurement systems, undermines the objectives of food security and self-reliance. Sustainable import substitution must be driven by robust domestic production incentives, fair pricing mechanisms, and resilient procurement frameworks—especially for non-cereal crops.

Why Governments Revise GDP Base Year and Why India’s 2026 Revision Matters

  • 20 Jun 2025

Context:

The Gross Domestic Product (GDP) is the most critical metric used to measure the size and performance of a country’s economy. The "base year" is the reference year against which future GDP growth is calculated. India’s current GDP base year is 2011–12. The government, through the Ministry of Statistics and Programme Implementation (MoSPI), is now preparing to revise it to 2022–23, with the updated series to be released in February 2026.

Why GDP Base Years are Revised

Base year revisions are necessary to reflect structural changes in the economy, incorporate improved and updated data sources, and align with global statistical standards. GDP calculation, by its definition—the market value of all final goods and services produced in an economy—requires accurate, timely, and sectorally-relevant data. However, India’s economy evolves rapidly, particularly with the expansion of the services sector and changes in consumption, production, and labour patterns.

Past revisions (seven since 1948-49) reflect efforts to modernize methodology and include newer data sources, such as the shift from decennial Census-based workforce estimates to five-yearly Employment-Unemployment Surveys by the NSSO. This aligns with the National Statistical Commission’s recommendation of rebasing economic indices every five years.

The last revision occurred in 2015 (base year changed to 2011–12), following which methodological changes attracted controversy. Experts, including former Chief Economic Advisor Arvind Subramanian, argued that the revised methodology overestimated India’s GDP growth, especially in manufacturing, due to reliance on corporate database MCA-21 over the traditional Annual Survey of Industries.

Why the 2026 Revision Is Crucial

The 2026 revision comes after India missed a base year update in 2017–18 due to data-related concerns. Two key surveys—the Consumer Expenditure Survey (CES) and the Periodic Labour Force Survey (PLFS)—faced credibility and methodological challenges. The 2017-18 CES suggested rising poverty, while the PLFS showed a 45-year high in unemployment—trends contrary to government narratives. These issues led to scrapping the proposed 2017–18 base year.

Additionally, disruptive policy changes like demonetisation (2016) and the rollout of GST (2017), followed by the COVID-19 pandemic, meant the following years were not "normal" reference points. The 2022–23 base year is likely to mark the first post-pandemic stable year suitable for a revised series.

This revision is especially significant as India is poised to become the world’s third-largest economy by nominal GDP. At such a juncture, the quality, accuracy, and global credibility of GDP data will directly influence investor confidence, credit ratings, and policymaking.

The base year revision will also extend to other indicators: the Index of Industrial Production (IIP) will be revised to 2022–23, and the Consumer Price Index (CPI) to 2023–24. These changes ensure that inflation and industrial output metrics remain reflective of present-day consumption and production structures.

Conclusion

Revising the GDP base year is not merely a technical exercise—it is central to economic governance. The upcoming 2026 revision must restore faith in India's statistical systems, offer a transparent methodology, and align with international best practices. Its credibility will shape India’s economic narrative for the decade to come, both domestically and on the global stage.

India’s uneasy balancing act in the Bay of Bengal

  • 19 Jun 2025

In News:

India’s engagement in the Bay of Bengal is increasingly being shaped by the intersection of strategic priorities and economic imperatives. While New Delhi seeks to position itself as the regional integrator and promoter of cooperative regionalism, recent developments — particularly in relation to Bangladesh — underscore the challenges of maintaining this balance.

 

At the surface, India’s maritime and port infrastructure along the eastern seaboard has seen considerable progress. Cargo throughput at Visakhapatnam, Paradip, and Haldia has steadily risen. Initiatives like the Sagarmala Programme and coastal shipping incentives have doubled cargo movement on the east coast in the last decade. The signing of the BIMSTEC Maritime Transport Cooperation Agreement in early 2025 further aims to harmonise customs procedures and reduce port-related frictions.

 

Yet, India’s decision to withdraw the transshipment facility granted to Bangladesh in April 2025, which had enabled Dhaka to route exports through Indian ports to third-country destinations, sparked concern. While Indian officials cited logistical congestion, many in Bangladesh interpreted the move as politically motivated — possibly in response to Dhaka’s growing engagement with China and a speech by a Bangladeshi leader in Beijing framing India’s northeast as “landlocked” and dependent on Bangladesh.

 

This decision, followed by India’s restrictions in May 2025 on the import of seven Bangladeshi product categories via land ports, has fueled bilateral tensions. These developments have particularly impacted Bangladesh’s ready-made garment sector, which constitutes over 85% of its export earnings and had increasingly relied on Indian ports for efficiency. New routing requirements via Kolkata or Nhava Sheva have added delays and costs, weakening the trade facilitation narrative India has long championed.

 

While Bangladesh has asserted its regional role by diversifying trade partners — including reopening maritime trade with Pakistan — these are sovereign choices. India’s use of trade access as a signaling mechanism, if perceived as coercive, risks undermining the credibility of the neutral and rules-based regional architecture it seeks to build under BIMSTEC.

 

This is significant beyond bilateral ties. Regional actors like Myanmar, Sri Lanka, Bhutan, and Thailand observe India's actions closely. If India's trade facilitation appears contingent on political alignment, smaller states may opt to hedge or diversify partnerships, potentially weakening India’s centrality in the Bay of Bengal order.

 

India remains the region’s best-equipped actor in terms of port capacity, connectivity, and logistics infrastructure, giving it a leadership edge. However, credibility and consistency are equally vital. Without a clear separation between economic cooperation and strategic messaging, India’s regional ambitions risk being derailed.

 

To restore balance, India could consider reinstating the transshipment facility under a rules-based framework, ensuring transparency and predictability in trade logistics. This would reassure neighbours, revive trust, and reinforce India’s image as a stable anchor in a geopolitically dynamic region.

The Bay of Bengal is at a crossroads. It can evolve into a vibrant economic corridor between South and Southeast Asia, or descend into a fragmented arena of mistrust. India’s choices today will determine whether regional cooperation remains the cornerstone of its foreign policy — or becomes another casualty of strategic competition.

 

India’s Aviation Safety Oversight: Global Recognition Amid AI-171 Crash Investigation

  • 18 Jun 2025

In News:

The recent crash of Air India flight AI-171 in Ahmedabad, claiming 241 lives, marks the deadliest aviation accident in India in over a decade. As investigations proceed, the spotlight is on India’s aviation safety standards and regulatory preparedness, particularly the role of the Directorate General of Civil Aviation (DGCA) and India’s standing in global aviation safety audits.

India has received commendable recognition from two premier global aviation oversight bodies: the International Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO) and the US Federal Aviation Administration (FAA). These ratings assume greater relevance now, as the Aircraft Accident Investigation Bureau (AAIB) leads the probe into the Air India crash, in coordination with international stakeholders.

ICAO’s Positive Evaluation of India’s Aviation Oversight

In its 2022 audit under the Universal Safety Oversight Audit Programme (USOAP), the ICAO rated India’s overall Effective Implementation (EI) score at 85.65%, a sharp improvement from 69.95% in 2018. India outperformed the global average across all eight USOAP parameters—legislation, organisation, licensing, operations, airworthiness, accident investigation, air navigation services, and aerodromes.

In two critical areas, India scored remarkably high:

  • Operations: India scored 94.02%, compared to the global average of 72.28%, and even surpassed the US (86.51%) and China (90%).
  • Airworthiness: India achieved 97.06%, again ahead of the US (89.13%) and China (94.83%).

These ratings reflect significant reforms in civil aviation governance and oversight mechanisms. India’s regulatory capabilities are aligned with ICAO protocols, demonstrating strong institutional capacity to manage operational safety and technical compliance in aviation.

FAA's Endorsement: Retaining Category 1 Status

Further affirming India’s safety standards, the FAA retained India’s Category 1 status in April 2023 after a comprehensive audit in 2021 of DGCA’s oversight in aircraft operations, airworthiness, and personnel licensing. This classification means that India complies with international safety norms under the Chicago Convention and allows Indian carriers to expand operations to the US and enter into code-share agreements with American airlines.

The FAA acknowledged DGCA’s consistent improvement and commitment to safety, especially considering India’s rapid aviation growth—it is the world’s third-largest domestic aviation market and the fastest-growing among major economies.

Multinational Collaboration in Crash Investigation

In the wake of the AI-171 crash, a multi-agency probe has been launched. The AAIB, as per ICAO norms, is leading the investigation. The US National Transportation Safety Board (NTSB) and the UK’s Air Accidents Investigation Branch (AAIB-UK) are involved due to the aircraft’s American origin (Boeing), and the presence of British citizens onboard. Boeing and engine manufacturer GE will also assist in the investigation, adhering to ICAO’s investigation protocols.

Conclusion

India’s strong global safety ratings by ICAO and FAA underscore the DGCA’s enhanced regulatory performance and the country’s growing credibility in civil aviation safety. However, the tragic AI-171 crash serves as a reminder that even well-rated aviation systems must remain vigilant, responsive, and transparent—especially in post-crisis investigations.

Centre’s Push for Forest Rights Act Implementation

  • 17 Jun 2025

In News:

The Forest Rights Act (FRA), 2006, was enacted to address the historical injustice faced by Scheduled Tribes (STs) and Other Traditional Forest Dwellers (OTFDs) by recognising their rights over forest land and resources. Its implementation, for nearly two decades, has been the sole responsibility of State governments. However, in a major policy shift, the Union government has begun funding support structures to aid its implementation through the Dharti Aaba Janjatiya Gram Utkarsh Abhiyaan (DAJGUA), launched in October 2024.

DAJGUA and Structural Support for FRA

For the first time, the Ministry of Tribal Affairs has sanctioned 324 district-level and 17 State-level Forest Rights Act (FRA) cells across 18 States and Union Territories. These cells aim to facilitate, not replace, the statutory process mandated under the FRA. The funding is routed through Grants-in-Aid General, with a budget allocation of ?8.67 lakh per district cell and ?25.85 lakh per State-level cell. Operational control rests with State Tribal Welfare Departments.

States like Madhya Pradesh (55 cells), Chhattisgarh (30), Telangana (29), Maharashtra (26), Assam (25), and Jharkhand (24) have received the highest number of sanctioned FRA cells. Notably, while Madhya Pradesh and Chhattisgarh report low pendency, States like Assam and Telangana have pending claim rates exceeding 60% and 50% respectively.

Mandate and Function of FRA Cells

These FRA cells are designed to support claimants and Gram Sabhas in the technical and administrative aspects of filing claims. Their responsibilities include:

  • Preparing documentation and gathering supporting evidence;
  • Assisting in Gram Sabha resolutions;
  • Digitising land records and maintaining claim status;
  • Facilitating the conversion of forest habitations into revenue villages;
  • Supporting demarcation and record updates.

Importantly, these cells are not empowered to influence the decisions of statutory committees such as Forest Rights Committees (FRCs), Sub-Divisional Level Committees (SDLCs), or District Level Committees (DLCs), which are central to the FRA’s decentralised decision-making framework.

Concerns of a Parallel Mechanism

Despite their limited mandate, forest rights activists and experts express concerns that these cells may create a parallel mechanism outside the FRA’s statutory framework. Critics argue that the responsibilities assigned to the FRA cells—documentation, verification, facilitation—already fall under the statutory roles of the FRCs and other committees. This overlap risks creating confusion at the grassroots level and may dilute the authority of legally mandated bodies.

Furthermore, structural challenges—such as infrequent SDLC/DLC meetings and delays by Forest Departments even after DLC approval—are cited as key reasons for pending claims, which currently stand at 14.45% of the total 51.11 lakh claims filed across 21 States/UTs. Over 42% of the 43 lakh claims disposed of have been rejected, highlighting systemic inefficiencies.

A Cautious Step Forward

While DAJGUA represents a broader tribal welfare initiative involving 25 schemes across 17 ministries, the FRA facilitation component must tread carefully to respect the legal sanctity of the FRA. If implemented transparently and collaboratively, the FRA cells can bridge capacity gaps and support timely disposal of claims.

However, the success of this intervention hinges on maintaining the balance between administrative innovation and legal integrity—ensuring that support structures complement, rather than compete with, the FRA’s decentralised governance.

Israel–Iran Strike 2025

  • 15 Jun 2025

In News:

On June 13, 2025, Israel launched a large-scale military strike on Iran, targeting nuclear and military sites in Tehran. The attack resulted in the deaths of Iran’s Revolutionary Guard chief and two top nuclear scientists, marking a sharp escalation in the long-running shadow conflict between Israel and Iran.

Backdrop: Iran’s Nuclear Programme and Global Concerns

Iran claims its nuclear programme is peaceful, aimed at energy production and medical research. However, international skepticism remains high. The International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA) recently declared Iran in breach of its non-proliferation obligations for the first time in two decades, citing a lack of transparency, failure to account for undeclared nuclear material, and enrichment of uranium up to 60% purity, dangerously close to weapons-grade (90%). According to reports, Iran possesses enough stockpiled uranium to build up to nine nuclear weapons, raising alarm globally.

Israel’s Strategic Calculus and the Execution of the Strike

Israel has long opposed Iran’s nuclear ambitions and the 2015 nuclear deal (JCPOA). The June 2025 assault was the culmination of years of covert operations, including the 2020 assassination of Mohsen Fakhrizadeh and earlier strikes on Iran-linked targets. The latest strike, targeting nuclear and missile facilities as well as residences of top scientists and generals, is seen as the most severe blow to Iran since the 1979 revolution.

The collapse of Iran’s regional deterrence network—its so-called “axis of resistance”—following the fall of Syrian President Bashar al-Assad in December 2024 played a critical role. With Syria no longer serving as a strategic corridor between Tehran and Hezbollah, Israel perceived an opportune moment to act.

US Foreign Policy Shift and Trump’s Role

The re-election of President Donald Trump in 2024 introduced a more confrontational posture toward Iran. Although the U.S. initially delayed the planned May strike to explore diplomacy, the failure of talks led to U.S. backing for the June operation, using military pressure as leverage for a new nuclear deal demanding Iran's full disarmament.

Regional Fallout and Global Economic Implications

The strike triggered an immediate 8% rise in global oil prices, exposing energy vulnerabilities across oil-importing nations. Particularly affected is India, which imports over 80% of its crude oil. Though India imports little directly from Iran, it depends heavily on Gulf producers like Iraq, Saudi Arabia, and the UAE, whose exports transit through the Strait of Hormuz—a vital chokepoint now under threat.

Further, disruptions in Red Sea and Suez Canal shipping routes may force Indian exporters to reroute via the Cape of Good Hope, increasing transit times by 15–20 days and pushing shipping costs up by 40–50%.

Market Response and Strategic Concerns

While oil prices are expected to stabilise due to global reserves and supply diversification, gold prices surged above ?1 lakh per 10g as investors moved to safer assets. The broader geopolitical uncertainty may stoke inflationary pressures, affecting global and Indian economic stability.

Conclusion

The Israel–Iran conflict, while regionally contained for now, holds serious global implications—challenging non-proliferation efforts, disrupting energy security, and threatening global economic stability. For India, the crisis underscores the need for diversified energy sourcing, geopolitical agility, and resilient export infrastructure to mitigate such strategic shocks.

Iran’s Non-Compliance with IAEA Safeguards

  • 16 Jun 2025

In News:

In a pivotal move, the International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA) Board of Governors, recently passed a resolution declaring Iran in breach of its 1974 Comprehensive Safeguards Agreement. This marks the first formal non-compliance declaration since 2006 and signals a possible escalation of Iran’s nuclear issue to the United Nations Security Council (UNSC). The resolution was passed with 19 votes in favour, 3 against (China, Russia, Venezuela), and 11 abstentions.

What led to the resolution?

The IAEA expressed grave concern over Iran’s failure to explain uranium traces found at three undeclared sites—Lavisan-Shian, Varamin, and Turquzabad. These sites, suspected to be part of an undeclared nuclear program until the early 2000s, reflect Iran’s longstanding reluctance to grant the IAEA full access and credible information.

The IAEA resolution cited Iran’s “many failures” since 2019 to provide timely cooperation. This includes Iran’s inability to account for undeclared nuclear material and activities, in violation of its obligations under the Non-Proliferation Treaty (NPT) and its 1974 Safeguards Agreement.

IAEA Safeguards and Article XII.C

Under the 1974 Safeguards Agreement, Iran is legally required to:

  • Declare all nuclear materials and maintain detailed inventories.
  • Notify the IAEA about any new nuclear facilities.
  • Allow routine and special inspections and surveillance.

The IAEA’s inability to verify the absence of nuclear material diversion for weaponisation constitutes a major safeguard failure.

The resolution was passed under Article XII.C of the IAEA Statute, which grants the Board powers to:

  • Demand corrective actions.
  • Suspend technical assistance.
  • Notify all member states.
  • Refer the case to the UNSC.

This rare Article has only been invoked six times before—against Iraq, North Korea, Iran (2006), Libya, Romania, and Syria.

Iran’s Response and Regional Tensions

Iran denounced the resolution as “political” and retaliated by:

  • Announcing plans for a new underground uranium enrichment facility.
  • Upgrading centrifuges at Fordow.
  • Placing air defence systems on alert.
  • Threatening “proportional measures” in response to Israeli and Western pressure.

A day after the IAEA resolution, Israel launched preliminary airstrikes on Iranian nuclear sites and declared a state of emergency. Iran reportedly mobilised drones in response, escalating military tensions in the region.

Broader Geopolitical Implications

This development coincides with the October 2025 deadline for the expiration of U.N. sanctions relief under the 2015 Iran Nuclear Deal (JCPOA). The U.S., which exited the JCPOA in 2018, has signaled support for “special inspections” of Iranian sites. Meanwhile, back-channel talks in Oman remain stalled, and the threat of sanctions “snapback” looms large.

The IAEA also maintains $1.5 million worth of peaceful nuclear projects in Iran, including in radiopharmaceuticals and desalination—now potentially at risk.

What lies ahead?

Iran now has a limited window to respond. If it fails to provide adequate clarifications, the Board may escalate the issue to the UNSC, which could result in renewed sanctions or binding resolutions. A follow-up Board meeting and vote is expected in September 2025.

Conclusion

The IAEA’s resolution represents a critical juncture in global non-proliferation diplomacy. It underscores the challenges of verification in the absence of cooperation and the rising tensions in the Middle East nuclear landscape. For India and the world, this raises important questions on nuclear governance, energy diplomacy, and regional stability.

 

Childhood Obesity in India: A Growing Public Health Challenge

  • 14 Jun 2025

Introduction

Childhood obesity has emerged as a serious public health concern in India, mirroring global trends. A recent study places India among the top countries grappling with rising obesity among children. This phenomenon, once limited to affluent sections, is now widespread across urban and semi-urban regions, driven by a complex interplay of dietary, behavioural, genetic, and socio-economic factors.

Understanding the Causes

  • Dietary Shifts and Unhealthy Eating Habits: The increasing consumption of calorie-dense, ultra-processed foods, sugary beverages, and fast food is one of the primary contributors to childhood obesity. Traditional, balanced home-cooked meals are being replaced due to changing family dynamics and time constraints, leading to poor nutritional choices among children.
  • Sedentary Lifestyle and Screen Time: The decline in physical activity among children is alarming. Excessive screen exposure through television, mobile phones, and video games, coupled with a lack of safe outdoor spaces and diminishing emphasis on physical education in schools, has led to a largely sedentary routine among adolescents.
  • Genetic and Medical Predispositions: Genetic predisposition plays a significant role. Children with a family history of obesity are more susceptible. Medical conditions like hypothyroidism and insulin resistance further increase vulnerability.

Consequences of Childhood Obesity

  • Physical Health Risks: Obese children are at an elevated risk of early-onset non-communicable diseases (NCDs) such as Type 2 diabetes, cardiovascular ailments, hypertension, and musculoskeletal disorders. They may also experience early puberty and related hormonal imbalances.
  • Psychosocial Impact: Beyond physical health, obesity in children is linked to psychological distress. Affected children often face bullying, social exclusion, low self-esteem, and are more prone to depression and anxiety. These challenges can persist into adulthood, impacting mental well-being and social functioning.

Preventive Strategies: The Role of Family, Schools, and Policy

  • Parental Involvement and Home Environment
    • Promoting home-cooked nutritious meals over packaged or junk food.
    • Integrating physical activities like walking, yoga, or family sports into daily routines.
    • Educating children on food labels, nutrition, and healthy choices.
    • Involving children in meal preparation and encouraging mindful eating practices.
  • School-based Interventions
    • Making physical education compulsory and structured in the school curriculum.
    • Conducting regular health screenings and awareness campaigns.
    • Promoting healthy food environments in school canteens and classrooms.
    • Organizing workshops on nutrition, mental health, and lifestyle habits.
  • Health Monitoring and Medical Intervention
    • Periodic health check-ups to identify early signs of obesity and related conditions.
    • Early medical and nutritional interventions to prevent progression to severe obesity or associated NCDs.

Policy Imperatives and Way Forward

Given its long-term implications on public health and healthcare burden, childhood obesity must be addressed through a multi-sectoral approach involving:

  • Policy frameworks that regulate food marketing targeted at children, particularly unhealthy snacks and beverages.
  • Urban planning that ensures safe public spaces for physical activity and sports infrastructure in schools.
  • Integration with national health programmes like the Rashtriya Bal Swasthya Karyakram (RBSK) and POSHAN Abhiyan to monitor and support child nutrition holistically.
  • Mass awareness campaigns to de-stigmatize obesity and promote healthy behaviours.

Conclusion

Childhood obesity is no longer a concern confined to individuals—it is a looming public health challenge with intergenerational consequences. If not addressed early, it risks leading to a population burdened by NCDs and compromised productivity. Collaborative action by parents, educational institutions, healthcare providers, and government agencies is critical to reversing this trend and ensuring a healthier future for India’s children.

Mental Healthcare in India

  • 13 Jun 2025

Introduction

Mental health has long been neglected in mainstream healthcare discourse. However, recent developments, especially in the post-pandemic era, have sparked a paradigm shift in both public perception and policy priorities. With the Mental Healthcare Act, 2017 and subsequent directives from the Insurance Regulatory and Development Authority of India (IRDAI), mental health is now legally and practically on par with physical health in India’s insurance ecosystem.

Global and National Context

  • According to the World Health Organization (WHO), mental health conditions affect 1 in 5 adults globally, resulting in over $1 trillion in productivity loss annually.
  • In India, increased awareness and policy changes have led to mental health coverage being integrated into mainstream health insurance.

Policy Milestones and Insurance Evolution

  • Mental Healthcare Act, 2017: A landmark legislation mandating equal treatment of mental and physical illnesses.
  • IRDAI Directives: Instructed insurers to include mental illness in their policy coverage.
  • Health Insurance Trends:
    • Mental health–related claims (for therapy, stress, anxiety medication) have risen by 30–50% over the past 2–3 years.
    • Outpatient Department (OPD) benefits now cover therapy, counselling, and psychiatric consultations.

Demographic and Behavioural Trends

1. Young Adults (25–35 years)

  • Major drivers of insurance adoption for mental health.
  • Key stressors include work-life imbalance, digital overload, and financial pressures.
  • Show preference for app-based therapy and digital mental health platforms.

2. Women

  • Higher uptake of mental health-inclusive policies.
  • Insurance aligned with life-stage challenges (e.g., pregnancy, menopause, caregiving).
  • Reflects increased cultural recognition of women’s emotional well-being needs.

3. Urban-Rural Divide

  • Tier-1 cities account for over 50% of mental health insurance uptake.
  • Better therapy networks, progressive employers, and higher digital literacy.
  • Tier-2 cities showing promising growth in awareness and access.

Workplace Shifts

  • Growing emphasis on mental wellness programs.
  • Initiatives include:
    • Stress management workshops
    • In-house counsellor access
    • Flexible work arrangements
  • Indicates an evolving perception of mental health as integral to employee well-being.

Challenges Ahead

  • Despite broader coverage, utilisation remains low due to:
    • Lack of awareness about existing benefits (e.g., OPD coverage, cashless therapy).
    • Social stigma and low mental health literacy.
    • Accessibility gaps in rural and semi-urban areas.

Way Forward

  • Awareness Campaigns: Promote knowledge of insurance entitlements and available services.
  • Capacity Building: Increase mental health professionals and digital outreach platforms.
  • School and Workplace Integration: Embed emotional literacy and psychological support in institutions.
  • Insurance Product Innovation: Develop simplified, accessible plans tailored to diverse demographic needs.
  • Data Collection and Monitoring: Use claim trends to shape targeted mental health interventions.

Conclusion

Mental healthcare in India is at a pivotal moment. The convergence of legal reform, insurance innovation, and shifting public attitudes is laying the foundation for a more inclusive and responsive mental health system. However, inclusion on paper must translate to accessibility in practice. Bridging this gap requires sustained efforts in awareness, education, and empathetic policy implementation.

Mental health is no longer an afterthought — it is an essential pillar of human well-being and economic productivity.

 

India’s Growing Gig Economy

  • 12 Jun 2025

In News:

India’s gig and platform economy is undergoing a significant transformation, driven by digital technologies, evolving labour market dynamics, and an increasing preference for flexible work arrangements. According to a recent study by the VV Giri National Labour Institute (VVGNLI), affiliated with the Ministry of Labour and Employment, India’s gig workforce is projected to grow to 62 million by 2047, accounting for 15% of the total non-agricultural workforce.

 

This forecast builds on estimates from the 2022 NITI Aayog report, which pegged the number of gig workers at 3 million in 2020, employed across 11 major platform companies. This figure is expected to rise to 23 million by 2030 (7% of the non-farm workforce). Under optimistic scenarios, gig employment could expand to 90.8 million, though external shocks like policy shifts or technological disruptions may cap growth at 32.5 million.

 

The gig economy in India initially found its foothold in ride-sharing and food delivery services. Over time, it has diversified into sectors such as healthcare, education, digital content creation, and professional consulting, indicating its expanding relevance in the overall employment landscape.

 

Despite this rapid growth, gig workers face significant structural challenges. These include the lack of social security, unregulated working hours, occupational stress, and the absence of effective grievance redressal mechanisms. Many gig workers are also vulnerable to retaliatory practices, such as app-based ID deactivation, for voicing concerns against unfair algorithms or wage-related issues.

 

One of the most pressing issues highlighted by the study is the ambiguous classification of gig workers. While countries such as the UK, Canada, Spain, France, and Denmark have legally recognised gig workers and provided appropriate labour protections, India continues to grapple with defining the boundary between employees and independent contractors. This ambiguity deprives workers of legal safeguards, especially those working full-time on digital platforms.

 

The VVGNLI study calls for urgent regulatory interventions. These include:

  • Legal recognition of gig workers and their right to unionize and collectively bargain.
  • Algorithmic accountability, to ensure transparency in task allocation and wage determination.
  • Minimum income guarantees, regulated working hours, and integration of occupational health and safety standards.
  • Establishing a National Registry for Platform and Gig Workers, managed jointly by central and state governments, to facilitate social security coverage.

 

Additionally, the Code on Social Security, 2020, provides a legislative foundation to extend health insurance, accident coverage, and retirement benefits to gig and platform workers. It proposes a social security fund, with contributions from aggregators, to support these provisions.

To ensure long-term sustainability, the government must also invest in skill development and upskilling initiatives, particularly in digital literacy, entrepreneurship, and emerging trades, to improve employability and economic resilience among gig workers.

 

In conclusion, India’s gig economy holds the potential to redefine employment patterns and contribute substantially to inclusive economic growth. However, this potential can only be fully realised through a rights-based, inclusive, and regulation-driven framework that balances innovation with worker welfare.

U.K.–EU Reset: A Strategic Gateway for India

  • 11 Jun 2025

In News:

The recent diplomatic overture by the United Kingdom under Prime Minister Keir Starmer to reset relations with the European Union (EU) marks a pivotal moment in Euro-Atlantic cooperation. Though the development appears Eurocentric, its implications for India are profound — ranging from trade facilitation and foreign policy realignment to diaspora and talent mobility. For India, this evolving Western convergence offers a unique opportunity to recalibrate its economic and strategic engagements.

Redefining India’s Trade Corridors

The renewed UK-EU cooperation — covering food safety, fisheries, customs, and border controls — has the potential to ease operational frictions for Indian exporters that emerged post-Brexit.

  • Current Trade Landscape: In FY2024, India’s exports to the EU stood at $86 billion, and to the U.K. at $12 billion, reflecting the strategic importance of these partners.
  • Post-Brexit Challenges: Indian businesses, especially in pharmaceuticals, textiles, and agri-products, faced dual regulatory requirements.
  • Reset Opportunities: A harmonised regulatory framework can reduce compliance redundancies and lower costs. India, which meets over 25% of the U.K.’s pharmaceutical demand, could benefit from unified drug approvals.
  • Sectoral Impact:
    • Indian seafood exports (worth approx. $7.38 billion) could see improved access if sanitary and phytosanitary norms are streamlined.
    • However, SMEs may face challenges in adapting to tighter European standards.

Policy Recommendation: India must bolster its export competitiveness through schemes like RoDTEP, PLI, and enhanced certification infrastructure to meet higher technical standards.

Deepening Strategic and Diplomatic Ties

A more aligned U.K.-EU foreign and defence policy creates new avenues for India to build deeper multilateral and trilateral engagements.

  • Existing Frameworks:
    • India–EU: Strategic Partnership Roadmap to 2025
    • India–U.K.: Comprehensive Strategic Partnership (2022), covering cybersecurity, climate, and maritime security
  • Potential Synergies:
    • Enhanced coordination in forums like the UN, G-20, and WTO
    • Scope for defence collaboration in the Indo-Pacific through joint naval exercises, technology transfers, and intelligence sharing

India’s partnerships with France, Germany, and the U.K. already focus on defence modernisation and green technologies. A coordinated U.K.–EU posture could formalise India’s role in shaping Western responses to strategic challenges in Asia, especially China’s assertiveness.

Global South Leadership: India can also leverage this alignment to push for climate finance, digital public infrastructure, and multilateral reform, reinforcing its leadership role post-G20 2023.

Reimagining Talent Mobility and Diaspora Engagement

India possesses the world’s largest diaspora, with significant populations in the U.K. and EU.

  • Mobility Trends:
    • In 2024, the U.K. issued over 1,10,000 student visas to Indian nationals.
    • Post-Brexit, mobility of Indian professionals to the EU was curtailed.
  • Potential Reset:
    • Renewed U.K.–EU coordination on border and migration policy may enable partial mobility reintegration.
    • India’s migration pacts with France, Germany, and Portugal could benefit from a wider U.K.–EU framework.

This realignment could lay the groundwork for a semi-integrated talent corridor, enhancing the movement of students, skilled professionals, and researchers.

Conclusion: Strategic Imperatives for India

The U.K.–EU reset is more than a European internal realignment — it is a geostrategic moment that India must strategically exploit. Whether through trade harmonisation, defence diplomacy, or diaspora engagement, India stands to gain significantly. However, to capitalise on this, India must:

  • Accelerate trade facilitation and infrastructure modernisation
  • Strengthen its regulatory frameworks
  • Enhance institutional diplomatic coordination
  • Assertively position itself in multilateral platforms

This convergence of economic and diplomatic opportunity presents India with a chance to reshape its place in the evolving global order.

Scaling India's Apparel Sector for Export Growth

  • 10 Jun 2025

In News:

India’s textiles and apparel (T&A) sector is one of its oldest and most employment-intensive industries, contributing 2.3% to GDP and employing over 45 million people, making it the second-largest employer after agriculture. Despite this, India’s share in global apparel trade has remained stagnant at around 3% for two decades—far below its potential. With global apparel trade at $529.3 billion, India’s contribution stands at just $15.7 billion, and the ambitious target of $40 billion in exports by 2030 remains distant unless bold structural reforms are initiated.

Structural Challenges

The fragmentation of the industry is a major bottleneck. Over 80% of apparel units are MSMEs, operating with limited scale, informal labour, and poor integration. In contrast, countries like China, Vietnam, and Bangladesh have achieved scale by setting up large, export-oriented factories or coordinated "buying houses" to pool capacity.

India’s cost of capital (≈9%) also hampers competitiveness, compared to 3–4.5% in China and Vietnam. Further, rigid labour laws, such as mandatory 2x overtime pay, discourage formal employment. Supply chains are dispersed, increasing delivery timelines and logistics costs. These issues are compounded by low female labour force participation, despite women comprising 70% of the workforce in leading apparel hubs.

Success Story: Shahi Exports

The example of Shahi Exports illustrates what is achievable with scale, professionalism, and inclusive practices. From a 15-member unit in 1974, it has evolved into India’s largest apparel exporter, employing over 100,000 workers (70% women) across 50+ factories in 8 states, with over $1 billion in revenue. It shows that Indian firms can scale and compete globally, but organic growth alone is too slow to meet national export goals.

Policy Reforms: A Way Forward

To unlock the sector’s full potential, transformative policy measures are required:

  • Capital Access for Scale: A 25–30% capital subsidy and a 5–7 year tax holiday for units with 1,000+ machines would help achieve viable scale. Linking incentives to size, as proposed under PLI 2.0, is essential.
  • Flexible Labour Norms: Labour reforms, such as rationalising overtime pay to 1.25x (ILO standard), and easing compliance can encourage formal hiring. Linking MGNREGA funds (25–30%) to wage subsidies in garment units can promote productive, formal employment.
  • Skilling for Demand: Schemes like SAMARTH should be expanded for short-cycle, demand-driven training, especially for women and youth, to bridge the skills gap in the sector.
  • Cluster-Based Development: At least two PM MITRA Parks should be designated as garment hubs in labour-abundant, low-cost states like Uttar Pradesh and Madhya Pradesh to reduce migration, cut costs, and promote inclusive industrialisation.
  • Export-Linked Incentives (ELI): Shift from production-linked to export-linked schemes that reward global competitiveness, not just output.

Conclusion

The apparel sector offers a rare opportunity to generate mass employment, promote inclusive growth, and boost exports. But without scale, reforms, and a strategic policy shift, the $40 billion export dream will remain elusive. India must act swiftly to replicate success stories like Shahi Exports, not over decades, but within years. The time for bold policy innovation is now.

Reforming Research Procurement in India

  • 09 Jun 2025

In News:

In a landmark move to boost scientific research and innovation, the Finance Ministry of India recently announced a series of reforms easing the procurement norms for scientific equipment. This policy shift addresses long-standing grievances from the research community about sub-standard materials, procedural delays, and restricted autonomy due to rigid procurement rules under the Government e-Marketplace (GEM).

Background: Challenges with GEM Procurement

The GEM portal, launched to promote “Make in India” procurement, mandated government institutions to source all goods through it. However, scientists highlighted serious concerns about its inefficiency, especially the inability to procure high-quality, customised scientific instruments required for cutting-edge research. Delays in procurement approvals and the necessity to first prove non-availability on GEM further hindered project timelines and research output.

Key Policy Reforms and Amendments

To rectify these issues, the government amended the General Financial Rules (GFR), introducing the following major changes:

  • Exemption from GEM Mandate:
    • Select scientific institutions and universities are now allowed to procure equipment and consumables outside the GEM portal.
    • This restores procurement autonomy to Directors, Vice-Chancellors, and Chancellors—similar to the pre-GEM era—enabling timely purchases from specialised, quality vendors.
  • Enhanced Financial Autonomy:
    • Without Quotation: Procurement limit increased from ?1 lakh to ?2 lakh for direct purchases.
    • Purchase Committee Limit: Raised from ?10 lakh to ?25 lakh, enabling quicker institutional decision-making.
    • Tender Enquiry Ceiling: Enhanced from ?50 lakh to ?1 crore, facilitating mid-level procurements efficiently.
    • These changes reflect inflation adjustments and reduce the administrative burden on research institutions.
  • Global Tender Enquiry (GTE):
    • Directors and Vice-Chancellors are now authorised to approve GTEs up to ?200 crore, a responsibility earlier restricted to departmental Secretaries.
    • This decentralisation helps avoid bottlenecks and streamlines large-scale procurements critical for advanced R&D.

Strategic Relevance and Broader Objectives

These reforms are strategically aligned with India’s aspirations under Atmanirbhar Bharat and its goal to emerge as a global science and technology leader. By reducing bureaucratic hurdles, enhancing institutional autonomy, and ensuring timely access to world-class research tools, the reforms empower innovation across sectors like health, defence, space, and agriculture.

Institutions benefitting from these measures include:

  • Department of Science and Technology (DST)
  • Department of Biotechnology (DBT)
  • Council of Scientific and Industrial Research (CSIR)
  • Department of Atomic Energy (DAE)
  • Indian Council of Medical Research (ICMR)
  • Indian Council of Agricultural Research (ICAR)
  • Defence Research and Development Organisation (DRDO)
  • Postgraduate research institutions under central and state universities

Conclusion

The revised GFR norms signify a progressive policy intervention aimed at creating a facilitative research ecosystem in India. By streamlining procurement, restoring institutional trust, and removing operational roadblocks, the government has responded positively to the scientific community's demands. As acknowledged by Science Minister Jitendra Singh, this reform is not just administrative; it is transformative—unlocking India's potential for innovation and scientific excellence.

India’s Decline in Extreme Poverty: A Decade of Significant Gains

  • 08 Jun 2025

In News:

According to the latest World Bank estimates, India’s extreme poverty has sharply declined from 27.1% in 2011-12 to 5.3% in 2022-23, based on an updated $3/day consumption threshold adjusted for 2021 purchasing power parity (PPP). In absolute terms, the number of extremely poor people has reduced from 344.47 million to 75.24 million, indicating 269 million people were lifted out of extreme poverty during this period.

The progress is more striking when viewed under the previous poverty line of $2.15/day (2017 prices). Under this standard, the extreme poverty rate fell from 16.2% to 2.3%, translating to a drop in the number of poor from 205.93 million to 33.66 million—a reduction of 172 million individuals.

Even as the poverty threshold was raised globally, India managed to outperform most developing countries. The lower-middle-income (LMIC) poverty rate, measured at a higher threshold of $4.20/day, also fell substantially—from 57.7% in 2011-12 to 23.9% in 2022-23. This decline reduced the number of people under LMIC poverty from 732.48 million to 342.32 million over 11 years.

The fall in poverty occurred despite high inflation during the decade. When adjusted for domestic inflation, even the $3/day threshold (new benchmark) is higher than the inflation-adjusted $2.60/day from previous estimates, making the achievement more credible.

The World Bank estimates also reveal stark differences in poverty distribution:

  • The top five populous states—Uttar Pradesh, Maharashtra, Bihar, West Bengal, and Madhya Pradesh—accounted for 65% of extreme poverty in 2011-12, but still made up 54% in 2022-23.
  • Rural India still shows significant poverty, with 90% of rural individuals reporting average monthly per capita expenditures below Rs 5,763, and the bottom 5% class spending just Rs 1,677.
  • Urban poverty is relatively lower, with 25.78% in the bottom 40%, compared to 45.44% in rural areas.
  • Educational attainment remains a strong poverty determinant; in 2022-23, 35.1% of Indians without schooling lived below the LMIC poverty line, compared to 14.9% with post-secondary education.

In terms of non-monetary deprivation, India also recorded improvement. As per the Multidimensional Poverty Index (MPI), which considers factors such as access to education, electricity, water, and sanitation, multidimensional poverty fell from 53.8% in 2005-06 to 15.5% in 2022-23. NITI Aayog estimates it to be 11.28%, down from 29.17% in 2013-14.

To ensure continued tracking, NITI Aayog is planning a new income-based extreme poverty measure with broader consultation. Meanwhile, the Household Consumption Expenditure Survey (HCES) 2023-24 indicates a 45.4% rise in rural consumption and 38% in urban consumption, reinforcing the World Bank’s findings.

Conclusion

India’s remarkable poverty reduction over the last decade reflects successful economic reforms, social welfare schemes, and increased consumption. However, regional, educational, and rural-urban disparities persist, necessitating continued policy focus, data refinement, and inclusive growth strategies.

Kashmir Rail Link: A Strategic and Developmental Milestone

  • 07 Jun 2025

In News:

The launch of the Vande Bharat Express between Katra and Srinagar by Prime Minister Narendra Modi marks a transformative chapter in Jammu and Kashmir’s infrastructural journey. The long-awaited completion of the Udhampur-Srinagar-Baramulla Rail Link (USBRL) is not merely a technological feat, but a symbol of national integration, economic upliftment, and inclusive development in the Kashmir Valley.

Historical Background

The evolution of rail connectivity in Jammu and Kashmir dates back to the colonial era when, in 1897, a 40–45 km rail line linked Jammu to Sialkot (now in Pakistan). Subsequent plans to extend railways to Srinagar in the early 20th century were shelved. After the 1947 Partition, Jammu was cut off from the rail grid as Sialkot became part of Pakistan. The region had to wait until 1975 for the inauguration of the Pathankot–Jammu line. The Jammu–Udhampur line, started in 1983, was completed only in 2004.

In 1994, the rail project was further extended to include Srinagar and Baramulla, and the USBRL was declared a national project in 2002, with the initial estimated cost of ?2,500 crore.

USBRL: Engineering Triumph

The fully operational 272 km USBRL has been completed at a revised cost of ?43,780 crore. It includes 36 tunnels, 943 bridges, and several record-setting engineering marvels in the seismically active, snow-covered terrain of the Shivalik and Pir Panjal ranges.

  • Chenab Bridge: The world’s tallest railway arch bridge, 359 meters above the riverbed, surpassing even the Eiffel Tower. Designed to withstand wind speeds of 260 km/h and extreme temperatures, it spans 1,315 meters and has a life expectancy of 120 years.
  • Anji Khad Bridge: India’s first cable-stayed rail bridge, located in Reasi, towers 331 meters above the river and stretches 725 meters. Its iconic inverted Y-shaped pylon is supported by 96 high-tensile cables.
  • Tunnel T-49: At 12.77 km, it is India’s longest transport tunnel, located in Ramban district, designed to ensure seamless all-weather connectivity.

Strategic and Socio-Economic Significance

This rail link is a game-changer for the region. By reducing Katra–Srinagar travel time to just 3 hours, it ensures year-round, all-weather accessibility, even during harsh Himalayan winters. The connectivity is critical not only for civilians but also for the rapid movement of security personnel in this strategically sensitive region.

Economically, the rail link is poised to boost trade and tourism. It will facilitate the quicker and more cost-effective transport of local produce such as apples, walnuts, saffron, pashmina, and handicrafts, thereby integrating the Valley with national markets. Reduced logistics costs will also lower the prices of essential goods imported into Kashmir.

Way Forward

The upcoming extension to Jammu Tawi aims to further enhance nationwide connectivity to Srinagar. This project stands as a testament to India’s commitment to inclusive development, national unity, and strategic infrastructure in border regions. With its blend of engineering excellence and socio-political impact, the USBRL reinforces the vision of a Viksit Bharat that leaves no region behind.

Tiger Conservation in India

  • 06 Jun 2025

In News:

India, which hosts over 70% of the world’s wild tiger population, holds a dual responsibility of pride and stewardship. The near-collapse of tiger numbers in 2006, with populations falling to around 1,400 and local extinctions in Sariska and Panna, prompted a national awakening. Strengthened interventions such as the formation of the National Tiger Conservation Authority (NTCA) and Project Tiger rejuvenation efforts helped India register over 3,600 tigers in the 2023 census, reflecting significant progress.

From Crisis to Recovery: Institutional Response

The disappearance of tigers due to poaching, habitat degradation, and poor monitoring led to structural reforms post-2006. The NTCA (established in 2005) ensured stricter protocols, better surveillance, and habitat restoration. India now boasts 53 Tiger Reserves, with central and southern states like Madhya Pradesh, Karnataka, and Uttarakhand emerging as conservation success stories.

Emerging Challenge: Prey Base Decline

Despite rising tiger numbers nationally, several reserves in eastern and central India—such as Guru Ghasidas, Indravati, Udanti-Sitanadi (Chhattisgarh), Palamau (Jharkhand), and Simlipal and Satkosia (Odisha)—have shown worrying trends of tiger decline. The core issue is not direct poaching but the fall in prey density, especially species like chital, sambar, and gaur. Scientific evidence indicates that tiger viability is closely tied to prey abundance, with a threshold of at least 10–15 prey animals per sq km required for stable populations.

Socioeconomic Roots of Ecological Depletion

Many affected reserves lie in poverty-stricken tribal regions. In the absence of alternative protein sources and sustainable livelihoods, communities turn to bushmeat hunting using traditional snares and traps. This not only reduces herbivore populations but also threatens predator survival. Palamau Reserve is a stark example where both large herbivores and tigers have nearly vanished under such pressures.

Institutional Recommendations and Ecological Restoration

The NTCA-WII 2023 report recommends short-term herbivore breeding enclosures but recognizes their limitations in rewilding success. A sustainable solution lies in habitat quality enhancement and involving communities in conservation. Some reserves still retain dense forests, providing an ecological foundation for revival. The decline of left-wing extremism in many areas also opens avenues for focused conservation interventions.

Towards Inclusive Conservation: Eco-Tourism and Livelihoods

Prosperous reserves like Bandhavgarh and Ranthambore benefit from conservation-linked tourism and community participation. In contrast, remote and underdeveloped areas lack such economic linkages. Promoting inclusive eco-tourism, skill development, and income-generation activities—such as SHGs, poultry farming, and forest produce marketing—can transform local attitudes.

Way Forward: Integrated, People-Centric Approaches

India must adopt multidimensional strategies combining ecological, institutional, and social measures:

  • Implement prey recovery plans in Tiger Conservation Plans (TCPs).
  • Provide targeted funding and technical support to underperforming states.
  • Restore grasslands, ensure wildlife corridors, and adopt technology (drones, AI) for monitoring.
  • Recognize community forest rights, promote Gram Sabha governance, and expand MGNREGA to conservation-linked jobs.

Conclusion

India’s tiger conservation success is laudable but remains precarious if prey depletion continues unchecked. The path ahead demands a shift from protectionism to participatory conservation—rooted in equity, ecological integrity, and community empowerment. The survival of the tiger is not merely a wildlife concern, but a test of India’s commitment to sustainable development and inclusive environmental governance.

Population Census 2027

  • 05 Jun 2025

In News:

India’s next population census is scheduled to be completed by March 1, 2027, marking a historic return to the decennial exercise after a 16-year gap—the longest in independent India’s history. Announced by the Ministry of Home Affairs (MHA), this census will be India’s first digital census and the first to include caste enumeration since Independence.

The census will be conducted intwo phases:

  1. House Listing and Housing Schedule
  2. Population Enumeration (including caste data)

The enumeration process will run from April 1, 2026 to February 28, 2027, with March 1, 2027, set as the reference date for most of India. For Ladakh and snow-bound areas of J&K, Himachal Pradesh, and Uttarakhand, the reference date will be October 1, 2026.

This exercise will be conducted under the Census Act, 1948 and the Census Rules, 1990. A gazette notification, expected on June 16, 2025, will formally announce the schedule. Around 25–30 lakh enumerators, largely schoolteachers, will be retrained to use a custom mobile app—a key component of the digital data collection process.

A major inclusion in this census is caste enumeration, extending beyond the current Scheduled Caste (SC) and Scheduled Tribe (ST) data. A separate input field will record caste data for all categories, making it a potentially transformative tool for targeted welfare policies and social justice initiatives.

However, the 2027 Census is not just a demographic exercise—it holds critical constitutional and political significance, especially in the context of delimitation and women's political reservation.

Under Articles 81 and 82 of the Constitution, the next delimitation of Lok Sabha and State Assembly constituencies must be based on the first census after 2026. The current 543 Lok Sabha seats are still based on the 1971 Census. The 42nd Constitutional Amendment (1976) had frozen seat redistribution, which was extended by the 84th Amendment (2002) until after 2026.

Once census data is finalized (likely by late 2027), Parliament must pass a Delimitation Act, following which a Delimitation Commission—headed by a retired Supreme Court judge and including the Chief Election Commissioner—will be constituted. This commission will determine the new seat allocation formula based on population per constituency.

Importantly, the implementation of 33% reservation for women in Parliament and State Assemblies, as mandated by the Women’s Reservation Act, is contingent upon the completion of this delimitation exercise.

This has triggered concerns, particularly from southern states like Tamil Nadu, which have seen slower population growth due to effective family planning. Redistribution based solely on population may reduce their parliamentary representation, leading to demands—such as by Tamil Nadu CM M.K. Stalin—for extending the status quo based on the 1971 census until 2056.

Political opposition has also criticized the delayed timeline, with Congress terming the 23-month postponement from 2021 as administrative inefficiency.

Moreover, there was no mention of updating the National Population Register (NPR), which is the first step towards the controversial National Register of Citizens (NRC).

In sum, Census 2027 is not just a statistical necessity but a politically sensitive and constitutionally mandated process, central to the future of electoral representation, gender justice, and federal balance in India.

India’s Green Economy: A Catalyst for Employment and Sustainable Development

  • 04 Jun 2025

In News:

India’s transition to a green economy is not only central to achieving its environmental and climate goals but is also emerging as a powerful engine for economic growth and employment generation.

According to a recent report by NLB Services, India’s green sector is expected to generate approximately 7.29 million new jobs by FY2027–28, with the figure projected to rise to 35 million by 2047, aligning with India’s long-term net-zero commitments.

Understanding the Green Economy

A green economy encompasses sectors and activities that contribute to ecological sustainability, low-carbon development, and resource efficiency, while also promoting inclusive employment. It integrates environmental goals with economic planning, thus creating green jobs in areas such as renewable energy, electric mobility, sustainable construction, waste management, and green agriculture.

Sectoral and Regional Dynamics

The most significant employment potential lies in industries such as renewable energy, electric vehicles (EVs), green infrastructure, sustainable textiles, and waste-to-energy solutions. These sectors have witnessed rising investments and policy focus under national missions such as PM-KUSUM, Faster Adoption and Manufacturing of Hybrid and Electric Vehicles (FAME), and the National Hydrogen Mission.

While metropolitan areas like Mumbai, Bengaluru, and Delhi remain hubs for green employment, tier II and III cities are poised to play a crucial role in the decentralisation of the green economy. Cities such as Jaipur, Coimbatore, Bhubaneswar, Visakhapatnam, and Indore are projected to account for 35–40% of the green job creation by FY28, primarily in logistics, warehousing, sustainable agriculture, and urban waste management.

Evolving Skill Demands

The transition towards green employment is redefining workforce skill requirements. Modern green jobs demand a blend of environmental sustainability expertise and technological proficiency, particularly in AI, IoT, GIS, blockchain, and data analytics. This digital integration is reshaping job profiles and creating pathways for future-ready employment.

In response, industries are shifting hiring strategies to focus more on skill-based recruitment rather than conventional degrees. There is also a growing emphasis on industry-academia collaborations to align curricula with the evolving demands of the green economy, thus fostering climate-literate and digitally equipped professionals.

Gender Inclusion and Equity Challenges

Despite the promising employment potential, women currently constitute only 11–12% of the green workforce in India. Barriers include limited access to STEM education, workplace safety concerns, and socio-cultural constraints. However, progressive employers are increasingly adopting inclusive hiring practices, promoting women-centric skill development programmes, and partnering with training agencies to build a more diverse and equitable green talent pipeline. These efforts are expected to improve female participation by 12–15% in the next 5–6 years.

Economic Significance

India’s green economy is expected to contribute significantly to national GDP. Its valuation is projected to reach $1 trillion by 2030, and expand to $15 trillion by 2070, supporting India’s target of achieving net-zero emissions by 2070. Thus, it offers a dual dividend—economic prosperity and environmental security.

Conclusion:
India’s green transition presents a transformative opportunity to simultaneously address climate change, unemployment, and regional disparities. With appropriate policy support, capacity building, and inclusivity, the green economy can become the bedrock of sustainable and equitable growth.

Technology Industry and Climate Goals

  • 03 Jun 2025

Introduction

The global technology sector, while being a driver of economic growth and innovation, is also a significant contributor to greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions. With the rapid expansion of cloud computing and digital services, data centres—the backbone of the digital economy—consume massive amounts of energy, primarily for cooling.

A recent landmark study by Microsoft and WSP Global, published in Nature, highlights the potential of advanced cooling technologies to significantly reduce the environmental footprint of data centres.

The Problem: Heat and Emissions from Data Centres

  • Energy Consumption: In modern data centres, cooling systems consume nearly as much electricity as computing itself.
  • Heat Management: As chips become smaller and faster, they generate more heat. Without effective cooling, systems overheat, leading to failure and reduced efficiency.
  • Climate Targets: The Information and Communications Technology (ICT) sector aims to reduce emissions by 42% by 2030 (from 2015 levels) and achieve net-zero by mid-century.

Cooling Innovations: The Game-Changers

1. Cold Plate Cooling (Direct-to-Chip Cooling)

  • Coolant flows through microchannels on a plate attached directly to the chip.
  • Reduces the need for energy-intensive air conditioning.
  • Heat is transferred away efficiently and silently.

2. Immersion Cooling

  • Entire hardware systems are submerged in thermally conductive, non-conductive liquid.
  • Uses one-phase (liquid remains stable) or two-phase (liquid vaporises and condenses) systems.
  • Ensures near-total heat dissipation and longer component life.

Environmental Impact (Study Findings):

Compared to traditional air cooling:

  • GHG Emissions by 15–21%
  • Energy Use by 15–20%
  • Water Consumption by 31–52%

With 100% renewable energy:

  • Emissions by 85–90%
  • Water use by 55–85%

Tech Industry’s Broader Climate Actions

  • Carbon Credits: Google, Netflix, and others invest in verified carbon offsets.
  • Blockchain for Carbon Markets: Ensures transparency; used by Indian IT firms for ESG compliance.
  • Renewable Energy: Tech giants like Apple, Meta, and Amazon power operations with green energy.
  • Indian Leadership: Infosys, Reliance, and Tech Mahindra lead in green operations using AI and energy-efficient systems.

Challenges and Limitations

  • Lifecycle Trade-offs: Coolant production and disposal can offset benefits.
  • Capital Cost: Retrofitting old data centres is expensive.
  • Regulatory Issues: Lack of global standards for coolants and fragmented carbon credit policies.
  • Dependence on Grid: Benefits are reduced if electricity is still coal-based.
  • Slow Deployment: Complex designs and supply chain delays hinder implementation.

Way Forward

  • Life Cycle Assessments (LCAs): Evaluate true environmental costs over the product lifecycle.
  • Unified Carbon Standards: Develop global frameworks for carbon credit verification and climate disclosures.
  • Government Support: Provide tax incentives, green finance, and subsidies for early adopters.
  • Strengthen R&D: Focus on low-impact coolants and AI-driven cooling systems.
  • Public-Private Partnerships: Encourage innovation through collaboration among tech firms, startups, and governments.

Conclusion

The technology industry stands at a crossroads where sustainable innovation is essential. Cooling technologies like cold plates and immersion cooling, coupled with renewable energy adoption and carbon offset mechanisms, can enable the ICT sector to significantly reduce its environmental footprint. With effective policy support and strategic innovation, the tech sector can become a pillar of global climate action.

Urban Flooding in India: A Growing Challenge and the Path to Resilience

  • 02 Jun 2025

In News:

Urban flooding has emerged as a critical challenge in India’s rapidly urbanising landscape. Cities like Delhi, Mumbai, Bengaluru, and Chennai face recurrent inundations, leading to loss of life, infrastructure damage, and economic disruptions. This crisis stems from a combination of outdated urban drainage systems, rapid concretisation, encroachment on natural water bodies, and climate change-induced extreme weather events.

The Urban Drainage Crisis

Urban drainage refers to the infrastructure that manages rainwater and prevents flooding. However, over 70% of India’s urban areas lack scientifically designed stormwater systems (MoHUA, 2019). Mumbai’s stormwater drains, originally built in the 1860s, can handle only 25 mm of rainfall per hour, while rainfall events often exceed 100 mm/hour. Delhi's drainage is based on 1976 norms, incapable of handling current rainfall intensities, such as the 185.9 mm received in a single day in May 2025. Bengaluru’s network is outdated, with over 65% of its lakes encroached and connected stormwater drains severely undersized.

Key causes of urban flooding include:

  • Natural Factors: Intensifying short-duration rainfalls due to climate change, low-lying topographies.
  • Man-made Factors: Unplanned urbanisation, loss of wetlands, illegal constructions, outdated design standards, infiltration of sewage into stormwater lines, and poor maintenance.

Economic and Environmental Impacts

Floods cause the highest economic damage among natural disasters in India. In 2024, Mumbai received 300 mm of rain in six hours, crippling the city’s transport and health systems. Chennai’s monsoon floods in 2024 led to massive waterlogging due to blocked drains and concretised surfaces.

Urbanisation has drastically increased impervious surfaces, reducing natural infiltration and increasing runoff. Nashik, for instance, witnessed rapid impervious expansion, contributing significantly to urban flooding.

Technological Solutions: GIS and Remote Sensing

To tackle urban flooding, advanced tools like Geographic Information Systems (GIS) and remote sensing are being deployed:

  • Satellite Monitoring: ISRO and NRSC use high-resolution imagery to monitor rainfall, land use, and flood-prone zones. LiDAR-generated Digital Elevation Models (DEMs) help map vulnerable areas.
  • Hydrological Modelling: Tools like HEC-HMS and HEC-RAS simulate flood scenarios and help plan mitigation strategies.
  • Urban Drainage Mapping: GIS assists in identifying drainage bottlenecks and encroachments. For instance, GIS studies in Ahmedabad and West Bengal’s Keleghai Basin have enabled flood risk zoning.

Government Interventions

Several policies and programs support flood mitigation:

  • AMRUT 2.0 and Smart Cities Mission: Promote integrated stormwater systems and sustainable urban drainage.
  • Model Building Bye Laws (2016): Mandate rainwater harvesting.
  • Jal Shakti Abhiyan, Atal Bhujal Yojana, and Amrit Sarovar Mission: Encourage water body rejuvenation and groundwater recharge.
  • NDMA Guidelines: Recommend real-time flood forecasting and risk mitigation using satellite data.

Future Directions

Moving forward, flood resilience must be built through:

  • Green Infrastructure: Restoring wetlands, using bioswales and permeable pavements.
  • Smart Drainage Systems: IoT-enabled sensors for real-time monitoring and early warnings.
  • AI Integration: Enhancing prediction models using real-time meteorological data.
  • Policy Enforcement: Preventing illegal constructions on floodplains and drainage channels.
  • Community Engagement: Raising awareness on waste disposal and flood preparedness.

Conclusion

Urban flooding in India reflects the failure to integrate environmental planning into urbanisation. However, with the aid of emerging technologies, inter-agency coordination, and proactive governance, Indian cities can transform from reactive flood responses to resilient urban systems. A holistic approach combining infrastructure, nature-based solutions, and data-driven policies is essential for sustainable urban development.

Preserving Glaciers: A Cry for Climate Justice and Water Security

  • 01 Jun 2025

In News:

In 2025, the United Nations has declared the year as the International Year of Glaciers’ Preservation, underscoring the urgent global need to address the retreat of glaciers. This critical issue was the focus of the International Conference on Glaciers’ Preservation held in Dushanbe, Tajikistan, co-hosted by the Republic of Tajikistan with the support of the UN and attended by leaders and experts from across the globe.

Glaciers, often referred to as the “water towers of the world”, store nearly 70% of Earth’s freshwater. However, accelerating glacier melt—driven by global warming—has become a slow-moving catastrophe. Since 1975, over 9,000 billion tons of glacial ice have been lost. The period from 2022 to 2024 marked the highest recorded glacier mass loss, with many smaller glaciers projected to vanish entirely within this century. This phenomenon threatens not only mountain ecosystems but also global water security, food systems, biodiversity, infrastructure, and human livelihoods.

Developing countries, particularly those in Asia, Africa, and Latin America, face disproportionate vulnerabilities due to glacier retreat. Communities dependent on glacier-fed rivers for drinking water, irrigation, and hydropower are witnessing increased poverty, forced migration, and infrastructure damage. Melting glaciers also contribute significantly to sea-level rise, placing coastal cities and low-lying regions at risk of displacement and flooding, as seen in Nigeria’s Niger Delta and Lagos.

The conference served as a clarion call to transition from pledges to concrete action. It recognized that 83% of global emissions that require mitigation lie with just 35 countries, emphasizing the need for collective ambition. The summit also launched the Decade for Cryosphere Science (2025–2034) and advocated for the establishment of a UN Glacier Preservation Fund to ensure sustained, long-term financing for adaptation.

Key recommendations included:

  • Integration of glacier preservation into national climate policies, especially Nationally Determined Contributions (NDCs) and National Adaptation Plans (NAPs).
  • Development of early warning systems and predictive tools for climate-related disasters in mountainous regions.
  • Investments in data-driven adaptation, using AI and hydrological models to forecast risks and optimize resilience strategies.
  • Promotion of gender-inclusive water governance, especially involving women in glacial and water-related decision-making.
  • Establishment of hydro-meteorological services for glacier-dependent regions to safeguard water access and ensure resilience.

The Deputy Secretary-General of the UN stressed that resilience pays — every dollar spent on adaptation strengthens economies, protects livelihoods, and mitigates future losses. The upcoming Fourth UN Conference on Financing for Development in Seville and COP30 in Brazil were identified as critical moments to elevate financing and policy commitments.

In conclusion, glacier loss is not merely an environmental concern but a humanitarian and developmental crisis. The protection of glaciers is central to achieving SDG 6 (Clean Water and Sanitation) and must be addressed with the urgency, equity, and international solidarity it demands. The world must act now—so that future generations do not inherit a planet where glaciers and the lifelines they sustain have become a relic of the past.

Governor’s Assent and Supreme Court’s Landmark Judgment

  • 10 Apr 2025

In News:

In a landmark judgment in The State of Tamil Nadu v. The Governor of Tamil Nadu & Anr., the Supreme Court of India decisively addressed the issue of Governors withholding assent to state bills without justification or within a reasonable time.

The case arose after the Tamil Nadu Governor delayed or reserved for the President’s consideration 10 re-enacted Bills passed by the State Assembly, prompting the State Government to move the Court. The Supreme Court declared such delays unconstitutional and laid down a time-bound framework for gubernatorial assent, thereby reinforcing the federal fabric and legislative autonomy of states.

Constitutional Framework and Issues

Under Article 200, when a Bill is presented to the Governor after being passed by the State Legislature, the Governor has four options: grant assent, withhold assent, return the Bill (except money Bills), or reserve it for the President. However, the proviso to Article 200 mandates that once a Bill is re-passed by the Legislature, the Governor “shall not withhold assent.” Article 163 requires the Governor to act on the aid and advice of the Council of Ministers (CoM), except in limited discretionary matters.

The crux of the problem lies in the absence of any timeline in Article 200, enabling some Governors to indefinitely delay or withhold assent—often termed a “pocket veto.” Such delays, especially in opposition-ruled states, have sparked accusations of political misuse and erosion of democratic norms. Tamil Nadu, Kerala, Punjab, and Telangana have faced similar issues, resulting in constitutional gridlock and litigation.

Key Observations of the Supreme Court

In its verdict, the Supreme Court declared that:

  • The Governor's delay in granting assent or reserving re-passed Bills is illegal and violates constitutional provisions.
  • The ten re-enacted Bills in Tamil Nadu are deemed to have received assent under Article 142, which empowers the Court to ensure "complete justice."
  • The Governor has no discretion to reserve or withhold assent once a Bill is re-passed by the Assembly unless its content has materially changed.
  • Indefinite inaction by the Governor amounts to a subversion of democracy and disrespect to the will of the people.

Time-bound Guidelines Laid Down

For the first time, the Court laid down clear timelines:

  • 1 month to act (assent/reserve) on the aid and advice of CoM.
  • 3 months to return a Bill if withholding assent without CoM's advice.
  • 1 month to assent to a Bill re-passed by the legislature.
  • 3 months maximum to reserve a Bill for the President, with justification.

Failure to comply renders the Governor’s inaction subject to judicial review, introducing a mechanism of constitutional accountability.

Significance for Federalism and Governance

The judgment is a milestone in reaffirming cooperative federalism, ending the misuse of gubernatorial discretion to obstruct state legislation. It upholds the supremacy of the elected legislature and enforces the constitutional principle that Governors are not political actors but facilitators of governance. It also ensures that democratic processes cannot be sabotaged by unelected constitutional functionaries.

Conclusion

By reinforcing time-bound gubernatorial actions and curbing arbitrary delays, the Supreme Court has safeguarded India’s constitutional architecture. As Dr. B.R. Ambedkar had warned, the effectiveness of the Constitution depends on its implementers. This verdict echoes that caution, ensuring that constitutional morality prevails over partisan politics.

Bridging the Gender Gap: Insights from “Women and Men in India 2024”

  • 09 Apr 2025

In News:

The Ministry of Statistics and Programme Implementation (MoSPI) recently released the 26th edition of “Women and Men in India 2024: Selected Indicators and Data”, a flagship publication that offers a gender-disaggregated statistical portrait of India. This comprehensive document provides valuable insights into the progress, challenges, and opportunities in achieving gender equality across various socio-economic spheres.

Purpose and Scope

Drawing from official statistics across Ministries and Departments, the publication covers vital areas such as population dynamics, education, health, economic participation, and political representation, highlighting disparities and gains across gender lines. It also reflects urban-rural divides and regional variations, thus enabling data-driven policymaking for inclusive development.

Education: Moving Towards Gender Parity

India has shown consistent improvements in Gender Parity Index (GPI) in education. Primary and higher secondary levels have maintained high GPI values, indicating strong female enrolment rates. While upper primary and elementary levels witnessed some fluctuations, they largely remained close to parity, demonstrating the impact of initiatives like Beti Bachao, Beti Padhao and expanding access to girls’ education.

Labour Force and Financial Inclusion

Women’s Labour Force Participation Rate (LFPR) has seen a marked improvement, rising from 49.8% in 2017-18 to 60.1% in 2023-24 (usual status for ages 15+). This indicates a gradual integration of women into the formal and informal workforce, though structural and cultural barriers persist.

In the financial sector, women now own 39.2% of all bank accounts and contribute 39.7% of total deposits. Their participation is especially prominent in rural India, where they make up 42.2% of account holders, showcasing the success of financial inclusion efforts under the Pradhan Mantri Jan Dhan Yojana.

Digital and Entrepreneurial Engagement

A notable trend is the sharp rise in DEMAT accounts, suggesting increased retail participation in capital markets. From March 2021 to November 2024, the total DEMAT accounts quadrupled from 33.26 million to 143.02 million. While men still dominate in terms of numbers, female participation also grew fourfold, rising from 6.67 million to 27.71 million in this period.

Encouragingly, female-led proprietary establishments across sectors such as manufacturing, trade, and services have shown a rising trend over 2021–24, indicating growing entrepreneurial confidence.

Additionally, startups with at least one woman director recognized by DPIIT rose from 1,943 in 2017 to 17,405 in 2024, underscoring the rise of women in innovation and enterprise.

Political Participation and Electoral Empowerment

Electoral data reflects the deepening roots of women’s political empowerment. The number of total electors rose from 173.2 million in 1952 to 978 million in 2024, with increasing female voter registration. Female voter turnout, which was 67.2% in 2019, stood at 65.8% in 2024. Notably, the gender gap in voting has narrowed, with female turnout surpassing male turnout in 2024, signaling a positive shift in political engagement.

Conclusion

The “Women and Men in India 2024” report is more than a statistical compendium—it is a mirror to India’s gender realities. While progress is evident in domains like education, financial inclusion, and entrepreneurship, persistent gaps remain. For India to achieve true gender equity, these insights must inform targeted, data-driven policies that empower women across all sectors, making gender equality central to the nation’s development discourse.

Prescribing Preventive Medicine for a Healthy India

  • 08 Apr 2025

In News:

As India aspires to become a $5 trillion economy and a global powerhouse, it must confront a growing public health crisis — the rising tide of non-communicable diseases (NCDs). Often called the "silent epidemic," NCDs are now the leading cause of death in India, responsible for approximately two-thirds of all mortalities. A preventive health-care mindset is the need of the hour — one that aims to "heal before there is a need to heal."

The Burden of NCDs: A Growing Threat

India has undergone a significant epidemiological transition, with communicable diseases declining but NCDs surging. Chronic ailments such as heart disease, diabetes, cancer, stroke, and chronic respiratory conditions now claim 5–6 million lives annually. Worryingly, these diseases are increasingly affecting younger populations, with 22% of Indians over the age of 30 at risk of dying from an NCD before 70.

This threatens India’s demographic dividend and economic productivity. Young patients in their 30s and 40s are presenting with heart ailments and diabetic complications, reflecting a national health crisis.

Economic Impact: A Drain on Development

The economic cost of NCDs is staggering. Reduced workforce participation and productivity losses are already costing India 5–10% of its GDP annually. A joint study by the World Economic Forum and Harvard School of Public Health estimated that India could lose $3.5–4 trillion due to NCDs between 2012 and 2030. Clearly, investment in preventive care is not a burden, but a strategic economic necessity.

Lifestyle and Environmental Triggers

Most NCDs are preventable. Key risk factors include:

  • Sedentary lifestyles
  • Unhealthy diets
  • Tobacco and alcohol use
  • Air pollution
  • Genetic predisposition

About 80% of premature cases of heart disease, stroke, and diabetes can be prevented by lifestyle modification. With 22–23% of Indian adults overweight, tackling obesity is critical. Regular 30 minutes of moderate physical activity, healthy diets low in sugar and fat, and pollution control are essential pillars of preventive health.

Early Detection and Screening: A Lifesaver

Early diagnosis through regular screenings from age 40 (or earlier with family history) enables timely intervention. This includes:

  • Hypertension and diabetes checks
  • Mammography for breast cancer
  • HPV testing for cervical cancer
  • Colon polyp screening

Early detection helps prevent complications — e.g., controlling blood pressure to prevent stroke, or detecting early-stage cancer.

Technology and AI: Catalysts for Preventive Care

India’s 750+ million smartphone users present a unique opportunity. Mobile apps, wearables, and health trackers can promote awareness and monitor health in real time.

Artificial Intelligence (AI) can:

  • Predict individual disease risk through data modelling
  • Generate health risk scores
  • Detect anomalies in X-rays or CT scans (e.g., lung nodules, fatty liver)

Used responsibly, AI enhances accuracy and access while keeping care humane and patient-centric.

Creating a Preventive Ecosystem

Preventive care must become a national mindset. Key stakeholders include:

  • Individuals: Adopt healthy habits and regular check-ups.
  • Workplaces: Implement employee wellness programmes.
  • Healthcare providers: Shift from curative to preventive approaches.
  • Government: Expand initiatives like the National Programme for Prevention and Control of NCDs and Health and Wellness Centres.

Policy measures must also be aligned — urban design should promote exercise, school curricula should include nutrition education, and food industry norms must limit unhealthy ingredients.

Conclusion

Preventive medicine is more than a health intervention — it is a development imperative. By encouraging early detection, healthy lifestyles, and technology-enabled care, India can reduce disease burden, enhance productivity, and safeguard its economic ambitions. Every individual’s choice matters. Scaled across 1.4 billion people, these choices will shape not just personal well-being but the health and prosperity of the nation.

Child Sexual Abuse in India

  • 31 May 2025

Context:

A landmark global study published in The Lancet has brought to light the disturbing scale of child sexual abuse (CSA) worldwide. Using data from 204 countries (1990–2023), the study by the Institute for Health Metrics and Evaluation found that 18.9% of women and 14.8% of men globally were victims of CSA. In India, 30.8% of women and 13.5% of men reported having experienced sexual violence before turning 18, placing it among the countries with the highest prevalence for women.

The research revealed that most abuse begins in childhood, with 67% of girls and 72% of boys facing their first abuse before 18. A staggering 26.9% of Indian women and 9.4% of men aged 20–24 continue to report having been abused during their childhood, indicating the persistence of this crisis.

Context and Contributing Factors

CSA in India is exacerbated by societal stigma, patriarchal norms, and underreporting, particularly among boys. Male survivors face additional silence due to entrenched ideas of masculinity and victim-blaming. Abuse often occurs in familiar settings, including homes and schools, with digital exploitation emerging as a growing threat.

Furthermore, regional disparities persist. Urban areas report more digital abuse, while rural areas suffer from familial exploitation compounded by lack of awareness and legal access. States like Kerala and Maharashtra show better reporting, while Bihar and Uttar Pradesh lag.

Legal and Institutional Response

India enacted the Protection of Children from Sexual Offences (POCSO) Act in 2012, a gender-neutral law covering a wide range of sexual offences with child-friendly procedures. However, implementation gaps remain:

  • Conviction rates below 30%
  • Backlogged trials
  • Insufficient training for police and judiciary

Additionally, mental health services for survivors are scarce, and sex education in schools remains inadequate, leaving children vulnerable and uninformed.

Civil Society and Global Comparisons

NGOs such as Save the Children, Kailash Satyarthi Children’s Foundation, and HAQ have played key roles in rehabilitation and awareness. International best practices offer valuable lessons:

  • Nordic countries integrate mandatory sex education.
  • Australia uses public awareness and national offender registries.

Recommendations and Way Forward

A multisectoral, prevention-focused approach is vital:

  • Legal Reforms
    • Fast-track POCSO courts
    • Child-friendly police units
    • Sensitisation training for frontline staff
  • Education System Overhaul
    • Include modules on “safe/unsafe touch” and digital safety
    • Train teachers to detect and report CSA
  • Community Engagement
    • Empower Panchayats and child welfare committees
    • Conduct grassroots campaigns to break the culture of silence
  • Technological Safeguards
    • Strengthen helplines like Childline 1098
    • Collaborate with tech platforms for safer digital ecosystems
  • Research and Data Collection
    • Create a national CSA data repository
    • Promote evidence-based policymaking through academic and NGO partnerships

Conclusion

The Lancet study underscores that CSA is not merely a criminal issue—it is a public health and social emergency. Laws like POCSO, while crucial, are not enough. What is needed is a coordinated, empathetic, and data-driven strategy that spans homes, schools, communities, and cyberspace. Only then can India safeguard its children not just from predators, but from institutional neglect and societal apathy.

Deputy Speaker of Lok Sabha

  • 30 May 2025

In News:

The office of the Deputy Speaker of the Lok Sabha, though not explicitly bound by rigid timelines, holds constitutional and democratic significance in India's parliamentary democracy. Under Article 93 of the Constitution, the Lok Sabha must elect a Speaker and Deputy Speaker from among its members "as soon as may be." Despite this mandate, the Deputy Speaker’s post has remained vacant since June 2019, reflecting a deepening divergence from constitutional propriety and democratic convention.

Constitutional Framework and Election Process

The Deputy Speaker is elected by Lok Sabha members, with the election date fixed by the Speaker and communicated through a parliamentary bulletin. As per Article 94, the Deputy Speaker remains in office until resignation, disqualification, or removal by a resolution supported by a majority. If the seat falls vacant, the House must elect a replacement. Constitutionally, under Article 95, the Deputy Speaker exercises all powers of the Speaker in their absence, including presiding over sessions, maintaining order, and ensuring legislative discipline.

While the Constitution does not mandate a time frame for this election, the phrase “as soon as may be” is intended to ensure prompt appointment to avoid any constitutional vacuum. However, the absence of legal compulsion has been misinterpreted, leading to prolonged delays.

Functions and Powers

The Deputy Speaker assists the Speaker in running the House and steps in as presiding officer when the Speaker is absent. In legislative committees, if nominated, the Deputy Speaker automatically assumes chairmanship. Distinctively, unlike the Speaker, the Deputy Speaker may participate in debates and vote on all matters when not presiding. When chairing, however, the Deputy Speaker can only vote in case of a tie. The salary of the Deputy Speaker is charged on the Consolidated Fund of India, ensuring financial independence from executive discretion.

Parliamentary Convention and Historical Practice

India's parliamentary practice, inspired by the Westminster model, has traditionally ensured balance by allocating the Deputy Speaker’s post to the Opposition, especially since the post-Emergency era. Notable examples include G.G. Swell (1969–77) and Godey Murahari (1977–79), both from Opposition parties. The intent has been to uphold a power-sharing mechanism and offer space for dissent within the House's functioning.

Democratic Concerns Arising from Prolonged Vacancy

The continued absence of a Deputy Speaker through the 17th and now 18th Lok Sabha raises serious concerns. It undermines Articles 93–95, and violates Rule 8 of the Lok Sabha Rules (1952), which mandates timely election post a formal motion. The delay centralizes authority in the Speaker—typically from the ruling party—and distorts the democratic balance between treasury and Opposition benches.

Moreover, the non-appointment sidelines the principles of consensus-based governance and institutional checks and balances, weakening parliamentary accountability. It also poses risks during any potential Speaker vacancy, potentially triggering a constitutional crisis.

Conclusion

The Deputy Speaker's post is not a ceremonial redundancy but a constitutional necessity for balanced legislative functioning. Upholding this institution is critical for the health of India’s democracy. The ongoing vacancy reflects not just administrative inaction but a gradual erosion of parliamentary conventions, warranting urgent political consensus and constitutional fidelity.

Base Editing Breakthrough

  • 29 May 2025

In News:

In a landmark medical feat, a nine-month-old American boy, Kyle “KJ” Muldoon Jr., became the first known human to be successfully treated using base editing, a next-generation gene editing technique derived from CRISPR-Cas9. KJ was born with Carbamoyl Phosphate Synthetase I (CPS1) deficiency, a rare genetic disorder that disrupts nitrogen breakdown, leading to toxic ammonia buildup—known as hyperammonemia—which can be fatal if untreated.

From CRISPR-Cas9 to Base Editing: Evolution of Gene Editing Tools

CRISPR-Cas9, developed in 2012 by Jennifer Doudna and Emmanuelle Charpentier, revolutionized biotechnology and earned them the 2020 Nobel Prize in Chemistry. Modeled after a microbial immune system, CRISPR works by creating “genetic memory”—capturing viral DNA and guiding the Cas9 enzyme, which acts as molecular scissors, to target and cut specific DNA sequences. This enables scientists to eliminate or repair faulty genes by inducing a double-strand break followed by insertion of a corrected DNA sequence.

However, the double-strand break mechanism raised concerns about unintended genetic consequences. Enter base editing, a refined tool that modifies single DNA bases—the letters A, T, C, G—without cutting both strands of the DNA. Instead of scissors and glue, base editing works like a pencil and eraser, replacing one incorrect base pair with the correct one using a fusion of Cas9 and a base-modifying enzyme. In KJ’s case, the specific base mispair causing CPS1 deficiency was successfully corrected using this technique.

 

Advantages of Base Editing

  • Precision and Safety: Avoids double-strand breaks, reducing off-target effects.
  • Compactness: Easier to deliver to cells via viral vectors.
  • No foreign DNA: Eliminates need for donor DNA insertion.
  • Customisation: Suitable for diseases caused by single-nucleotide mutations.

Challenges: Economic, Ethical, and Regulatory

Despite its promise, base editing faces several bottlenecks:

  • Cost and Accessibility: The procedure is prohibitively expensive—estimated in the range of hundreds of thousands of dollars—and was funded by research institutions and biotech firms in KJ’s case.
  • Scalability: The therapy was custom-designed for KJ’s specific mutation, limiting its use for others. Such personalised medicine lacks the economies of scale that attract pharmaceutical investment.
  • Regulatory hurdles: Countries like India face issues of bureaucratic red tape and outdated ethical frameworks that delay the deployment of advanced genomic therapies.
  • Ethical concerns: As the technology becomes more powerful, there are concerns about misuse, eugenics, and the potential editing of germline cells.

Conclusion

KJ’s treatment marks a paradigm shift in personalised medicine, highlighting the transformative potential of base editing in addressing rare and otherwise untreatable genetic disorders. However, wider application requires systemic reforms in bioethics, regulatory frameworks, and healthcare infrastructure. To ensure equitable access, future efforts must focus on cost reduction, public funding, global collaboration, and ethical oversight. If successfully scaled, base editing could revolutionise medicine for millions suffering from rare genetic diseases.

NITI Aayog Recommends Dedicated Credit Support and Reforms to Boost Medium Enterprises

  • 28 May 2025

In News:

Medium enterprises (MEs), a vital yet under-recognized segment of India’s MSME ecosystem, have long faced significant challenges, especially in accessing affordable and timely credit. Though they constitute only about 0.3% of registered MSMEs, medium enterprises contribute nearly 40% of MSME exports, highlighting their critical role in India’s industrial growth and global trade competitiveness.

Significance of Medium Enterprises in the Indian Economy

The MSME sector as a whole contributes around 29% to India’s GDP and employs over 60% of the workforce. However, while micro and small enterprises dominate in number (97% and 2.7% respectively), medium enterprises represent a minuscule share by count but a disproportionately large share in exports and innovation. Medium enterprises have a turnover range of ?100–500 crore and investment in plant and machinery between ?25–125 crore, as per the revised FY26 classification norms announced in the Union Budget 2025-26.

Credit Gap and Financing Challenges

NITI Aayog’s 2025 report, Designing Policy for Medium Enterprises, reveals a credit deficit of approximately $10 billion faced by medium enterprises. This gap stems from institutional biases and structural constraints. Unlike micro units that benefit extensively from priority sector lending, medium enterprises receive fewer such loans and face borrowing costs about 4% higher than those for large companies. Moreover, out of 18 government MSME schemes, only 8 specifically target medium enterprises, which receive less than 18% of total scheme funds (?5,442 crore overall). The absence of dedicated working capital schemes exacerbates liquidity issues, limiting growth and scale-up prospects.

NITI Aayog’s Key Policy Recommendations

  • Working Capital Financing Scheme: A sector-specific loan scheme, administered by the Ministry of MSME, is proposed to provide medium enterprises with working capital loans capped at ?25 crore, with individual requests up to ?5 crore. Loans would be linked to enterprise turnover and offered at concessional interest rates, addressing their substantial capital needs.
  • Medium Enterprise Credit Card: To meet immediate liquidity requirements—such as payroll, inventory, and equipment maintenance—a credit card facility with a pre-approved limit of ?5 crore is recommended. This facility would follow market interest rates but include a repayment grace period.
  • Expedited Credit Disbursal via Retail Banks: Leveraging local retail banks for faster fund distribution under MSME ministry supervision aims to reduce bureaucratic delays and enhance timely access to credit.
  • Technology and Skilling Initiatives: The report advocates transforming existing MSME technology centres into ‘India MSME 4.0 Competence Centres’ tailored to sectoral and regional demands, spanning industries like engineering, electronics, and specialized manufacturing. It also proposes incorporating medium enterprise-specific modules into entrepreneurship training and skilling programmes to bridge labour skill mismatches.
  • Digital Access and Compliance Support: NITI Aayog recommends creating a dedicated sub-portal within the Udyam platform that facilitates scheme discovery, compliance guidance, and AI-powered navigation to help medium enterprises efficiently access government resources.

Broader Structural Challenges

Apart from financing, medium enterprises face low adoption of advanced technologies, limited R&D support, inadequate sector-specific testing infrastructure, and a disconnect between training programmes and industry needs. These gaps impede innovation and scalability.

Strategic Importance and Policy Outlook

NITI Aayog emphasizes that medium enterprises have the potential to be major employment generators and innovation drivers if provided focused policy attention and financial support. Drawing lessons from global examples like Germany’s Mittelstand and Italy’s fashion industry, the report envisions India’s medium enterprises evolving into globally competitive firms over the next decade.

The medium sector’s formal labour structure also makes it key to transitioning India’s economy from informal to formal. Therefore, a coordinated and inclusive policy framework focusing on finance, technology, skill development, and digital infrastructure is vital to unlock this segment’s full potential and enhance India’s industrial competitiveness, export growth, and self-reliance.

State Space Policies of Gujarat and Tamil Nadu

  • 27 May 2025

In News:

India’s space sector, traditionally dominated by public institutions like ISRO, has seen major policy shifts since 2020 to enable private participation. In a significant development, Gujarat and Tamil Nadu have become the first Indian states to formulate state-level space policies, aiming to bolster private investment, foster innovation, and generate employment.

Recently, Gujarat launched the Space Tech Policy 2025–30, becoming the first state to do so. A day later, Tamil Nadu approved its Space Industrial Policy 2025. These policies complement the Indian Space Policy 2023 and the liberalisation of FDI norms in the space sector. They also align with national efforts led by IN-SPACe (Indian National Space Promotion and Authorization Centre), established in 2022 to facilitate private sector engagement in space activities.

Key Features and Objectives

Employment and Investment Targets:

  • Gujarat aims to create 25,000 jobs, while Tamil Nadu targets 10,000 new high-skilled jobs.
  • Tamil Nadu expects to attract ?10,000 crore in investments over five years.

Sectoral Scope: Both policies aim to develop a full spectrum of space-tech activities including:

  • Satellite payload and component manufacturing
  • Communication and propulsion systems
  • Ground stations and control centres
  • Space application software and analytics

State-specific Incentives:

  • Gujarat will provide launch and patent support, capital incentives via the Gujarat Electronics Policy, and access to benefits under the IT/ITeS and Deep Tech Start-up Programme.
  • Tamil Nadu offers capital subsidies up to 20%, a ?10 crore Space Tech Fund, payroll subsidies up to 30% in the first year, and location-based investment incentives.

Infrastructure and Ecosystem Development

  • Gujarat plans to establish a Centre of Excellence in Space Technology and a dedicated manufacturing cluster in Sanand, near Ahmedabad.
  • Tamil Nadu will create TNSpaceBays, special industrial zones catering to MSMEs, deep-tech start-ups, R&D labs, and international players.
  • New satellite testing infrastructure and skill development programmes are planned in Chennai.

Strategic Importance

The policies reflect recognition of space technology’s growing importance in national security, navigation, healthcare, internet services, weather forecasting, and disaster management. Missions such as Chandrayaan, Mangalyaan, and SpaDeX have enhanced India’s global space credentials, motivating states to leverage their talent and industrial ecosystems to participate in this high-value sector.

These state initiatives also resonate with India’s broader push towards Atmanirbhar Bharat, by promoting domestic manufacturing and reducing dependence on imports in critical technology sectors.

Conclusion

The Gujarat and Tamil Nadu space policies mark a paradigm shift in India’s sub-national innovation strategy. By aligning with central space policy reforms and incentivising private participation, these states are poised to become key hubs in India’s space-tech value chain. Such proactive state-level interventions are vital for India’s ambition to emerge as a global space power and offer a replicable model for other states like Karnataka and Telangana, which are also planning similar initiatives.

India Becomes the 4th Largest Economy

  • 26 May 2025

In News:

In a significant milestone for the Indian economy, India has officially surpassed Japan to become the 4th largest economy in the world in nominal GDP terms, as per the IMF World Economic Outlook (April 2025). According to NITI Aayog CEO B.V.R. Subrahmanyam, India’s GDP now stands at $4.19 trillion, marginally higher than Japan’s $4.18 trillion. This marks a historic moment, reflecting a shift in the global economic order and reaffirming India's rising stature on the world stage.

From Fifth to Fourth: A Decade of Accelerated Growth

India’s economic rise has been particularly notable over the past decade. From a GDP of $2 trillion in 2014, India has more than doubled its output to cross the $4 trillion mark in 2025. This rapid expansion has also been accompanied by a sharp rise in per capita income, which has grown from $1,438 in 2014 to $2,880 in 2025. In global rankings, India moved from the 5th position in 2024 to 4th in 2025, overtaking Japan and trailing only the United States, China, and Germany.

Factors Driving the Surge

India’s ascent is the result of multiple structural reforms and policy initiatives undertaken in recent years. Programs such as Digital India, Atmanirbhar Bharat, and the Production Linked Incentive (PLI) scheme have enhanced domestic manufacturing, boosted digital infrastructure, and encouraged self-reliance. The government’s focus on ease of doing business, tax reforms (GST, corporate tax rationalisation), and large-scale infrastructure investment under schemes like Gati Shakti have further catalysed growth.

Despite global trends towards supply chain diversification and reshoring, India continues to attract foreign companies due to its cost-effective labor, large consumer base, and improving logistics. For instance, companies like Apple continue to expand their operations in India, viewing it as a reliable manufacturing hub.

Strategic and Geopolitical Implications

India’s new economic position carries significant geopolitical weight. As the 4th largest economy, India’s influence in global financial institutions, climate negotiations, trade partnerships, and multilateral forums such as G20 and BRICS is set to grow. The achievement enhances investor confidence, thereby potentially increasing foreign direct investment (FDI) inflows.

Domestically, this growth presents an opportunity for addressing structural issues such as unemployment, regional disparities, and income inequality. The challenge ahead lies in ensuring that growth remains inclusive, sustainable, and innovation-driven.

Future Outlook

According to NITI Aayog, India is poised to surpass Germany within the next 2.5–3 years, potentially becoming the third-largest economy globally. For this, sustaining macroeconomic stability, boosting exports, enhancing skill development, and transitioning to a green economy will be crucial.

Conclusion

India’s rise to the 4th largest economy marks a defining moment in its development trajectory. It reflects not just statistical growth, but also the success of structural reforms, demographic potential, and policy resilience. As India prepares for its next leap, balancing economic dynamism with social equity will be the key to truly becoming a global economic leader.

Waqf (Amendment) Bill, 2025

  • 05 Apr 2025

In News:

The Waqf (Amendment) Bill, 2025, tabled in the Lok Sabha on April 2, 2025, seeks to amend the Waqf Act, 1995, which governs the administration of waqf properties in India. The revised Bill incorporates the recommendations of a Joint Parliamentary Committee (JPC) and has sparked significant political and community debate due to its proposed structural and procedural reforms.

1. Retention and Restriction of ‘Waqf by User’ Doctrine

  • Background: The doctrine allows property to be treated as waqf based on uninterrupted communal usage, even without formal documentation.
  • Revised Provision: Retains ‘waqf by user’ for properties registered before the enactment of the law but prohibits its use for future claims.
  • Criticism: The introduction of a clause requiring individuals to prove Islamic practice for five years to establish waqf status is seen as exclusionary and arbitrary.

2. Inclusion of Non-Muslims in Waqf Institutions

  • Provisions:
    • Mandates the inclusion of at least two non-Muslims in the Central Waqf Council and State Waqf Boards.
    • Removes the requirement that the CEO of a Waqf Board be Muslim.
    • Redefines Waqf Tribunals to include a district judge, a Joint Secretary-level officer, and a Muslim law expert.
  • Criticism: Raises questions about community autonomy in religious affairs under Article 26 of the Constitution.
  • Government's Justification: Aims to enhance expertise, transparency, and administrative efficiency.

3. Enhanced Government Oversight in Waqf Property Surveys

  • New Mechanism:
    • Surveys to be conducted by senior officials above the rank of District Collector.
    • Such officers will serve as the final authority in determining whether land is waqf or government-owned.
    • Tribunal jurisdiction curtailed in such disputes.
  • Implications:
    • Centralizes decision-making within the state bureaucracy.
    • Raises concerns about executive overreach and weakening of judicial oversight in waqf matters.

4. Centralised Registration and Digital Governance

  • Digital Portal:
    • Mandatory online registration of all waqf properties within six months.
    • Extensions can be granted by waqf tribunals upon demonstration of "sufficient cause."
  • Objective: To curb encroachment, enhance transparency, and create a uniform digital record of waqf assets.

5. Application of the Limitation Act, 1963

  • Change Introduced: Repeals Section 107 of the Waqf Act, 1995, which exempted waqf properties from the statutory limitation period.
  • Implication: Allows claims of adverse possession after 12 years; may legitimize longstanding illegal occupations of waqf land.
  • Opposition View: Seen as a move that undermines waqf rights and aids encroachers.

6. Judicial Review and Appeals

  • Revised Provision:
    • Waqf tribunal decisions are no longer final.
    • Appeals can be made to the High Court within 90 days.
    • Courts can dismiss suits if properties are not registered within the stipulated time unless “sufficient cause” is shown.
  • Impact: Enhances judicial scrutiny but also limits access to justice in certain cases through procedural conditions.

Critical Analysis

  • Pros:
    • Encourages transparency and formalisation of waqf governance.
    • Introduces checks against misuse and encroachments.
    • Provides a digital framework for property management.
  • Cons:
    • Risks state interference in religious institutions, impacting minority rights under Articles 25–28.
    • Exclusion of oral traditions may erase significant community practices and histories.
    • Implementation challenges due to administrative overburden and community mistrust.

Conclusion

The Waqf (Amendment) Bill, 2025, represents a significant shift in the governance of waqf properties by increasing state oversight, standardising processes, and promoting digital reforms. However, it raises serious questions about religious autonomy, federal balance, and minority rights. A careful balance between administrative efficiency and constitutional guarantees is essential to ensure inclusive and equitable governance.

Revamped Periodic Labour Force Survey (PLFS), 2025

  • 17 May 2025

In News:

The Government of India has undertaken a significant revamp of the Periodic Labour Force Survey (PLFS) from January 2025 to strengthen the quality, frequency, and coverage of employment and unemployment data across the country. Conducted by the National Statistical Office (NSO) under the Ministry of Statistics and Programme Implementation (MoSPI), PLFS plays a pivotal role in informing labour market policies and addressing data gaps in India’s employment landscape.

Key Changes and Objectives

Originally launched in 2017, the PLFS was designed to generate quarterly estimates of labour market indicators for urban areas under the Current Weekly Status (CWS) and annual estimates for both rural and urban areas under both Usual Status (ps+ss) and CWS. The 2025 overhaul expands the PLFS to produce monthly all-India estimates of key indicators—Labour Force Participation Rate (LFPR), Worker Population Ratio (WPR), and Unemployment Rate (UR)—for both rural and urban areas using the CWS framework.

The quarterly results, earlier limited to urban regions, will now also cover rural areas, offering disaggregated and timely data at national and major state levels. Annual results will shift from a July–June cycle to a calendar year reporting format (January–December) to align better with international standards and improve comparability.

Enhanced Sampling Design

A critical aspect of the revamp lies in the revised sampling methodology. The new design uses a multistage stratified approach, ensuring representation from most districts and capturing diverse labour dynamics across geographies. A total of 22,692 First Stage Units (FSUs)—12,504 in rural and 10,188 in urban areas—will be surveyed annually, covering 2,72,304 households, a substantial 2.65-fold increase over the earlier sample size of 1,02,400 households. Each selected household will now be visited four times over four months in a rotational panel format to improve the robustness of estimates.

Inclusion of New Parameters

The revamped PLFS introduces several new data points to enrich its analytical value:

  • Household income sources including rent, pension, interest, and remittances
  • Land possession and leasing status
  • Additional education indicators like years of schooling completed and attendance in the past year
  • Information on vocational training, including details of the certifying body

These additions make the PLFS more holistic, offering deeper insights into the economic and social characteristics influencing labour participation.

Significance and Policy Implications

India has long faced a dearth of high-frequency, reliable labour market data. The revamped PLFS addresses this gap by delivering timely, comprehensive, and representative statistics. This is critical for monitoring employment trends, understanding the rural-urban labour divide, and assessing the impact of government schemes, economic reforms, and global shocks.

Further, the alignment with international reporting norms will strengthen India's statistical credibility in global forums and aid in better representation in databases maintained by institutions like the ILO and World Bank.

In conclusion, the PLFS revamp marks a milestone in labour statistics modernization. By offering high-frequency, granular data on a range of labour and socio-economic indicators, it empowers evidence-based policy formulation, a key requirement for inclusive and sustainable economic development.

India’s Human Development Index 2025

  • 08 May 2025

In News:

India has made steady progress in the Human Development Index (HDI), improving its rank from 133rd in 2022 to 130th in 2023 among 193 countries. Its HDI value rose from 0.676 to 0.685, reflecting advancements in key areas such as health, education, and income. Despite these gains, significant challenges, particularly inequality, continue to limit India’s overall human development.

Understanding India’s HDI Progress

The HDI is a composite measure that captures a country’s average achievements in three core dimensions: health (life expectancy), education (years of schooling), and income (gross national income per capita). India currently belongs to the ‘medium human development’ category and is approaching the threshold for ‘high human development’ (an HDI value of 0.700).

Several factors have driven India’s recent improvement:

  • Health: Life expectancy increased markedly from 58.6 years in 1990 to 72 years in 2023. This improvement is supported by flagship health schemes like Ayushman Bharat, the National Rural Health Mission, Janani Suraksha Yojana, and PoshanAbhiyaan, which have enhanced healthcare access and nutrition.
  • Education: The expected years of schooling grew from 8.2 years in 1990 to 13 years in 2023, while mean years of schooling rose from 4.1 to 6.9 years. Policies such as the Right to Education Act and the National Education Policy 2020 have played critical roles in improving educational quality and accessibility.
  • Income: India’s per capita Gross National Income surged from $2,167 in 1990 to $9,046 in 2023. Social welfare programs like MGNREGA and Jan Dhan Yojana have contributed to this growth by lifting approximately 135 million people out of multidimensional poverty between 2015-16 and 2019-21.

Persistent Challenges: Inequality and Gender Disparity

Inequality poses a major impediment to India’s HDI progress. It is estimated that disparities reduce India’s HDI by 30.7%, one of the highest losses in South Asia. The wealthiest 10% earn nearly 57% of the national income, while the poorest 50% share only 13%. Gender inequality further complicates the picture: India’s Gender Development Index (GDI) stands at 0.874, with female HDI (0.631) significantly lower than male HDI (0.722). Despite policy efforts, female labor force participation and political representation remain limited.

Regional and Global Context

Regionally, India lags behind neighbors like China (75th) and Sri Lanka (89th) but shares a similar HDI value with Bangladesh (130th), and surpasses Nepal (145th) and Pakistan (168th). Globally, the 2025 Human Development Report highlights a slowdown in HDI growth—the slowest since 1990—but emphasizes the transformative role of Artificial Intelligence (AI) in fostering inclusive development. India holds 20% of global AI researchers, positioning it to harness AI’s potential in sectors such as healthcare, education, and productivity.

Strategic Innovations and National Initiatives

India’s pursuit of sustainable development complements its HDI goals through key initiatives:

  • Scientists have developed a metal-free catalyst leveraging mechanical energy for sustainable hydrogen fuel production, supporting the National Green Hydrogen Mission to promote clean energy.
  • The Indian Navy’s deployment of INS Sharda to the Maldives for its inaugural Humanitarian Assistance and Disaster Relief (HADR) exercise under the MAHASAGAR vision showcases India’s leadership in regional disaster preparedness and maritime security.
  • Developments in regional defense, such as Iran’s unveiling of the solid-fuel GhassemBasir medium-range missile, highlight ongoing security challenges necessitating vigilance and capability enhancement.

Way Forward

To advance into the ‘high human development’ category, India must:

  • Implement targeted policies to reduce income and gender inequalities.
  • Invest in quality education and healthcare, especially for underserved populations.
  • Promote inclusive economic growth benefiting marginalized groups.
  • Leverage emerging technologies like AI responsibly to enhance public services without deepening disparities.
  • Strengthen regional cooperation and disaster resilience to protect socio-economic gains.

Conclusion

India’s HDI improvement reflects meaningful progress in health, education, and income. Yet, to fully realize its human development potential, India must tackle persistent inequalities and strategically harness technological innovations alongside regional cooperation. With sustained, inclusive efforts, India can continue its upward trajectory toward equitable growth and global leadership.

Biodiversity Benefit Sharing Regulations 2025

  • 07 May 2025

In News:

The National Biodiversity Authority (NBA), under the Biological Diversity Act, 2002, has notified the Biodiversity Benefit Sharing Regulations, 2025 to regulate fair and equitable sharing of benefits arising from the use of India’s rich biological resources, including digital sequence information (DSI). This move strengthens India’s compliance with global Access and Benefit Sharing (ABS) frameworks under the Convention on Biological Diversity (CBD).

Background and Need

India’s vast biodiversity is a vital national asset, deeply linked with traditional knowledge of local and indigenous communities. The updated regulations address concerns that industries and researchers benefit commercially from biological resources without adequately compensating custodians of biodiversity or associated knowledge. The 2025 regulations supersede the 2014 guidelines and incorporate digital sequence information, a significant addition in the biotechnology era, where genetic information is often used without accessing physical resources.

Key Provisions of the Regulations

  • Turnover-Based Benefit Sharing Slabs:The regulations introduce slabs based on the annual turnover of users accessing biological resources or associated knowledge:
    • ?0–5 crore: No benefit sharing
    • ?5–50 crore: 0.2% of ex-factory turnover
    • ?50–250 crore: 0.4%
    • Above ?250 crore: 0.6%
  • Mandatory Reporting:All users with annual turnover exceeding ?1 crore must submit an annual statement detailing biodiversity resource usage.
  • Exemption for Cultivated Medicinal Plants:In alignment with the Biological Diversity (Amendment) Act, 2023, cultivators of medicinal plants, and Indian traditional medicine practitioners are exempt from benefit sharing. This supports promotion of medicinal plant cultivation while balancing conservation.
  • High-Value and Threatened Species Clause:For species with significant conservation or economic importance — such as red sanders, sandalwood, agarwood, and other notified threatened species — minimum benefit sharing is set at 5%, which can rise above 20% for commercial exploitation.
  • Inclusion of Digital Sequence Information (DSI):Recognizing that genetic data can substitute physical biological samples, DSI has been brought under the ABS ambit, ensuring benefits from its use are also equitably shared.
  • Researchers and Intellectual Property Rights (IPR):Those conducting research or applying for IPR based on Indian biodiversity must comply with benefit-sharing obligations.

Mechanism for Utilization of Benefits

The collected benefits are distributed such that approximately 10–15% is retained by the NBA to support biodiversity conservation efforts, while the remaining is transferred to claimant communities and biodiversity conservers who have preserved and nurtured these resources.

Institutional Role: National Biodiversity Authority (NBA)

Established in 2003 and headquartered in Chennai, the NBA implements the Biological Diversity Act. Its key functions include regulating access to biological resources, granting approvals to foreign and domestic entities, overseeing State Biodiversity Boards (SBBs), and advising the central government on biodiversity conservation policies. The NBA ensures compliance with international protocols like the Nagoya Protocol under the CBD, reinforcing India’s commitment to global biodiversity governance.

Global Context and International Compliance

At COP16 of the CBD held in Cali, Colombia (2024), member nations adopted a multilateral mechanism to ensure benefit sharing from the use of DSI. This is critical given the global usage of genetic resources by sectors such as pharmaceuticals, agriculture, cosmetics, and biotechnology. India’s updated regulations align with these international norms, demanding equitable compensation for communities that are custodians of biodiversity and traditional knowledge.

Conclusion

The Biodiversity Benefit Sharing Regulations 2025 mark a significant advancement in India’s biodiversity governance by closing regulatory gaps, especially around digital information and high-value species. The policy balances biodiversity conservation with sustainable use and incentivizes communities by ensuring fair economic returns, thereby promoting India’s leadership in global biodiversity stewardship.

Myanmar-Thailand Earthquake 2025

  • 30 Mar 2025

In News:

Recently, a devastating 7.7 magnitude earthquake struck central Myanmar near Mandalay, resulting in catastrophic destruction across Myanmar and Thailand. The tremor, the strongest in the region in 75 years and globally the most powerful in two years, occurred at a shallow depth of 10 km, amplifying its destructive impact.

Human and Structural Impact

In Myanmar, at least 144 people were killed and 730 injured, while in Thailand, particularly Bangkok, eight deaths were confirmed, including three from a 33-storey building collapse. The death toll is expected to rise as search and rescue operations continue. Infrastructure damage was widespread—residential buildings, pagodas, a dam, and a 90-year-old bridge in Myanmar collapsed. In Bangkok, high-rises swayed dangerously, rapid transit systems shut down, and panic gripped the city. Over 90 people were reported missing in Bangkok’s construction site collapse.

The quake severely impacted regions already suffering from ongoing humanitarian crises, particularly Myanmar, where a civil war has displaced over 3 million people, and 20 million are in need of assistance, according to the UN. Emergency services were hindered by damaged roads and downed power lines.

Geological Context and Causes

The earthquake was caused by strike-slip faulting along the Sagaing Fault, a major tectonic boundary between the Indian and Eurasian plates. This north-south fault is highly seismically active and has been responsible for several past quakes, including those in 1839 (M 8.3), 1912 (M 7.9), and 2016 (M 6.9).

Shallow-focus earthquakes like this one, occurring at just 10 km depth, tend to cause significant surface damage due to minimal energy dissipation before the seismic waves reach the surface. Additionally, seismic waves radiate along the entire fault line, affecting regions far beyond the epicenter, including China’s Yunnan and Sichuan provinces, where structural damage and injuries were also reported.

Preparedness and Vulnerabilities

Myanmar's infrastructure is ill-prepared for high-magnitude earthquakes, especially in the Mandalay region where modern seismic-resistant construction is limited. The USGS estimated potential fatalities between 10,000 and 100,000, and economic losses up to 70% of Myanmar’s GDP, underscoring the country’s vulnerability. The affected area lies in the central region of the country, less accustomed to high-magnitude tremors than the traditionally more seismically active western regions.

International and Regional Response

Myanmar declared a state of emergency in six regions, including Naypyidaw and Mandalay. Thailand’s city hall declared Bangkok a disaster zone to mobilize emergency responses. Indian Prime Minister Narendra Modi offered immediate support, stating that Indian authorities and the Ministry of External Affairs are in touch with both governments. The disaster also holds diplomatic relevance, with Bangkok set to host the BIMSTEC Summit, highlighting the importance of regional disaster cooperation.

Conclusion

The 2025 Myanmar-Thailand earthquake exposes the urgent need for seismic resilience, urban preparedness, and regional disaster response cooperation in South and Southeast Asia. With climate change and tectonic vulnerabilities intersecting, India and neighboring nations must integrate robust disaster management frameworks into developmental planning and regional diplomacy.

UN Women’s Report 2025

  • 12 Mar 2025

Context:
Marking the 30th anniversary of the Beijing Declaration and Platform for Action (1995)—a landmark global framework for achieving gender equality—the UN Women’s Report 2025 presents a sobering assessment of the status of women’s rights worldwide. Released ahead of International Women’s Day 2025, the report reflects a disturbing pattern: while there has been measurable progress, recent years have witnessed an alarming backlash against gender equality in many parts of the world.

Key Findings

  • Backsliding of Women’s Rights: Nearly one in four countries reported a backlash against women’s rights, often linked to democratic erosion and rise of authoritarian or conservative forces. The report warns of "anti-rights actors" systematically working to undermine legal and policy gains made over decades.
  • Escalation in Gender-Based Violence

The world continues to grapple with high levels of violence against women:

    • A woman or girl is killed every 10 minutes by an intimate partner or family member.
    • Conflict-related sexual violence has risen 50% since 2022, with 95% of victims being women and girls.

These trends point to both persistent patriarchal norms and the failure of protective systems, especially in conflict and humanitarian settings.

  • Legal and Political Disempowerment

Despite notable legislative progress:

  • Women globally have only 64% of the legal rights enjoyed by men.
  • Only 87 countries have ever had a female head of state.
  • Women occupy just 26% of parliamentary seats, even though this figure has doubled since 1995.

These gaps reflect the structural barriers and gender biases embedded in political systems and governance.

  • Economic and Health Inequities
    • 10% of women and girls live in extreme poverty.
    • Young women (ages 15–24) face limited access to family planning, impacting health and autonomy.
    • Maternal mortality has remained stagnant since 2015, reflecting uneven healthcare access.

Positive Developments

Despite the challenges, there are signs of progress:

  • 88% of countries now have laws against violence towards women.
  • Most countries have banned workplace discrimination.
  • 44% of countries are working to improve education and training for women.
  • Female legislative representation has more than doubled since 1995.

UN Women’s Roadmap for Gender Equality (2030)

To address setbacks and accelerate progress, the report outlines a five-pronged strategy:

  • Digital Inclusion – Ensure equitable access to digital technologies.
  • Social Protection – Invest in universal healthcare, education, and safety nets.
  • Zero Gender-Based Violence – Strengthen laws, services, and public awareness.
  • Equal Decision-Making – Promote women's leadership in all sectors.
  • Gender-Sensitive Crisis Response – Integrate gender priorities in humanitarian aid.

Conclusion

The UN Women’s Report 2025 underscores a critical paradox: legal and policy advancements coexist with deep-rooted inequalities and growing resistance to gender justice. As UN Secretary-General António Guterres aptly noted, “Instead of mainstreaming equal rights, we’re seeing the mainstreaming of misogyny.” Achieving SDG 5 (Gender Equality) by 2030 demands sustained political will, democratic resilience, and transformative reforms. For India and the global community, this is both a warning and an opportunity—to reaffirm their commitment to gender justice and inclusive development.

India Philanthropy Report 2025

  • 05 Mar 2025

In News:

The India Philanthropy Report 2025, a joint publication by Bain & Company and Dasra, presents an insightful overview of the evolving landscape of philanthropic giving in India. With private philanthropic funding projected to grow annually by 10–12% over the next five years, the report underlines the increasing role of family philanthropy and corporate social responsibility (CSR) in complementing public sector expenditure on social development.

Growth of Social Sector Funding

India's total social sector funding reached approximately ?25 lakh crore ($300 billion) in FY24, accounting for 8.3% of the GDP. Public funding continues to dominate, constituting 95% of the total with allocations towards flagship welfare schemes like MGNREGS and the Pradhan Mantri Awas Yojana. Private philanthropy, however, is steadily gaining ground, contributing ?1.3 lakh crore ($16 billion) in FY24, and is expected to grow significantly by FY29.

Despite this growth, a considerable funding gap persists—estimated at ?14 lakh crore in FY24 and projected to widen to ?16 lakh crore by FY29. Bridging this deficit is critical for meeting India's Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs) and the vision of Viksit Bharat@2047.

Rise of Family Philanthropy

Family philanthropy has emerged as a key driver of private social funding, accounting for around 40% of total private contributions. It spans diverse sectors including education, healthcare, gender equity, diversity and inclusion (GEDI), climate action, and social justice. Notably, 55% of family philanthropic initiatives are women-led, and around one-third involve next-generation leadership, indicating a shift towards more inclusive and innovative giving.

Structured philanthropy is becoming more prominent, with nearly 65% of family-run initiatives now managed by professional teams. The report projects that by building robust advisory infrastructure and tapping into family offices, India can unlock an additional ?50,000–55,000 crore ($6–$7 billion) in family philanthropy over the next five years.

Corporate Social Responsibility: Compliance and Concentration

Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) spending, mandated under the Companies Act, is another critical pillar. CSR expenditure is growing at a projected 10–12% per annum, driven by increased compliance and strategic integration into corporate goals. The number of CSR-compliant firms rose from 12,000 in FY22 to around 15,000 in FY23.

Family-owned businesses contribute nearly 65%–70% of total private CSR spending, with major conglomerates like Tata, Adani, Birla, and Ambani alone accounting for ?800–1,000 crore each annually. However, the sector remains top-heavy: just 2% of family-owned firms are responsible for over half of all CSR contributions.

HNIs, UHNIs, and the Philanthropic Disparity

Despite the promising trends, Indian High-Net-Worth Individuals (HNIs) and Ultra-High-Net-Worth Individuals (UHNIs) still contribute a relatively small fraction of their wealth towards philanthropy. Indian UHNIs donate only 0.1%–0.15% of their wealth, compared to 1.2%–2.5% in the US, 0.5%–1.8% in the UK, and 0.5%–1.4% in China.

In FY24, average annual philanthropic contributions from UHNIs (net worth ?1,000 crore and above) hovered around ?5 crore, while HNIs (?200–1,000 crore) contributed ?0.4–?5 crore. This indicates a large untapped potential that can significantly bolster India's development financing.

Institutionalization and Diaspora Potential

The number of family offices—dedicated institutions managing family wealth and philanthropy—has increased from 45 in 2018 to 300 in 2024, with projections to cross 500 by 2029. Institutions like Dasra, Sattva, and Bridgespan have been instrumental in supporting structured and high-impact philanthropy.

India’s diaspora, growing from 18 million in 2019 to 35 million in 2024, also presents a significant but underutilized opportunity. While diaspora philanthropy is estimated at $130 billion currently, better awareness, simplified compliance norms, and digital platforms could enhance its impact and push the potential closer to $200 billion.

Challenges and the Way Forward

Despite the optimistic outlook, several challenges hinder the full realization of philanthropic potential in India:

  • Persistent funding gaps in critical sectors like healthcare, education, and climate change.
  • Regulatory and compliance barriers, especially affecting foreign and diaspora contributions.
  • Fragmented infrastructure, with limited advisory services and high transaction costs.
  • Short-term funding models, with only 23% of family philanthropies combining grants with direct program implementation, undermining sustainable impact.

To address these, the report suggests:

  • Promoting long-term funding mechanisms, including multi-year grants.
  • Professionalizing philanthropy through structured advisory services and capacity building.
  • Unlocking diaspora contributions via simplified regulations and dedicated philanthropic platforms.
  • Enhancing collaboration across stakeholders to amplify social impact and innovation.

Conclusion

The India Philanthropy Report 2025 underscores the transformative potential of private giving, particularly through family philanthropy and CSR. While public funding remains the bedrock of India’s social development agenda, strengthening the philanthropic ecosystem—by leveraging wealth, institutions, and global networks—is vital to achieving equitable growth and meeting national development goals.

RBI Monetary Policy Committee (MPC) cuts Repo Rate

  • 09 Feb 2025

In News:

In a landmark decision during its February 2025 meeting, the Reserve Bank of India’s (RBI) Monetary Policy Committee (MPC) reduced the repo rate by 25 basis points, from 6.5% to 6.25%, marking the first rate cut in five years (since May 2020). This move follows the Union Government’s recent cut in personal income tax, aimed at boosting consumption.

What is the Monetary Policy Committee (MPC)?

The MPC is a six-member statutory body responsible for setting India’s monetary policy. Its primary objective is price stability while ensuring economic growth. It meets bi-monthly to assess economic indicators and modify key policy rates like the repo rate, which influences overall borrowing and lending costs in the economy.

Key Highlights from the MPC Decision:

Repo Rate Cut:

  • Reduced to 6.25% from 6.5%.
  • Objective: Stimulate credit growth, investment, and consumer demand.
  • Expected Impact: Lower EMIs for borrowers, reduced interest rates on EBLR and MCLR-linked loans.

GDP Growth Outlook (FY26):

  • RBI projects 6.7% GDP growth for FY26.
  • This is slightly higher than the FY25 estimate of 6.4%, and in line with the Economic Survey’s projection of 6.3–6.8%.
  • Growth recovery is attributed to calibrated fiscal consolidation and stable private consumption.

Inflation Projections (CPI-based):

  • FY26 Inflation Estimate: 4.2%
    • Q1: 4.5%
    • Q2: 4.0%
    • Q3: 3.8%
    • Q4: 4.2%
  • CPI inflation had already dropped to 5.22% in December 2024, aided by easing food prices.
  • RBI emphasized continued transmission of past policy measures and food price moderation as drivers of disinflation.

Broader Monetary Policy Context

  • RBI will maintain a “neutral” policy stance to remain flexible amid evolving macroeconomic conditions.
  • RBI Governor Sanjay Malhotra stressed that the inflation-targeting framework has helped stabilize prices, especially post-pandemic.
  • The policy space was created by the simultaneous drop in inflation and moderate growth, allowing support for the economy without derailing price stability.

Cybersecurity & Digital Measures

  • Additional Factor Authentication (AFA) introduced for international digital payments.
  • Launch of exclusive domains:
    • "bank.in" for Indian banks
    • "fin.in" for the wider financial sector

These aim to bolster digital transaction security amid rising cyber fraud.

Forex & External Sector Outlook

  • RBI reiterated that it does not target exchange rate levels, intervening only to curb excessive volatility.
  • Ongoing global challenges include:
    • Strengthening of the US dollar
    • Higher bond yields
    • Geopolitical tensions
    • Threat of trade wars
  • These have led to capital outflows, currency depreciation, and increased financial market volatility.

Conclusion

The RBI’s rate cut signals a strategic shift towards supporting economic growth amid global uncertainties. With a moderate inflation outlook and improving macroeconomic indicators, the decision is expected to boost domestic demand and investment, while reinforcing RBI’s commitment to price and financial stability.

India’s Pursuit of a Sovereign Foundational AI Model

  • 08 Feb 2025

In News:

As artificial intelligence (AI) reshapes global economic, strategic, and technological landscapes, the question of whether India should build its own sovereign foundational AI model has gained prominence. Sovereign AI models—developed, trained, and deployed using domestic infrastructure, datasets, and expertise—are now seen as strategic assets, with countries like the US and China already establishing their own. India, however, remains dependent on foreign AI giants such as OpenAI, Google DeepMind, and Meta.

Why India Needs a Sovereign AI Model

1. Data Sovereignty and Security: India generates one of the world’s largest data pools, including sensitive data from healthcare, finance, and governance. Using foreign-built AI models risks privacy breaches and potential misuse. A homegrown model would ensure control over data and ethical AI deployment.

2. Reducing Foreign Dependence: Sovereign AI is crucial for applications in defense, cybersecurity, and governance, where reliance on foreign technology may undermine strategic autonomy. Sanctions or export controls could otherwise disrupt access to essential technologies like GPUs or software updates.

3. Cultural and Linguistic Alignment: Current global AI models are largely English-centric. A sovereign model trained on Indian languages and datasets would bridge the digital divide and make AI more inclusive. Projects like AI4Bharat’s IndicTrans2 and Sarvam AI’s Sarvam-1, a multilingual model built with Nvidia, exemplify this direction.

4. National Security and Innovation: Sovereign AI is essential in military intelligence, predictive security, and surveillance. It also fosters an innovation ecosystem, generating high-skilled jobs and encouraging academic-industry collaboration.

Challenges in Building Foundational AI Models

1. Infrastructure Gaps: India lacks cutting-edge chip manufacturing capabilities. With no agreements with firms like TSMC, India relies on imports of GPUs and processors, unlike countries developing supercomputers (e.g., Denmark’s Gefion, Japan’s AI Grid).

2. High Development Costs: Training a large AI model can cost millions. DeepSeek V3, for instance, cost $5.6 million for a single run, while India’s annual AI R&D budget remains modest compared to Big Tech’s $80 billion.

3. Fragmented Resources: Subsidized GPUs are spread thin across institutions, diluting their impact. Meta’s Llama 4, for example, used large dedicated clusters—unfeasible under current Indian frameworks.

4. Public R&D Inefficiencies: Bureaucratic red tape discourages risk-taking needed in AI research. Unlike flexible spending in firms like OpenAI, Indian R&D lacks autonomy and long-term funding.

Policy Recommendations and Way Forward

  • Invest in IndiaAI Mission: Develop a national AI infrastructure with over 10,000 GPUs, secure cloud systems, and supercomputing clusters to train and deploy large-scale models.
  • Build DPI for AI Builders: Create datasets, APIs, and platforms to support data annotation, fine-tuning, and delivery in Indian contexts.
  • Adopt a Phased Approach: Focus on sovereign models in sensitive sectors (defense, healthcare) while using global open models for non-critical applications.
  • Promote Public-Private Collaboration: Forge partnerships with companies like Nvidia or OpenAI for technology transfer and joint ventures.
  • Encourage Innovation Under Constraints: India must emulate models like Alibaba or DeepSeek, which succeeded with limited resources and targeted innovations.

Conclusion

Building a sovereign foundational AI model is not merely a technological ambition but a strategic necessity. With coordinated efforts between government, industry, and academia, India can achieve AI self-reliance—ensuring data sovereignty, inclusive growth, and a strong global presence in the AI-driven future.

MSMEs in India’s Economic Growth

  • 07 Feb 2025

In News:

In the Union Budget 2025–26, the Finance Minister proposed a significant policy shift by increasing the investment and turnover limits for MSME classification by 2.5 and 2 times respectively. This move is expected to enhance the growth prospects and scalability of India’s micro, small, and medium enterprises (MSMEs).

Economic Significance:

The MSME sector forms the backbone of the Indian economy, contributing 30% to the GDP and nearly 45% to manufacturing output. With over 1 crore registered units employing 7.5 crore people, it is the largest source of non-agricultural employment in the country. It plays a pivotal role in inclusive development, offering livelihood opportunities to the rural, urban poor, and semi-skilled workforce.

The formalization drive has been significant, with over 4 crore MSMEs registered on the Udyam portal by March 2024. Key schemes like PM Vishwakarma Yojana (?13,000 crore) and Mudra Yojana (?5.41 lakh crore disbursed in FY24) have supported artisans and first-time entrepreneurs, particularly women and marginalized communities.

Boost to Trade and Innovation:

MSMEs account for 45.73% of India’s total exports in sectors like textiles, leather, and engineering goods. Their integration into Global Value Chains (GVCs) is being facilitated by reforms in trade logistics, the GeM portal, and PLI schemes. Digital transformation is advancing rapidly, with 72% MSME transactions now digital, supported by platforms like ONDC and the RBI’s Public Tech Platform.

Women and Rural Empowerment:

Women entrepreneurs constitute 20.5% of Udyam registrations, and 68% of Mudra loans benefit them. MSMEs are also catalyzing rural industrialization by promoting agro-processing and curbing rural-urban migration through schemes like the SRI Fund and Animal Husbandry Credit Guarantee Scheme.

Key Challenges:

Despite their potential, MSMEs face critical bottlenecks:

  • Credit access remains limited; only 20% of units access formal finance. Payment delays amounting to ?10.7 lakh crore (2022) hinder working capital.
  • Regulatory burdens, inadequate infrastructure, and poor digital skills further constrain productivity.
  • Low awareness of schemes and limited integration into global ESG standards affect competitiveness.
  • The sector remains largely informal, weakening labor rights and policy outreach.

Recent Reforms & Recommendations:

To unlock MSMEs’ potential, a multi-pronged reform strategy is underway:

  • Credit Measures: Promotion of cash-flow based lending, expansion of CGTMSE, Vyapar Credit Cards, and enhanced TReDS-GeM integration.
  • Ease of Doing Business: Single-window clearances, self-certification, and stronger MSME facilitation councils.
  • Digital & Skill Upgradation: Launch of Digital MSME 2.0, apprenticeship hubs, and innovation incubators.
  • Market Access: Expansion of cluster-based models, branding support, and ONDC-GeM integration.
  • Green MSMEs: ESG-linked credit, circular economy incentives, and green certifications.
  • Formalization Push: Linking benefits to Udyam registration, backed by SIDBI-led equity support.

Conclusion:
MSMEs are central to India’s vision of a $5 trillion economy and Viksit Bharat by 2047. With increased investment thresholds, focused policy interventions, and digital empowerment, India can build a resilient, inclusive, and globally competitive MSME ecosystem.

Mental Health in India: Budget 2025–26

  • 06 Feb 2025

In News:

The Union Budget 2025–26 marks a pivotal step towards strengthening mental health infrastructure in India. An allocation of ?99,858.56 crore to the Ministry of Health and Family Welfare (MoHFW) highlights the government’s recognition of health, including mental health, as a key pillar of national development.

Key Budgetary Allocations for Mental Health (2025–26)

  • National Tele Mental Health Programme (NTMHP): Allocated ?79.6 crore to expand access to mental health services across the country.
  • National Institute of Mental Health and Neurosciences (NIMHANS): Receives support to enhance research and treatment capacity.
  • District Mental Health Programme: Implemented in 767 districts, providing training and outpatient services.
  • Ayushman Arogya Mandirs: Over 1.73 lakh SHCs and PHCs are being upgraded to offer mental health services under comprehensive primary care.

Mental Health in India: Status and Burden

  • As per WHO, mental health is the ability to realize one’s potential, cope with stress, work productively, and contribute to the community.
  • India's Burden:
    • 15% of adult Indians experience mental disorders (National Survey).
    • Mental morbidity is highest in urban metros (13.5%), followed by rural areas (6.9%) and non-metro urban zones (4.3%).
  • Global Burden (2019): Around 970 million people globally suffered from mental disorders, notably anxiety and depression.
  • Treatment Gap: Estimated at 70% to 92%, particularly acute among blue-collar workers.
  • Economic Impact: Mental health disorders result in significant productivity losses, often surpassing the direct cost of care.

Challenges in Mental Health Care in India

1. Budgetary and Policy Limitations

  • The National Mental Health Programme (NMHP) faces funding ambiguities, often subsumed under broader health allocations.
  • Limited enforcement of Mental Healthcare Act, 2017, despite mental health being a statutory right. Over 11 crore Indians suffer from mental disorders, yet 80% do not seek help.

2. Exclusion in Labour Laws

  • The Occupational Safety, Health and Working Conditions Code (OSHWC), 2020, primarily covers physical safety. Mental health is not explicitly recognized.
  • Phrases like “as far as reasonably practicable” limit employers’ obligations.
  • The Code on Social Security (CSC), 2020, does not list mental strain as an occupational disease, making compensation for stress-induced conditions difficult.

3. Neglect of Blue-Collar Mental Health

  • Mental health risks—long hours, poor conditions, job insecurity—affect blue-collar workers disproportionately.
  • Workplace mental health programs (e.g., Infosys HALE, TCS EAP) are mainly for white-collar employees.
  • Tele-MANAS, a government mental health helpline, requires voluntary calls. Low awareness and stigma among blue-collar workers dilute its effectiveness.

Policy and Structural Reforms Needed

  • Legislative Frameworks:
    • Amend OSHWC and CSC to explicitly include mental well-being and stress-related injuries as compensable conditions.
    • Update the Third Schedule of the CSC to include mental health conditions, reducing dependence on case law.
  • Awareness and Education:
    • Launch mandatory employer-led awareness campaigns on programs like Tele-MANAS and Manodarpan.
    • Community-based programs for early detection, support, and referral of mental health disorders.
  • Inclusive and Tripartite Approach:
    • Integrate employers, blue-collar workers, and mental health professionals into a unified framework under the new Labour Codes.
    • Incorporate mental health indicators into occupational safety audits.
  • Institutional Strengthening:
    • Increase capacity-building efforts by training frontline health workers, general physicians, and non-specialist cadres in mental healthcare.
    • Establish Centres of Excellence for mental health training and research.

Global and National Initiatives

  • WHO Comprehensive Mental Health Action Plan (2013–2030): Focuses on integrating mental health into primary care and strengthening community-level interventions.
  • Manodarpan Initiative: Aims at student mental health support under Atmanirbhar Bharat.
  • Kiran Helpline: Government-run suicide prevention helpline for crisis support.
  • Tele-MANAS Cells: 53 centers operational in 36 States/UTs, enhancing digital mental health care access.

Conclusion and Way Forward

The 2025–26 Budget reflects a progressive approach to mental health, particularly through investments in tele-counselling, primary care, and institutional support. However, significant gaps remain in policy, especially in addressing the mental health needs of blue-collar workers.

To transform “Satyamev Jayate” to “Shramev Jayate,” India must:

  • Institutionalize rights-based mental health protection in labour legislation.
  • Close the treatment gap through universal access and community-level awareness.
  • Recognize mental health as integral to human capital and national productivity.

Only a comprehensive, inclusive, and rights-oriented approach will ensure mental health equity in India’s development journey.

Rapid Glacial Retreat in Arunachal Pradesh

  • 05 Feb 2025

In News:

A recent scientific study has revealed that the eastern Himalayas in Arunachal Pradesh have lost 110 glaciers between 1988 and 2020, highlighting a critical impact of climate change in the region.

Key Findings of the Study

  • Glacier Loss: The number of glaciers declined from 756 to 646 over 32 years.
  • Glacial Area Reduction: Total glacial cover reduced from 585.23 sq. km to 309.85 sq. km, indicating a loss of over 47%.
  • Retreat Rate: Glaciers retreated at a rate of 16.94 sq. km per year.
  • Elevation: Most glaciers were located at 4,500–4,800 metres above mean sea level on north-facing slopes of 15°–35°.
  • Remote Sensing & GIS: The study used advanced tools along with the Randolph Glacier Inventory to track and analyze glacier boundaries.
  • Glacial Lakes: Retreat has led to the formation of numerous glacial lakes, increasing the risk of Glacial Lake Outburst Floods (GLOFs), as seen during the 2023 Sikkim disaster which killed at least 55 people and damaged a 1,200 MW Teesta hydropower project.

Causes of Glacial Retreat

  • Climate Change:
    • The eastern Himalayas are warming faster than the global average.
    • Temperature rise: Between 0.1°C and 0.8°C per decade.
    • Over the last century, the region has experienced an increase of ~1.6°C.
    • By 2100, projections indicate a 5–6°C temperature rise and 20–30% increase in precipitation.
  • Black Carbon Deposition: Emissions from human activities (e.g., vehicles, biomass burning) deposit soot on ice, reducing reflectivity (albedo) and increasing heat absorption.
  • Erratic Snowfall Patterns: Changes in precipitation reduce snow accumulation, weakening glacier sustenance.
  • Geological Factors: Local topography, altitude, and rock composition also influence glacier stability and response to warming.

Implications of Glacial Retreat

  • Water Security
    • The Himalayas are known as the ‘Third Pole’, storing the largest volume of ice outside the polar regions.
    • They are vital for sustaining over 1.3 billion people in South Asia by feeding major rivers (Indus, Ganga, Brahmaputra).
    • Glacial retreat threatens long-term freshwater availability, agriculture, and urban water supplies.
  • Hydropower and Infrastructure
    • Changing river flow patterns due to glacial melt affect hydropower generation and irrigation systems.
    • Risk of infrastructure damage from GLOFs is rising.
  • Biodiversity and Agriculture: Altered ecosystems and climatic stress impact Himalayan biodiversity and disrupt traditional farming practices.

Himalayan Glaciers and River Systems

  • Indus Basin: Originates from Lake Mansarovar; flows through Ladakh and Pakistan.
  • Ganga Basin: Emerges from Gangotri Glacier in Uttarakhand; forms the Ganga after merging with Alaknanda.
  • Brahmaputra Basin: Rises near Kailash range in Tibet; flows through Arunachal Pradesh, Assam, and Bangladesh.

Major Glaciers in India

Glacier                  Region              Importance

Siachen                Ladakh               Longest glacier in India (76 km)

Gangotri             Uttarakhand        Source of the Ganga

Yamunotri          Uttarakhand        Origin of the Yamuna

Zemu                  Sikkim                 Largest glacier in Eastern Himalayas

Rathong             Sikkim                 Feeds Teesta River

Milam                Uttarakhand         Source of Goriganga River

Pindari               Uttarakhand         Glacial trekking route

Glacial Lake Outburst Floods (GLOFs)

  • GLOFs are sudden discharges of water from glacial lakes, often caused by moraine dam failures.
  • These can trigger catastrophic downstream floods, threatening lives, infrastructure, and ecosystems.

 

Mitigation and Adaptation Strategies

  • Climate Action: Drastic cuts in greenhouse gas emissions at national and global levels.
  • Sustainable Water Management: Enhance glacier-fed river basin planning.
  • Disaster Risk Reduction: GLOF early-warning systems, resilient infrastructure, and relocation policies.
  • Community Participation: Local awareness, traditional knowledge integration, and eco-restoration efforts.
  • International Cooperation: Transboundary initiatives under frameworks like the HKH (Hindu Kush Himalaya) Monitoring Network and UNFCCC.

RBI’s Liquidity Infusion of ?1.5 Lakh Crore

  • 04 Feb 2025

In News:

In January 2025, the Reserve Bank of India (RBI) announced its largest monetary easing since the COVID-19 pandemic, unveiling a multi-pronged plan to inject over ?1.5 lakh crore into the money markets.

This move aims to address liquidity shortfalls caused by RBI’s forex interventions and signal possible easing in the upcoming monetary policy review.

Context: Why Liquidity Infusion Was Needed

  • Forex Intervention: RBI sold over $50 billion from its foreign exchange reserves to stabilise the rupee, in response to large-scale equity sell-offs by Foreign Institutional Investors (FIIs).
  • Impact: These interventions reduced rupee liquidity, tightened short-term interest rates, and raised borrowing costs.
  • Liquidity Deficit: Market estimates pegged the shortfall at ?3 lakh crore.

Key Liquidity Measures Announced by RBI

  • Government Bond Buy-Back: ?60,000 Crore
    • Conducted in three tranches on January 30, February 13, and February 20, 2025.
    • Objective: To inject liquidity into the banking system by repurchasing government securities before maturity.
  • 56-Day Variable Rate Repo Auction: ?50,000 Crore
    • Scheduled for February 7, 2025.
    • Enables banks to borrow short-term funds by offering government securities as collateral at a market-determined interest rate.
  • USD/INR Buy-Sell Swap Auction: $5 Billion
    • A six-month forex swap in which RBI borrows dollars in exchange for rupees and agrees to buy them back later.
    • Helps stabilize the rupee without draining rupee liquidity.

Significance of the Measures

  • Monetary Transmission: With adequate liquidity, any potential repo rate cut will be more effectively transmitted through lower lending rates, boosting investment and consumption.
  • Financial Stability: By calming money markets and moderating borrowing costs, RBI strengthens confidence amid global uncertainties.
  • Rupee Management without Liquidity Squeeze: The forex swap allows rupee liquidity to remain intact while addressing exchange rate volatility.

Governor’s Focus Areas:

In a meeting with private sector bank heads ahead of the February monetary policy review, RBI Governor Sanjay Malhotra highlighted the following priorities:

  • Financial Stability & Inclusion
  • Enhanced Digital Literacy and Credit Access
  • Improved Customer Service & Grievance Redressal
  • Cybersecurity & IT Risk Management
  • Monitoring of Third-party Service Providers
  • Countering Rising Digital Fraud

Union Budget 2025–26

  • 03 Feb 2025

In News:

Union Minister for Finance and Corporate Affairs Smt Nirmala Sitharaman presented Union Budget 2025-26 in the Parliament.

Key Highlights:

Fiscal Policy and Macroeconomic Indicators

  • Total Expenditure: ?50.65 lakh crore
  • Total Receipts (excl. borrowings): ?34.96 lakh crore
  • Fiscal Deficit: 4.4% of GDP
  • Gross Market Borrowing: ?14.82 lakh crore
  • Capital Expenditure: ?11.21 lakh crore (3.1% of GDP)

Agriculture and Allied Sectors

  • Prime Minister Dhan-Dhaanya Krishi Yojana: 100 low-productivity districts targeted; 1.7 crore farmers to benefit.
  • Mission for Aatmanirbharta in Pulses: 6-year mission on Tur, Urad, and Masoor; NAFED/NCCF to procure for 4 years.
  • Vegetables & Fruits Program: Comprehensive initiative for production, pricing, processing, and logistics.
  • Makhana Board: New board in Bihar for production, value addition, and export.
  • National Mission on High Yielding Seeds: To commercialize over 100 high-yielding seed varieties.
  • Cotton Mission: 5-year initiative to boost productivity and Extra Long Staple (ELS) varieties.
  • Fisheries: New EEZ and High Seas Framework focusing on Islands.
  • Credit through KCC: Loan limit increased from ?3 lakh to ?5 lakh.
  • Urea Plant in Assam: New plant at Namrup (12.7 lakh MT annual capacity).

MSMEs and Startups

  • MSME Classification: Investment and turnover limits doubled (2.5x & 2x).
  • Credit Cards for Micro Units: ?5 lakh limit; 10 lakh cards in year one.
  • ?10,000 Cr Fund of Funds for Startups
  • First-Time Entrepreneurs Scheme: Loans up to ?2 crore for 5 lakh women, SC/ST entrepreneurs.
  • Footwear & Leather Sector Scheme: Aims ?4 lakh crore turnover and 22 lakh jobs.
  • Toy Manufacturing Support: High-quality, eco-friendly toy ecosystem.
  • Food Tech Institute: To be established in Bihar.
  • National Manufacturing Mission: Across small, medium, and large units.

Infrastructure and Investment

  • PPP Pipeline: 3-year project pipeline to be announced.
  • ?1.5 lakh crore 50-year interest-free loans to states for CapEx.
  • Urban Challenge Fund: ?1 lakh crore outlay; ?10,000 crore for FY26.
  • Asset Monetization Plan 2025–30: Capital recycling worth ?10 lakh crore.
  • Jal Jeevan Mission: Extended to 2028 with enhanced outlay.
  • UDAN 2.0: Targeting 120 new destinations, 4 crore passengers in 10 years.
  • Maritime Development Fund: ?25,000 crore; up to 49% govt contribution.
  • Nuclear Energy Mission: ?20,000 crore outlay for Small Modular Reactors (SMRs).
  • Greenfield Airports: Announced for Bihar.

Welfare and Social Security

  • Saksham Anganwadi & Poshan 2.0: Enhanced nutritional cost norms.
  • Medical Education: 10,000 new MBBS seats; 75,000 in 5 years.
  • Day Care Cancer Centres: In all district hospitals; 200 in FY26.
  • PM SVANidhi Revamp: ?30,000 UPI-linked credit cards.
  • Online Platform Workers: E-Shram ID, PMJAY coverage.
  • Urban Livelihood Scheme: For sustainable urban worker incomes.

Education and Skilling

  • 50,000 Atal Tinkering Labs: Govt schools in 5 years.
  • Bharatiya Bhasha Pustak Scheme: Digital books in Indian languages.
  • National Skilling Centres of Excellence: With global partners.
  • AI in Education: Centre of Excellence with ?500 crore outlay.
  • IIT Expansion: Additional capacity for 6,500 students.

Innovation and R&D

  • ?20,000 crore Innovation Fund (private-led R&D).
  • Deep Tech Fund of Funds: For next-gen startups.
  • PM Research Fellowships: 10,000 fellowships with higher support.
  • 2nd Gene Bank: 10 lakh germplasm lines for food security.
  • National Geospatial Mission
  • Gyan Bharatam Mission: Conservation of 1 crore+ manuscripts.

Exports and Trade

  • Export Promotion Mission: With ministerial and sectoral targets.
  • BharatTradeNet (BTN): Unified platform for trade finance and docs.
  • GCC Framework: Promote Global Capability Centres in Tier-2 cities.

Financial Sector Reforms

  • FDI in Insurance: Raised from 74% to 100% for domestic investment.
  • NaBFID Credit Enhancement Facility: For infra bonds.
  • Grameen Credit Score: For SHGs and rural borrowers.
  • Investment Friendliness Index: To rank states in 2025.
  • Jan Vishwas Bill 2.0: Decriminalization of 100+ provisions.
  • Tonnage Tax Extended: To inland vessels.
  • Startups: Tax benefit eligibility extended to incorporation by 1 April 2030.

Taxation Reforms

Direct Taxes

  • No Personal Tax: Income up to ?12 lakh (?12.75 lakh for salaried) under new regime.
  • Revised Tax Slabs (New Regime):
    • 0–4L: Nil | 4–8L: 5% | 8–12L: 10%
    • 12–16L: 15% | 16–20L: 20% | 20–24L: 25% | 24L+: 30%
  • Standard Deduction: ?75,000
  • Compliance Relief: Trusts registration extended to 10 years.
  • TDS/TCS Rationalization: Fewer thresholds, higher limits for senior citizens and rent.
  • Tax Certainty: Safe harbour rules, startup extensions, presumptive taxation for electronics.

Indirect Taxes

  • Tariff Rationalization: Only 8 remaining tariff rates.
  • Customs Relief: ?2,600 crore forgone, key lifeline drugs exempted.
  • Support to Domestic Manufacturing:
    • EV/mobile battery manufacturing: 63 capital goods exempted
    • Ships: BCD exemption extended for 10 years
    • Marine, leather, textiles: Several BCD reductions/exemptions
  • Voluntary Compliance Scheme: Without penalty for post-clearance corrections.

Geo-Economic Fragmentation (GEF)

  • 02 Feb 2025

In News:

Geo-economic fragmentation refers to a policy-driven reversal of global economic integration, increasingly shaped by geopolitical alignments. It signifies a shift from globalization to strategically-driven economic blocs, where nations prioritize political alliances over market efficiency.

Key Characteristics

  • Emergence of friend-shoring, re-shoring, and economic nationalism.
  • Fragmentation of trade, capital flows, FDI, and migration.
  • Retreat from multilateralism, with institutions like the WTO and IMF under stress.
  • Strategic use of environmental, labor, and social standards by developed countries to impose uniform regulations, causing tensions.

Globalization to Fragmentation: Statistical Evidence

  • Trade-to-GDP Ratio: Increased from 39% (1980) to 60% (2012); now threatened by rising protectionism.
  • FDI Inflows: Rose from $54 billion (1980) to $1.5 trillion (2019); now increasingly concentrated among like-minded countries.
  • Global Economy: Expanded from $11 trillion (1980) to over $100 trillion (2022).
  • Trade Restrictions (WTO Report):
    • 2023–24: 169 new measures covering $887.7 billion in trade.
    • 2022–23: Covered $337.1 billion — shows a dramatic rise in protectionism.
  • Over 24,000 new trade and investment restrictions imposed globally between 2020–24.

IMF on Costs of GEF

  • Trade fragmentation could cause 0.2% to 7% GDP losses, especially for developing countries.
  • Current fragmentation is more costly than Cold War era, as trade now constitutes 45% of global GDP (vs. 16% then).
  • Less trade = less knowledge diffusion, innovation, and productivity gains.

Strategic Impacts: Global Supply Chains

China’s Dominance

  • 80% of global battery manufacturing.
  • 80% of solar panel components.
  • 60% of wind turbine capacity.
  • 70% of global rare earth mineral processing.
  • Dominates EV supply chains, critical mineral refining, and clean energy manufacturing.

FDI Realignment

  • FDI is increasingly relocating from China to India, Vietnam, Mexico, etc.
  • Friend-shoring reduces capital access for emerging markets.
  • Emerging economies face reduced FDI, slower growth, and technological decoupling.

India’s Strategic Response: Deregulation and Internal Growth

Policy Recommendations (Economic Survey 2024–25)

  • Amplify deregulation to lower compliance costs and boost entrepreneurship.
  • Empower SMEs to withstand global shocks and strengthen domestic manufacturing.
  • Encourage inter-state learning for best practices in economic governance.
  • Redouble efforts to boost exports and foreign investment amidst global volatility.

Rationale

  • With the decline of global cooperation, internal engines of growth become crucial.
  • Deregulation can unleash innovation, enhance productivity, and ensure resilient growth.
  • India's response must be strategic, systematic, and state-inclusive to capitalize on this global transition.

Economic Survey 2024–25

  • 01 Feb 2025

In News:

  • Released on 31st January 2025, a day before the Union Budget.
  • Prepared by the Department of Economic Affairs, Ministry of Finance.
  • Provides a comprehensive review of India’s macroeconomic trends, sectoral developments, and key policy challenges.
  • Real GDP growth estimated at 6.4% in FY25 (close to decadal average); projected between 6.3–6.8% in FY26.
  • Reflects India's resilience amidst global slowdown, supply chain disruptions, and geopolitical uncertainties.

Sector-wise Performance

Agriculture:

  • Expected growth: 3.8% in FY25.
  • Record Kharif foodgrain production: 1647.05 LMT (+5.7% YoY).
  • Growth driven by horticulture, livestock, and fisheries.
  • Supported by above-normal monsoons and robust reservoir levels.

Industry:

  • Estimated growth: 6.2% in FY25.
  • Construction, utilities, and mining contribute significantly.
  • Challenges: Sluggish export demand, climate disruptions, and festival timing variations.
  • Manufacturing PMI remains in the expansionary zone.

Services:

  • Robust growth: 7.2% in FY25.
  • Services exports up by 12.8% (April–Nov FY25) vs 5.7% in FY24.
  • Growth led by finance, real estate, public administration, and professional services.

Inflation and Price Stability

  • Retail inflation eased to 4.9% (Apr–Dec 2024) from 5.4% (FY24).
  • Food inflation remains high at 8.4%, driven by pulses and vegetables.
  • CPI expected to align with RBI's 4% target by FY26.

Investment and Infrastructure

  • Capital Expenditure grew 8.2% YoY (Jul–Nov 2024); sustained increase since FY21.
  • Infrastructure momentum:
    • 2031 km railways commissioned (Apr–Nov 2024).
    • 17 Vande Bharat trains introduced.
    • Port efficiency improved; container turnaround time reduced from 48.1 to 30.4 hours.
  • Renewable energy capacity rose by 15.8% YoY (Dec 2024).

External Sector and Trade

  • Overall exports grew by 6% (Apr–Dec 2024); merchandise exports up 1.6%.
  • Services exports surged; India now 7th largest globally.
  • FDI inflows: $55.6 billion (Apr–Nov FY25), +17.9% YoY.
  • Forex reserves at $640.3 billion (Dec 2024), covering 10.9 months of imports and 90% of external debt.
  • CAD contained at 1.2% of GDP in Q2 FY25.
  • Strong remittance inflows support BOP stability.

Fiscal Health

  • Gross Tax Revenue rose 10.7% YoY (Apr–Nov 2024).
  • Stable deficit indicators allowed for developmental expenditure.
  • State revenue expenditure grew 12%, with subsidies increasing by 25.7%.

Banking, Credit, and Financial Markets

  • Gross NPAs dropped to 2.6% (lowest in 12 years).
  • CRAR of scheduled banks at 16.7% (Sept 2024), well above regulatory norms.
  • Stock market cap to GDP ratio: 136%, higher than China (65%) and Brazil (37%).
  • Credit-GDP gap reduced to -0.3% in Q1 FY25 (from -10.3% in Q1 FY23).

Employment and Labour Market

  • Unemployment rate declined to 3.2% (2023-24) from 6.0% (2017-18).
  • Labour Force Participation Rate (LFPR) and Worker-Population Ratio (WPR) improved.
  • Emphasis on AI skill development to future-proof labour markets.

Health, Education & Social Sector

  • Government health expenditure rose from 29% to 48% of total health spending (FY15–FY22).
  • Out-of-pocket expenditure dropped from 62.6% to 39.4% in the same period.
  • Education reforms aligned with NEP 2020 via programs like Samagra Shiksha, DIKSHA, PM SHRI, etc.
  • Social services spending grew at 15% CAGR (FY21–FY25).
  • Decline in Gini coefficient indicates improving consumption equality.

Policy Recommendations and Reform Agenda

  • Deregulation as central theme to boost productivity and EoDB.
  • Advocates Ease of Doing Business 2.0, led by states, targeting:
    • Simplification of compliance norms.
    • Risk-based regulation.
    • Reduction in tariffs and licensing hurdles.
  • ?50,000 crore Self-Reliant India Fund launched for MSME equity support.
  • Need for long-term infrastructure investment to achieve Viksit Bharat@2047.

Global Backdrop

  • Global GDP grew by 3.3% in 2023, with an average 3.2% growth projected over next five years (IMF).
  • Weak global manufacturing; services sector remains stronger.
  • Risks: Geopolitical tensions, trade policy fragmentation, energy transition dependence on China.

Way Forward

  • Balanced outlook for FY26 with upside from:
    • Strong rural demand.
    • Agricultural recovery.
    • Easing food inflation.
  • Challenges include:
    • Geopolitical tensions.
    • Global trade and commodity price volatility.
    • Delay in private investment materialisation.

Darfur Crisis: Humanitarian Emergency in Western Sudan

  • 31 Jan 2025

Context:

Sudan’s Darfur region is once again in global focus following a deadly drone attack on the last functional hospital in El-Fasher, killing at least 67 people and injuring dozens. The International Criminal Court (ICC) has called for urgent UN Security Council intervention as the humanitarian situation deteriorates.

Geographical and Historical Background

  • Location: Western Sudan, bordering Chad, Libya, Central African Republic, and South Sudan.
  • Area: Approximately 493,000 sq. km, nearly the size of France.
  • Topography: Predominantly arid and semi-arid terrain, with desert in the north and savanna in the south. Key physical features include:
    • Jebel Marra Mountains: Volcanic highlands and key water source.
    • Wadi Howar: Seasonal river vital for agriculture.
    • Baggara Belt: Grazing zone, often contested.
  • Historical Significance: Once an independent Islamic sultanate ruled by the Fur tribe, Darfur was annexed by Anglo-Egyptian Sudan in 1916. The name "Darfur" means "land of the Fur" in Arabic.

Ethnic Composition and Demographics

  • Home to over 80 ethnic groups, including the Fur, Zaghawa, Beja, Nubians, and Arabs.
  • Long-standing ethnic tensions exist between Arab nomadic groups and non-Arab farming communities, which have been a root cause of conflict.

Conflict Timeline and Key Actors

  • Conflict Origins: Armed conflict began in 2003, led by rebel groups such as the Sudan Liberation Movement (SLM) and Justice and Equality Movement (JEM), demanding political autonomy and better representation.
  • Government Response: The Sudanese government armed Janjaweed militias—now rebranded as the Rapid Support Forces (RSF)—who were accused of widespread atrocities, including genocide, mass killings, and rape.
  • Recent Escalation:
    • In 2023, violence surged amid civil war between Sudan's national army and RSF.
    • RSF has seized much of Darfur and has besieged El-Fasher, capital of North Darfur, since May 2023.
    • A January 2025 drone attack destroyed the Saudi Hospital in El-Fasher, killing 67 people. The hospital was one of the last with surgical capacity in the region.

Humanitarian Impact

  • Health Crisis:
    • 80% of healthcare facilities in Sudan are non-functional.
    • Attacks on medical infrastructure have been rampant; El-Fasher’s Saudi Hospital was hit multiple times by suspected RSF drones.
  • Displacement and Starvation:
    • Over 12 million people displaced.
    • Tens of thousands killed.
    • Famine has already gripped camps like Zamzam, Abu Shouk, and Al-Salam, and is expected to spread to additional regions, including El-Fasher, by May 2025 (UN Assessment).

Global and Regional Implications

  • The Darfur conflict has destabilized the region, affecting neighboring countries like Chad and the Central African Republic.
  • ICC has issued warrants for several individuals including former President Omar al-Bashir, citing war crimes and crimes against humanity.
  • The conflict highlights the intersection of climate stress, ethnic rivalries, political marginalization, and international accountability failures.

ASER 2024

  • 30 Jan 2025

In News:

The Annual Status of Education Report (ASER) 2024, released by the NGO Pratham, provides an insightful assessment of schooling and foundational learning levels across rural India.

Conducted in 17,997 villages across 605 districts, the survey reached over 6.49 lakh children aged 3–16 and tested more than 5 lakh for reading and arithmetic.

About ASER:

  • Type: Household-based, citizen-led survey
  • Initiated: 2005 (Annual till 2014; biennial since 2016)
  • Scope:
    • Tracks school enrollment (ages 3–16)
    • Assesses basic reading and arithmetic skills (ages 5–16)
    • Includes children in and out of school, across government, private, and informal institutions
    • 2024: Introduced digital literacy assessment for ages 14–16

Key Findings of ASER 2024:

1. Enrollment Trends

  • Pre-primary (Ages 3–5):
    • Overall enrollment improved significantly.
    • 3-year-old enrollment rose from 68.1% in 2018 to 77.4% in 2024.
    • Anganwadis remain primary providers for 3–4-year-olds, while private preschools dominate among 5-year-olds.
  • Elementary (Ages 6–14):
    • Overall enrollment slightly declined from 98.4% (2022) to 98.1% (2024).
    • Government school enrollment fell from 72.9% (2022) to 66.8% (2024).
    • Private school enrollment, steadily rising since 2006, is regaining ground post-pandemic.
  • Adolescents (Ages 15–16):
    • Dropout rates fell from 13.1% in 2018 to 7.9% in 2024.
    • However, female dropout (8.1%) remains higher than male.

2. Learning Outcomes

  • Reading Skills:
    • Std III: 23.4% in government schools could read Std II-level text (up from 16.3% in 2022).
    • Std V: 44.8% could read Class II text, nearly matching 2018 levels (44.2%).
    • Private schools yet to recover fully to pre-pandemic levels (59.3% in 2024 vs. 65.1% in 2018).
  • Arithmetic Skills:
    • Std III: 33.7% could perform basic subtraction (up from 25.9% in 2022, exceeding 28.2% in 2018).
    • Std VIII: 45.8% could solve basic problems, showing consistent improvement.

Trend: Arithmetic recovery has outpaced reading, with government schools showing faster gains than private ones.

3. Digital Literacy (Ages 14–16)

  • Access: Nearly 90% have access to smartphones.
  • Ownership:
    • 36.2% of boys own smartphones vs. 26.9% of girls.
  • Usage:
    • 82.2% use smartphones; only 57% for education, but 76% for social media.
  • Safety Awareness:
    • 62% know how to block/report users, and 55.2% can make profiles private.

4. School Infrastructure & Observations

  • Attendance:
    • Student attendance improved from 72.4% (2018) to 75.9% (2024).
    • Teacher attendance rose from 85.1% to 87.5% in the same period.
  • Facilities:
    • Usable girls' toilets increased from 66.4% to 72%.
    • Drinking water availability rose from 74.8% to 77.7%.
    • Playground access remains stable (~66%).
  • Learning Resources:
    • Use of non-textbook reading materials (e.g., stories, folk tales) rose from 36.9% to 51.3%.
  • Foundational Literacy and Numeracy (FLN):
    • 80%+ of schools implemented FLN activities.
    • 75% had at least one FLN-trained teacher.

Significance of Elementary Education:

  • Foundational for Learning: Builds core skills vital for academic progression.
  • Social Development: Encourages interaction, empathy, teamwork, and communication.
  • Emotional and Cognitive Growth: Stimulates curiosity, motivation, and self-confidence.
  • Economic Multiplier: Strong early education contributes to long-term national productivity and innovation.

Persistent Challenges:

  • Infrastructure Deficits:
    • Over 1.5 lakh schools lack functional electricity.
    • 67,000 schools lack toilets; only 33.2% have usable disabled-friendly toilets.
  • Technology Divide: Only 43.5% of government schools have computers vs. 70.9% in private schools.
  • Human Resource Gaps: Around 1 lakh schools function with only one teacher.
  • Social Barriers:
    • Caste, class, rural-urban, and gender divides restrict equal educational access.
    • Language barriers affect non-Hindi/English speakers due to lack of regional textbooks.

Key Government Initiatives:

  • National Education Policy (NEP) 2020
  • PM SHRI Schools
  • Sarva Shiksha Abhiyan
  • Mid-Day Meal Scheme
  • Beti Bachao Beti Padhao
  • National Programme on Technology Enhanced Learning (NPTEL)
  • PRAGYATA (Guidelines for digital education

Way Forward:

  • Early Interventions: Focus on retention among disadvantaged groups.
  • Inclusive Learning Models: Introduce flexible/part-time programs for working children.
  • Supplementary Literacy: Target out-of-school and dropout children with bridge courses.
  • Local Governance: Establish District School Boards for planning and accountability.
  • Infrastructure Expansion: Ensure school access within 1 km in underserved regions.
  • Parental Awareness: Launch community campaigns on education's long-term benefits.

Union Budget: understanding its formulation and implications

  • 29 Jan 2025

What is the Union Budget?

The Union Budget, referred to as the Annual Financial Statement under Article 112 of the Constitution, outlines the government's estimated receipts and expenditure for a financial year. It serves as a crucial instrument for economic policy and governance.

The Budget Division of the Department of Economic Affairs under the Ministry of Finance is responsible for preparing the Union Budget.

Key Components of the Budget

1. Expenditure

Expenditure is classified on the basis of:

  • Asset Creation and Liability Reduction:
    • Capital Expenditure: Increases assets or reduces liabilities (e.g., infrastructure, hospitals).
    • Revenue Expenditure: Does not create assets (e.g., salaries, subsidies, interest payments).
  • Sectoral Impact:
    • General Services: Administrative functions, defence, interest payments.
    • Economic Services: Agriculture, transport, rural development, etc.
    • Social Services: Education, health, welfare.
    • Grants-in-Aid and Contributions.

Development Expenditure = Economic Services + Social Services, and it too can be capital or revenue in nature.

2. Receipts

Government receipts are classified into:

  • Revenue Receipts: Do not create liabilities (e.g., tax and non-tax revenues).
  • Non-Debt Capital Receipts: Do not involve liabilities (e.g., loan recovery, disinvestment).
  • Debt-Creating Capital Receipts: Involve future liabilities (e.g., borrowings).

3. Deficit Indicators

  • Fiscal Deficit = Total Expenditure - (Revenue Receipts + Non-Debt Capital Receipts)
  • Primary Deficit = Fiscal Deficit - Interest Payments
  • Revenue Deficit = Revenue Expenditure - Revenue Receipts

Fiscal deficit reflects the net borrowing requirement of the government.

Implications of the Budget on the Economy

1. Aggregate Demand

  • Government Expenditure boosts aggregate demand.
  • Tax and Non-Tax Revenue reduces disposable income, thereby contracting demand.

Policy Interpretations:

  • Expansionary Fiscal Policy: Rise in expenditure-GDP ratio, increase in fiscal deficit.
  • Contractionary Fiscal Policy: Increase in revenue-GDP ratio, reduction in fiscal deficit.

2. Income Distribution

  • Revenue expenditure like food subsidies or MGNREGA supports lower-income groups.
  • Corporate tax concessions benefit businesses. Both may increase deficits but differ in their distributional impact.

Fiscal Rules and Their Role

Fiscal rules define policy targets to maintain macroeconomic stability. They guide the government’s borrowing and spending behaviour.

Current Framework in India

India’s fiscal framework is guided by the N.K. Singh Committee Report, which recommended:

  1. Stock Target: Maintain a specific Debt-to-GDP ratio.
  2. Flow Target: Limit Fiscal Deficit-to-GDP ratio.
  3. Composition Target: Maintain Revenue Deficit-to-GDP ratio.

Challenges in Implementation

  • India’s tax rates are largely fixed and not adjusted frequently.
  • To meet fiscal targets, the government primarily adjusts expenditure.
  • This rigidity may constrain the ability to undertake expansionary fiscal policy, especially during economic downturns or rising unemployment.

Need for Re-examination

Given persistent issues like low growth and unemployment, current fiscal rules may hinder responsive policy action. A flexible and context-specific fiscal framework is essential for ensuring both macroeconomic stability and inclusive development.

Conclusion

The Union Budget is not merely a financial statement but a tool of economic management. A nuanced understanding of its formulation, components, and policy implications is vital for evaluating government priorities and their impact on the economy and society.

Addressing Environmental Challenges and Strengthening Regulations in India

  • 28 Jan 2025

In News:

India's recent coal mining tragedy in Dima Hasao, Assam, underscores the nation's ongoing struggle with illegal and hazardous rat-hole mining, despite the National Green Tribunal's 2014 ban. This persistent exploitation, driven by industrial demand for coal, highlights the gap between environmental regulations and their enforcement, revealing a broader issue of balancing economic growth with environmental protection. As India strives to meet ambitious climate goals and sustain economic development, strengthening environmental regulations becomes critical.

Current Environmental Regulations in India

India has established a strong legal framework to protect its environment, grounded in the Indian Constitution. Articles 48A and 51A(g) direct the state and citizens to safeguard the environment, while Article 21 ensures the right to a clean and healthy environment, as interpreted by the Supreme Court. Key pollution control laws include:

  • Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1974: Regulates water pollution and establishes pollution control boards at the national and state levels.
  • Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act, 1981: Controls air pollution from industrial emissions and vehicles.
  • Environment (Protection) Act, 1986: Provides overarching powers for environmental protection.
  • Plastic Waste Management Rules, 2016: Regulates plastic waste disposal and bans single-use plastics.

Other significant laws focus on forest and wildlife protection, including the Indian Forest Act, 1927, and the Wildlife (Protection) Act, 1972, along with the National Green Tribunal (NGT) Act, 2010, which ensures quick resolution of environmental disputes.

Key Issues with Enforcement

  • Despite these stringent regulations, enforcement remains weak due to institutional limitations. Many industrial units fail to meet environmental standards, with regulatory bodies underfunded and understaffed. For example, pollution control boards in states like Uttar Pradesh and Bihar are plagued by staffing shortages, hampering their ability to monitor pollution effectively.
  • Inadequate public participation and insufficient technology adoption further exacerbate these challenges.
  • The Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) process, often bypassed or diluted, leads to development projects being approved without full consideration of their environmental impacts, particularly in ecologically sensitive areas.

Weak Enforcement and Conflict between Development and Conservation

The tension between development and conservation is evident in policies that relax environmental regulations for economic growth. The Forest (Conservation) Amendment Act, 2023, prioritizes infrastructure projects over forest preservation, undermining ecological conservation. Moreover, the rapid urbanization of cities like Gurugram and Faridabad has led to large-scale deforestation and a reduction in natural conservation zones, worsening air and water quality.

Strengthening Environmental Regulations

To address these challenges, India needs to strengthen its environmental regulatory mechanisms:

  • Enhance Enforcement: Adequate funding, skilled personnel, and advanced technology, such as AI-based pollution monitoring and drone surveillance, are essential to improve compliance.
  • EIA Reforms: The EIA process should be made more transparent and participatory, ensuring that marginalized communities are included in decision-making.
  • Promote Clean Energy: Expanding subsidies for renewable energy and encouraging industries to adopt green technologies will help reduce reliance on fossil fuels.
  • Circular Economy: Encouraging industries to adopt recycling and upcycling practices can minimize waste and reduce resource extraction.
  • Strengthen Local Involvement: Empowering local communities through decentralization under the Forest Rights Act will ensure more inclusive environmental governance.

Conclusion

India’s environmental challenges require a balanced approach, integrating sustainable development with robust environmental protections. Strengthening regulatory enforcement, reforming the EIA process, and fostering community-led conservation are essential to aligning economic growth with environmental sustainability. By addressing these gaps, India can better navigate its path toward achieving both its development goals and climate commitments.

India-Indonesia Relations

  • 27 Jan 2025

In News:

The President of Indonesia, visited India as the Chief Guest for the 76th Republic Day in January 2025. This marked the 75th anniversary of diplomatic ties, reaffirming the commitment to deepen cooperation in economic, strategic, cultural, and defense domains.

Historical Foundations

  • Ancient Civilizational Links: Trade and cultural exchanges date back to the 2nd century BCE, reflected in the influence of Hinduism and Buddhism on Indonesian society (e.g., Ramayana, Mahabharata, Borobudur, Prambanan).
  • Modern Diplomatic Ties:
    • Formalized in 1950, with a Treaty of Friendship in 1951.
    • Collaborated in the 1955 Bandung Conference and co-founded the Non-Aligned Movement (1961).
    • Indonesia’s first President Sukarno was the Guest of Honour at India’s first Republic Day in 1950.
  • Cold War and Beyond:
    • Relations cooled in the 1960s but revived in the 1980s.
    • The 1991 'Look East' Policy and the 2014 'Act East' Policy revitalized ties.
    • Strategic Partnership in 2005; upgraded to a Comprehensive Strategic Partnership in 2018.

Key Pillars of Cooperation

  • Economic and Trade Relations
    • Trade Volume: Reached USD 38.8 billion (2022–23), targeted to increase to USD 50 billion by 2025.
    • Key Imports: India imports coal, palm oil, and nickel.
    • Investment: Indian investments in Indonesia total USD 1.56 billion in infrastructure, textiles, and energy.
  • New Developments:
    • MoU on Local Currency Settlement Systems to reduce dependency on USD.
    • Focus on resolving trade barriers via forums like WGTI and BMTF.
    • Cooperation in critical minerals like nickel and bauxite.
    • BPCL to invest USD 121 million in the Nunukan gas block.
  • Military Exercises: Garuda Shakti (Army), Samudra Shakti (Navy), and participation in Milan, Komodo, Super Garuda Shield, etc.
  • Key Agreements:
    • 2018 Defense Cooperation Agreement.
    • White Shipping Information Exchange (WSIE).
    • Proposal for Bilateral Maritime Dialogue and Cyber Security Dialogue.
    • Joint vision on maritime cooperation under SAGAR (Security and Growth for All in the Region).
    • BrahMos Deal: Talks underway for Indonesia’s acquisition of BrahMos missiles (~USD 450 million).
  • Cultural Diplomacy: Shared heritage of Hindu-Buddhist traditions; India assisting in restoring Prambanan temple.
  • Tourism & Connectivity: Direct flights since 2023; India is the second-largest source of tourists to Bali.
  • New Initiatives:
    • Cultural Exchange Programme (2025–2028).
    • India reaffirmed the Kashi Cultural Pathway for heritage restoration and repatriation of artifacts.
  • Science, Technology, and Space
    • ISRO supports Indonesia’s satellite ambitions; agreement on Biak Tracking Station.
    • Renewed MoU on STEM cooperation.
    • Areas of collaboration: Quantum tech, high-performance computing, and digital public infrastructure.
  • Energy and Health Security
    • Collaboration on biofuels under the Global Biofuels Alliance.
    • Joint initiatives on mid-day meals and public distribution systems.
    • MoUs on digital health, capacity building, and traditional medicine.

Multilateral and Regional Cooperation

  • ASEAN & Indo-Pacific: Commitment to ASEAN centrality and cooperation through IPOI, India-Indonesia-Australia Trilateral, and ASEAN-India outlook.
  • Global Platforms: Collaboration in BRICS, G20, IORA, and advocacy for the Global South.
  • Climate & Disaster Resilience:
    • Joint efforts under CDRI.
    • Indonesia invited to the International Solar Alliance and Big Cat Alliance.

Key Challenges

  • Trade Imbalance: Heavy reliance on limited imports (coal, palm oil); imbalance persists as Indonesia’s trade with China is far greater (~USD 139 billion).
  • Bureaucratic & Regulatory Barriers: Slow progress on infrastructure and investment due to permit and regulatory issues.
  • Geopolitical Pressures: Indo-Pacific instability and China's expanding influence pose strategic challenges.
  • Logistical Constraints: Inadequate connectivity infrastructure hinders deeper integration.

Way Forward

  • Trade Diversification: Include sectors like tech, agriculture, and green energy.
  • Defense Deepening: Expand joint exercises, maritime patrols, and intelligence-sharing.
  • Enhance Connectivity: Boost air, sea, and digital linkages for trade and tourism.
  • Green Collaboration: Advance renewable energy and sustainable mining ventures.
  • Cultural & Educational Engagement: Promote student exchanges, scholarships (e.g., ITEC), and diaspora involvement.

Conclusion

India and Indonesia share deep-rooted civilizational links and are strategically aligned in the Indo-Pacific. Their evolving Comprehensive Strategic Partnership encompasses trade, defense, technology, and cultural diplomacy. Strengthening this partnership will not only boost bilateral growth but also ensure a stable, multipolar, and cooperative regional order.

External Commercial Borrowings (ECBs)

  • 25 Jan 2025

In News:

A recent State Bank of India (SBI) report highlights the evolving trends in investment activity and the increasing importance of External Commercial Borrowings (ECBs) in financing India's economic growth. It also reflects rising private sector participation and a robust capital formation trend.

Investment Trends in India:

  • Total Investment Announcements reached ?32.01 lakh crore during April–December 2024 (9MFY25), up 39% from the same period in FY24.
  • The private sector accounted for 70% of investments in 9MFY25, up from 56% in FY24, indicating rising business confidence.
  • Gross block of Indian corporates rose to ?106.5 lakh crore (March 2024), from ?73.94 lakh crore in March 2020—an addition of over ?8 lakh crore annually.
  • Capital Work in Progress stood at ?13.63 lakh crore, reflecting ongoing infrastructure and industrial projects.
  • Household Net Financial Savings (HNFS) improved to 5.3% of GDP in FY24 from 5.0% in FY23.
  • Investment-to-GDP ratio improved, with:
    • Government investment at 4.1% of GDP (FY23) — highest since FY12.
    • Private corporate investment rising to 11.9% in FY23, projected to reach 12.5% in FY24.

What are External Commercial Borrowings (ECBs)?

ECBs refer to loans raised by Indian entities from foreign lenders, including commercial banks, export credit agencies, and institutional investors. These borrowings are regulated by the Reserve Bank of India (RBI) and used for purposes like capital expansion, modernization, and infrastructure development.

Current Status of ECBs (as of Sept–Nov 2024):

  • Outstanding ECBs stood at $190.4 billion (Sept 2024).
    • Private sector share: 63% (~$97.6 billion).
    • Public sector share: 37% (~$55.5 billion).
  • Of the total, non-Rupee and non-FDI ECBs accounted for $154.9 billion.
  • ECBs registered (April–Nov 2024): $33.8 billion, mainly for capital goods import, local capex, and new projects.
  • Cost of ECBs declined to:
    • 6.6% average during April–November 2024.
    • 5.8% in November 2024, down by 71 basis points from the previous month.
  • Hedging practices: Private companies hedge about 74% of their ECB exposure, essential for managing currency risk.

Why Are ECBs Important for India?

  • Bridging Capital Gaps: Domestic markets may not meet the capital needs of large projects.
  • Lower Interest Rates: ECBs often offer cheaper financing than domestic loans.
  • Infrastructure Financing: Key source of funds for sectors needing long-term investment.
  • Foreign Exchange Access: Supports imports, modernization, and technology adoption.
  • Private Sector Expansion: Enables firms to grow, diversify, and remain globally competitive.

Challenges and Risks:

  • Currency Risk: Rupee depreciation can raise repayment costs.
  • Interest Rate Risk: Linked to global rates (e.g., LIBOR/SOFR), which can rise unpredictably.
  • Hedging Costs: Though necessary, hedging adds to borrowing costs.
  • Global Dependency: Exposure to international financial volatility.
  • Regulatory Constraints: RBI norms on end-use, maturity, and cost ceilings can reduce flexibility.
  • Over-Borrowing Risk: Mismanagement can lead to unsustainable debt levels and strain forex reserves.

Clarification on ECB Liability Data:

  • Some media reports mistakenly cited India’s ECB stock as $273 billion.
  • The actual ECBs, as per RBI (Sept 2024), stand at $190.4 billion.
  • The inflated figure includes $72 billion in FPI (Debt), which should not be classified as ECBs.

Way Forward:

  • Regulatory Refinement: Simplify ECB rules for strategic sectors and long-term projects.
  • Encourage Hedging: Make risk management more affordable and accessible.
  • Prudent Borrowing: Promote ECBs for infrastructure, exports, and modernization rather than working capital.
  • Monitoring and Oversight: Ensure transparency and prevent over-leverage.
  • Strengthen Domestic Financing: To reduce overdependence on foreign borrowing.

National Health Mission (NHM): 2021–2024

  • 24 Jan 2025

In News:

The Union Cabinet reviewed the progress under NHM (2021–24), underscoring significant gains in public health infrastructure, disease control, and healthcare accessibility, particularly during and after the COVID-19 pandemic.

About NHM:

  • Launched: 2013, integrating NRHM (2005) and NUHM (2012).
  • Objective: Universal access to equitable, affordable, and quality healthcare services.
  • Focus: Vulnerable populations, rural and urban poor.
  • Implementation: Ministry of Health & Family Welfare supports states and UTs.

Key Achievements (2021–2024):

1. Human Resource Expansion

  • 12.13 lakh healthcare workers added, including doctors, nurses, CHOs, and AYUSH practitioners.
  • Ni-kshay Mitras: 1.56 lakh volunteers supported 9.4 lakh TB patients.
  • Progressive annual engagement:
    • FY 2021–22: 2.69 lakh
    • FY 2022–23: 4.21 lakh
    • FY 2023–24: 5.23 lakh

Maternal and Child Health

  • Maternal Mortality Ratio (MMR): Dropped by 83% since 1990 (from 130 to 97 per lakh live births).
  • Under-5 Mortality Rate (U5MR): Reduced from 45 (2014) to 32 (2020).
  • Infant Mortality Rate (IMR): Declined from 39 (2014) to 28 (2020).
  • Total Fertility Rate (TFR): Reduced from 2.3 (2015) to 2.0 (2020).

Disease Control and Elimination

  • Tuberculosis (TB):
    • Incidence: From 237 (2015) to 195 (2023) per 1,00,000.
    • Mortality: Decreased by 21.4% (from 28 to 22).
  • Kala-azar: Target achieved in all endemic blocks (<1 case/10,000 population by 2023).
  • Sickle Cell Anemia: 2.61 crore people screened under the National Elimination Mission.
  • Malaria:
    • Cases fell in 2021 but rose in 2022 and 2023.
    • Deaths declined continuously.

Immunization Campaigns

  • COVID-19: Over 220 crore doses administered (2021–2024).
  • Measles-Rubella: 97.98% coverage, vaccinating 34.77 crore children under IMI 5.0.
  • Digital Health: U-WIN platform launched in 2023 for real-time vaccination tracking in 65 districts.

Healthcare Infrastructure

  • 7,998 health facilities certified under National Quality Assurance Standards (NQAS).
  • Ayushman Arogya Mandirs: 1.72 lakh operational, with 1.34 lakh offering 12 essential services.
  • 24×7 services: At 12,348 PHCs and 3,133 FRUs.
  • Mobile Medical Units (MMUs): Expanded to 1,424 units, MMU Portal operational.

Specialized Health Initiatives

  • Pradhan Mantri TB Mukt Bharat Abhiyan: Volunteer-driven TB patient support.
  • Pradhan Mantri National Dialysis Programme:
    • Delivered 62.35 lakh hemodialysis sessions to 4.53 lakh patients in FY 2023–24.
  • Sickle Cell Mission: Major tribal health initiative targeting elimination by 2047.

National Programs Under NHM

  • RMNCH+A: Reproductive, Maternal, Newborn, Child, and Adolescent Health.
  • Communicable Disease Control: TB, malaria, leprosy, HIV/AIDS.
  • Non-Communicable Diseases (NCDs): Cancer, diabetes, hypertension.
  • Other Initiatives: Rashtriya Bal Swasthya Karyakram (RBSK), PM National Dialysis Programme, Ayushman Bharat (AB-PMJAY).

Alignment with SDG Goals

  • NHM achievements indicate India is on track to meet SDG-3 targets (Good Health and Well-being), especially in maternal and child mortality reduction.

Judiciary in Crisis and the Digital Transformation of India

  • 23 Jan 2025

In News:

The Indian judiciary is grappling with an unprecedented backlog of cases, while India’s digital economy is witnessing exponential growth, promising to be a key driver of future economic expansion. Simultaneously, India's strides in the space sector and emerging technologies signal its increasing role as a global innovator.

The Crisis of Judicial Pendency in India

  • Background: The Supreme Court recently permitted High Courts to appoint ad-hoc retired judges under Article 224A to address the mounting pendency of cases. This move revives a constitutional provision that had remained dormant, with only three recorded instances of its use.
  • Scale of Backlog:
    • As of January 2025, over 62 lakh cases are pending in High Courts.
    • Nearly 4 crore cases are pending in subordinate courts.
    • 30% of High Court judicial positions remain vacant.
  • Reasons for Pendency
  • Insufficient Judicial Strength: Low judge-to-population ratio.
  • Infrastructure Deficit: Poor court facilities, especially in rural areas.
  • Administrative Delays: Outdated systems and slow bureaucratic processing.
  • Rising Litigation: Increase in public awareness and socio-economic issues.
  • Adjournments & Procedural Delays: Inefficient court practices.
  • Vacancies in Appointments: Delay in filling judicial posts due to the standoff between executive and judiciary.

Constitutional Provision: Article 224A

  • Enables High Courts to appoint retired judges temporarily with the President’s consent.
  • Judges appointed under this article have full powers and jurisdiction of a regular High Court judge.
  • Supreme Court in Lok Prahari v. Union of India (2021) provided guidelines for such appointments, including limiting it to instances where judicial vacancies are not more than 20%.

Judicial Appointments Debate: Collegium vs. NJAC

  • Collegium System
    • CJI + Four senior-most judges decide appointments.
    • Criticized for lack of transparency, nepotism, and non-accountability.
  • National Judicial Appointments Commission (NJAC)
    • Proposed inclusion of judiciary, executive, and civil society (2 eminent persons).
    • Struck down by SC in 2015 to preserve judicial independence.
  • Current Debate: Rising demands for a reformed NJAC to bring in accountability while retaining independence.

Global Models of Judicial Appointments

Country                  System                           Key Feature

UK                     Judicial Appointments Commission                 Transparent, includes laypersons

South Africa     Judicial Service Commission                            Diverse representation: judiciary, politicians, academics

France                High Council of Judiciary                                Balanced approach with civil society input

Impacts of Judicial Delay

  • Delayed Justice: Undermines public trust.
  • Overcrowded Prisons: Over 70% of inmates are undertrials; prisons operate at 114% capacity.
  • Economic Costs: Delays in dispute resolution hamper business environment and economic efficiency.
  • Judicial Burnout: Overburdened judges impact quality of judgments.

Addressing Judicial Pendency

  • Short-Term Measures
    • Appointment of Ad-Hoc Judges under Article 224A.
    • Fast Track Courts for specific offenses (e.g., crimes against women, corruption).
  • Long-Term Reforms
    • Reforming Judicial Appointments: Transparent and accountable system through restructured NJAC.
    • Enhancing Collegium Transparency: Clear criteria and public disclosure.
    • Promoting ADR Mechanisms: Arbitration, mediation, and conciliation to reduce court burden.
    • Judicial Infrastructure Development: More courtrooms, modern facilities, and digitalization.

Way Forward

Judicial Reform

  • Strengthen judicial accountability while maintaining independence.
  • Incorporate global best practices in appointment systems.
  • Promote Alternative Dispute Resolution (ADR) and digitization of court processes

India’s Renewable Energy Revolution

  • 22 Jan 2025

Introduction

India's transition towards clean energy has accelerated, with 2024 witnessing record-breaking renewable energy (RE) installations and policy innovation. With a vision to achieve 500 GW of non-fossil fuel capacity by 2030 and net-zero emissions by 2070, India is shaping itself as a global leader in sustainable development.

What is Renewable Energy?

Renewable energy is derived from naturally replenishing sources like solar, wind, hydropower, and biomass. It plays a vital role in:

  • Reducing dependence on fossil fuels.
  • Lowering greenhouse gas emissions.
  • Ensuring long-term energy security.

India’s RE Targets and Progress

Parameter                                 Target/Status

2030 Target                              500 GW of non-fossil fuel capacity

Net Zero by                               2070

Current Status (Jan 2025)      217.62 GW of non-fossil fuel-based capacity

Short-term Goal                      50% energy capacity from renewable sources

2024: Year of Renewable Milestones

Solar Energy

  • 24.5 GW added in 2024 — a 2.8x increase over 2023.
  • 18.5 GW utility-scale solar: Rajasthan, Gujarat, Tamil Nadu contributed 71%.
  • Rooftop Solar:
    • 4.59 GW added (↑53%)
    • 7 lakh installations under PM Surya Ghar: Muft Bijli Yojana.
  • Off-grid Solar:
    • 1.48 GW added (↑182%), promoting rural energy access.

Wind Energy

  • 3.4 GW added: Gujarat (1,250 MW), Karnataka (1,135 MW), Tamil Nadu (980 MW) = 98% of new capacity.

Hydropower & Others

  • Existing hydropower plants modernized to improve efficiency.

Government Initiatives Driving Growth

Scheme/Initiative                                                Purpose

PM Surya Ghar: Muft Bijli Yojana                  Rooftop solar subsidies for households

Green Energy Corridor (GEC)                        Transmission infra for RE-rich states

Hydrogen Energy Mission                                Promote green hydrogen production

National Smart Grid Mission (NSGM)            Integration of variable RE sources into the grid

FAME Scheme                                                   Promote EV adoption, indirectly supporting RE usage

International Solar Alliance (ISA)                   Strengthen global cooperation in solar energy

Challenges in RE Expansion

  • Land Acquisition: Resistance from locals, especially in solar park areas.
  • Grid Stability: Intermittency of solar/wind leads to voltage and frequency issues.
  • Storage Gaps: Lack of large-scale battery storage limits surplus utilization.
  • E-Waste Concerns: Rising disposal of solar panels and batteries.
  • Mineral Dependency: Import reliance on lithium, cobalt, etc.
  • Regulatory Bottlenecks: Delay in approvals and lack of inter-state coordination.

Way Forward: Strategic Interventions

Technological Innovation

  • Floating Solar Projects: Utilize reservoirs to save land and reduce evaporation.
  • Decentralized Systems: Peer-to-peer trading via blockchain for energy democratization.
  • Green Hydrogen: Use surplus RE for hydrogen fuel, develop hydrogen corridors.

Infrastructure & Manufacturing

  • Renewable Energy SEZs: Promote local manufacturing and innovation.
  • Smart Grid Development: Improve grid flexibility and real-time balancing.

Environmental Management

  • Circular Economy for RE Waste: Design policies for solar panel and battery recycling.
  • Urban Integration: Incentivize rooftop installations in urban centers.

Conclusion

India’s renewable energy revolution is at a crucial juncture. With 2024 setting a strong precedent through record installations and policy progress, the path to 2030 and beyond will require addressing infrastructural, financial, and regulatory challenges. A multi-pronged, inclusive, and technology-driven approach will help India lead the global clean energy transition.

Why Indian cities need Behavioral Change Officers

  • 21 Jan 2025

Urban India at a Crossroads

India's urban population is projected to reach 40% by 2030, up from 30% in 2011. While this urban surge brings opportunities for economic and social progress, it also amplifies challenges such as:

  • Infrastructure strain
  • Environmental degradation
  • Social inequality
  • Climate impactsincluding increased frequency of floods, heatwaves, and climate-driven migration

Traditionally, governments have relied on a combination of policy reforms, infrastructure investment, and technological advancements. However, a crucial component is often overlooked: behavioral change.

The Case for Behavioral Change in Urban Governance

Urban planning and service delivery frequently overlook how citizen and provider behavior shapes outcomes. Sustained, meaningful change requires more than just awareness campaigns—it demands behaviorally-informed governance. Here's why:

  • Enhancing Service Delivery: Cities like Indore showcase how behavior change can revolutionize urban systems. Once struggling with waste management, Indore became India’s cleanest city through:
    • Door-to-door campaigns
    • Strict enforcement of segregation rules
    • Viral initiatives like the ‘Kachra Gadi’ song to shift mindsets
  • Driving Sustainability: In cities like Delhi, the odd-even vehicle rule led to a 30% reduction in traffic congestion by using simple default behavioral triggers. When people opt for public transport or energy conservation, it reduces emissions and eases city operations.
  • Improving Public Safety: Behavioral strategies also improve law enforcement and community trust. For instance, Kerala’s ‘Janamaithri Suraksha’ program emphasizes empathetic policing, resulting in stronger police-citizen relations.
  • Boosting Institutional Efficiency: Embedding behavioral insights can improve the efficiency of government schemes. The NITI Aayog’s Behavioral Insights Unit and initiatives in Uttar Pradesh and Bihar demonstrate success in using nudges to improve outcomes in areas like maternal health and welfare delivery.

Why Cities need Chief Behavioral Officers (CBOs)

To embed these insights systematically, Indian cities must institutionalize behavioral science through dedicated roles like Chief Behavioral Officers (CBOs) within Urban Local Bodies.

CBO Functions:

  • Integrate behavioral strategies into urban planning
  • Design evidence-backed nudges and campaigns
  • Collaborate with stakeholders, municipal officers, and researchers
  • Guide data-driven policy experimentation

Support Structure:

  • A small team of behavioral fellows
  • Annual Behavioral Plans aligned with city goals
  • Investment in citizen engagement platforms
  • Use of big data and surveys to uncover behavioral bottlenecks

Examples from global cities like New Orleans (via What Works Cities) show that CBOs can drive change quickly and cost-effectively.

Challenges to Behaviorally-Informed Urbanism

Despite its promise, this approach faces several roadblocks:

  • Cultural inertia and resistance to change (e.g., reluctance in waste segregation)
  • Lack of training in behavioral science among officials
  • Resource constraints in smaller municipalities
  • Fragmented coordination between departments (e.g., transport, sanitation)

Way Forward

To overcome these challenges, cities must:

  • Institutionalize behavioral roles in governance structures
  • Partner with behavioral scientists and think tanks
  • Leverage technology (e.g., mobile apps for citizen feedback)
  • Scale successful pilots (e.g., Indore’s waste model) across regions

This structured approach not only improves efficiency and citizen satisfaction, but also reduces the costs of service delivery, allowing long-term savings.

India-Middle East-Europe Economic Corridor (IMEC)

  • 20 Jan 2025

Context:

  • The India-Middle East-Europe Economic Corridor (IMEC), announced at the G20 Summit 2023 in New Delhi, is a transformative multi-modal connectivity initiative aiming to link India, the Middle East, and Europe through railways, ports, roads, energy pipelines, and digital infrastructure.
  • Seen as a strategic counter to China’s Belt and Road Initiative (BRI), IMEC marks a significant step in reshaping global trade routes and enhancing economic cooperation across continents.

Structure and Components of IMEC

  • Corridors:
    • Eastern Corridor: Connects India to the Arabian Peninsula
    • Northern Corridor: Links the Gulf to Europe
  • Key Infrastructure:
    • Rail and road networks
    • Shipping routes from Indian ports (e.g., Mumbai, Mundra, Kandla, JNPT) to UAE and onwards via rail to Saudi Arabia, Jordan, and Israel (Haifa Port)
    • Maritime link from Haifa to Piraeus Port in Greece, and further into Europe
    • Electricity grids, green hydrogen pipelines, and high-speed data cables
  • Participating Nations: India, US, Saudi Arabia, UAE, France, Germany, Italy, European Union
  • Support Mechanism: US-led Partnership for Global Infrastructure and Investment (PGII)

Significance of IMEC

For India

  • Enhanced Global Connectivity:
    • Provides faster, cost-effective access to European markets
    • Reduces dependence on the Suez Canal, a known chokepoint
  • Economic Gains:
    • Boosts the Make in India initiative through expanded market access
    • Enhances maritime security and tourism opportunities in the Mediterranean
  • Strategic Leverage:
    • Strengthens ties with Middle East, US, and Europe
    • Reinforces India’s image as a global strategic partner
  • Energy Security and Green Growth:
    • Facilitates the Green Grid Concept via power lines and hydrogen pipelines
    • Aligns with India’s clean energy and decarbonisation goals
  • Digital and Cyber Infrastructure:
    • Supports data flow and communication resilience across the corridor

For the United States

  • Strategic Counter to BRI:
    • Offers democratic nations an alternative to China’s BRI
  • Reinforces Transatlantic Unity:
    • Addresses trust deficits post Ukraine war
    • Reaffirms US commitment to European allies
  • Energy and Supply Chain Security:
    • Reduces reliance on adversarial energy routes
    • Diversifies regional supply chains
  • Geopolitical Stability:
    • Encourages peaceful engagement among West Asian rivals
    • Deters alignment with China-led blocks
  • Job Creation and Economic Growth:
    • Infrastructure investments boost local economies and employment

Strategic and Geopolitical Implications

  • Acts as a balancing mechanism in global geopolitics against the influence of China’s BRI
  • Built on diplomatic breakthroughs such as the Abraham Accords
  • Promotes economic cooperation between traditional rivals (e.g., Israel, Saudi Arabia, UAE)
  • Supports a rules-based international order centered on transparency, sustainability, and democratic values

Challenges to Implementation

  • Geopolitical Instability: Conflicts such as Israel-Hamas, Iran-Saudi tensions, or political instability in West Asia can delay progress
  • Infrastructure Bottlenecks:
    • High capital requirement and complexity of cross-border integration
    • Varying timelines and priorities among participating nations
  • Competing Regional Interests:
    • Exclusion of key players like Turkey, Iran, and China may trigger pushback
    • Turkey’s rivalry with Greece and Israel may create diplomatic hurdles

Security Concerns: Risk of terrorism, piracy, and cyber threats in unstable regions

Israel-Hamas Ceasefire

  • 19 Jan 2025

In News:

After 15 months of war triggered by Hamas' October 2023 attack on Israel, a ceasefire agreement has been brokered by Qatar, Egypt, and the US, marking a fragile but significant pause in one of the most destructive phases of the Israel-Palestine conflict.

Key Features of the Ceasefire Agreement

The agreement is based on a three-phase framework proposed by US President Joe Biden in June 2024 and endorsed by the UN Security Council:

Phase I (42 days)

  • Complete ceasefire and withdrawal of Israeli forces from all populated areas in Gaza.
  • Release of 33 Israeli hostages (women, elderly, injured) by Hamas.
  • Release of 900–1,650 Palestinian prisoners, including minors and those detained since October 7, 2023.
  • Daily entry of 600 humanitarian aid trucks into Gaza.
  • Partial Israeli withdrawal from key corridors like Netzarim (splitting Gaza) and parts of the Philadelphi Corridor (Gaza-Egypt border).

Phase II

  • Release of remaining hostages, primarily male soldiers.
  • Complete Israeli military withdrawal from Gaza.
  • Details to be negotiated during Phase I; no written guarantees for its execution.

Phase III

  • Return of the remains of deceased hostages.
  • Initiation of a multi-year reconstruction plan for Gaza under international supervision.

Challenges to Implementation

Fragile Political Consensus in Israel

  • Far-right ministers (e.g., Itamar Ben-Gvir) oppose the deal, threatening to quit the government.
  • Prime Minister Netanyahu faces pressure from both hawks demanding a full military victory and moderates seeking peace.

Hamas' Demands

  • Seeks permanent ceasefire and complete Israeli withdrawal, making it unwilling to release all hostages without guarantees.
  • Israel, in contrast, insists on neutralizing Hamas militarily.

Unclear Future Governance of Gaza

  • Israel rejects both Hamas and the Palestinian Authority (PA) as future administrators.
  • Global consensus supports Palestinian-led governance, but viable alternatives remain elusive.

Wider Geopolitical Impact

Reshaping West Asia

  • Conflict escalated tensions with Hezbollah (Lebanon) and drew Israel into direct conflict with Iran.
  • Iran’s influence weakened due to losses in Hezbollah and Syria.
  • Assad regime in Syria collapsed, altering regional power dynamics.

Diplomatic Repercussions for Israel

  • Despite military dominance, Israel faces global condemnation over civilian casualties.
  • PM Netanyahu is under scrutiny at the ICC (war crimes) and ICJ (genocide allegations).
  • Israel is now diplomatically isolated, particularly after the humanitarian toll in Gaza.

Humanitarian Crisis in Gaza

  • Over 64,000 Palestinians killed (The Lancet, 2024), including large numbers of civilians.
  • Massive destruction of infrastructure—schools, hospitals, homes—rendering Gaza nearly uninhabitable.
  • Reconstruction hinges on sustained peace and international aid.

Conclusion

The ceasefire presents a rare opportunity for de-escalation in a deeply entrenched conflict. However, distrust between parties, domestic political constraints, and regional rivalries pose significant risks to its sustainability. A durable peace can only emerge through inclusive political dialogue, humanitarian prioritization, and movement toward a two-state solution.

River Interlinking in India

  • 18 Jan 2025

Context:

India, with 17% of the world’s population but only 4% of its freshwater resources, faces significant water distribution challenges. The ambitious river interlinking project aims to mitigate regional water imbalances by transferring water from surplus areas to water-deficient regions, addressing irrigation, drinking water supply, flood control, and overall development.

Background and Evolution

The idea of interlinking rivers dates back to 1858 when British engineer Captain Arthur Cotton proposed linking rivers for inland navigation. Post-independence, Dr. K.L. Rao (1972) suggested the ‘Ganga-Cauvery Link Canal,’ followed by Captain Dinshaw J. Dastur’s ‘National Garland Canal’ proposal in 1977. However, these were deemed infeasible. In 1980, the Ministry of Water Resources formulated the National Perspective Plan (NPP), identifying 30 river link projects—14 under the Himalayan component and 16 under the Peninsular component.

The National Water Development Agency (NWDA) was established in 1982 to study and implement these projects. The Supreme Court, in response to a PIL in 2002, directed the government to expedite the completion of interlinking projects.

Ken-Betwa Link Project (KBLP)

The first project under the NPP, the Ken-Betwa Link Project (KBLP), was inaugurated on December 25, 2024. It aims to provide irrigation to Bundelkhand, one of India’s most drought-prone regions, by transferring surplus water from the Ken River in Madhya Pradesh to the Betwa River in Uttar Pradesh. Covering 10.62 lakh hectares of land (8.11 lakh ha in MP and 2.51 lakh ha in UP), the project will supply drinking water to 62 lakh people and generate 103 MW of hydropower along with 27 MW of solar power. However, environmental concerns persist as it passes through the Panna Tiger Reserve.

Significance of River Interlinking

  • Water Redistribution: The scheme will transfer about 200 billion cubic meters (BCM) of water annually to water-scarce regions, ensuring equitable distribution.
  • Agricultural Benefits: It will irrigate approximately 34 million hectares of farmland, enhancing food security and increasing agricultural productivity.
  • Hydropower Generation: An estimated 34,000 MW of hydropower will be generated, supporting renewable energy expansion.
  • Flood and Drought Mitigation: Excess water will be stored in reservoirs, reducing flood risks while ensuring availability during droughts.
  • Economic Growth: Improved water availability will boost industries, generate employment, and aid in rural development.

Environmental and Social Concerns

  • Ecological Disruptions: Altering river morphology can impact sediment transport, water quality, and aquatic ecosystems.
  • Biodiversity Loss: Dams and canals may disrupt fish migration patterns and submerge forests, leading to biodiversity depletion.
  • Climate Impact: Water transfer may affect regional climate attributes, altering temperature, precipitation, and humidity levels.
  • Displacement and Social Issues: Large-scale projects often lead to displacement of communities, causing resettlement challenges and conflicts over compensation.
  • Economic Viability: High project costs and potential delays raise concerns about financial feasibility compared to alternative solutions like rainwater harvesting and local water conservation.

Conclusion

While river interlinking presents a potential solution to India’s water crisis, it must be carefully assessed against environmental and social impacts. Sustainable water management strategies, such as efficient irrigation techniques and localized conservation methods, should complement large-scale projects to ensure a balanced approach to water security and development.

 

Satellite Docking Experiment (SpaDeX)

  • 17 Jan 2025

In News:

The Indian Space Research Organisation (ISRO) achieved a historic milestone by successfully executing a satellite docking experiment, making India the fourth country after the United States, Russia, and China to accomplish this feat. This advancement represents a significant leap in India's space capabilities, positioning the nation at the forefront of space exploration and in-orbit servicing.

Key Highlights:

  • The Space Docking Experiment (SpaDeX) is a critical technological demonstration by ISRO aimed at developing autonomous docking and undocking capabilities in space.
  • The mission involves two satellites, SDX01 (Chaser) and SDX02 (Target), which were launched aboard PSLV C60 on December 30, 2024.
  • The docking maneuver was overseen by the Mission Operations Complex (MOX) at the ISRO Telemetry, Tracking, and Command Network (ISTRAC) and was successfully completed in the early hours of January 18, 2025.

Key Steps in the Docking Process:

  • Manoeuvre from 15m to 3m hold point.
  • Precision docking initiation, leading to spacecraft capture.
  • Retraction and rigidization for stability.
  • Successful control of the docked satellites as a single object.

Significance of the Mission

  • Technological Advancement: The docking of two spacecraft in orbit is a crucial capability that paves the way for:
  • Autonomous spacecraft operations
  • Refueling and maintenance of satellites
  • Space station development
  • Lunar and interplanetary missions

Future Applications

  • Manned Missions: Enables India to develop technology for manned lunar missions and future space station operations.
  • Satellite Servicing: Allows repair, maintenance, and extension of satellite lifespan, reducing costs and space debris.
  • Sample Return Missions: Essential for lunar and planetary sample retrieval, crucial for deep-space exploration.

Challenges and Overcoming Setbacks

The SpaDeX docking was initially scheduled for January 7, 2025, but was postponed due to the need for further ground validation and an unexpected drift between the satellites. The issue was later resolved, and the docking was executed with precision.

The Road Ahead

Undocking and Power Transfer Demonstration

  • ISRO will follow up with power transfer checks between the docked satellites.
  • The satellites will later undock and operate separately for the remaining mission duration of up to two years.

Expanding Space Capabilities

  • The successful execution of SpaDeX aligns with India’s plans for an independent space station by the 2030s.
  • Strengthens India’s position in international space collaborations and commercial space services.

Conclusion

The SpaDeX mission represents a landmark achievement for India’s space program, placing it among the elite nations capable of satellite docking. This breakthrough will serve as a foundation for India’s ambitious future missions, including deep-space exploration, human spaceflight, and interplanetary research. As ISRO continues to develop advanced space technologies, India is set to play a crucial role in the future of global space exploration.

Digital Governance in India

  • 16 Jan 2025

In News:

India is making significant strides toward digital governance, an initiative aimed at enhancing both citizen services and the capabilities of government employees. This transition to a digitally-driven framework is designed to improve the efficiency, transparency, and accountability of government operations, positioning India as a global leader in modern governance practices.

What is Digital Governance?

Digital governance refers to the application of technology to enhance the functioning of government processes. By integrating digital tools and platforms, it aims to streamline administrative operations, reduce inefficiencies, and improve public service delivery. This approach also extends to ensuring greater transparency and accountability in government dealings.

Key Initiatives in Digital Governance

India has launched several critical initiatives to modernize governance through digital means. Some of the key programs include:

  • iGOT Karmayogi Platform: The iGOT Karmayogi platform is a government initiative to provide online training to public employees. It aims to enhance public administration skills, foster expertise in data analytics, and equip employees with the necessary tools in digital technologies. This initiative aims to prepare government personnel to handle the challenges of a digitally evolving governance landscape.
  • e-Office Initiative: The e-Office program is designed to reduce paper-based work by digitizing workflows within government departments. This initiative facilitates real-time communication among offices and ensures more efficient and transparent management of tasks. It also helps streamline decision-making processes and improves the speed of governance operations.
  • Government e-Marketplace (GeM): The Government e-Marketplace (GeM) is an online platform developed to optimize procurement processes. It allows government agencies to procure goods and services efficiently, transparently, and with accountability. This platform has contributed to reducing corruption and ensuring that government purchases represent the best value for public money.
  • Cybersecurity Training for Employees: As digital operations increase, ensuring the safety of sensitive data is paramount. The cybersecurity training program for government employees is designed to enhance their ability to recognize and respond to potential cyber threats. This initiative ensures data protection, safe online practices, and cyber resilience across digital governance platforms.

Challenges in Implementing Digital Governance

Despite its benefits, India faces several challenges in the successful implementation of digital governance. These obstacles must be addressed to unlock the full potential of technology-driven governance.

  • Resistance to Technological Change: One of the key barriers to digital transformation in government is the resistance among employees to adopt new technologies. Many government officials remain accustomed to traditional, paper-based processes and are reluctant to transition to digital systems due to concerns about complexity and job security.
  • Digital Divide in Rural Areas:  While urban regions in India have better access to high-speed internet and digital infrastructure, many rural areas face significant digital divide challenges. Limited access to technology hampers the successful implementation of digital governance in these regions, restricting equitable service delivery across the country. 
  • Cybersecurity Risks: The rise of digital operations in governance increases the risk of cyberattacks and data breaches. With government data being digitized, the threat of cybercrimes becomes more pronounced, making it critical to implement robust cybersecurity measures and data protection strategies to safeguard sensitive information.
  • Lack of Incentives for Training Outcomes: Although government employees are encouraged to take part in training programs such as iGOT Karmayogi, the absence of clear incentives to complete these programs can undermine their effectiveness. Establishing tangible rewards or career progression linked to the successful completion of training would encourage employees to fully engage in capacity-building initiatives.

Solutions to Overcome Challenges

To ensure the success of digital governance, several strategies must be put in place to address the challenges identified.

  • Foster Innovation-Friendly Environments: Promoting an innovation-friendly culture within government offices can help reduce resistance to new technologies. Encouraging employees to engage with digital tools, offering regular training, and providing ongoing support will facilitate a smoother transition to a technology-driven governance system.
  • Invest in Digital Infrastructure for Rural Areas: Addressing the digital divide requires significant investment in digital infrastructure in rural and remote areas. Ensuring that these regions have reliable internet access and the necessary technological resources will empower citizens across India to benefit from digital governance.
  • Continuous Capacity-Building Programs: Establishing continuous training programs for government employees will ensure that they remain up-to-date with the latest technological trends. Regular updates to training content will help employees stay prepared to handle emerging challenges in digital governance.
  • Strengthen Cybersecurity Protocols: To mitigate cybersecurity risks, it is essential to implement stringent cybersecurity measures across all levels of government operations. This includes regular cybersecurity awareness programs, proactive threat management systems, and rigorous data protection protocols to safeguard both government data and citizens’ personal information.

Conclusion

India’s shift towards digital governance represents a significant step toward modernizing administrative systems, enhancing transparency, and improving service delivery to citizens. However, challenges such as resistance to change, the digital divide, cybersecurity risks, and the lack of clear incentives for training must be addressed. By investing in digital infrastructure, offering continuous training programs, and reinforcing cybersecurity measures, India can create an effective and secure framework for digital governance that benefits both its citizens and the government workforce.

India’s Startup Revolution

  • 15 Jan 2025

Context

India has solidified its position as one of the most dynamic startup ecosystems globally, emerging as a hub for innovation, entrepreneurship, and technological progress. However, realizing its ambition of becoming the top startup ecosystem requires addressing critical challenges and leveraging available opportunities.

Current Landscape of Indian Startups

Growth and Innovation

India ranks as the third-largest startup ecosystem in the world, following the U.S. and China. As of January 15, 2025, over 1.59 lakh startups have been officially recognized by DPIIT, with more than 120 attaining unicorn status (valuation exceeding $1 billion).

Investment Trends

Despite economic fluctuations, India's startups continue to attract significant investments. In 2022, venture capitalists infused $25 billion into the ecosystem, reaffirming India’s position as a preferred destination for global investors. Although there was a slowdown in 2023, domains like Software as a Service (SaaS) and climate tech continue to secure substantial funding.

Government Support

India’s startup-friendly policies, including Startup India, Digital India, and Atmanirbhar Bharat, have created an enabling environment. Notable initiatives include:

  • Tax incentives, faster patent approvals, and regulatory relaxations.
  • The launch of a ?10,000 crore Fund of Funds for Startups (FFS) in 2023 to improve capital accessibility.
  • The Bharat Startup Knowledge Access Registry (BHASKAR) to streamline collaboration among startups and investors.

Regional Growth

  • Tier II and III Expansion: Nearly 50% of startups are now based in emerging hubs such as Indore, Jaipur, and Ahmedabad.
  • Tamil Nadu: The state boasts a $28 billion startup ecosystem, growing at 23%. Chennai alone houses around 5,000 startups, significantly contributing to employment generation.
  • Kerala: With a $1.7 billion startup ecosystem, Kerala exhibits a compound annual growth rate of 254%, emphasizing cost-effective tech talent hiring.

Key Challenges Faced by Startups

1. Funding Constraints

The global economic downturn, coupled with rising interest rates, has limited venture capital inflows, resulting in layoffs and operational cutbacks.

2. Regulatory and Compliance Barriers

Despite government support, startups grapple with complex tax structures, evolving data protection laws, and stringent compliance requirements, including ESOP taxation policies.

3. Scaling and Market Adaptability

Many startups struggle with operational inefficiencies, limited market penetration, and inadequate infrastructure, hampering growth potential.

4. High Failure Rate

Approximately 90% of Indian startups fail within five years due to poor product-market fit, lack of financial planning, and insufficient adaptation to market needs.

5. Talent Shortages

India faces stiff competition in acquiring skilled professionals in areas like AI, cybersecurity, and machine learning, making retention increasingly difficult amid economic uncertainties.

Strategic Measures to Strengthen India’s Startup Ecosystem

1. Enhancing Policy Frameworks

  • Simplified Regulations: Streamline startup registration, funding approvals, and international business operations.
  • IP Protection: Strengthen intellectual property laws to boost R&D investment.
  • Sector-Specific Initiatives: Develop targeted policies for AI, deep tech, healthcare, and green technologies.

2. Expanding Funding Access

  • Encouraging Domestic Investment: Leverage pension and sovereign wealth funds to invest in startups.
  • Public-Private Partnerships: Foster large-scale government-industry collaboration to finance emerging ventures.
  • Decentralized Funding: Expand angel investor networks and micro-investment opportunities, particularly in Tier II and III cities.

3. Building Robust Infrastructure

  • Tech Parks and Incubation Centers: Establish state-of-the-art facilities with mentorship programs.
  • Improved Digital Connectivity: Ensure high-speed internet access in underserved regions.
  • Enhanced Logistics and Supply Chains: Strengthen infrastructure to support startup scalability.

4. Developing a Skilled Workforce

  • STEM and Entrepreneurial Education: Introduce curriculum enhancements in technical and business disciplines.
  • Upskilling Programs: Collaborate with industry leaders to train professionals in high-demand skills.
  • Diversity and Inclusion: Promote initiatives encouraging women and marginalized communities in entrepreneurship.

5. Fostering Innovation and Risk-Taking

  • Strengthened R&D Funding: Increase allocations to universities and private research sectors.
  • Encouraging Entrepreneurship: Reduce societal stigma surrounding startup failures to promote risk-taking.
  • Leveraging Domestic Challenges: Address local issues like climate change and urbanization through innovation.

6. Expanding Global Reach

  • International Collaborations: Partner with foreign accelerators and governments.
  • Ease of Cross-Border Trade: Simplify export and import regulations for startups.
  • Engaging the Indian Diaspora: Encourage successful overseas entrepreneurs to mentor and invest in Indian startups.

7. Advancing Sustainability Goals

  • Green Tech Promotion: Support startups focusing on renewable energy and circular economy initiatives.
  • Eco-Friendly Incentives: Offer financial support to ventures aligning with sustainability targets.
  • Inclusive Growth Strategies: Expand agritech, edtech, and health-tech startups in rural areas, supporting platforms like the Women Entrepreneurship Platform (WEP) by NITI Aayog.

Building a Resilient Digital Economy

To fortify India's digital economy, startups should leverage existing infrastructure like UPI and Aadhaar while capitalizing on emerging technologies such as AI, 5G, and blockchain. A robust cybersecurity framework and data protection policies will be essential to ensure investor confidence.

Genome India Project

  • 14 Jan 2025

In News:

The Genome India Project is an ambitious national initiative aimed at decoding the genetic diversity of India’s population. Launched in January 2020 by the Department of Biotechnology (DBT), the project seeks to create a comprehensive map of India’s genetic variations, offering insights that can revolutionize public health, medicine, and our understanding of human genetics.

What is Genome Sequencing?

Genome sequencing is the process of determining the complete DNA sequence of an organism’s genome. The human genome, composed of about 3 billion base pairs of DNA, contains all the genetic instructions necessary for the growth, development, and functioning of the human body. The process involves extracting DNA from a sample (often blood), breaking it into smaller fragments, and using a sequencer to decode these fragments. The data is then reassembled to reconstruct the full genome.

Key Aims and Objectives

The Genome India Project aims to address several crucial scientific and healthcare challenges:

  • Create an Exhaustive Catalog of Genetic Variations: This includes common, low-frequency, rare, and structural variations (such as Single Nucleotide Polymorphisms or SNPs).
  • Establish a Reference Haplotype Structure: This reference panel will be used for imputing missing genetic variations in future genetic studies.
  • Design Affordable Genome-wide Arrays: These arrays will be useful for research and diagnostics at a lower cost, making genetic analysis accessible.
  • Create a Biobank for Future Research: The collected DNA and plasma will be preserved for future studies to facilitate ongoing genetic research.

Genome India Project: Phase 1 and Key Findings

The project’s Phase 1 focused on sequencing the genomes of 10,074 individuals from 99 ethnic groups across India. This initiative provides a critical baseline for studying the country’s genetic diversity. Some of the key findings include:

  • 459 plant species have been identified as part of genetic diversity studies.
  • 135 million genetic variations have been uncovered, including 7 million that are unique to India, not found in global databases.
  • The project has revealed several genetic risks specific to Indian populations, such as the MYBPC3 mutation (linked to cardiac arrest) and the LAMB3 mutation (associated with a lethal skin condition), which are not commonly seen in global datasets.

This database will serve as a vital resource for researchers, contributing to the development of precision medicine, better disease diagnosis, and more personalized treatments.

Second Phase: Expanding the Scope

The second phase of the Genome India Project will focus on sequencing the genomes of individuals suffering from specific diseases. This will enable researchers to:

  • Compare the genomes of healthy individuals with those having diseases, helping identify genetic mutations responsible for conditions like cancer, diabetes, and neurodegenerative diseases.
  • Investigate rare diseases specific to Indian populations and develop therapies tailored to these conditions.

By sequencing the genomes of individuals with various conditions, the project aims to pinpoint genetic factors that contribute to the pre-disposition or causation of diseases.

Data Sharing and Security

To ensure data security and privacy, the genetic information will be made available only through managed access. Researchers interested in using the data will need to submit a proposal and collaborate with the Department of Biotechnology. The data will be stored securely at the Indian Biological Data Centre (IBDC) in Faridabad, Haryana, and anonymized to maintain confidentiality.

Why Does India Need Its Own Genetic Database?

India is home to a highly diverse population, with over 4,600 distinct ethnic groups and varying genetic backgrounds. The country’s genetic diversity, shaped by its geographical, cultural, and historical context, cannot be fully understood through datasets derived from other countries. The Genome India Project helps:

  • Identify Genetic Risk Factors: For various diseases, paving the way for developing targeted diagnostic tools and therapies.
  • Uncover Unique Variants: Some genetic mutations found in India, such as the Vaishya community’s resistance to anaesthetics, are absent in global databases.
  • Address Population-specific Health Issues: Genetic mapping enables the identification of prevalent diseases and health conditions specific to Indian populations.

Global Context and Comparison

India’s genome sequencing effort is part of a larger global movement in genomics:

  • Human Genome Project (2003): The first international effort to decode the human genome.
  • 1,000 Genome Project (2012): Published 1,092 human genome sequences.
  • UK 100,000 Genome Project (2018): Sequenced 100,000 genomes for health research.
  • European Genome Project: Aims to sequence over 1 million genomes across 24 countries.

The Genome India Project fills a crucial gap by focusing on the genetic diversity of Indian populations, which differs significantly from the genetic profiles studied in Western or European genomes.

Applications of Genome India Project

The Genome India Project has the potential to impact multiple areas:

  • Advancements in Medicine: Understanding genetic variations can lead to the development of personalized medicine, where treatments are tailored to individual genetic profiles.
  • Genetic and Infectious Disease Control: The project helps identify genetic resistance to diseases, and aids in understanding how certain populations may respond differently to drugs or vaccines.
  • Public Health Policies: Data from the project can inform health policies, especially in tackling diseases prevalent in specific regions or communities.
  • International Research Collaboration: The project aims to foster collaboration with global research communities, enhancing India’s presence in the field of genomics.

Conclusion:

The Genome India Project is a landmark initiative for India’s scientific community, enabling better understanding of the country’s genetic diversity and paving the way for breakthroughs in medicine, healthcare, and disease prevention. The ability to analyze genetic variations on such a large scale provides immense opportunities for precision medicine and personalized treatments.

Rat-hole mining

  • 13 Jan 2025

In News:

In Dima Hasao district of Assam, at least nine workers aged between 26 and 57 were trapped in a coal “rat-hole” mine after it was flooded with water. Three miners trapped in a flooded coal mine were confirmed dead, while six remained stuck. Later an Indian Navy team, including deep-sea divers, arrived at the site, where the water level inside the pit is 200 feet deep.

Key Takeaways:

  • Rat-hole mining is a method of extracting coal from narrow, horizontal seams, prevalent in Meghalaya. The term “rat hole” refers to the narrow pits dug into the ground, typically just large enough for one person to descend and extract coal.
  • Once the pits are dug, miners descend using ropes or bamboo ladders to reach the coal seams. The coal is then manually extracted using primitive tools such as pickaxes, shovels, and baskets.
  • Types of Rat-hole mining: 
    •  Side-cutting mining: In the side-cutting procedure, narrow tunnels are dug on the hill slopes and workers go inside until they find the coal seam. The coal seam in the hills of Meghalaya is very thin, less than 2 m in most cases.
    • Box-cutting mining: In the other type of rat-hole mining, called box-cutting, a rectangular opening is made, varying from 10 to 100 sqm, and through that a vertical pit is dug, 100 to 400 feet deep. Once the coal seam is found, rat-hole-sized tunnels are dug horizontally through which workers can extract the coal.
  • Concerns associated with Rat-hole mining: Rat-hole mining poses significant environmental and safety hazards. This method of mining has faced severe criticism due to its hazardous working conditions, and numerous accidents leading to injuries and fatalities.
  • The mines are typically unregulated, lacking safety measures such as proper ventilation, structural support, or safety gear for the workers. Additionally, the mining process can cause land degradation, deforestation, and water pollution. Despite attempts by authorities to regulate or ban such practices, they often persist due to economic factors and the absence of viable alternative livelihoods for the local population.
  • Notably, the National Green Tribunal (NGT) banned Rat-hole mining in 2014, and retained the ban in 2015, on grounds of it being unscientific and unsafe for workers. The order was in connection with Meghalaya, where this remained a prevalent procedure for coal mining. The state government then appealed the order in the Supreme Court.

Role of Rat-Hole Mining in Uttarkashi Tunnel Rescue

  • The rat-hole mining practice, banned for being unsafe, helped in the rescue operation of 41 workers trapped in the collapsed Silkyara-Barkot tunnel in Uttarakhand in 2023.
  • Rat-hole miners were called in after the auger machine that was drilling through the debris broke. Rescuers then tried cutting through the blade stuck inside the rescue pipes and removing it piece by piece. As large metal pieces hindered the machine drilling, the rescuers went ahead with rat-hole mining.
  • It was a test of grit and perseverance – for men on both sides of the 57 metres of debris – as the rescue operation suffered one setback after another. In the end, it was miners who dug through the last 12 metres and reached the trapped men.

Selection Process for Chief Election Commissioner (CEC)

  • 12 Jan 2025

In News:

The Chief Election Commissioner and Other Election Commissioners (Appointment, Conditions of Service and Term of Office) Act, 2023 represents a significant shift in the process of selecting the Chief Election Commissioner (CEC) and other Election Commissioners (ECs) in India. Traditionally, the senior-most Election Commissioner automatically ascended to the position of CEC. However, the new law introduced in December 2023 widens the scope for selection, allowing for a more transparent process with an expanded pool of candidates.

Key Features of the Act:

  • Election Commission Structure: The Election Commission of India is constituted by the Chief Election Commissioner (CEC) and two other Election Commissioners (ECs). The President of India appoints these members, with the number of ECs fixed periodically.
  • Appointment Process: The Act mandates that the CEC and ECs are appointed by the President based on recommendations from a Selection Committee. This committee comprises:
    • The Prime Minister (Chairperson),
    • The Leader of the Opposition in the Lok Sabha (or leader of the largest opposition party),
    • A Union Cabinet Minister appointed by the Prime Minister.
  • Search Committee: A Search Committee, chaired by the Minister of Law and Justice, prepares a panel of five candidates. The Selection Committee may choose from this panel or opt for someone outside of it.
  • Eligibility Criteria:
    • Candidates must have integrity and experience in election management.
    • They should be or have been Secretary-level officers or equivalent.
  • Term and Reappointment:
    • The term of CEC and ECs is six years or until they turn 65 years.
    • They cannot be re-appointed after their term.
  • Salary and Pension: The salary, allowances, and conditions of service of CEC and ECs are equivalent to those of a Cabinet Secretary.
  • Removal Process:
    • The CEC can be removed in the same manner as a Supreme Court Judge.
    • ECs can be removed only on the recommendation of the CEC.

Departure from Tradition:

Traditionally, the next CEC was the senior-most Election Commissioner. However, the new law opens the process, allowing the Search Committee to consider candidates outside the current pool of Election Commissioners. This widens the net and may lead to a more transparent and inclusive selection.

Concerns and Criticisms: While the Act aims to improve the selection process, it has faced scrutiny and concerns, particularly about the independence of the Election Commission:

  • Government Influence: The inclusion of the Leader of Opposition in the Selection Committee is a positive step, but critics argue that the final decision may still be influenced by the government. The government’s dominance in the Selection Committee could potentially affect the neutrality of the Commission.
  • Exclusion of the Chief Justice of India (CJI): The Supreme Court's 2023 ruling had recommended including the CJI in the committee, but the new Act excludes the CJI. This has raised concerns about the balance of power and the credibility of the Election Commission.
  • Risk of Partisanship: Former CEC O.P. Rawat expressed concerns that political changes might influence decisions, leading to a compromised credibility of the Election Commission.

Legal Challenges: Petitions challenging the exclusion of the CJI from the Selection Committee are currently pending before the Supreme Court, which is expected to address them in February 2025.

Historical Context and Legal Backdrop:

  • Article 324 of the Indian Constitution provides for the appointment of CEC and ECs by the President, but this is subject to laws passed by Parliament.
  • In 2023, the Supreme Court intervened in response to the growing concerns over the executive's unilateral control over these appointments. The Court's ruling in the Anoop Baranwal v. Union of India case led to the formation of a committee comprising the Prime Minister, Leader of Opposition, and CJI until Parliament could enact a law. This resulted in the Chief Election Commissioner and Other Election Commissioners Act, 2023, which was aligned with the Court's directions.

Implications and Way Forward:

  • Potential Government Influence: While the law aims to reduce executive control, the dominant role of the Prime Minister and the Leader of the Opposition could still allow the government to influence appointments, especially in contentious times.
  • Suggestions for Reform: The Law Commission had recommended a broader selection committee, including the CJI, to ensure a balanced and impartial selection process. The National Commission to Review the Working of the Constitution (NCRWC) also suggested a committee comprising key political figures, including the Leader of Opposition in the Rajya Sabha and the Speaker of Lok Sabha.
  • Integrity of the Election Commission: The credibility and impartiality of the Election Commission are vital for ensuring free and fair elections. It is crucial to ensure that the appointment process not only appears fair but is also free from political interference.

Conclusion:

The Chief Election Commissioner and Other Election Commissioners (Appointment, Conditions of Service and Term of Office) Act, 2023 introduces a reformed approach to the selection of the Election Commission members. While the law aims for greater transparency, it also raises concerns regarding government influence and independence. The Supreme Court’s review of the exclusion of the CJI from the Selection Committee will be pivotal in determining the future trajectory of the Election Commission’s appointment process. The evolving legal and institutional dynamics will play a significant role in shaping the electoral reforms in India.

Unified District Information System for Education Plus (UDISE+) Report

  • 10 Jan 2025

In News:

The Unified District Information System for Education Plus (UDISE+) report for 2023-24 reveals a significant decline in school enrolment across India, highlighting critical challenges in the education sector. The total enrolment in grades 1-12 fell by over 1.55 crore students, from 26.36 crore (2018-2022 average) to 24.8 crore in 2023-24. This represents a 6% drop, with the biggest declines occurring in government schools.

Key Findings:

  • Enrolment Decline:
    • In 2023-24, enrolment decreased from 25.17 crore in 2022-23 to 24.8 crore.
    • The drop was not only in government schools (5.59%) but also in private schools (3.67%).
    • States like Bihar, Uttar Pradesh, and Maharashtra saw the largest decreases.
    • The decline in enrolment is despite an increase in the number of schools, from 14.66 lakh in 2022 to 14.72 lakh in 2023.
  • Methodology Change:
    • A significant change in the data collection methodology occurred in 2022-23, including linking enrolment to Aadhaar numbers, aimed at reducing data duplication.
    • While this has improved data accuracy, it has also led to the removal of inflated figures, explaining part of the enrolment drop.
    • Despite these changes, there has been a notable decline of 37 lakh students from 2022-23 to 2023-24, which remains unexplained in the report.
  • Gender and Age Trends:
    • Boys’ enrolment declined by 6.04%, and girls’ by 5.76%, reflecting a uniform drop across gender groups.
    • The dropout rates increase as students progress through school, with the highest dropout at the secondary level.
  • Infrastructure and Facilities:
    • While most schools have basic facilities like electricity and gender-specific toilets, advanced infrastructure like functional computers (57%) and internet access (53%) is lacking in nearly half of schools.
    • This technological gap exacerbates regional disparities and affects educational quality, particularly in rural areas.
  • State-Specific Impact:
    • Jammu and Kashmir, Assam, Uttar Pradesh, and Madhya Pradesh saw the highest reductions in the number of schools.
    • Many school closures or mergers have led to increased distances for students, causing further dropouts during re-admission processes.

Socio-Economic Barriers:

  • Economic hardships, migration, and inadequate facilities contribute to the enrolment decline.
  • Low-income families and backward regions struggle to prioritize education, further affecting enrolment and retention.

Government Initiatives:

  • Initiatives like the National Education Policy (NEP) 2020, Sarva Shiksha Abhiyan, and Right to Education Act (RTE) have made strides in primary education but face challenges in secondary education.
  • Education spending has hovered around 4-4.6% of GDP, which is insufficient to meet the needs of the education system.

Moving Forward:

  • Targeted Interventions: Focus on expanding vocational training, incentivizing school attendance, and improving digital infrastructure in schools.
  • Address Regional Disparities: Conduct audits to address school shortages in densely populated areas and consolidate underutilized urban schools.
  • Enhancing Teacher Quality: Invest in teacher training and encourage innovative teaching methods.
  • Community Engagement: Promote local participation in school management to address specific educational needs.

Conclusion:

The UDISE+ 2023-24 report underscores the need for urgent reforms in India's education system, focusing on increasing enrolment, reducing dropout rates, and ensuring equitable access to quality education. By addressing these challenges with targeted policies, India can move closer to achieving its educational goals.

Why Farmers Deserve Price Security

  • 11 Jan 2025

Introduction:

The future of Indian agriculture is at a crossroads. With the shrinking of the agricultural workforce and the diversion of fertile farmlands for urbanization, ensuring the sustainability of farming is a strategic imperative. Among the various support mechanisms for farmers, the Minimum Support Price (MSP) remains a central point of debate. Should there be a legal guarantee for MSP? This question has gained prominence, especially with the rising challenges in agriculture, from unpredictable climate patterns to volatile market prices.

The Decline of Agriculture and Its Impact

India’s agricultural sector faces a dual crisis: loss of both land and human resources. Prime agricultural lands across river basins, such as the Ganga-Yamuna Doab or the Krishna-Godavari delta, are being repurposed for real estate, infrastructure, and industrial projects. Additionally, the number of "serious farmers" – those deriving at least half of their income from agriculture – is dwindling. The number of operational holdings may be 146.5 million, but only a small fraction of these farmers remains committed to agriculture.

This decline threatens the future of India’s food security, as the country will need to feed a population of 1.7 billion by the 2060s. To sustain farming and ensure long-term food security, we must secure farmers' livelihoods. Price security, particularly through MSP, plays a crucial role in this context.

The Role of MSP in Securing Farmers

MSP is the government-mandated price at which it guarantees the purchase of crops if market prices fall below a certain threshold. It provides a safety net for farmers against price volatility. The process of fixing MSP involves recommendations by the Commission for Agricultural Costs and Prices (CACP), which takes into account factors such as the cost of production and market trends. Once approved by the Cabinet Committee on Economic Affairs (CCEA), MSP is set for various crops, including rice, wheat, and sugarcane.

For farmers to stay in business, there must be a balance between production costs and returns. Farming is a risky business – yield losses can occur due to weather anomalies, pest attacks, or other natural factors. However, price risks can be mitigated with a guaranteed MSP. This would encourage farmers to invest in their land and adopt modern farming technologies, which would boost productivity and reduce costs.

Arguments for and Against Legal MSP Guarantee

Supporters of a legal MSP guarantee argue that it would provide financial security to farmers, protecting them from unpredictable market conditions. It would also promote crop diversification, encourage farmers to shift from water-intensive crops to those less dependent on irrigation, and inject resources into rural economies, thus addressing distress in rural areas.

However, critics highlight several challenges with a legal guarantee for MSP. The most significant concern is the fiscal burden it would impose on the government, potentially reaching Rs. 5 trillion. Furthermore, such a system could distort market dynamics, discouraging private traders and leading to a situation where the government becomes the primary buyer of agricultural produce. This could be economically unsustainable, especially for crops with low yields. Additionally, legal MSP guarantees could violate World Trade Organization (WTO) subsidy principles, adversely impacting India’s agricultural exports.

The Way Forward: A Balanced Approach

Given the challenges associated with a legal MSP guarantee, alternative measures should be explored. Price Deficiency Payment (PDP) schemes, such as those implemented in Madhya Pradesh and Haryana, could be expanded at the national level. These schemes compensate farmers for the difference between market prices and MSP, ensuring price security without the fiscal burden of procurement.

Additionally, the government can focus on improving agricultural infrastructure, such as cold storage facilities, to help farmers better access markets and increase price realization. Supporting Farmer Producer Organizations (FPOs) could also help farmers by enhancing collective bargaining power and ensuring better prices for their produce. Moreover, gradual expansion of MSP coverage to include a wider range of crops would encourage diversification, reducing the dominance of rice and wheat.

River Interlinking: Environmental Disaster or Solution?

  • 09 Jan 2025

Overview of the River Interlinking Concept

The concept of river interlinking in India traces its origins to the 19th century, when Sir Arthur Cotton first proposed inter-basin water transfer to address irrigation issues. Over time, this idea was refined by other experts. It evolved into the National Water Grid and, later, the River-Interlinking Project (ILR) under the Ministry of Water Resources. The goal is to transfer surplus water from rivers to drought-prone areas, aiming for water security, irrigation, and power generation.

Key Projects and Initiatives

  • Ken-Betwa River Link Project (KBLP): Launched in December 2024, the KBLP will link the water-surplus Ken River with the drought-stricken Betwa River. It aims to irrigate over 10 lakh hectares, supply drinking water to 62 lakh people, and generate hydropower and solar power. However, concerns over the environmental impact of building a dam within the Panna Tiger Reserve have been raised.
  • National River Linking Project (NRLP): The NRLP, formally known as the National Perspective Plan, is an ambitious proposal that includes 30 river links—14 Himalayan and 16 Peninsular—to connect India's rivers and create a giant South Asian Water Grid.

Benefits of Interlinking Rivers

  • Flood and Drought Mitigation: Redistributing water from surplus areas to drought-prone regions, such as Bundelkhand, will reduce the severity of floods and droughts.
  • Agriculture and Irrigation: Expanding irrigation systems across 35 million hectares of land could significantly boost agricultural productivity and food security.
  • Hydropower Generation: The interlinking project has the potential to generate up to 34 GW of hydropower, contributing to India's renewable energy targets.
  • Economic Growth: Improving water availability can boost industries, provide drinking water, and support economic development in underdeveloped regions.
  • Inland Waterways: The project will also contribute to the expansion of inland waterways, benefiting trade and reducing transportation costs.

Challenges and Concerns

  • Environmental Impact:
    • Biodiversity Loss: Projects like the Ken-Betwa project raise alarms about the destruction of ecologically sensitive areas, such as the Panna Tiger Reserve.
    • River Ecosystem Disruption: Altering natural river courses can harm aquatic life, disrupt deltaic ecosystems, and degrade water quality. For instance, the Sardar Sarovar Dam's impact on the Narmada river system shows the long-term consequences of such projects.
    • Pollution: The mixing of cleaner and more polluted rivers could exacerbate water contamination issues.
  • Social and Financial Costs:
    • Displacement: Large-scale interlinking projects will displace millions, especially marginalized communities and indigenous people, and disturb local livelihoods.
    • High Financial Burden: The total estimated cost of the NRLP is ?5.5 lakh crore, which does not include environmental rehabilitation costs or the long-term maintenance of the infrastructure.
  • Climate Change: Predictions suggest that climate change could affect river flows and the availability of surplus water. This might render the interlinking project ineffective in the long term.
  • Inter-State Conflicts: Water-sharing disputes, like the long-standing issues over the Cauvery and Krishna rivers, could intensify with more interlinking projects.
  • Infrastructural Challenges: Maintaining vast canal networks and reservoirs, managing sedimentation, and acquiring land for construction are logistical hurdles.

Alternative Approaches and Solutions

  • Efficient Water Management:
    • Integrated Watershed Management: Implementing a comprehensive approach to manage existing water resources can reduce the need for large-scale river transfers.
    • Groundwater Recharge: Focusing on efficient groundwater management by identifying recharge mechanisms and regulating water use is crucial for sustainability.
  • Modern Irrigation Techniques:
    • Drip Irrigation: Israel’s success with drip irrigation, which reduces water use by 25%-75%, provides an example of how modern technologies can save significant amounts of water.
  • Virtual Water: Emphasizing the import of water-intensive goods (like wheat) could save local water resources, which would otherwise be used for domestic agriculture.
  • National Waterways Project (NWP): An alternative to the interlinking project, NWP aims to improve water management by creating navigation channels that double as water distribution networks with a fraction of the land use.

Way Forward

  • Comprehensive Impact Assessments: The need for multidisciplinary studies to evaluate the environmental, social, and economic impacts of river interlinking projects cannot be overstated. Stakeholder engagement is crucial for equitable decision-making.
  • Sustainable Water Policies: A national water policy should prioritize sustainable water practices, focusing on local solutions, such as water harvesting, watershed management, and smart irrigation.
  • Focus on Regional Solutions: Smaller, state-specific projects should be prioritized to address water scarcity issues without triggering large-scale environmental degradation.

The Impact of Climate Change on Earth’s Water Cycle

  • 08 Jan 2025

In News:

Climate change is significantly affecting Earth's water cycle, leading to extreme weather events such as intense floods and prolonged droughts. According to the 2024 Global Water Monitor Report, this disruption is increasingly evident, as seen in the devastating weather patterns experienced worldwide in 2024. The report, based on data from international researchers, highlights how these changes are directly linked to rising global temperatures and the resulting shifts in precipitation patterns.

Understanding the Water Cycle

The water cycle is the continuous movement of water in various forms—solid, liquid, and gas—throughout the Earth's atmosphere, land, and bodies of water. This cycle involves processes such as:

  • Evaporation: Water from the surface of oceans, lakes, and rivers turns into vapor.
  • Transpiration: Water is absorbed by plants from the soil and released as vapor.
  • Precipitation: Water vapor condenses into clouds and falls as rain or snow, replenishing the Earth's surface.
  • Runoff and Infiltration: Precipitation either flows into rivers or infiltrates the soil, contributing to groundwater.

The water cycle is vital for maintaining the planet’s ecosystems, regulating weather patterns, and providing water for all living organisms. However, climate change is intensifying these natural processes, with far-reaching consequences.

Impact of Climate Change on the Water Cycle

As global temperatures rise, climate change is having a profound impact on the water cycle. Warmer temperatures lead to:

  • Increased evaporation: As air temperatures soar, more water evaporates into the atmosphere. For every 1°C rise in temperature, the atmosphere can hold about 7% more moisture, which exacerbates storms and increases the intensity of rainfall.
  • More intense precipitation: With more moisture in the atmosphere, storms have become more intense, leading to severe flooding in various regions.
  • Increased droughts: Warmer air also dries out the soil. This reduces the amount of water available for crops and plants, while also increasing the evaporation rate from soil, leading to longer and more intense droughts.

This disruption of the water cycle is already causing erratic weather patterns, as some regions face severe droughts, while others are experiencing extreme rainfall and floods.

Key Findings from the 2024 Global Water Monitor Report

The 2024 report presents several alarming statistics that highlight the growing impact of climate change on the water cycle:

  • Water-related disasters: In 2024, these disasters caused over 8,700 fatalities, displaced 40 million people, and resulted in economic losses exceeding $550 billion globally.
  • Dry months: There were 38% more record-dry months in 2024 than the baseline period (1995-2005), underlining the growing frequency of droughts.
  • Intense rainfall: Record-breaking rainfall occurred 27% more frequently in 2024 compared to 2000, with daily rainfall records set 52% more often. This shows the growing intensity of precipitation events.
  • Terrestrial water storage (TWS): Many dry regions faced ongoing low TWS levels, reflecting the scarcity of water in these areas, while some regions, such as parts of Africa, saw an increase in water storage.
  • Future predictions: Droughts may worsen in regions like northern South America, southern Africa, and parts of Asia, while areas like the Sahel and Europe could experience increased flood risks in the coming years.

Conclusion

The findings of the 2024 report underscore the alarming impact of climate change on the global water cycle. As temperatures continue to rise, we can expect more frequent and severe weather events, including extreme flooding and devastating droughts. These changes will affect billions of people worldwide, highlighting the urgent need for action to mitigate climate change and adapt to its consequences. Addressing this challenge requires global cooperation to reduce emissions, enhance water management systems, and protect vulnerable regions from the intensifying effects of climate change.

Implications of China’s Mega-Dam Project on the Brahmaputra River Basin

  • 07 Jan 2025

Introduction:

China has approved the construction of the Yarlung Tsangpo hydropower project, the world's largest hydropower project, with a capacity of 60,000 MW, on the Brahmaputra River in Tibet. This mega-dam, located at the Great Bend in Medog county, has significant geopolitical, environmental, and socio-economic implications for India, Bhutan, and Bangladesh, the downstream riparian countries.

Geographical and Geopolitical Context:

  • The Brahmaputra is a transboundary river system flowing through China, India, Bhutan, and Bangladesh.
  • China, located at the river’s source in Tibet, is the uppermost riparian nation, controlling water flow into India and Bangladesh.
  • All riparian countries, including China, India, Bhutan, and Bangladesh, have proposed major water infrastructure projects in the river basin, which has become a site for geopolitical rivalry, with mega-dams symbolizing sovereignty.

China’s Hydropower Ambitions:

  • The Yarlung Tsangpo project is part of China’s 14th Five-Year Plan (2021-2025) and aims to address the country's energy needs while moving towards net carbon neutrality by 2060.
  • The river's steep descent from Tibet provides an ideal location for hydroelectricity generation.
  • China’s previous mega-projects, like the Three Gorges Dam, highlight the scale of these ambitions but also raise concerns about environmental and social consequences, including ecosystem disruption, displacement, and seismic risks.

Impact on Downstream Communities:

  • Water Flow and Agriculture: China’s mega-dam may significantly alter water flow to India, particularly affecting agriculture and water availability in the northeastern regions. India, reliant on the Brahmaputra for irrigation and drinking water, could face disruptions.
  • Silt and Biodiversity: The blocking of silt essential for agriculture could degrade soil quality and damage biodiversity in the river basin.
  • Seismic Risks: The region’s seismic activity, coupled with the construction of large dams, heightens the risk of catastrophic events such as landslides and Glacial Lake Outburst Floods (GLOFs), which have previously caused devastation in the Himalayas.

Hydropower Competition Between China and India:

  • Both China and India are competing to harness the Brahmaputra's potential for hydropower, with India planning its own large project at Upper Siang.
  • Bhutan has also proposed several medium-sized dams, raising concerns in downstream countries about cumulative impacts.
  • No comprehensive bilateral treaty exists between India and China to regulate shared transboundary rivers, though they have mechanisms for data sharing and discussions on river issues.

Environmental and Regional Concerns:

  • The Brahmaputra river basin is an ecologically sensitive region. The construction of large dams threatens the fragile ecosystem, including agro-pastoral communities, biodiversity, and wetlands.
  • Tibet’s river systems are vital for the global cryosphere, affecting climate systems, including monsoon patterns. Disruption to these systems could have broader implications for regional and global climate stability.

Challenges in Bilateral Cooperation:

  • India and China have struggled with effective coordination on river management. China has shown reluctance to share critical hydrological data, a concern amplified by the lack of a binding agreement.
  • The ongoing geopolitical tensions between the two countries, particularly over the border dispute, further complicate cooperation on transboundary water issues.

Recommendations for India:

  • Enhanced Cooperation: India should push for renewed agreements and mechanisms for real-time data exchange with China to prevent ecological and socio-economic damage.
  • Public Challenges: India needs to challenge China’s claims that its hydropower projects will have minimal downstream impact, ensuring that India's concerns are addressed in international forums.
  • Diplomatic Engagement: Water issues should be prioritized in India’s diplomatic engagement with China, emphasizing the importance of transparency and cooperation to ensure mutual benefit and regional stability.

Conclusion:

The Yarlung Tsangpo mega-dam project poses significant risks to the entire Brahmaputra river basin. A collaborative approach, involving transparent dialogue and cooperation among riparian countries, is essential to mitigate the potential adverse impacts on downstream communities and the fragile Himalayan ecosystem.

NITI Aayog Celebrates 10 Years

  • 06 Jan 2025

In News:

  • NITI Aayog, the National Institution for Transforming India, completed its 10th anniversary on January 1, 2025.
  • Established to replace the Planning Commission, NITI Aayog was designed to address contemporary challenges such as sustainable development, innovation, and decentralization in a dynamic, market-driven economy.

About NITI Aayog

Establishment and Mandate

  • Formation: Created through a Union Cabinet resolution in 2015.
  • Primary Mandates:
    • Overseeing the adoption and monitoring of the Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs).
    • Promoting competitive and cooperative federalism between States and Union Territories.

Composition

  • Chairperson: Prime Minister of India.
  • Governing Council: Includes Chief Ministers (CMs) of all States and UTs, Lt. Governors, the Vice Chairperson, full-time members, and special invitees.
  • CEO: Appointed by the PM for a fixed tenure.

Key Achievements

Policy Advisory and Decentralized Governance

  • Shifted focus from financial allocation to policy advisory roles.
  • Promoted decentralized governance through data-driven initiatives like the SDG India Index and the Composite Water Management Index.

Innovative Initiatives

  • Aspirational Blocks Programme (2023): Focused on 500 underdeveloped blocks for 100% coverage of government schemes.
  • Atal Innovation Mission (AIM): Trained over 1 crore students through Atal Tinkering Labs and incubation centres.
  • Initiatives like e-Mobility, Green Hydrogen, and the Production-Linked Incentive (PLI) Scheme were conceptualized to drive innovation and sustainability.

Role and Functions of NITI Aayog

Strategic Advice and Federal Cooperation

  • Provides policy formulation and strategic advice to both central and state governments.
  • Fosters cooperative federalism by encouraging collaboration between the central and state governments.

Monitoring and Evaluation

  • Plays a crucial role in monitoring and evaluating policies and programs to ensure alignment with long-term goals.

Promoting Innovation and SDGs

  • NITI Aayog contributes to aligning national development programs with the Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs), focusing on innovation, research, and technology in critical sectors.

Key Differences Between Planning Commission and NITI Aayog

Aspect                                            Planning Commission                                                                                                              NITI Aayog

Purpose                                         Centralized planning and resource allocation.                                                Focus on cooperative federalism and policy research.

Structure                                       Led by the PM, with Deputy Chairman and full-time members.                   Led by the PM, with Vice-Chairperson, CEO, and Governing Council.

Approach                                      Top-down, centralized.                                                                                   Bottom-up, encouraging state participation.

Role in Governance                     Executive authority over policies.                                                                  Advisory body without enforcement power.

Five-Year Plans                            Formulated and implemented.                                                                        Focus on long-term development, no Five-Year Plans.

Challenges Faced by NITI Aayog

  • Limited Executive Power: Lacks authority to enforce its recommendations, restricting its influence.
  • Coordination Issues: Achieving effective collaboration between central and state governments remains challenging.
  • Data Gaps: Inconsistent state-level data hampers accurate policymaking and evaluation.
  • Resource Constraints: Limited resources hinder full implementation of initiatives.
  • Resistance to Change: Some states resist NITI Aayog's initiatives due to concerns over autonomy and alignment with local needs.

Future Vision and Planning

  • Agenda for 2030: Focus on achieving the Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs) in areas like poverty alleviation, education, healthcare, clean energy, and gender equality.
  • Vision for 2035: NITI Aayog's 15-year vision document aims for sustainable, inclusive growth, with an emphasis on economic growth, social equity, and environmental sustainability.
  • Innovation and Digitalization: Promotes digitalization and innovation through data-driven policymaking and regional focus on tribal and hilly areas.

Conclusion: Reflections on the First Decade

  • Despite significant achievements, NITI Aayog’s influence remains limited by its advisory role and resource constraints.
  • The shift away from centralized planning, evident since the dissolution of the Planning Commission, has sparked debate about the effectiveness of such a model in ensuring long-term development and inclusive growth.

Draft Digital Personal Data Protection Rules, 2025

  • 05 Jan 2025

In News:

The Government of India has introduced the long-awaited draft Digital Personal Data Protection Rules, 2025 to operationalize the Digital Personal Data Protection Act, 2023. These rules contain several significant provisions, including the controversial reintroduction of data localisation requirements, provisions for children's data protection, and measures to strengthen data fiduciaries' responsibilities.

This development holds substantial implications for both Indian citizens' data privacy and global tech companies, especially with respect to compliance, security measures, and data processing.

Data Localisation Mandates

Key Provision: The draft rules propose that certain types of personal and traffic data must be stored within India. Specifically, "significant data fiduciaries", a category that will include large tech firms such as Meta, Google, Apple, Microsoft, and Amazon, will be restricted from transferring certain data outside India.

  • Committee Oversight: A government-appointed committee will define which types of personal data cannot be transferred abroad, based on factors like national security, sovereignty, and public order.
  • Localisation Re-entry: This provision brings back data localisation, a contentious issue previously removed from the 2023 Data Protection Act after heavy lobbying by tech companies.
  • Impact on Big Tech: Companies like Meta and Google had previously voiced concerns that strict localisation rules could hinder their ability to offer services in India, with Google arguing for narrowly tailored data localisation norms.

Role and Responsibilities of Data Fiduciaries

Key Provision: The rules lay out a clear framework for data fiduciaries, defined as entities that collect and process personal data.

  • Significant Data Fiduciaries (SDFs): This subcategory will include entities that process large volumes of sensitive data, such as health and financial data. These companies will be held to higher standards of compliance and security.
  • Data Retention: Personal data can only be stored for as long as consent is valid; after which, it must be deleted.
  • Security Measures: Data fiduciaries must implement stringent measures such as encryption, access control, unauthorized access monitoring, and data backups.

Parental Consent for Children's Data

Key Provision: The draft rules include provisions aimed at protecting children's data, including mechanisms to ensure verifiable parental consent before children under 18 can use online platforms.

  • Verification Process: Platforms must verify the identity of parents or guardians using government-issued identification or digital locker services.
  • Exceptions: Health, mental health institutions, educational establishments, and daycare centers will be exempted from needing parental consent.

Data Breach Reporting and Penalties

Key Provision: In the event of a data breach, data fiduciaries are required to notify affected individuals without delay, detailing the breach's nature, potential consequences, and mitigation measures. Failure to comply with breach safeguards can result in penalties.

  • Penalties for Non-Compliance: Entities that fail to adequately protect data or prevent breaches could face fines of up to Rs 250 crore.
  • Breach Notification: The rules mandate timely reporting of all breaches, whether minor or major, and an emphasis on transparency in the breach notification process.

Safeguards for Government Data Processing

Key Provision: The draft rules seek to ensure that the government and its agencies process citizen data in a lawful manner with adequate safeguards in place.

  • Exemptions for National Security and Public Order: The rules also address concerns that the government may process data without adequate checks by stipulating lawful processing and protections when data is used for national security, foreign relations, or public order.

Compliance Challenges for Businesses

Key Challenges: The introduction of these rules will impose several challenges for businesses, particularly tech companies:

  • Consent Management: Companies will need to implement robust systems to handle consent records, allowing users to withdraw consent at any time. This will require significant infrastructure changes.
  • Data Infrastructure Overhaul: Organizations will need to invest in data collection, storage, and lifecycle management systems to ensure compliance.
  • Security Standards: Experts have raised concerns about the vagueness of certain security standards, which could lead to inconsistent implementation across sectors.

Penalties and Enforcement

Key Provisions:

  • Penalties for Non-Compliance: Entities failing to adhere to the rules may face significant financial penalties, including fines up to Rs 250 crore for serious breaches.
  • Repeat Violations: Consent managers who repeatedly violate rules could have their registration suspended or cancelled.

Conclusion:

The Digital Personal Data Protection Rules, 2025 bring important changes to India’s data privacy framework, particularly the reintroduction of data localisation and more stringent requirements for data fiduciaries. These rules aim to strengthen citizen privacy and ensure greater accountability from businesses. However, the challenges in compliance, especially for global tech firms, and the potential impact on service delivery, will need to be closely monitored as the final rules take shape.

Government Extends Special Subsidy on DAP

  • 03 Jan 2025

In News:

The Indian government has decided to extend the special subsidy on Di-Ammonium Phosphate (DAP) fertilizer for another year, a decision aimed at stabilizing farmgate prices and addressing the challenges posed by the depreciation of the Indian rupee.

Key Government Decision

  • Extension of Subsidy: The Centre has extended the Rs 3,500 per tonne special subsidy on DAP from January 1, 2025 to December 31, 2025.
  • Objective: This extension aims to contain farmgate price surges of DAP, India’s second most-consumed fertilizer, which is being impacted by the fall in the rupee's value against the US dollar.

Fertilizer Price Dynamics and Impact

  • MRP Caps on Fertilizers: Despite the decontrol of non-urea fertilizers, the government has frozen the maximum retail price (MRP) for these products.
    • Current MRPs:
      • DAP: Rs 1,350 per 50-kg bag
      • Complex fertilizers: Rs 1,300 to Rs 1,600 per 50-kg bag depending on composition.
  • Subsidy on DAP: The subsidy includes Rs 21,911 per tonne on DAP, plus the Rs 3,500 one-time special package.
  • Impact of Currency Depreciation:
    • The rupee's depreciation has made imported fertilizers significantly more expensive.
      • The landed price of DAP has increased from Rs 52,960 per tonne to Rs 54,160 due to the rupee falling from Rs 83.8 to Rs 85.7 against the dollar.
      • Including additional costs (customs, port handling, insurance, etc.), the total cost of imported DAP is now Rs 65,000 per tonne, making imports unviable without further subsidy or MRP adjustments.

Industry Concerns and Viability Issues

  • Import Viability:
    • Fertilizer companies face significant cost pressures due to rising import prices and the current MRP caps.
    • Without an increase in government subsidies or approval to revise MRPs upwards, imports will be unviable.
    • Even with the extended subsidy, companies estimate a Rs 1,500 per tonne shortfall due to currency depreciation.
  • Stock Levels and Supply Challenges:
    • Current stock levels for DAP (9.2 lakh tonnes) and complex fertilizers (23.7 lakh tonnes) are below last year's levels.
    • With inadequate imports, there are concerns about fertilizer supply for the upcoming kharif season (June-July 2025).

Government’s Strategy and Fiscal Implications

  • Compensation for Imports:
    • In September 2024, the government approved compensation for DAP imports above a benchmark price of $559.71 per tonne, based on an exchange rate of Rs 83.23 to the dollar.
    • With the rupee falling below Rs 85.7, these previous compensation calculations have become outdated.
  • Fiscal Impact:
    • The extended subsidy will cost the government an additional Rs 6,475 crore. Despite this, political implications of raising the MRP are minimal, as only non-major agricultural states are facing elections in 2025.

Future Outlook and Priorities

  • Immediate Priority: The government’s primary concern is securing adequate fertilizer stocks for the kharif season, focusing on ensuring sufficient imports of both finished fertilizers and raw materials.
  • Balancing Factors: The government will need to navigate the complex balance of maintaining fertilizer affordability for farmers, ensuring the viability of fertilizer companies, and managing fiscal constraints.

As the subsidy extension is implemented, all eyes will be on the government's ability to ensure a stable supply of fertilizers while safeguarding both farmer interests and economic sustainability in the face of an increasingly challenging exchange rate environment.

Caste-Based Discrimination in Prisons

  • 02 Jan 2025

In News:

The Union Ministry of Home Affairs has recently introduced significant revisions to the Model Prison Manual, 2016, and the Model Prisons and Correctional Services Act, 2023. These changes aim to eliminate caste-based discrimination in Indian prisons and establish a standardized approach to defining and treating habitual offenders across the country.

Background

In October 2024, the Supreme Court of India expressed concerns over the persistence of caste-based discrimination within prisons and the lack of consistency in how habitual offenders are classified. In response, the Court instructed the government to amend prison regulations to promote equality and fairness. The newly introduced reforms are in line with the Court's directives and focus on aligning prison practices with constitutional principles.

Addressing Caste-Based Discrimination in Prisons

The recent amendments take specific steps to combat caste-based discrimination within correctional facilities:

  • Ban on Discrimination: Prison authorities are now mandated to ensure there is no caste-based segregation or bias. All work assignments and duties will be distributed impartially among inmates.
  • Legal Provision Against Discrimination: A new clause, Section 55(A), titled "Prohibition of Caste-Based Discrimination in Prisons and Correctional Institutions", has been added to the Model Act, establishing a formal legal framework to address caste discrimination.
  • Manual Scavenging Ban: The amendments extend the provisions of the Prohibition of Employment as Manual Scavengers and their Rehabilitation Act, 2013 to include prisons, prohibiting the degrading practice of manual scavenging or any hazardous cleaning within correctional facilities.

Redefining Habitual Offenders

The updated amendments also standardize the classification and treatment of habitual offenders, in accordance with the Supreme Court’s directions:

  • Uniform Definition: A habitual offender is now officially defined as an individual convicted and sentenced to imprisonment for two or more separate offences within a continuous five-year period, provided the sentences were not overturned on appeal or review. Importantly, time spent in jail under sentence is excluded from this five-year period.
  • National Consistency: States that do not have specific Habitual Offender Acts must amend their laws within three months to ensure consistency with the new national framework.

Importance of the Reforms

  • Promoting Equality: These amendments seek to uphold the constitutional rights of prisoners, ensuring that all individuals, regardless of caste or background, are treated equally and with dignity.
  • Eliminating Degrading Practices: The extension of the manual scavenging prohibition to prisons is a vital step in eliminating degrading and inhumane practices, ensuring a more humane environment for prisoners.
  • Uniform Framework: The establishment of a standardized definition of habitual offenders ensures a consistent approach in handling repeat offenders across all states, reducing the possibility of arbitrary classifications.

Conclusion

The reforms introduced by the Union Home Ministry mark a significant milestone in India’s prison reform journey. By addressing caste-based discrimination and standardizing the classification of habitual offenders, these amendments reaffirm the country’s commitment to human rights and the rule of law. These changes not only improve the conditions within prisons but also set the stage for future reforms aimed at creating a fairer and more equitable correctional system.

Arvind Panagariya to Head 16th Finance Commission (ET)

  • 01 Jan 2024

Why is it in the News?

The government appointed former NITI Aayog Vice-Chairman Arvind Panagariya Chairman of the 16th Finance Commission, which will recommend the tax revenue sharing formula between the Centre and States for the five-year period beginning April 2026.

Constitution of the 16th Finance Commission:

  • The Government of India, with the approval of the President of India, has constituted the 16th Finance Commission, in pursuance to Article 280(1) of the Constitution.
  • Dr Arvind Panagariya, former Vice-Chairman, of NITI Aayog, and Professor, at Columbia University will be the Chairman.
  • Members of the 16th Finance Commission would be notified separately.
  • Shri Ritvik Ranjanam Pandey has been appointed as Secretary to the Commission.
  • The 16th Finance Commission shall make recommendations as to the following matters, namely:
  • The distribution between the Union and the States of the net proceeds of taxes which are to be, or maybe, divided between them under Chapter I, Part XII of the Constitution and the allocation between the States of the respective shares of such proceeds;
  • The principles which should govern the grants-in-aid of the revenues of the States out of the Consolidated Fund of India and the sums to be paid to the States by way of grants-in-aid of their revenues under Article 275 of the Constitution for the purposes other than those specified in the provisos to clause (1) of that article; and
  • The measures needed to augment the Consolidated Fund of a State to supplement the resources of the Panchayats and Municipalities in the State on the basis of the recommendations made by the Finance Commission of the State.
  • The 16th Finance Commission may review the present arrangements on financing Disaster Management initiatives, with reference to the funds constituted under the Disaster Management Act, 2005 (53 of 2005), and make appropriate recommendations thereon.
  • The 16th Finance Commission has been requested to make its report available by the 31st day of October 2025 covering a period of five years commencing on the 1st day of April 2026.

15h Finance Commission Recommendations (Effective from 2021 to 2026):

  • Tax Proceeds Allocation: The Commission advocates for an equitable distribution of tax proceeds between the central government and states, fostering a well-balanced fiscal sharing mechanism.
  • Assessment of GST Impact: The FC underscores the importance of analyzing the impact of the Goods and Services Tax (GST) on the economy.
  • This evaluation aims to comprehend the implications of GST implementation across various sectors.
  • Performance-Linked Incentives: Proposed incentives are tied to states' efforts in addressing key issues like population control, ease of doing business, and other pertinent factors.
  • Financial Assistance to States: The FC suggests the provision of revenue deficit grants, grants to local bodies, and disaster management grants to states.
  • These grants are intended to bolster the financial requirements of the states and promote effective governance.

Proposed Recommendations for the 16th Finance Commission:

  • Review of the 2018 Amendment to the Centre’s FRBM: This proposal aligns with the suggestion made by the 15th Finance Commission.
  • In the fiscal year 2020-21, the combined debt-GDP ratio of the central and state governments reached 89.8%.
  • While these figures have started declining, they remain significantly higher than the corresponding Fiscal Responsibility and Budget Management (FRBM) norms of 40% and 20% established in the 2018 amendment.
  • With the Centre’s fiscal deficit at 9.2% of GDP and that of states at 4.1% in 2020-21, it becomes imperative to re-examine the 2018 amendment to the Centre’s FRBM, especially considering the deviations from established norms.
  • Limiting Freebies: Some state governments exhibit relatively higher debt and fiscal deficit figures compared to their Gross State Domestic Products (GSDPs).
  • Two primary concerns arise in this context: the widespread distribution of subsidies and the reintroduction of the previous pension scheme in states without a clear identification of funding sources and the resultant fiscal burdens.
  • Often, these subsidies are financed by increasing the fiscal deficit. While advocating for safety nets for the poor is essential in a country facing economic challenges, a prudent approach is crucial.
  • The next Finance Commission should provide explicit guidelines to ensure long-term fiscal sustainability and responsible spending on gratuities.

Freebies Must Be Restricted Through Reform:

  • An innovative approach to address this issue is the establishment of a loan council, as suggested by the 12th Finance Commission.
  • This independent body would monitor the scale and profiles of loans taken by both the central and state governments.
  • The 16th Finance Commission should thoroughly scrutinize non-merit subsidies.
  • It is crucial for the Finance Commission to enforce strict adherence to fiscal deficit limits by states.
  • Incentives should be provided for states maintaining fiscal discipline, potentially integrating fiscal performance as a criterion in horizontal distribution.
  • Conversely, measures should be imposed on states exceeding fiscal deficit limits, with appropriate actions taken on their borrowing capacities.

Conclusion

During the pre-reform era, Finance Commission recommendations held less significance, given alternative methods the Centre employed to compensate states. However, with the abolition of the Planning Commission, the Finance Commission has emerged as the primary architect of India's fiscal federalism, shouldering substantial responsibility and wielding significant influence. The recommendations provided by the 16th Finance Commission will be critical as India progresses towards becoming the world's third-largest economy.

Finance Commission:

  • The Finance Commission is a constitutional body responsible for providing recommendations on the distribution of tax revenues among the Union and the States, as well as among the States themselves.
  • Composition: Constituted by the President under Article 280 of the Constitution, the Finance Commission is formed at the end of every fifth year or earlier, as deemed necessary.
  • Parliament has the authority to establish the requisite qualifications for commission members and determine the selection process, as enacted by The Finance Commission (Miscellaneous Provisions) Act, 1951.
  • Mandate: The Commission is tasked with making recommendations to the President on various aspects, including the distribution of net tax proceeds between the Union and the States, principles governing grants-in-aid to State revenues, measures to augment a State's Consolidated Fund, and other matters referred to it by the President in the interest of sound finance.
  • Composition: The Finance Commission comprises a Chairman and four other members appointed by the President.
  • The Chairman is selected from individuals with experience in public affairs, while the other members may have qualifications related to judiciary, financial expertise, administration, or economics.
  • Tenure: Each member serves a term specified by the President and is eligible for reappointment.
  • Independence: The recommendations of the Finance Commission, although significant, are not binding on the government.